Atla Ghibli 3661514M2GBind

Atlantis 70-75-80-85-90-100
Ghibli 80-90-100
Training manual
P/N° 3661514M2
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Chap. 1 INTRODUCTION
Chap. 2 ENGINE
Chap. 3 CLUTCH
Chap. 4 STANDARD TRANSMISSION
Chap. 5 OPTIONAL TRANSMISSION
Cap. 6 4WD FRONT AXLE
Chap. 7 POWER TAKE-OFF
Chap. 8 LOW PRESSURE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Chap. 9 HIGH PRESSURE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Chap.10 OPTIONAL HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Chap.11 MECHANICAL POWER LIFT
Chap.12 GHIBLI TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Chap.13 ATLANTIS TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Chap.14 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Chap.15 SPECIAL TOOLS

PREFACE
This manual includes all specifications, mechanical, hydraulic and electrical

diagrams as well as descriptions of operation and adjustments of Atlantis
and Ghibli tractors. The manual is not necessarily comprehensive of all infor-
mation, as it has to be completed by theoretical and practical explanations
given by trainers during training courses. This information is therefore exclu-
sively aimed to persons attending courses at Landini Training Center.
NOTE:
Descriptions and specifications contained in this manual are not committing.

Landini reserves the right to change organs and accessories owing to techni-
cal or commercial requirements without each time updating this manual.
PRE-SALE SERVICE
April 2003
42042 FABBRICO (RE) ITALY
INTRODUCTION
CHAP.1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 1 Reading the manual. ................................................................. 1-3

1-1 Introduction .................................................................... 1-4
1-2 Structure of the manual.................................................. 1-4
Sect. 2 Tractor identification and technical specifications. ............... 1-5

2-1 Tractor identification ...................................................... 1-6
2-2 Weights and dimensions ............................................... 1-8
2-3 Engine specifications ................................................... 1-11
2-4 Clutch specifications .................................................... 1-14
2-5 Transmission specifications ........................................ 1-14
2-6 Power take-off specifications ....................................... 1-23
2-7 2 WD axle .................................................................... 1-25
2-8 4 WD front axle specifications ..................................... 1-26
2-9 Hydraulic circuit specifications .................................... 1-27
Sect. 3 Working in safety. ................................................................... 1-29

3-1 Essential rules for accident prevention ........................ 1-30
3-2 Danger decals for Atlantis tractors............................... 1-36
3-3 Danger decals for Ghibli tractors ................................. 1-39
3-4 Replacing tractor parts ................................................ 1-42
3-5 Safe use of the tractor.................................................. 1-42
Sect. 4 Pre-delivery inspections and maintenance. .......................... 1-45

4-1 General information ..................................................... 1-46
4-2 Inspections before delivery .......................................... 1-46
4-3 Routine maintenance guide for Atlantis tractors .......... 1-48
4-4 Routine maintenance guide for Ghibli tractors ............. 1-50
1-1
INTRODUCTION
CHAP.1
Sect. 5 Conversion tables. .................................................................. 1-53

5-1 Length ......................................................................... 1-54
5-2 Area ............................................................................. 1-57
5-3 Volume ........................................................................ 1-58
5-4 Weight ......................................................................... 1-61
5-5 Pressure ...................................................................... 1-63
5-6 Moment of rotation ....................................................... 1-65
5-7 Temperature ................................................................ 1-67
Sect. 6 Sealants. ................................................................................ 1-69
Sect. 7 Table of bolt driving torques. .............................................. 1-72
Sect. 8 General assembly instructions. .......................................... 1-73

8-1 Seals .......................................................................... 1-74
8-2 O-rings ....................................................................... 1-75
8-3 Bearings .................................................................... 1-76
1-2
INTRODUCTION
CHAP. 1
Reading the manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.1 Reading the manual
1-1 Introduction .................................................................... 1-4

1-2 Structure of the manual.................................................. 1-4
1-3
INTRODUCTION
Sect.1 - Reading the manual

1-1 Introduction
The purpose of this training manual is to provide
clear instructions on how to repair Atlantis 70-80-
90-100, Atlantis 75-85 and Ghibli 80-90-100
tractors.
The manual is for the chief foreman since it does
not describe the demounting, remounting and adju-
stment operations in detail and for all assemblies,
merely those that require particular expertise or re-
commendations.
Before reading the manual, it is essential to read

sect.3: WORKING IN SAFETY in order to prevent errors
or mistakes that could jeopardize the safety of
the technicians in the workshop.
The information in this manual was up to date at the

time of publication. Landini reserves the right to make
modifications without being obliged to give notice.
Please contact your area dealer or the importer if
discrepancies are discovered or for any other requi-
rement.
1-2 Structure of the manual

The manual is divided into chapters (chap.) and each
chapter into sections (sect.). Page numbering be-
gins with 1 for each chapter with the number of the
chapter itself alongside.
Example: 5-7 indicates page 7 of chapter 5.
Numbering of the figures also begins with 1 in each

chapter with the chapter number alongside.
Example: Fig. 73-5, indicates figure 73 of chapter

5.
The tools required for all the demounting, remoun-

ting and adjusting operations are listed at the end of
each important chapter or section. However, not all
the tools given at the end of the chapter or section
are mentioned in the text, just those considered es-
sential to demount, remount and adjust the unit in
question in the correct way.
Chapter 12 contains the constructional drawings of
all the tools indicated in the various chapters or sec-
tions so that dealers can make all those considered
necessary for their workshops.
1-4
INTRODUCTION
CHAP.1
Tractor identification and technical

specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.2 Tractor identification and technical specifications
2-1 Tractor identification ...................................................... 1-6

2-2 Weights and dimensions ............................................... 1-8
2-3 Engine specifications ................................................... 1-11
2-4 Clutch specifications .................................................... 1-14
2-5 Transmission specifications ........................................ 1-14
2-6 Power take-off specifications
2.6.1 Atlantis 70-75-80-85-90-100 tractors.................. 1-23
2.6.2 Ghibli 80-90-100 tractors .................................... 1-24
2-7 2 WD axle .................................................................... 1-24
2-8 4 WD front axle specifications ..................................... 1-25
2-9 Hydraulic circuit specifications .................................... 1-26
1-5
INTRODUCTION
Sect.2-Tractor identification and technical specifications

2-1 Tractor identification
A - ATLANTIS TRACTORS
The tractor is identified by a serial number stamped

on the rear part of the transmission housing and on
the bonnet. The engine also has its own serial num-
ber stamped on the engine block.
To ensure a quick and efficient service when orde-

ring spare parts or asking for technical specifica-
tions or other information, always state the chassis
and engine serial number.
Fig.1-1
Chassis serial number (Fig. 1/2-1) ........................
Engine serial number (Fig. 3-1) .............................
Type of tractor ........................................................
Owner / Operator ...................................................
Dealer's or Agent's address ...................................
...............................................................................
Delivery date ..........................................................
Warranty expiry date .............................................
Fig.2-1
Fig.3-1
1-6
INTRODUCTION
Tractor identification and technical specifications

B - GHIBLI TRACTORS
The tractor is identified by a serial number stamped

on the rear part of the transmission housing and on
the bonnet. The engine also has its own serial num-
ber stamped on the engine block.
To ensure a quick and efficient service when orde-

ring spare parts or asking for technical specifica-
tions or other information, always state the chassis
and engine serial number.
Chassis serial number (Fig. 4/6/7-1) .....................
Engine serial number (Fig. 5-1) ............................. Fig.5-1
Cab serial number (Fig. 6-1) ..................................
Type of tractor ........................................................
Owner / Operator ...................................................
Dealer's or Agent's address ...................................
...............................................................................
Delivery date ..........................................................
Warranty expiry date .............................................
Fig.6-1
Fig.4-1 Fig.7-1
1-7
INTRODUCTION

2-2 Weights and dimensione
ATLANTIS TRACTORS
D
B G
C F
E
Fig.8-1
General specifications
Atlantis 70 Atlantis 80 Atlantis 90
* Atlantis 75 and 85 are sold on some markets only Atlantis 75 Atlantis 85 Atlantis 100
2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD
With tyres
- front 7.50-18 12.4R24 9.00-16 380/70R24 9.00-16 380/70R24
- rear 16.9R30 16.9R30 18.4R30 480/70R30 480/70R34480/70R34
Weights
- In running order, without front and rear ballast and safety

frame
With steel rings .......................................................... Kg 3010 3250 3090 3300 3090 3300
With cast iron rings .................................................... Kg 3160 3410 3240 3460 3240 3460
Dimensions
A - Height at safety frame (rotating beacon) ................... mm 2820 2820 2870 2870 2870 2870
B - Wheelbase ............................................................... mm 2350 2350 2380 2380 2380 2380
C - Max. length with front ballast .................................... mm 4200 4200 4200 4200 4200 4200
D - Ground clearance (under front axle) ......................... mm 520 350 520 400 540 420
E - Max. length on road .................................................. mm 2080 2080 2080 2080 2080 2080
F - Front track ................................................................ mm See See See
G - Rear track ................................................................ mm track tables track tables track tables
1-8
INTRODUCTION
Tractor identification and technical specificationS

GHIBLI TRACTORS
Fig.9-1
Ghibli 80 Ghibli 90
2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD
With tyres
- front 9.00-16 13.6R24 9.00-16 380/70R24
- rear 16.9R34 16.9R34 16.9R34 480/70R34
Weights
- In running order, without front and rear ballast,

with cab and steel rings .......................................... Kg 3600 3830 3650 3880
- In running order, with cast iron rings ....................... Kg 3770 4000 3820 4050
Dimensions
A - Height at cab ........................................................ mm 2630 2630 2630 2630

B - Wheelbase ........................................................... mm - 2360 - 2360
C - Max. length with front ballast and links ................. mm - 4410 - 4410
D - Ground clearance (under front axle) ..................... mm 575 450 575 450
E - Minimum width ...................................................... mm - 1830 - 1830
F - Front track ............................................................ mm See See
G - Rear track ............................................................ mm track tables track tables
1-9
INTRODUCTION
Fig.9a-1
Ghibli 100
2 WD 4 WD
With tyres
- front 9.00-16 380/70R24
- rear 18.4R34 480/70R34
Weights
- In running order, without front and rear ballast,

with cab and steel rings .......................................... Kg 3820 4050
- In running order, with cast iron rings ....................... Kg 3990 4220
Dimensions
A - Height at cab ........................................................ mm 2670 2670

B - Wheelbase ........................................................... mm - 2390
C - Max. length with front ballast and links ................. mm - 4420
D - Ground clearance (under front axle) ..................... mm 595 450
E - Minimum width ...................................................... mm 1830
F - Front track ............................................................ mm See

G - Rear track ............................................................ mm track tables
1 - 10
INTRODUCTION

2-3 Engine specifications
Engine Atlantis 75 Atlantis 85
Type Perkins 4-stroke diesel engine with
direct injection
Model 4.41 4.41

Fuelling Natural Natural
Number of cylinders 4 4
Bore m m 101 101
Stroke m m 127 127
Swept volume liters 4.1 4.1
Compression ratio 18.5 : 1 18.5 : 1
Power (DIN 70020) HP/kW 71,5/52,5 82/60
ISO power rating HP/kW 75/55 84/62
Max. speed under load RPM 2200 2200
Max. speed with no load RPM 2310 2310
Max. torque (DIN 70020) Nm 255 281
Max. torque speed RPM 1200 1300
Idling speed RPM 750 750
Valve gear
Type Overhead valves controlled by tappets
Tappet gap with engine cold

Intake m m 0,20 0,20
Exhaust m m 0,45 0,45
Fuel system
Fuel pump Diaphragm type

Injection pump LUCAS rotary
Filter on injection pump delivery C.A.V
Injection order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2

Injectors Perkins Perkins
Injector pressure setting Bar 290 294
Cold starting device Thermostarter
Air filter dry, with two elements
removable for maintenance
1 - 11
INTRODUCTION

Engine Atlantis 70 Atlantis 80 Atlantis 90 Atlantis 100
direct injection
Model 1004-40 1004-42 1004-40T 1004-40T

Fuelling Natural Natural Turbo Turbo
Number of cylinders 4 4 4 4
Bore m m 100 103 100 100
Stroke m m 127 127 127 127
Swept volume liters 3.990 4.233 3.990 3.990
Compression ratio 18.5 : 1 18.5 : 1 17.25 : 1 17.25 : 1
Power (DIN 70020) HP/kW 67/49 78/57 88/65 93/68
ISO power rating HP/kW 68/50 80/58,5 91/67 95/70
Max. speed under load RPM 2200 2200 2200 2200
Max. speed with no load RPM 2310 2310 2354 2354
Max. torque (DIN 70020) N m 263 284 358 387
Max. torque speed RPM 1300 1400 1400 1400
Idling speed RPM 750 750 850 800
Valve gear

Intake m m 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
Exhaust m m 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45
Fuel system

Injection order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2

Injectors Perkins Perkins Perkins Perkins
Injector pressure setting Bar 290 290 290 294
Air filter dry, with two elements removable for maintenance
1 - 12
INTRODUCTION

Engine Ghibli 80 Ghibli 90 Ghibli 100
direct injection
Model 1004-42 1004-40T 1004-40T

Fuelling Natural Turbo Turbo
Number of cylinders 4 4 4
Bore m m 103 100 100
Stroke m m 127 127 127
Swept volume liters 4.233 3.990 3.990
Compression ratio 18.5 : 1 17.25 : 1 17.25 : 1
Power (DIN 70020) HP/kW 78/57 88/65 93/68
ISO power rating HP/kW 80/58,5 91/67 95/70
Max. speed under load RPM 2200 2200 2200
Max. speed with no load RPM 2310 2354 2354
Max. torque (DIN 70020) Nm 284 358 387
Max. torque speed RPM 1300 1400 1400
Idling speed RPM 750 800 800
Valve gear

Intake m m 0.20 0.20 0.20
Exhaust m m 0.45 0.45 0.45
Fuel system

Injection order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2

Injectors Perkins Perkins Perkins
Injector pressure setting Bar 290 290 294
Air filter dry, with two elements removable for maintenance
1 - 13
INTRODUCTION

2-4 Clutch specifications
Manufacturer Lx (Ox)
Type Double-disk
Dimensions 11" (280 mm) 70-75-80-85

12" (304.8 mm) Ghibli 80-90-100
Material Cerametallic organic gearshift plate Atlantis-Ghibli (all models)

Organic PTO plate Atlantis-Ghibli (all models)
2-5 Transmission specifications

Manufacturer Landini
Gearbox
Speeds Four synchronized speeds with infinitely meshed
helical gears
Type of reduction range Three forward ranges (Slow-Standard-Fast)

Creeper
Reverse shuttle Synchronized with gearbox input
Number of speeds 12 forward and 12 reverse with standard gearbox
24 forward and 12 reverse with creeper (optional)
24 forward and 12 reverse with underdrive (optional)
24 forward and 12 reverse with overdrive (optional)
Rear axle
Bevel gear pair 9/44 with helical toothing Atlantis 70-75-80-85-90
Ghibli 80-90
51/11 Atlantis 100, Ghibli 100
Total reduction ratios: 27.555 - Atlantis 70-75

29.74 - Atlantis 80-85-90
30.768 - Atlantis 100
29.74 - Ghibli 80-90
30.768 - Ghibli 1000
Type of Differential With two planetaries

Differential lock With mechanical or electrohydraulic control and
mechanical engagement
Disengaged by means of the brakes.
1 - 14
INTRODUCTION

BRAKES
REAR BRAKES
ATLANTIS TRACTORS GHIBLI TRACTORS

8 (4 per side) 70-75
NUMBER OF
10 (5 per side) 80-85-90 10 (5 per side) 80-90
FRICTION DISCS
12 (6 per side) 100 12 (6 per lato) 100
FRICTION
Sintered graphite 70-80-90-100 Sintered graphite 80-90-100
DISC MATERIAL
TOTAL 1500 cm2 70-75

BRAKING 1875 cm2 80-85-90 1875 cm2 80-90
SURFACE 2225 cm2 100 2225 cm2 100
DISC DIAMETER 178 x 141 mm 70-80-90-100 178 x 141 mm 80-90-100
PARKING
Mechanical, activated by hand lever Mechanical, activated by hand lever
BRAKE
FRONT BRAKES
ATLANTIS TRACTORS GHIBLI TRACTORS
NUMBER OF 4 (2 per side) 70-75-80-85-90-100 4 (2 per side) 80-90-100

FRICTION DISCS
FRICTION
Sintered graphite 70-75-80-85-90-100 Sintered graphite 80-90-100
MATERIAL
DISC DIAMETER 165 x 110 mm 70-75-80-85-90-100 165 x 110 mm 80-90-100
1 - 15
INTRODUCTION

Ground speed table
The following table gives the various speeds, in kph, The table also gives the supplementary speeds that
which different types and versions of the tractor can can be obtained when one of the following “OPTIO-
reach at maximum speed rate. NALS” is added to the basic gearbox:
The table shows the speeds of the basic gearbox – CREEPER
which comprises 12 standard speeds and 12 spee- – UNDERDRIVE
ds with the reverse shuttle. – OVERDRIVE.
ATLANTIS TRACTORS
Fig.10-1
Speeds in kph with engine at top rate and rear tyres as shown:
MODEL Atlantis 70-75 Atlantis 80-85-90 Atlantis 100
2200 RPM 2200 RPM 2200 RPM
Range
GEAR
14.9R28 16.9R30 18.4R30 18.4R34

480/70R30
1st 1.60 1.74 1.67 1.72

FORWARD GEARS
Slow
2nd 2.51 2.73 2.62 2.71

3rd 3.20 3.45 3.31 3.42
CREEPER
4th 4,68 5.09 4.88 5.05
1st 3.82 4.15 3.98 4.12

Normal
2nd 6.01 6.52 6.26 6.48

3rd 7.58 8.24 7.91 8.18
4th 11.19 12.15 11.67 12.06
1st 9.42 10.24 9.83 10.16

Fast
2nd 14.81 16.09 15.44 15.97

3rd 18.72 20.33 19.51 20.17
4th 27.60 29.97 28.77 29.74
1st 1.62 1.76 1.68 1.74

Slow
2nd 2.54 2.76 2.65 2.74

3rd 3.21 3.48 3.34 3.46
REVERSE GEARS
4th 4.73 5.14 4.93 5.10

STANDARD
1st 3.86 4.19 4.02 4.16

Normal
2nd 6.07 6.59 6.32 6.54

3rd 7.66 8.32 7.99 8.26
4th 11.31 12.28 11.78 12.18
1st 9.52 10.34 9.93 10.26

Fast
2nd 14.97 16.25 15.60 16.13

3rd 18.91 20.53 19.71 20.37
4th 27.88 30.27 29.06 30.04
1 - 16
INTRODUCTION

Basic gearbox with reverse shuttle and creeper 1 : 5,12
Fig.11-1
2200 RPM 2200 RPM 2200 RPM
Range
GEAR
14.9R28 16.9R30 18.4R30 18.4R34

480/70R30
1st 0.31 0.34 0.32 0.34

Slow
2nd 0.49 0.53 0.51 0.53

3rd 0.62 0.67 0.65 0.67
CREEPER
4th 0.91 0.99 0.95 0.99
1st 0.75 0.81 0.78 0.80

Normal
2nd 1.17 1.27 1.22 1.26

3rd 1.48 1.61 1.54 1.60
FORWARD GEARS
4th 2.18 2.37 2.28 2.36
1st 1.84 2.00 1.92 1.99

Fast
2nd 2.89 3.14 3.01 3.12

3rd 3.65 3.97 3.81 3.94
4th 5.39 5.85 5.60 5.81
1st 1.60 1.74 1.67 1.72

Slow
2nd 2.51 2.73 2.62 2.71

3rd 3.20 3.45 3.31 3.42
4th 4.68 5.09 4.88 5.05
STANDARD
1st 3.82 4.15 3.98 4.12

Normal
2nd 6.01 6.52 6.26 6.48

3rd 7.58 8.24 7.91 8.18
4th 11.19 12.15 11.67 12.07
1st 9.42 10.24 9.83 10.17

Fast
2nd 14.80 16.09 15.44 15.98

3rd 18.72 20.33 19.51 20.19
4th 27.60 29.97 28.77 29.76
1st 1.62 1.76 1.68 1.74

Slow
2nd 2.54 2.76 2.65 2.74

3rd 3.21 3.48 3.34 3.46
REVERSE GEARS
4th 4.73 5.14 4.93 5.10

STANDARD
1st 3.86 4.19 4.02 4.16

Normal
2nd 6.07 6.59 6.32 6.54

3rd 7.66 8.32 7.99 8.26
4th 11.31 12.28 11.78 12.19
1st 9.52 10.27 9.93 10.27

Fast
2nd 14.97 16.14 15.60 16.14

3rd 18.91 20.53 19.71 20.39
4th 27.88 30.27 29.06 30.06
1 - 17
INTRODUCTION

Basic gearbox with reverse shuttle and underdrive
Fig.12-1
2200 RPM 2200 RPM 2200 RPM
Range
GEAR
14.9R28 16.9R30 18.4R30 18.4R34

480/70R30
1st 1.33 1.44 1.38 1.43

Slow
2nd 2.08 2.26 2.17 2.25

UNDERDRIVE
3rd 2.63 2.86 2.74 2.84

4th 3.88 4.22 4.05 4.19
1st 3.17 3.44 3.30 3.42

Normal
2nd 4.98 5.41 5.19 5.36

3rd 6.29 6.83 6.56 6.78
FORWARD GEARS
4th 9.28 10.07 9.67 10.00
1st 7.81 8.49 8.15 8.43

Fast
2nd 12.28 13.34 12.80 13.23

3rd 15.52 16.85 16.17 16.72
4th 23.87 24.84 23.84 24.65
1st 1.60 1.74 1.67 1.72

Slow
2nd 2.51 2.73 2.62 2.71

3rd 3.20 3.45 3.31 3.42
4th 4.68 5.09 4.88 5.05
STANDARD
1st 3.82 4.15 3.98 4.12

Normal
2nd 6.01 6.52 6.26 6.48

3rd 7.58 8.24 7.91 8.18
4th 11.19 12.15 11.67 12.07
1st 9.42 10.24 9.83 10.16

Fast
2nd 14.80 16.09 15.44 15.97

3rd 18.72 20.33 19.51 20.17
4th 27.60 29.97 28.77 29.74
1st 1.62 1.76 1.68 1.74

Slow
2nd 2.54 2.76 2.65 2.74

3rd 3.21 3.48 3.34 3.46
REVERSE GEARS
4th 4.73 5.14 4.93 5.10

STANDARD
1st 3.86 4.19 4.02 4.16

Normal
2nd 6.07 6.59 6.32 6.54

3rd 7.66 8.32 7.99 8.26
4th 11.31 12.28 11.78 12.18
1st 9.52 10.27 9.93 10.26

Fast
2nd 14.97 16.14 15.60 16.13

3rd 18.91 20.53 19.71 20.37
4th 27.88 30.27 29.06 30.04
1 - 18
INTRODUCTION

Basic gearbox with reverse shuttle and overdrive
Fig.13-1
2200 RPM 2200 RPM 2200 RPM
Range
GEAR
14.9R28 16.9R30 18.4R30 18.4R34

480/70R30
1st 1.66 1.74 1.67 1.72

Slow
2nd 2.51 2.73 2.62 2.71

STANDARD
3rd 3.18 3.45 3.31 3.42

4th 4.69 5.09 4.88 5.05
1st 3.82 4.15 3.98 4.12

Normal
2nd 6.01 6.52 6.26 6.48

3rd 7.59 8.24 7.91 8.18
FORWARD GEARS
4th 11.19 12.15 11.67 12.06
1st 9.43 10.24 9.83 10.16

Fast
2nd 14.82 16.09 15.44 15.98

3rd 18.72 20.33 19.51 20.17
4th 27.60 29.97 28.77 29.74
1st 2.06 2.24 2.15 2.22

Slow
2nd 3.24 3.52 3.38 3.49

3rd 4.09 4.44 4.26 4.41
MOLTIPLICATORE
4th 6.04 6.56 6.29 6.51
1st 4.92 5.35 5.13 4.12

Normal
2nd 7.74 8.40 8.06 6.48

3rd 9.77 10.62 10.19 8.18
4th 14.42 15.65 15.03 12.07
1st 12.15 13.19 12.66 13.09

Fast
2nd 19.09 20.73 19.89 20.57

3rd 24.12 26.13 25.13 26.00
4th 35.55 38.61 37.06 38.30
1st 1.62 1.76 1.68 1.74

Slow
2nd 2.54 2.76 2.65 2.74

3rd 3.21 3.48 3.34 3.46
REVERSE GEARS
4th 4.73 5.14 4.93 5.10

STANDARD
1st 3.86 4.19 4.02 4.16

Normal
2nd 6.07 6.59 6.32 6.54

3rd 7.66 8.32 7.99 8.26
4th 11.31 12.28 11.78 12.19
1st 9.52 10.27 9.93 10.27

Fast
2nd 14.97 16.14 15.60 16.14

3rd 18.91 20.53 19.71 20.39
4th 27.88 30.27 29.06 30.06
1 - 19
INTRODUCTION

Basic gearbox with reverse shuttle and creeper 1 : 5,12
Fig.14-1
MODEL Ghibli 80-90 Ghibli 100
2200 RPM 2200 RPM
Renge
GEAR
14.9R28 16.9R30 18.4R30 18.4R34

480/70R34 480/70R34
1st 0.32 0.34 0.33 0.34

Slow
2nd 0.51 0.53 0.51 0.53

UNDERDRIVE
3rd 0.65 0.67 0.65 0.67

4th 0.95 0.99 0.95 0.99
1st 0.78 0.80 0.78 0.80

Normal
2nd 1.22 1.26 1.22 1.26

3rd 1.54 1.60 1.54 1.60
FORWARD GEARS
4th 2.28 2.36 2.28 2.35
1st 1.92 1.99 1.92 1.98

Fast
2nd 3.01 3.12 3.02 3.12

3rd 3.81 3.94 3.81 3.94
4th 5.62 5.81 5.62 5.81
1st 1.67 1.72 1.67 1.72

Slow
2nd 2.62 2.71 2.62 2.71

3rd 3.31 3.42 3.31 3.42
4th 4.88 5.05 4.89 5.05
STANDARD
1st 3.98 4.12 3.98 4.12

Normal
2nd 6.26 6.48 6.26 6.47

3rd 7.91 8.18 7.91 8.18
4th 11.67 12.07 11.67 12.06
1st 9.83 10.17 9.83 10.16

Fast
2nd 15.44 15.98 15.45 15.97

3rd 19.51 20.19 19.52 20.17
4th 28.77 29.76 28.77 29.74
1st 1.68 1.74 1.69 1.74

Slow
2nd 2.65 2.74 2.65 2.74

3rd 3.34 3.46 3.34 3.46
REVERSE GEARS
4th 4.93 5.10 4.93 5.10

STANDARD
1st 4.02 4.16 4.02 4.16

Normal
2nd 6.32 6.54 6.33 6.54

3rd 7.99 8.26 7.99 8.26
4th 11.78 12.19 11.79 12.18
1st 9.93 10.27 9.93 10.26

Fast
2nd 15.60 16.14 15.60 16.13

3rd 19.71 20.39 19.71 20.37
4th 29.06 30.06 29.06 30.04
1 - 20
INTRODUCTION

Basic gearbox with reverse shuttle and underdrive
Fig.15-1
MODELLO Ghibli 80-90 Ghibli 100
2200 RPM 2200 RPM
Range
GEAR
14.9R28 16.9R30 18.4R30 18.4R34

480/70R34 480/70R34
1st 1.38 1.43 1.38 1.43

Slow
2nd 2.17 2.25 2.17 2.25

UNDERDRIVE
3rd 2.74 2.84 2.74 2.84

4th 4.05 4.19 4.05 4.19
1st 3.30 3.42 3.30 3.42

Normal
2nd 5.19 5.37 5.19 5.36

3rd 6.56 6.78 6.56 6.78
FORWARD GEARS
4th 9.67 10.01 9.67 10.00
1st 8.15 8.43 8.15 8.42

Fast
2nd 12.80 13.25 12.80 13.23

3rd 16.17 16.74 16.18 16.72
4th 23.84 24.67 23.85 24.65
1st 1.67 1.72 1.67 1.72

Slow
2nd 2.62 2.71 2.62 2.71

3rd 3.31 3.42 3.31 3.42
4th 4.88 5.05 4.89 5.05
STANDARD
1st 3.98 4.12 3.98 4.12

Normal
2nd 6.26 6.48 6.26 6.47

3rd 7.91 8.18 7.91 8.18
4th 11.67 12.07 11.67 12.06
1st 9.83 10.17 9.83 10.16

Fast
2nd 15.44 15.98 15.45 15.97

3rd 19.51 20.19 19.52 20.17
4th 28.77 29.76 28.77 29.74
1st 1.68 1.74 1.69 1.74

Slow
2nd 2.65 2.74 2.65 2.74

3rd 3.34 3.46 3.34 3.46
REVERSE GEARS
4th 4.93 5.10 4.93 5.10

STANDARD
1st 4.02 4.16 4.02 4.16

Normal
2nd 6.32 6.54 6.33 6.54

3rd 7.99 8.26 7.99 8.26
4th 11.78 12.19 11.79 12.18
1st 9.93 10.27 9.93 10.26

Fast
2nd 15.60 16.14 15.60 16.13

3rd 19.71 20.39 19.71 20.37
4th 29.06 30.06 29.06 30.04
1 - 21
INTRODUCTION

Basic gearbox with reverse shuttle and overdrive
Fig.16-1
MODELLO Ghibli 80-90 Ghibli 100
2200 RPM 2200 RPM
Range
GEAR
14.9R28 16.9R30 18.4R30 18.4R34

480/70R34 480/70R34
1st 1.67 1.72 1.67 1.72

Slow
2nd 2.62 2.71 2.62 2.71

STANDARD
3rd 3.31 3.42 3.31 3.42

4th 4.88 5.05 4.89 5.05
1st 3.98 4.12 3.98 4.12

Normal
2nd 6.26 6.48 6.26 6.47

3rd 7.91 8.18 7.91 8.18
FORWARD GEARS
4th 11.67 12.07 11.67 12.06
1st 9.83 10.17 9.83 10.16

Fast
2nd 15.44 15.98 15.45 15.98

3rd 19.51 20.19 19.52 20.17
4th 28.77 29.76 28.77 29.74
1st 2.15 2.22 2.15 2.22

Slow
2nd 3.38 3.49 3.38 3.49

3rd 4.26 4.41 4.27 4.41
4th 6.29 6.51 6.29 6.51
OVERDRIVE
1st 5.13 5.31 5.13 5.31

Normal
2nd 8.06 8.35 8.07 8.34

3rd 10.19 10.54 10.19 10.53
4th 15.03 15.55 15.03 15.54
1st 12.66 13.10 12.66 13.09

Fast
2nd 19.89 20.59 19.90 20.57

3rd 25.13 26.01 26.14 25.99
4th 37.06 38.34 37.07 38.31
1st 1.68 1.74 1.69 1.74

Slow
2nd 2.65 2.74 2.65 2.74

3rd 3.34 3.46 3.34 3.46
REVERSE GEARS
4th 4.93 5.10 4.93 5.10

STANDARD
1st 4.02 4.16 4.02 4.16

Normal
2nd 6.32 6.54 6.33 6.54

3rd 7.99 8.26 7.99 8.26
4th 11.78 12.19 11.79 12.18
1st 9.93 10.27 9.93 10.26

Fast
2nd 15.60 16.14 15.60 16.13

3rd 19.71 20.39 19.71 20.37
4th 29.06 30.06 29.06 30.04
1 - 22
INTRODUCTION

2-6 Power take-off specifications
2-6.1 ATLANTIS TRACTORS 70-75-80-85-90-100
Type: Independent
Type of clutch: Mechanical with two speeds

540/540E or 540/1000 RPM
Servo-assisted hydraulic control
PTO output shaft In compliance with Asae 13/8 specifications

(34.9 mm) with 6 splines
PTO speed Power take-off

- 540 RPM with 1944 RPM engine rate
- 540E RPM with 1392 RPM engine rate (on request).
- 1000 RPM with 1916 RPM engine rate (on request
instead of 540E RPM).
- PTO proportional to ground speed:
PTO shaft turns per wheel turn:
Atlantis 70-75
- 9,185 RPM with PTO at 540 RPM
- 12,822 RPM with PTO at 540E RPM
Atlantis 80-85-90
Atlantis 100
1 - 23
INTRODUCTION

2-6.2 GHIBLI TRACTORS 80-90-100
Type: Independent
Type of clutch: Mechanical with two speeds

540/540E or 540/1000 RPM
Servo-assisted hydraulic control
PTO output shaft In compliance with Asae 13/8 specifications

PTO speed Power take-off

- 540E RPM with 1392 RPM engine rate (on request)
- 540E RPM with 1376 RPM engine rate (on request)
- 1000 RPM with 1916 RPM engine rate (80-90).
- 1000 RPM with 1918 RPM engine rate (100).
- PTO proportional to ground speed:
9,888 PTO shaft turns per wheel turn:
Ghibli 80-90
Ghibli 100
PTO engagement and operation mode selection by

the hand lever on the left of the gearshift lever.
1 - 24
INTRODUCTION

2-7 2WD axle
Type: Boxed and swinging

around a central pivot
Track widths number: 6
Min. track width: 1.42 m
Max. track width: 1.92 m
Max. steering angle 60°
Fig.17-1
1 - 25
INTRODUCTION

2-8 4 WD front axle specifications
ATLANTIS TRACTORS
Type of axle In spheroidal cast iron, swinging with central pivot
Type of reductions Models Bevel gear pair Epicyclic red.

70-75 9 / 41 1 : 5.2
80-85-90-100 8 / 31 1 : 4.6
Clutch control Electrohydraulic
Max. steering angle 55° 4WD version
GHIBLI TRACTORS
Type of axle In spheroidal cast iron, swinging with central pivot
Type of reductions Models Bevel gear pair Epicyclic red.

80-90-100 8 / 31 1 : 5.2
Clutch control Electrohydraulic
Max. steering angle 4WD version
1 - 26
INTRODUCTION

2-9 Hydraulic circuit specifications
PUMP
Type Single or double gear type (in tandem)

Make Bx
Model
Pump / engine RPM ratio
Max. operating pressure 180 bar
Max. flow rate of low pressure circuit (l/min) 18.7 for Atlantis and Ghibli
Max. flow rate of high pressure circuit(l/min) 53.9
Position front side to right of engine

Drive valve system gears
Quantity of hydraulic oil / transmission 33 l
Type of oil transfluid AS/B.
FILTERS
Type (on the intake) with single washable metal gauze cartridge
Filtering degree 40 micron
Type (on the delivery) with single replaceable paper cartridge
Filtering degree 15/20 micron (Ghibli only)
STEERING SYSTEM
System Power steering system

Make Dx
Type Orbitrol ospc 80 4 W.D. Orbitrol ospc 50 2 W.D.
Calibrating valve 150 bar (built into the valve system block)
Antishock valve calibration 200 bar (built into the valve system block)
Steering cylinder 1 piece

Type double-acting, balanced
Make Landini
Pump delivery 27.3 l. / min. at 2600 RPM engine rate
1 - 27
INTRODUCTION

AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVES
Make Hdx for Atlantis and Ghibli
Operation Standard-Single/double acting, floating, for hydraulic

engines, with “Kick out” automatic release
Type Open center with “Push - Pull” quick couplings
Calibrating valve 180 bar

Max. flow rate 35 l/min
Max. quantity 3 for Atlantis and Ghibli
Connection to circuit in series

Position at rear
HYDRAULIC MECHANICAL POWER LIFT
Make Landini
Operating mode position / draft control
intermix - float mode
Hydraulic system open-center

Standard cylinder single acting
Dimensions ø 100 x 127 stroke
Calibrating valve 180 bar
Antishock valve 200 bar
LIFTING CAPACITY
Without auxiliary control valves 2600 kg

with 2 auxiliary control valves
(Ghibli 80-90) 3700 kg
(Ghibli 100) 4350 kg
Lower links 1st and 2nd class
Third point with hydraulic ram (on request)
1 - 28
INTRODUCTION
CHAP. 1
Working in safety
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 3 Working in safety
3-1 Essential rules for prevention ...................................... 1-30

3-2 Safety decals for Atlantis tractors ................................ 1-36
3-3 Safety decals for Atlantis tractors ................................ 1-39
3-4 Replacing tractor parts ................................................ 1-42
3-5 Safe use of the tractor.................................................. 1-42
1 - 29
INTRODUCTION
Sect.3 - Working in safety

3-1 Essential rules
for prevention
The structures, systems and equipment in repair Always bear your safety and that of others in mind
shops must conform to the current laws governing whenever you work on a machine, whichever type it
labour safety in order to safeguard the health and may be.
safety of each worker. To work in complete safety, it is essential to know
Although they are obviously only partial, the regula- the nature of the job, to correctly use the tools and
tions given in this section inform the workers about materials required and to rely on your common sen-
the dangers they may encounter on the job. se.
To prevent accidents, it is important to:
- BEHAVE correctly and act with caution;
- Pay ATTENTION and keep your actions under

control;
- Comply with the REGULATIONS and rules of

behaviour of a general character.
To
work
in
SAFETY
always think before acting !
This is the warning symbol. Any time you

see it, either on the machine or in the ma-
nual, pay attention to the possible danger
of accidents.
1 - 30
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
A - Rules of a general character Always wear protective clothing (goggles - visors - glo-
ves - footwear, etc.).
Preliminary instructions
- always comply with the instructions received from
superiors;
- always comply with the indications on the stickers

and signs;
- never use machines or systems without authoriza-

tion and never carry out operations and manoeuvres
that are the competence of others;
- use the safety devices and other means of protec-

tion with care;
- inform your superiors if the safety and protective

means and devices are defective or about any
danger conditions of which you may become aware;
Fig.18-1
- never remove or modify the safety devices and other
means of protection without having been authorized
to do so; Machines and systems
- Before beginning work, make sure that the guards
- Let your superiors know immediately about any and screens are in place, in a good condition and
accidents you have had or about which you may that the safety devices are functional;
have become aware;
- check the operation of any exhaust or ventilating
- keep your place of work clean and orderly. Keep systems installed;
the floor clear of any materials that are not strictly
required for the job in hand and prevent greasy or - never remove the guards or safety devices from
oily substances from being spilt (clean them up with the machine unless this is strictly necessary and
absorbent material if this should occur). after having been authorized to do so by your su-
periors, who will also indicate the precautions that
must be taken;
Work clothes
- Do not wear loose clothing that can become caught - the protections and safety devices must be fitted
up in moving parts or garments that are not tight at back in place and be re-activated as soon as the
the cuffs; reasons for their having been temporarily removed
have ceased;
- do not wear necklaces, rings, bracelets and similar;
- it is forbidden to clean, oil or grease moving parts
- do not clean the garments with inflammable or of machines and systems by hand.
harmful substances, or using compressed air;
- it is forbidden to adjust or work on moving parts.
- do not wear sandals, slippers, clogs or shoes with
high heels.
1 - 31
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
Lifting and carrying
Vehicles
By hand - proceed at a moderate speed and with due care,
- do not bend your back to lift loads; depending on the road conditions. Comply with the
farm/company rules and with the road signs.
- hold the load safely where it is easy to get a good
grip; Electricity
- do not make electrical connections with makeshift
- do not carry loads with greasy or oily hands; means and never ever insert the ends of wet
conductors into sockets;
- hand trucks without drawbars should be pushed,
not pulled; - disconnect plugs from sockets by holding the outer
casing, never by pulling the electric cable;
- never deposit loads near stairs, fire-fighting
systems, first-aid means or places of transit. - avoid twisting the cables;
- frequently check the insulating material of

On vehicles conductors and electrical equipment and make sure
- comply with the capacity limits and regulate your that it is in a good condition;
speed according to the road conditions, the load,
and the braking distance; - point out any damage to electrical equipment and
systems, with particular reference to the condition
- make sure the loads are well harnessed and of the ground conductors;
fastened;
- do not open cabinets or containers housing electrical
- avoid passing with hanging loads in places where equipment or carry out work inside unless you are
dropping could cause a danger hazard. If this is trained and authorized to do so;
inevitable, indicate when the manoeuvre is made or
have all bystanders move out of the area. - watch out for overhead electric lines when
approaching or working in their vicinity.
Internal circulation Fire outbreaks
People In departments or processes where there may be a

- use the correct and authorized routes (pedestrian danger of fire outbreaks owing to the presence or use
crossings, gangways and similar); of inflammable substances:
- do not run; - it is forbidden to smoke;
- do not walk or stand under hanging loads or in places - it is forbidden to use equipment with naked flames
where loads could drop; or to handle glowing materials;
- do not ride on means of transport or lifting equipment - do not place inflammable materials near heat
designed for handling materials alone. sources;
- do not store materials in front of extinguishers or

fire hydrants;
1 - 32
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
Dangerous substances and preparations GUIDE TO CHOOSING THE RIGHT EXTINGUISHER
EXTINGUISHING AGENT
TYPE OF FIRE WATER SPECIAL
POWDER CO2 FOAM
Take the following precautions when using dange- POWDERS
rous chemical products (fire, explosion, irritation, A

YES YES YES YES NO
caustic burning, scalding, intoxication:
Only for small
- only keep receptacles containing dangerous Ordinary solid fuels fires.
Does not
extinguish the
products open for the time strictly required for their embers.
use; B
- do not use or transfer dangerous products into con
NO YES YES YES NO
Unless suitable
equipment is used
tainers that are not designed for this use, or into Inflammable liquids
those without indications as to their contents or

without the relative markings;
C
NO YES YES NO NO
- comply with the indications on the relative labels
Inflammable gas
when using chemical products.
D
Defence against gas, fumes, dust, harm- NO NO NO NO YES
May react with
water
ful vapours Metalli combustibili
E
- make sure that the exhausting systems are
operating; NO YES YES NO NO
Electrical equipment
- wear protective clothing and equipment;

Fig.19-1
- install temporary exhausts as near as possible to
the sources, if necessary;
- do not work in the direction of the flow of polluting

substances blown out by exhaust systems.
Agents of a biological nature
- in the event of fermentation (development of algae),

avoid direct contact and act with appropriate
protective means.
- Only enter places where anaerobic fermentation may
have taken place and produced fumes (e.g.
ammoniacal) after having worn a protective mask.
1 - 33
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
B - Tools
Makeshift, inadequate or defective tools may cause All chains and cables must be parallel to each other
faults or accidents. Never use the wrong tools since and as near to the vertical as possible, depending
such action could cause injuries and spoil the fi- on the component being lifted.
nished job.
Always use the special tools recommended by the C - First Aid

manufacturer when demounting, overhauling and re-
mounting the various parts of a tractor. Mechanics are exposed to various risks at work.
Use of specific tools will reduce the effort and time If anyone should be injured, use sterile materials
required for the job and, consequently, the cost. You and disinfectants for first aid purposes. These ma-
will also be certain that the work has been correctly terials should be kept in the first-aid box, equipped
done. in compliance with the laws in force.
Never use:
- A hammer with a loose head or cracked handle.
- Pincers or pieces of iron instead of a hammer; drill
bits or bolts instead of pin drivers.
- Worn or welded wrenches.
- A steel hammer to tap bearings or stress relieved
components (use one made of bronze or brass).
The engine and gearbox and the front and rear tran-
smissions must be split for certain jobs on the tractor
components. This operation is facilitated and made
safer by use of the special divider kit.
When lifting weights, make sure that the chains, lif-

ting brackets, hooks, cables or ropes comply with
CE standards.
Unless different indications are given, an adjustable
bracket must be used when particularly heavy parts
are removed.
Fig.20-1
1 - 34
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
D - Tractor safety regulations
Note
Before getting into the tractor, it is essential to read - Do not recharge batteries in a closed space: make
and strictly comply with the instructions in the sure that the ventilation is adequate to prevent the
operation and maintenance manual. risk of accidental explosions caused by
accumulations of the gas issued during the
Starting recharging phase.
- Never start the engine in a closed space without an
adequate ventilation system able to eliminate the - Always disconnect the battery before carrying out
gas fumes; any work on the electrical system.
- Never place your head, body, limbs, feet, hands or Hydraulic Plant
fingers near spinning belts or fans. - A fluid leaking from a very small hole may be al
most invisible but have sufficient force to penetrate
Engine under the skin. If you need to check for leaks, use
- Unscrew the radiator plug very slowly to relieve the a piece of cardboard or wood. NEVER USE THE
pressure from the system before taking it completely HANDS: if the fluid comes into contact with the skin,
off. Coolant fluid must only be topped up with the immediately seek medical help. Series infections
engine at a standstill or idling, if hot. or dermatitis may occur unless prompt medical
treatment is immediately obtained.
- Do not refuel the engine whilst the engine is running,
particularly if this hot. Such action could cause a - Use suitable tools when checking the pressure
fire outbreak if fuel were to be spilt. values in the plant.
- Never attempt to check or regulate the tension of Lifting and lowering

the fan belts whilst the engine is running. Never - Lift and handle all particularly heavy components
adjust the fuel injection pump when the tractor is with lifting means of a suitable carrying capacity.
moving. Make sure that the parts are borne by appropriate
harness and hooks. Use adequate lifting bolts. Take
- Do not lubricate the tractor when the engine is care of bystanders when lifting the load.
running.
- Handle all parts with the greatest care. Never insert
Electrical system the hands or fingers between one part and the next.
- If auxiliary batteries are used, remember that the Wear approved protective clothing such as goggles,
leads at both ends must be connected to the gloves and safety footwear.
terminals in the indicated way: (+) with (+) and (-)
with (-). Avoid short-circuiting the terminals. THE - Do not allow metal chains or ropes to twist. Always
GAS ISSUED BY THE BATTERIES IS wear protective gloves when handling cables or
HIGHLY INFLAMMABLE. chains.
When recharging, leave the battery compartment
uncovered to allow for ventilation. Never ever check
the battery charge by placing metal objects on the
terminals as "jumpers". Avoid sparks or flames in
the battery zone. Do not smoke as there could be a
risk of explosion.
- Make sure that there are no fuel leaks before
proceeding with any other operation: eliminate any
leaks before continuing work.
1 - 35
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
3-2 Safety decals for Atlantis
tractors
When replacing a tractor part bearing a sticker with A complete list of the places where these stickers
safety warnings (yellow coloured), it is ESSENTIAL are applied is given below.
to affix the same sticker to the spare part.
7 3 2 5
12
5
11
6 4 9 10 1 8 Fig.21-1
1 - 36
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
POSITION OF THE SAFETY DECALS - WEO markets
For these decals order part N. 3559 552 M93
1 5
Inside the cab on the top panelling or on Inside cab on the right-hand pillar or left-
the dashboard for tractors with safety hand mudguard for tractors with safety
frames. frames.
DANGER: Risk of overturning and WARNING: Caution. Read the safety

crushing the chest. If the tractor is and operating instructions in the
tipping over, hold tightly on to the steering Operation and Maintenance manual.
wheel. DO NOT leave your seat or
jump off the tractor.
2 6
On the pillar in the cab or on the safety Positioned inside the side panel near
frame for tractors with safety frames. the battery support.
WARNING: Risk of being crushed. WARNING: Risk of electrocution.

Safety belts must be worn with the Always disconnect the negative lead
safety frame in the vertical position. before the positive lead when removing
the battery or servicing the electrical
system.
3 7
Near the radiator plug. On both sides of the radiator or on the
intake manifold.
DANGER: High pressure steam and hot
water. Protect your face. Radiator under WARNING: Hot surfaces, risk of burns
pressure when engine is hot. Remove to hands and fingers. Warning, keep
cap with caution only when engine is cold. well clear of hot components. Keep at a
safe distance.
WARNING: Risk of entanglement.

Keep hands well clear of moving parts
4 and be careful not to get caught up in
belts or pulleys when engine is on.
On right and left sides of the radiator or
Keep guards in place.
on shroud.

Keep hands well clear of fan when the
engine is running. Always keep guards
and shields in place.
1 - 37
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
8 11
On rear panelling inside cab for tractors On the inside of rear mudguard.
without 2nd passenger seat and on left-
hand mudguard for tractors with safety DANGER: Risk of entanglement. Keep
frames. clear of spinning shafts. be careful NOT to
get caught up by the cardan shaft of the
WARNING: Risk of being crushed. DO PTO driveline. Keep all guards in place on
NOT let any passenger sit on the transmission shafts of the tractor and
mudguards or on any part of the tractor implements.
or implements being towed.
9 12
On starter motor. Near the fluid reservoir
of the brake circuit, on
DANGER: Risk of the rear bonnet support
electrocution. DO NOT or on the dashboard.
short across starter
terminals to start the engine. This operation could put your life at
risk. Start engine only from driving seat. WARNING:
Risk of damaging the brake system. Carefully read the safety
warnings and instructions in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual before servicing.
10 13
On starter motor. On safety frame of footstep tractors.
WARNING: Risk of overturning and

WARNING: crushing. Always keep the safety frame
Risk of electrocution. mounted. Never alter, remove, bend, repair
Always disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before or attach any equipment to the safety
removing the solenoid cover and before servicing the electrical frame. When necessary, lower or remove
system. the safety frame only for maintenance
purposes and drive with extreme caution
as protection is no longer provided.
1 - 38
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
3-3 Safety decals for Ghibli tractors

Position on tractors with cab
7 3 14 2
13
6
11
12
4 1 8
9 10 5 Fig.22-1
Position on footstep tractors with safety frame
7 3 14 2
13
6
11
12
4 1 8
9 10 5
Fig.23-1
1 - 39
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
1 5
Inside the cab on the top panelling or on Posizionata all'interno della cabina
the dashboard for tractors with safety sul montante destro o sul parafango
frames. sinistro per trattrici con telaio di sicu-
rezza.
DANGER: Risk of overturning and
crushing the chest. If the tractor is ATTENZIONE: Fare attenzione. Leg-
tipping over, hold tightly on to the steering gere il libretto di uso e manutenzione
wheel. DO NOT leave your seat or per informazioni sulla sicurezza e l'uso
jump off the tractor. del trattore.
2 6
On the pillar in the cab or on the safety Positioned inside the side panel near
frame for tractors with safety frames. the battery support.
WARNING: Risk of being crushed. WARNING: Risk of electrocution.

Safety belts must be worn with the Always disconnect the negative lead
safety frame in the vertical position. before the positive lead when removing
the battery or servicing the electrical
system.
3 7
Near the radiator plug. On both sides of the radiator or on the
intake manifold.
DANGER: High pressure steam and hot
water. Protect your face. Radiator under WARNING: Hot surfaces, risk of burns
pressure when engine is hot. Remove to hands and fingers. Warning, keep
cap with caution only when engine is cold. well clear of hot components. Keep at a
safe distance.

Keep hands well clear of moving parts
4 and be careful not to get caught up in
belts or pulleys when engine is on.
On right and left sides of the radiator or
Keep guards in place.
on shroud.

Keep hands well clear of fan when the
engine is running. Always keep guards
and shields in place.
1 - 40
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
8 11
On rear panelling inside cab for tractors On the inside of rear mudguard.
without 2nd passenger seat and on left-
hand mudguard for tractors with safety DANGER: Risk of entanglement. Keep
frames. clear of spinning shafts. be careful NOT to
get caught up by the cardan shaft of the
WARNING: Risk of being crushed. DO PTO driveline. Keep all guards in place on
NOT let any passenger sit on the transmission shafts of the tractor and
mudguards or on any part of the tractor implements.
or implements being towed.
9 12
On starter motor. On left-hand rear mudguard, only with
electronic power lift.
DANGER: Risk of
electrocution. DO NOT DANGER: Risk of blows and serious
short across starter accidents. Keep to one side of the tractor
terminals to start the engine. This operation could put your life at when using external lift controls. NEVER
risk. Start engine only from driving seat. STAND between tractor and implement -
you could be hit by the implement.
10 13
On starter motor. On right-hand rear mudguard, only with
electronic power lift.
DANGER: Risk of blows and serious

WARNING:
accidents. Keep to one side of the tractor
Risk of electrocution.
when using external lift controls. NEVER
Always disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before
STAND between tractor and implement -
removing the solenoid cover and before servicing the electrical
you could be hit by the implement.
system.
14
Near the fluid reservoir
of the brake circuit, on
the rear bonnet support
or on the dashboard.
WARNING:
Risk of damaging the brake system. Carefully read the safety
warnings and instructions in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual before servicing.
1 - 41
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
3-4 Replacing tractor parts
- Reduce speed when turning the tractor, crossing
It is essential to use genuine Landini spare parts slopes and on rough, slippery or muddy surfa-
when repairing the tractor. ces.
Pay particular attention to the following instructions
when repairing and mounting parts and spares ac- - Keep clear of slopes too steep for safe opera-
cessories. tion.
Use of spurious spares can jeopardize tractor sa-
fety. Strictly comply with the torque wrench values - Watch where you are going - especially at row
given in the workshop manual and, where indicated, ends and around trees.
install the relative locking devices when demounting
operations are being carried out. - Never let anyone else get on to the tractor or the
Installation of spurious spare parts will automatical- implement.
ly invalidate your tractor's warranty, since all Landi-
ni spares are guaranteed by the manurfacturer. Lan- - Operate the tractor smoothly, with no sudden mo-
dini dealers must only supply genuine spare parts. vements: do not turn, start or stop abruptly.
- Hitch only to the drawbar and recommended hi-

3-5 Safe use of the tractor tchpoints. Never hitch above the central line of
the rear axle.
Only qualified and authorized operators are able to
use farming tractors in safety. To be qualified you - Apply the parking brake whenever the tractor is
also need to be familiar with the instructions in the stopped.
operation and maintenance manual and to strictly
comply with these indications. - Never alter or remove any part of the equipment.
Moreover, operators need to know the labour safety
regulations. - Keep others well clear of your work area.
For example, some regulations specify that no one - Never use attachments that are not designed for
under the age of 18 years may use a tractor. your tractor.
You are responsible for knowing these regulations
and for complying with them at work.
They also include the following instructions for safe

use of the tractor.
Warning: The operator must never use

alcohol or drugs that can affect his at-
tention or the co-ordination of his move-
ments.
Observe the following precautions
- Do not allow children or unauthorized persons to

drive your tractor.
This is the warning symbol. Any time you
- Fasten your seat belt if the tractor is fitted with a see it, either on the machine or in the ma-
roll-over frame. nual, pay attention to the possible danger
of accidents.
- Whenever possible, do not use the tractor near
ditches or embankments.
1 - 42
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
Safety frame (ROPS)
Safety frame
Either a roll-over protective structure or a cab is

mounted as standard equipment together with a sa-
fety belt. You cannot work without the safety frame
or cab. A safety structure or cab reduces the risk of
injury should the tractor roll over. Rolling over without
a safety structure or cab can cause damage and
serious injury.
Use
Fig.24-1
- Before using the tractor, ensure that the ROPS or
the cab has not been damaged and that it is secu-
rely fastened to the tractor.
- DO NOT attach chains, cables, etc., to the ROPS

or to the cab for towing purposes as this could
cau-se the tractor to tip up: always use the draw-
bar for this purpose.
- Always fasten your safety belt. Do not wear the

safety belt if the tractor is not equipped with a
ROPS or cab.
- Check the safety belt for damage. Damaged belts

must be replaced.
Damaged ROPS or cabs

Fig.24a-1
If the tractor has rolled over and the ROPS or the
cab have been damaged (e.g. in the case of a crash
against a bridge), they must be replaced in order to
ensure the original degree of protection.
After an accident, check the ROPS or cab, the dri-

ving seat, the safety belt and the anchor points of
the safety belt. Replace all damaged parts before
using the tractor again.
DO NOT WELD, DRILL, BEND OR STRAIGHTEN

THE ROPS OR CAB: to do so reduces the degree of
protection that is ensured by original equipment.
Fig.24b-1
1 - 43
INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
Precautions for safe operation
Protect yourself
Wear all the protective clothing and personal safety
devices issued to you or called for by job conditions.
Don't take chances (Fig. 24c-1).
You may need:
• A hard hat.
• Safety glasses, goggles or face shield.

• Hearing protection.
• Respirator or filter mask.
• Foul weather clothing.
• Reflective clothing.
Fig.24c-1
• Heavy gloves (neoprene for chemicals, leather
for rough work.
• Safety shoes.
1 - 44
INTRODUCTION
CHAP. 1
Pre-delivery inspections and maintenance
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 4 Pre-delivery inspections and maintenance
4-1 General information ..................................................... 1-47

4-2 Inspections before delivery .......................................... 1-47
4-3 Routine maintenance for Atlantis tractors .................... 1-48
4-4 Routine maintenance for Ghibli tractors ...................... 1-50
1 - 45
INTRODUCTION

4-1 General information
To ensure that the tractor is regularly serviced du-
ring the 12 month warranty period, the Landini dea-
ler must carry out maintenance work after 50 and
250 hours service.
These operations will ensure your tractor functions
with utmost efficiency throughout the warranty pe-
riod and that it gives reliable service.
1 - 46
INTRODUCTION
Sect.4 - Pre-delivery inspections and maintenance

4-2 Pre-delivery inspection
The following operations must be carried out both - Test the tractor on the road, making sure that the
by the agent before delivering to the Dealer and by brakes, controls and accessories operate cor-
the Dealer before delivering to the customer or ope- rectly.
rator:
2. Driving torques
1. General installation
- Check the driving torques of the bolts or nuts that
- Clean the lower surface of the batteries and spread fix the various chassis components:
the terminals with vaseline. - Front axle/Engine
- Charge the battery if necessary. - Engine/Gearbox
- Check all battery connections. Make sure that all - Gearbox/Rear axle
leads, tubes and indicator lights are well fixed. - Axle shaft housings/Rear axle- Check the driving
- Check and top up the oil in the engine and tran- torque of the nuts or bolts that fix the wheels and
smission housings. wheel plates.
- Lubricate all parts requiring grease.
- Check the tension of the belts (alternator, fan,
servo-control pump and air-conditioning compres-
sor) and adjust if necessary.
- Flush out the cooling circuit and fill it with fresh
water (unless it contains antifreeze).
- Make sure that the tank contains sufficient fuel
and that this is the right type. Total safety
- Make sure that the nuts and bolts that fix the cylin-
der head have been driven to the right torque. Before delivering the machine to the customer,
Make sure that the fixing nuts and bolts on the always control its operation. Particularly check for
intake and exhaust manifolds are tight. the safety systems to operate correctly. Install all
- Check and adjust the tappet play and visually in- safety guards and protections.
spect the valve springs.
- Check the injectors. Bleed the fuel circuit and ti-
ghten all the fuel pipe unions.
- Make sure that the engine air filtering pipes are
well fixed.
- Check the adjustment of the engine articulations,
making sure that they operate smoothly.
- Start the engine.
- Make sure that the instruments, controls and in-
dicator lights operate correctly.
- Check the engine rate on the rev counter using SAFETY
the pedal and hand accelerator. above all
- Hitch a towed implement and make sure that the
hydraulic accessories of the tractor operate cor-
rectly.
- Check and regulate the tyre pressure (on the road
or ground).
- Make sure that all nuts, bolts, centering pins, pipe
unions and fastening devices are correctly fixed.
- Make sure that there are no leaks from the pi-
pes.
- Make sure that the lights are correctly positio-
ned.
1 - 47
INTRODUCTION

4-3 Routine maintenance guide for Atlantis tractors
Servicing
ASS'Y
Daily 100 250 500 1000(1) points

DESCRIPTION or as HOURSW HOURS HOURS HOURS
required(4) (Fig.25-1)
LUBRICA-
General lubrication -
TION
Lubricate three-point linkage 21

Wheel hub for 2WD axle 27
Check engine oil level 1
ENGINE
Change engine oil 22

Change engine oil filter 23
Check valve clearance * 25
Clean engine open breather: every 2000 hours* 36
Clean fuel filter bowl 2
FUEL SYSTEM
Change fuel filter cartridges 26

Check injector settings and injection pump * 28
Dry air filter: clean drain valve 3
Dry air filter: clean or change cartridge 4
Drain sludge from fuel tank 29
COOLING
Check coolant level in radiator 5

SYSTEM SYSTEM HYDRAULIC POWER LIFT SYSTEM
Clean radiator fins 6

Wash out cooling circuit 30
Check oil level in gearbox, front differential, rear and front final 7-9-10
drives
TRANSMISSION
Change oil in gearbox(2), front differential, rear and front final 31-32
drives
Clean lift oil filter 24
Clean transmission oil radiator (if installed)
Check and adjust free travel of clutch pedal, PTO clutch lever 12-13-14
and brake pedals
Check oil level in brake fluid reservoir 11
ELECTRIC STEERING
Check oil level in hydraulic power steering reservoir 8

Clean oil filter in hydraulic power steering 27
Change oil in hydraulic power steering 34
Check level of electrolyte in battery 12
Check fan and alternator belt tension 13
Check efficiency of alternator and starter motor* 28
Check tyre pressure 14
OTHERS
Check wheel nut tightness 15

Check tightness of nuts and bolts in general 17
Check tightness of safety frame fixing bolts 16
REFERENCE MARKS FOR THE OPERATIONS NOTES
Inspection, filling, lubrication. (1) Operation to be carried out at least once a year.
Replacement. (2) Initially after the first 500 hours operation, then every 1000
hours.
Cleaning or washing. (3) ATTENTION: Clean the filter of the steering circuit after the first 50
hours to protect the circuit itself. Following this, clean the filter every
Adjustment 500 hours.
Operations that must be carried out by the Dealer. (4) ATTENTION: Use your own discretion and experience when deciding
on the actual intervals for variable interval service and maintenance
* Operations marked by an asterisk must be carried out by the operations. Always remember, however, that it is better to carry out
Dealer. them too often than not often enough.
1 - 48
INTRODUCTION
28
26
36
33
9 32
8 27 34
20 12
14 19 11 5
3 4 2 7
21
6
30
16
13 15 24 17
23 22 1 29 31 10 35
18 Fig.25-1
Service and maintenance points.
EVERY DAY OR WHEN 18. Check wheel nut tightness. EVERY
NEEDED (4) 19. Check tightness of safety 1000 HOURS (1)
frame screws.
1. Check engine oil level. 20. Check tightness of nuts and 28*. Check injector and injection
2. Clean fuel filter bowl. bolts in general. pump settings.
3. Air filter: clean drain valve. 21. General greasing and 29. Drain sludge from fuel tank.
4. Air filter: clean or change filter lubrication. 30. Flush engine cooling circuit
cartridge. 31. Change oil in gearbox and
5. Check coolant level in radiator. hydraulic system (2).
6. Clean engine radiator fins. 32. Change oil in front axle and
7. Oil level in gearbox and EVERY front final drives.
hydraulic system. 250 HOURS 33. Check operation of alternator
8. Oil level in steering power and starter motor.
circuit. 22. Change engine oil. 34. Change oil in power steering
9. Oil level in front axle and front 23. Change engine oil filter. system.
final drives. 24. Clean power lift oil filter (3). 35. Change oil in rear final drives.
10. Oil level in rear final drives.
11. Oil level in braking circuit. EVERY EVERY
12. Brake pedal adjustment. 500 HOURS 2000 HOURS
13. Gearshift clutch pedal
adjustment. 25*. Check valve clearance. 36*. Clean engine open breather.
14. PTO clutch lever adjustment. 26. Change fuel filter.
15. Level of electrolyte in battery. 27. Wash power steering circuit oil
16. Fan and alternator drive belt filter.
tension.
17. Tyre pressures.
NOTES: For notes (1), (2), (3), (4) see Routine Maintenance Table.
* Operations marked by an asterisk must be carried out by our Dealer or Area Agent.
1 - 49
INTRODUCTION

4-4 Routine maintenance guide for Ghibli tractor
CATION ASS'Y
Daily 100 250 500 1000(1) Servicing

DESCRIPTION or as HOURS HOURS HOURS HOURS points
required4) (Fig.26-1)
General lubrication 20
LUBRI-
Lubricate three-point linkage 20

Wheel hub for 2WD axle -
Check engine oil level 1
ENGINE
Change engine oil 26

Change engine oil filter 27
Check valve clearance * 28
Clean engine open breather *: every 2000 hours 40
Clean fuel filter bowl 2
FUEL SYSTEM
Change fuel filter cartridge 29

Check injector settings * 31
Dry air filter: clean drain valve 3
Dry air filter: clean or change cartridge 4
Drain sludge from fuel tank 32
Check coolant level in radiator 5
COOLING
OTHERS AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM SYSTEMHYDRAULIC POWER LIFT SYSTEM
Clean radiator fins 6

Wash out cooling circuit 33
Check oil levels in gearbox, front differential,
front and rear final drives
TRANSMISSION
Change oil in gearbos(2), front differential, 34-35-38

front and rear final drives
Clean lift oil circuit filter 27
Clean transmission oil radiator (if installed) -
Check and adjust free traver of clutch and brake pedals 12-13
Check oil level in brake circuit reservoir 11
ELECTRIC STEERING
Check oil level in power steering circuit reservoir 8

Clean power steering oil filter 30
Change power steering oil filter 37
Check level of electrolyte in battery 14
Check alternator drive belt tension 15
Check efficiency of alternator and starter motor * 29
Check liquid level in windscreen washer reservoir -
Check and clean cab air filter 21
Change cab filter element 39
CAB
Check air conditioning system charge 22

Clean air conditioning system condenser 23
Check compressor drive belt tension 24
Check tyre pressure 16
Check wheel nut tightness 17
Check tightness of nuts and bolts in general 18-19
REFERENCE MARKS FOR THE OPERATIONS hours.

Inspection, filling, lubrication. (3) ATTENTION: Clean the filter of the steering circuit after the first 50
Replacement. Cleaning or washing. Adjustment. hours to protect the circuit itself. Following this, clean the filter every
Operations that must be carried out by the Dealer. 500 hours.
* The operations marked by an asterisk must be carried out by
the Dealer. (4) ATTENTION: Use your own discretion and experience when deciding
on the actual intervals for variable interval service and maintenance
NOTES operations. Always remember, however, that it is better to carry out
Operation to be carried out at least once a year. them too often than not often enough.
(2) Initially after the first 500 hours operation, then every 1000
1 - 50
INTRODUCTION

21 39
2 23
29 5
18 19
11
3 4 28 31
22 24
23
15
14
36
25
26
13
1 32
9 35
12 8 30 37
40
6 33
16
16 20
17 34 27
17 10 38 10 38
Fig.26-1
Maintenance and service points.
EVERY DAY OR WHEN 17. Check wheel nut tightness. EVERY
NEEDED' (4) 18. Check tightness of cab screws. 1.000 HOURS (1)
1. Check engine oil level. 19. Check tightness of nuts and 31*. Check injector and injection
2. Clean fuel filter bowl. bolts in general. pump settings.
3. Air filter: clean drain valve. 20. General greasing and lubrication. 32. Drain sludge from fuel tank.
4. Air filter: clean or change filter 21. Clean cab air filter 33. Flush engine cooling circuit
cartridge. 22. Check air conditioning system 34. Change oil in gearbox and
5. Check coolant level in radiator. charge. hydraulic system (2).
6. Clean engine radiator fins. 23. Clean condenser. 35. Change oil in front axle and
7. Oil level in gearbox and 24. Check compressor drive belt front final drives.
hydraulic system. tension. 36. Check operation of alternator
8. Oil level in steering power and starter motor.
circuit. 37. Change oil in power steering
EVERY
9. Oil level in front axle and front system.
250 HOURS
final drives. 38. Change oil in rear final drives.
10. Oil level in rear final drives. 25. Change engine oil. 39. Change cab air filter.
11. Oil level in braking circuit. 26. Change engine oil filter.
12. Brake pedal adjustment. 27. Clean power lift oil filter (3).
13. Gearshift clutch pedal
adjustment.
14. Level of electrolyte in battery. EVERY
15. Fan and alternator drive belt 500 HOURS
EVERY
tension. 28*. Check valve clearance. 2.000 HOURS
16. Tyre pressures. 29. Change fuel filter.
30. Wash power steering circuit oil 40*. Clean engine open breather.
filter.
NOTE: For notes (1), (2), (3), (4) see Routine Maintenance Table.
* Operations marked by an asterisk must be carried out by our Dealer or Area Agent.
1 - 51
INTRODUCTION
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 52
INTRODUCTION
CHAP. 1
Conversion tables
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 5 Conversion tables
5-1 Length ......................................................................... 1-54

5-2 Area ............................................................................. 1-57
5-3 Volume ........................................................................ 1-58
5-4 Weight ......................................................................... 1-61
5-5 Pressure ...................................................................... 1-63
5-6 Moment of rotation ....................................................... 1-65
5-7 Temperature ................................................................ 1-67
1 - 53
INTRODUCTION
Sect. 5 - Conversion tables

5-1 Length
From mm to inches
mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches
1 0.0394 26 102.36 51 2.0079 76 2.9921

2 0.0387 27 1.0630 52 2.0472 77 3.0315
3 0.1181 28 1.1024 53 2.0866 78 3.0709
4 0.1575 29 1.1417 54 2.1260 79 3.1102
5 0.1968 30 1.1811 55 2.1653 80 3.1496
6 0.2362 31 1.2205 56 2.2047 81 3.1890
7 0.2756 32 1.2598 57 2.2441 82 3.2283
8 0.3150 33 1.2992 58 2.2835 83 3.2677
9 0.3543 34 1.3386 59 2.3228 84 3.3071
10 0.3937 35 1.3779 60 2.3622 85 3.3464
11 0.4331 36 1.4173 61 2.4016 86 3.3858
12 0.4724 37 1.4567 62 2.4409 87 3.4252
13 0.5118 38 1.4961 63 2.4803 88 3.4646
14 0.5512 39 1.5354 64 2.5197 89 3.5039
15 0.5905 40 1.5748 65 2.5590 90 3.5433
16 0.6299 41 1.6142 66 2.5984 91 3.5827
17 0.6693 42 1.6535 67 2.6378 92 3.6220
18 0.7087 43 1.6929 68 2.6772 93 3.6614
19 0.7480 44 1.7323 69 2.7165 94 3.7008
20 0.7874 45 1.7716 70 2.7559 95 3.7401
21 0.8268 46 1.8110 71 2.7953 96 3.7795
22 0.8661 47 1.8504 72 2.8346 97 3.8189
23 0.9055 48 1.8898 73 2.8740 98 3.8583
24 0.9449 49 1.9291 74 2.9134 99 3.8976
25 0.9842 50 1.9685 75 2.9527 100 3.9370
From inches to mm From inches to mm

inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm
1/64 0.3969 33/64 13.0969 17/64 6.7469 49/64 19.4469

1/32 0.7937 17/32 13.4937 9/32 7.1437 25/32 19.8437
3/64 1.1906 35/64 13.8906 19/64 7.5406 51/64 20.2406
1/16 1.5875 9/16 14.2875 5/16 7.9375 13/16 20.6375
5/64 1.9844 37/64 14.6844 21/64 8.3344 53/64 21.0344
3/32 2.3812 19/32 15.0812 11/32 8.7312 27/32 21.4312
7/64 2.7781 39/64 15.4781 23/64 9.1281 55/64 21.8281
1/8 3.1750 5/8 15.8750 3/8 9.5250 7/8 22.2250
9/64 3.5719 41/64 16.2719 25/64 9.9219 57/64 22.6219
5/32 3.9687 21/32 16.6687 13/32 10.3187 29/32 23.0187
11/64 4.3656 43/64 17.0656 27/64 10.7156 9/64 23.4156
3/16 4.7625 11/16 17.4625 7/16 11.1125 15/16 23.8125
13/64 5.1594 45/64 17.8594 29/64 11.5094 21/64 24.2094
7/32 5.5562 23/32 18.2562 15/32 11.9062 31/32 24.6062
15/64 5.9531 47/64 18.6531 31/64 12..3062 63/64 25.0031
1/4 6.3500 3/4 19.0500 1/2 12..7000 1 25.4000
00
1 - 54
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
From Ft to Meters
ft. 0 1 2 3 4
m m m m m
- 0.305 0.610 0.914 1.219

10 3.048 3.353 3.658 3.962 4.267
20 6.096 6.401 6.706 7.010 7.315
30 9.144 9.449 9.754 10.058 10.363
40 12.192 12.497 12.802 13.106 13.411
50 15.240 15.545 15.850 16.154 16.459
60 18.288 18.593 18.898 19.202 19.507
70 21.336 21.641 21.946 22.250 22.555
80 24.384 24.689 24.994 25.298 25.603
90 27.432 27.737 28.042 28.346 28.651
100 30.480 30.785 31.090 31.394 31.699
ft. 5 6 7 8 9
m m m m m
- 1.524 1.829 2.134 2.438 2.743

10 4.572 4.877 5.182 5.486 5.791
20 7.620 7.925 8.230 8.534 8.839
30 10.668 10.973 11.278 11.582 11887
40 13.716 14.021 14.326 14.630 14.935
50 16.764 17.069 17.374 17.678 17.983
60 19.812 20.117 20.422 20.726 21.031
70 22.860 23.165 23.470 23.774 24.079
80 25.908 26.213 26.518 26.822 27.127
90 28.956 29.261 29.566 29.870 30.175
100 32. 004 32.309 32.614 32.918 33.223
From Meters to Ft
m 0 1 2 3 4
ft. ft. ft. ft. ft.
- 3.2808 6.5617 9.8425 13.1234

10 32.8084 36.0892 39.3701 42.6509 45.9318
20 65.6168 68.8976 72.1785 75.4593 78.7402
30 98.4252 101.7060 104.9869 108.2677 111.5486
40 131.2336 134.5144 137.7953 141.0761 144.3570
50 164.0420 167.3228 170.6037 173.8845 177.1654
60 196.8504 200.1312 203.4121 206.6929 209.9738
70 229.6588 232.9396 236.2205 239.5013 242.7822
80 262.4672 265.7480 269.0289 272.3097 275.5906
90 295.2756 298.5564 301.8373 305.1181 308.3990
100 328.0840 331.3648 334.6457 337.9265 341.2074
m 5 6 7 8 9
ft. ft. ft. ft. ft.
- 16.4042 19.6850 22.9659 26.2467 29.5276

10 49.2126 52.4934 55.7743 59.0551 62.3360
20 82.0210 85.3018 88.5827 91.8635 95.1444
30 114.8294 118.1102 121.3911 124.6719 127.9528
40 147.6378 150.9186 154.1995 175.4803 160.7612
50 180.4462 183.7270 187.0079 190.2887 193.5696
60 213.2546 216.5354 219.8163 223.0971 226.3780
70 246.0630 249.3438 252.6247 255.9055 259.1864
80 278.8714 282.1522 285.4331 288.7139 291.9948
90 311.6798 314.9606 318.2415 321.5223 324.8032
100 344.4882 347.7690 351.0499 354.3307 357.6116
1 - 55
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
From Miles to Kilometers
miles 0 1 2 3 4
km km km km km
- 1.609 3.219 4.828 6.437

10 16.093 17.703 19.312 20.921 22.531
20 32.187 33.796 35.406 37.015 38.624
30 48.280 49.890 51.499 53.108 54.718
40 64.374 65.983 67.593 69.202 70.811
50 80.467 82.077 83.686 85.295 86.905
60 96.561 98.170 99.779 101.390 103.000
70 112.650 114.260 115.870 117.480 119.090
80 128.750 130.360 131.970 133.580 135.190
90 144.840 146.450 148.060 149.670 151.280
100 160.930 162.540 164.150 165.760 167.370
miles 5 6 7 8 9
km km km km km
- 8.047 9.656 11.265 12.875 14.484

10 24.140 25.750 27.359 28.968 30.578
20 40.234 41.843 43.452 45.062 46.671
30 56.327 57.936 59.546 61.155 62.764
40 72.421 74.030 75.639 77.249 78.858
50 88.514 90.123 91.733 93.342 94.951
60 104.610 106.220 107.830 109.440 111.040
70 120.700 122.310 123.920 125.530 127.140
80 136.790 138.400 140.010 141.620 143.230
90 152.890 154.500 156.110 157.720 159.330
100 168.980 170.590 172.200 173.810 175.420
From Kilometers to Miles

km 0 1 2 3 4
miles miles miles miles miles
- 0.621 1.243 1.864 2.486

10 6.214 6.835 7.457 8.078 8.699
20 12.427 13.049 13.670 14.292 14.913
30 18.641 19.263 19.884 20.506 21.127
40 24.855 25.477 26.098 26.720 27.341
50 31.069 31.690 32.311 32.933 33.554
60 37.282 37.904 38.525 39.147 39.768
70 43.497 44.118 44.739 45.361 45.982
80 49.711 50.332 50.953 51.575 52.196
90 55.924 56.545 57.166 57.788 58.409
100 62.138 62.759 63.380 64.002 64.623
km 5 6 7 8 9
miles miles miles miles miles
- 3.107 3.728 4.350 4.971 5.592

10 9.321 9.942 10.562 11.185 11.805
20 15.534 16.156 16.776 17.399 18.019
30 21.748 22.370 22.990 23.613 24.233
40 27.962 28.584 29.204 29.827 30.447
50 34.175 34.797 35.417 36.040 36.660
60 40.389 41.011 41.631 42.254 42.874
70 46.603 47.225 47.845 48.468 49.088
80 52.817 53.439 54.059 54.682 55.302
90 59.030 59.652 60.272 60.895 61.515
100 65.244 65.866 66.486 67.109 67.729
1 - 56
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
5-2 Area
From square inches to square centimeters
in(2) 0 1 2 3 4
cm(2) cm(2) cm(2) cm(2) cm(2)
- 6.452 12.903 19.355 25.806

10 64.516 70.968 77.419 83.871 90.322
20 129.032 135.484 141.935 148.387 154.838
30 193.548 200.000 206.451 212.903 219.354
40 258.064 264.516 270.967 277.419 283.870
50 322.580 329.032 335.483 341.935 348.386
60 397.096 393.548 399.999 406.451 412.902
70 451.612 458.064 464.515 470.967 477.418
80 516.128 522.580 529.031 535.483 541.934
90 580.644 587.096 593.547 599.999 606.450
100 645.160 651.612 658.063 664.515 670.966
in(2) 5 6 7 8 9
cm(2) cm(2) cm(2) cm(2) cm(2)
- 32.258 38.710 45.161 51.613 58.064

10 96.774 103.226 109.677 116.129 122.580
20 161.290 167.742 174.193 180.645 187.096
30 225.806 232.258 238.709 245.161 251.612
40 290.322 296.774 303.225 309.677 316.128
50 354.838 361.290 367.741 374.193 380.644
60 419.354 425.806 432.357 438.709 445.160
70 483.870 490.322 496.773 503.225 509.676
80 548.386 554.838 561.289 567.741 574.192
90 612.902 619.354 625.805 632.257 638.708
100 677.418 683.870 690.321 696.773 703.224
From square cemtimeters to square inches

cm(2) 0 1 2 3 4
in(2) in(2) in(2) in(2) in(2)
- 0.155 0.310 0.465 0.620

10 1.550 1.705 1.860 2.015 2.170
20 3.100 3.255 3.410 3.565 3.720
30 4.650 4.805 4.960 5.115 5.270
40 6.200 6.355 6.510 6.665 6.820
50 7.750 7.905 8.060 8.215 8.370
60 9.300 9.455 9.610 9.765 9.920
70 10.850 11.005 11.160 11.315 11.470
80 12.400 12.555 12.710 12.865 13.020
90 13.950 14.105 14.260 14.415 14.570
100 15.500 15.655 15.810 15.965 16.120
cm(2) 5 6 7 8 9
in(2) in(2) in(2) in(2) in(2)
- 0.775 0.930 1.085 1.240 1.395

10 2.325 2.480 2.635 2.790 2.945
20 3.875 4.030 4.185 4.340 4.495
30 5.425 5.580 5.735 5.890 6.045
40 6.975 7.130 7.285 7.440 7.595
50 8.525 8.680 8.835 8.990 9.145
60 10.075 10.230 10.385 10.540 10.695
70 11.625 11.780 11.935 12.090 12.245
80 13.175 13.330 13.485 13.640 13.795
90 14.725 14.880 15.035 15.190 15.345
100 16.275 16.430 16.385 16.740 16.895
1 - 57
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
5-3 Volume
From cubic inches to cubic centimetres
(3)
in 0 1 2 3 4
cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc)
- 16.387 32.774 49.161 65.548

10 163.871 180.258 196.645 213.032 229.419
20 327.741 344.128 360.515 376.902 393.290
30 491.612 507.999 524.386 540.773 557.160
40 655.483 671.870 688.257 704.644 721.031
50 819.353 835.740 852.127 868.514 884.901
60 983.224 999.611 1015.998 1032.385 1048.772
70 1147.094 1163.482 1179.869 1196.256 1212.643
80 1310.965 1327.352 1343.739 1360.126 1376.513
90 1474.836 1491.223 1507.610 1523.997 1540.384
100 1638.706 1655.093 1671.481 1687.868 1704.255
in(3) 5 6 7 8 9
cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc)
- 81.935 98.322 114.709 131.097 147.484

10 245.806 262.193 278.580 294.967 311.354
20 209.677 426.064 442.451 458.838 475.225
30 573.547 589.934 606.321 622.708 639.095
40 737.418 753.805 770.192 786.579 802.966
50 901.289 917.676 934.063 950.450 966.837
60 1065.159 1081.546 1097.933 1114.320 1130.707
70 1229.030 1245.417 1261.804 1278.191 1294.578
80 1392.200 1409.288 1425.675 1442.062 1458.449
90 1556.771 1573.158 1589.545 1605.932 1622.319
100 1720.642 1737.029 1753.416 1769.803 1786.190
From cubic centimeters to cubic inches

cm(3) (cc) 0 1 2 3 4
in(3) in(3) in(3) in(3) in(3)
- 0.0610 0.1220 0.1831 0.2441

10 0.6102 0.6713 0.7323 0.7933 0.8543
20 1.2205 1.2815 1.3425 1.4035 1.4646
30 1.8307 1.8917 1.9528 2.0138 2.0748
40 2.4409 2.5020 2.5630 2.6240 2.6850
50 3.0512 3.1122 3.1732 3.2343 3.2953
60 3.6614 3.7224 3.7835 3.8445 3.9055
70 4.2717 4.3327 4.3937 4.4547 4.5158
80 4.8819 4.9429 5.0039 5.0650 5.1260
90 5.4921 5.5532 5.6142 5.6752 5.7362
100 6.1024 6.1634 6.2244 6.2854 6.3465
cm(3) (cc) 5 6 7 8 9
in(3) in(3) in(3) in(3) in(3)
- 0.3051 0.3661 0.4272 0.4882 0.5492

10 0.9154 0.9764 1.0374 1.0984 1.1595
20 1.5256 1.5866 1.6476 1.7087 1.7697
30 2.1358 2.1969 2.2579 2.3189 2.3799
40 2.7461 2.8071 2.8681 2.9291 2.9902
50 3.3563 3.4173 3.4784 3.5394 3.6004
60 3.9665 4.0276 4.0886 4.1495 4.2106
70 4.5768 4.6378 4.6988 4.7599 4.8209
80 5.1870 5.2480 5.3091 5.3701 5.4311
90 5.7973 5.8583 5.9193 5.9803 6.0414
100 6.4075 6.4685 6.5295 6.5906 6.6516
1 - 58
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
From gallons (U.S.) to liters
U.S. gal. 0 1 2 3 4
liters liters liters liters liters
- 3.7854 7.5709 11.3563 15.1417

10 37.8543 41.6397 45.4251 49.2105 52.9960
20 75.7085 79.4940 83.2794 87.0648 90.8502
30 113.5528 117.3482 121.1337 124.9191 128.7045
40 151.4171 155.2025 158.9879 162.7734 166.5588
50 189.2713 1930568 196.8422 200.6276 204.4131
60 227.1256 230.9110 234.6965 238.4819 242.2673
70 264.9799 268.7653 272.5507 276.3362 280.1216
80 302.8342 306.6196 310.4050 314.1904 317.9759
90 340.6884 344.4738 348.2593 352.0447 355.8301
100 378.5427 382.3281 386.1135 389.8990 393.6844
U.S. gal. 5 6 7 8 9
- 18.9271 22.7126 26.4980 302834 34.0638

10 56.7814 60.5668 64.3523 68.1377 71.9231
20 94.6357 98.4211 102.2065 105.9920 109.7774
30 132.4899 136.2754 140.0608 143.8462 147.6316
40 170.3442 174.1296 177.9151 181.7005 185.4859
50 208.1985 211.9839 215.7693 219.5548 223.3402
60 246.0527 2498382 253.6236 257.4090 261.1945
70 283.9070 287.6924 291.4779 295.2633 299.0487
80 321.7613 325.5467 329.3321 333.1176 336.9030
90 359.6156 363.4010 367.1864 370.9718 374.7573
100 397.4698 401.2553 405.0407 408.8261 412.6115
From liters to gallons (U.S.)

Litri 0 1 2 3 4
gal. gal. gal. gal. gal.
- 0.2642 0.5283 0.7925 1.0567

10 2.6417 2.9059 3.1701 3.4342 3.6984
20 5.2834 5.5476 5.8118 6.0759 6.3401
30 7.9251 8.1893 8.4535 8.7176 8.9818
40 10.5668 10.8310 11.0952 11.3594 11.6235
50 13.2086 13.4727 13.7369 14.0011 14.2652
60 15.8503 16.1144 16.3786 16.6428 16.9069
70 18.4920 18.7561 19.0203 19.2845 19.5487
80 21.1337 21.3979 21.6620 21.9262 22.1904
90 23.7754 24.0396 24.3037 24.5679 24.8321
100 26.4171 26.6813 26.9454 27.2096 27.4738
Litri 5 6 7 8 9
- 1.3209 1.5850 1.8492 2.1134 2.3775

10 3.9626 4.2267 4.4909 4.7551 5.0192
20 6.6043 6.8684 7.1326 7.3968 7.6610
30 9.2460 9.5102 9.7743 10.0385 10.3027
40 11.8877 12.1519 12.4160 12.6802 129444
50 14.5294 14.7936 15.0577 15.3219 15.5861
60 17.1711 17.4353 17.6995 17.9636 18.2278
70 19.8128 20.0770 20.3412 20.6053 20.8695
80 22.4545 22.7187 22.9829 23.2470 23.5112
90 25.0962 25.3604 25.6246 25.8888 26.1529
100 27.7380 28.0021 28.2663 28.5305 28.7946
1 - 59
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
From gallons (IMP) to liters
Imp gal. 0 1 2 3 4
- 4.5460 9.0919 13.6379 18.1838

10 45.4596 50.0056 54.5515 59.0975 63.6434
20 90.9192 95.4652 100.0111 104.5571 109.1030
30 136.3788 140.9248 145.4707 150.0167 154.5626
40 181.8384 186.3844 190.9303 195.4763 200.0222
50 227.2980 231.8440 236.3899 240.9359 245.4818
60 272.7576 277.3036 281.8495 286.3955 290.9414
70 318.2172 322.7632 327.3091 331.8551 336.4010
80 363.6768 368.2223 372.7687 377.3147 381.8606
90 409.1364 413.6824 418.2283 422.7743 427.3202
100 454.5960 459.1420 463.6879 468.2339 472.7798
Imp gal. 5 6 7 8 9
- 22.7298 27.2758 31.8217 36.3677 40.9136

10 68.1894 72.2354 77.2813 81.8275 86.3732
20 113.6490 118.1950 122.7409 127.2869 131.8328
30 159.1086 163.6546 168.0005 172.7465 177.2924
40 204.5682 209.1142 213.6601 218.2061 222.7520
50 250.0278 254.5738 259.1197 263.6657 268.2116
60 295.4874 300.0334 304.5793 309.1253 313.6712
70 340.9470 345.4930 350.0389 354.5849 359.1308
80 386.4066 390.9526 395.4985 400.0445 404.5004
90 431.8662 436.4122 440.9581 445.9041 450.0500
100 477.3258 4818718 4864177 490.9637 495.5096
From liters to gallons (IMP)

Litri 0 1 2 3 4
- 0.2200 0.4400 0.6599 0.8799

10 2.1998 2.4197 2.6397 2.8597 3.0797
20 4.3995 4.6195 4.8395 5.0594 5.2794
30 6.5993 6.8193 7.0392 7.2592 7.4792
40 8.7990 9.0190 9.2390 9.4590 9.6789
50 10.9988 11.2188 11.4388 11.6587 11.8787
60 13.1986 13.4185 13.6385 13.8585 14.0785
70 15.3983 15.6183 15.8383 16.0582 16.2782
80 17.5981 17.8181 18.0380 18.2580 18.4780
90 19.7978 20.0178 20.2378 20.4578 20.6777
100 21.9976 22.2176 22.4376 22.6575 22.8775
Litri 5 6 7 8 9
- 1.0999 1.3199 1.5398 1.7598 1.9798

10 3.2996 3.5196 3.7396 3.9596 4.1795
20 5.4994 5.7194 5.9394 6.1593 6.3793
30 7.6992 7.9191 8.1391 8.3591 8.5791
40 9.8989 10.9189 10.3389 10.5588 10.7788
50 12.0987 12.3187 12.5386 12.7586 12.9786
60 14.2984 14.5184 14.7384 14.9584 15.1783
70 16.4982 16.7182 16.9382 17.1581 17.3781
80 18.6980 18.9179 19.1379 19.3579 19.5779
90 20.8977 21.1177 21.3377 21.5576 21.7776
100 23.0975 23.3175 23.5374 23.7574 23.9774
1 - 60
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
5-4 Mass
From Pounds to Kilograms
Ibs. 0 1 2 3 4
Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg
- 0.454 0.907 1.361 1.814

10 4.536 4.990 5.443 5.897 6.350
20 9.072 9.525 9.979 10.433 10.886
30 13.608 14.061 14.515 14.969 15.422
40 18.144 18.597 19.051 19.504 19.958
50 22.680 23.133 23.587 24.040 24.494
60 27.216 27.669 28.123 28.576 29.030
70 31.571 32.205 32.659 33.112 33.566
80 36.287 36.741 37.195 37.648 38.102
90 40.823 41.277 41.730 42.184 42.638
100 45.359 45.813 46.266 46.720 47.174
Ibs. 5 6 7 8 9
Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg
- 2.268 2.722 3.175 3.629 4.082

10 6.804 7.257 7.711 8.165 8.618
20 11.340 11.793 12.247 12.701 13.154
30 15.876 16.329 16.783 17.237 17.690
40 20.412 20.865 21.319 21.772 22.226
50 24.948 25.401 25.855 26.308 26.762
60 29.484 29.937 30.391 30.844 31.298
70 34.019 34.473 34.927 35.380 35.834
80 38.555 39.009 39.463 39.916 40.370
90 43.092 43.545 43.998 44.453 44.906
100 47.627 48.081 48.534 48.988 49.442
From Kilograma to Pounds

Kg 0 1 2 3 4
Ibs. Ibs. Ibs. Ibs. Ibs.
- 2.205 4.409 6.614 8.818

10 22.046 24.251 26.455 28.660 30.865
20 44.092 46.297 48.502 50.706 52.911
30 66.139 68.343 70.548 72.752 74.957
40 88.185 90.389 92.594 94.799 97.003
50 110.230 112.440 114.640 116.840 119.050
60 132.280 134.480 136.690 138.890 141.100
70 154.320 156.530 158.730 160.940 163.140
80 176.370 178.570 180.780 182.980 185.190
90 198.420 200.620 202.830 205.030 207.230
100 220.460 222.670 224.870 227.080 229.280
Kg 5 6 7 8 9
Ibs. Ibs. Ibs. Ibs. Ibs.
- 11.023 13.228 15.432 17.637 19.842

10 33.069 35.274 37.479 39.683 41.888
20 55.116 57.320 59.525 61.729 63.934
30 77.162 79.366 81.571 83.776 85.980
40 99.208 101.410 103.620 105.820 108.030
50 121.250 123.460 125.660 127.870 130.070
60 143.300 145.510 147.710 149.910 152.120
70 165.350 167.550 169.760 171.960 174.170
80 187.390 189.600 191.800 194.010 196.210
90 209.440 211.640 213.850 216.050 218.260
100 231.490 233.690 235.890 238.100 240.300
1 - 61
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
From Kilograms to Newton
Kg 0 1 2 3 4
N N N N N
- - 9.81 19.61 29.42 39.23

10 98.07 107.87 117.68 127.49 137.29
20 196.13 205.94 215.75 225.55 235.36
30 294.20 304.01 313.81 323.62 333.43
40 392.27 402.07 411.88 421.69 431.49
50 490.33 500.14 509.95 519.75 529.56
60 558.40 598.21 608.01 617.82 627.63
70 686.47 696.27 706.08 715.89 725.69
80 784.53 794.34 804.15 813.95 823.76
90 882.60 892.41 902.21 912.02 921.83
100 980.66 990.47 1000.30 1010.08 1019.89
Kg 5 6 7 8 9
N N N N N
- 49.03 58.81 68.65 78.45 88.26

10 147.10 156.91 166.71 176.52 186.33
20 245.17 254.97 264.78 274.59 284.39
30 343.23 353.04 362.85 372.65 382.46
40 441.30 451.11 460.91 470.72 480.53
50 539.37 549.17 558.98 568.79 578.59
60 637.43 647.24 657.05 666.85 676.66
70 735.50 745.31 755.11 764.92 774.73
80 833.57 843.37 853.18 862.99 872.79
90 931.63 941.44 951.25 961.05 970.86
100 1029.69 1039.47 1049.31 1059.11 1068.92
From Newton to Kilograms

N 0 1 2 3 4
Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg
- - 1.020 2.039 3.059 4.079

100 10.197 11.217 12.237 13.256 14.276
200 20.394 21.414 22.434 23.453 24.473
300 30.591 31.611 32.631 33.651 34.670
400 40.789 41.808 42.828 43.848 44.868
500 50.986 52.006 53.025 54.045 55.065
600 61.183 62.203 63.222 64.242 65.262
700 71.380 72.400 73.420 74.439 75.459
800 81.577 82.597 83.617 84.636 85.656
900 91.774 92.794 93.814 94.834 95.853
1000 101.972 102.990 104.011 105.031 106.051
N 5 6 7 8 9
Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg
- 5.099 6.118 7.138 8.158 9.177

100 15.296 16.315 17.335 18.355 19.375
200 25.493 26.513 27.532 28.552 29.572
300 35.690 36.710 37.729 38.749 39.769
400 45.887 46.907 47.927 48.946 49.966
500 56.084 57.104 58.124 59.144 60.163
600 66.282 67.301 68.321 69.341 70.360
700 76.479 77.498 78.518 79.538 80.558
800 86.676 87.696 88.715 89.735 90.755
900 96.873 97.893 98.912 99.932 100.951
1000 107.071 108.090 109.110 110.130 111.149
1 - 62
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
5-5 Pressure
From Pounds per square inch to Kilograms per square centimeter
(2)
Ib/in 0 1 2 3 4
(psi) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2)
- 0.0703 0.1406 0.2100 0.2812

10 0.7031 0.7734 0.8437 0.9140 0.9843
20 1.4062 1.4765 1.5468 1.6171 1.6874
30 2.1092 2.1795 2.2498 2.3202 2.3905
40 2.8123 2.8826 2.9529 3.0232 3.0935
50 3.5154 3.5857 3.6560 3.7263 3.7966
60 4.2185 4.2888 4.3591 4.4294 4.4997
70 4.9216 4.9919 5.0622 5.1325 5.2028
80 5.6246 5.6949 5.7652 5.8356 5.9059
90 6.3277 6.3980 6.4683 6.5386 6.6089
100 7.0308 7.1011 7.1714 7.2417 7.3120
Ib/in(2) 5 6 7 8 9
(psi) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2)
- 0.3515 0.4218 0.4921 0.5625 0.6328

10 1.0546 1.1249 1.1952 1.2655 1.3358
20 1.7577 1.8280 1.8983 1.9686 2.0389
30 2.4608 2.5311 2.6014 2.6717 2.7420
40 3.1639 3.2342 3.3045 3.3748 3.4451
50 3.8669 3.9372 4.0072 4.0779 4.1482
60 4.5700 4.6403 4.7106 4.7809 4.8512
70 5.2731 5.3434 5.4137 5.4840 5.5543
80 5.9762 6.0465 6.1168 6.1871 6.2574
90 6.6793 6.7496 6.8199 6.8902 6.9605
100 7.3823 7.4526 7.5229 7.5933 7.6636
From Kilogram per square centimeter to Pounds per square inch

Kg/cm(2) 0 1 2 3 4
Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi)
- 14.22 28.45 42.67 56.89

10 142.23 156.45 170.68 184.90 199.12
20 284.46 298.69 312.91 327.13 341.36
30 426.70 440.92 455.14 469.36 483.59
40 568.93 583.15 597.37 611.60 625.82
50 711.16 725.38 739.61 753.83 768.05
60 853.39 867.61 881.84 896.06 910.28
70 995.62 1009.80 1024.10 1038.30 1052.50
80 1137.80 1152.10 1166.30 1180.50 1194.70
90 1280.10 1294.30 1308.50 1322.70 1337.00
100 1422.30 1436.50 1450.80 1465.00 1479.20
Kg/cm(2) 5 6 7 8 9
Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi)
- 71.12 85.34 99.56 113.78 128.01

10 213.35 227.57 241.79 256.02 270.24
20 355.58 369.80 384.03 398.25 412.47
30 497.81 512.03 526.26 540.48 554.70
40 640.04 654.27 668.49 682.71 696.94
50 782.28 796.50 810.72 824.94 839.17
60 924.51 938.73 952.95 967.18 981.40
70 1066.70 1081.00 1095.20 1109.40 1123.60
80 1209.00 1223.20 1237.40 1251.60 1265.90
90 1351.20 1365.40 1379.60 1393.90 1408.10
100 1493.40 1507.70 1521.90 1536.10 1550.30
1 - 63
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
From Kilogram per square centimeter to Kilo Pascal
(2)
Kg/cm 0 1 2 3 4
KPa KPa KPa KPa KPa
- - 98.1 196.1 294.2 392.3

10 980.7 1078.7 1176.8 1274.9 1372.9
20 1961.3 2059.4 2157.5 2255.5 2353.6
30 2942.0 3040.1 3138.1 3236.2 3334.3
40 3922.7 4020.7 4118.8 4216.9 4314.9
50 4903.3 5001.4 5099.5 5197.5 5295.6
60 5584.0 5982.1 6080.1 6178.2 6276.3
70 6864.7 6962.7 7060.8 7158.9 7256.9
80 7845.3 7943.4 8041.5 8139.5 8237.6
90 8826.0 8924.1 9022.1 9120.2 9218.3
100 9806.6 9904.7 10003.7 10101.8 10198.9
Kg/cm(2) 5 6 7 8 9
KPa KPa KPa KPa KPa
- 490.3 588.4 686.5 784.5 882.6

10 1471.0 1569.1 1667.1 1765.2 1863.3
20 2451.7 2549.7 2647.8 2745.9 2843.9
30 3432.3 3530.4 3628.5 3726.5 3824.6
40 4413.0 4511.1 4609.1 4707.2 4805.3
50 5393.7 5491.7 5589.8 5687.9 5785.9
60 6374.3 6472.4 6570.5 6668.5 6766.6
70 7355.0 7453.1 7551.1 7649.2 7747.3
80 8335.7 8433.7 8531.8 8629.9 8727.9
90 9316.3 9414.4 9512.5 9610.5 9708.6
100 10296.9 10395.0 10493.1 10591.1 10689.2
From Kilo Pascal to Kilograms per square centimeter

KPa 0 1 2 3 4
Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2)
- - 1.020 2.039 3.059 4.079

1000 10.197 11.217 13.237 13.256 14.276
2000 20.394 21.414 22.434 23.453 24.473
3000 30.591 31.611 32.631 33.651 34.670
4000 40.789 41.808 42.828 43.848 44.868
5000 50.986 52.006 53.025 54.045 55.065
6000 61.183 62.203 63.222 64.242 65.262
7000 71.380 72.400 73.420 74.439 75.459
8000 81.577 82.597 83.617 84.636 85.656
9000 91.774 92.794 93.814 94.834 95.853
10000 101.972 102.990 104.011 105.031 106.051
KPa 5 6 7 8 9
Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2)
- 5.099 6.118 7.138 8.158 9.177

1000 15.296 16.315 17.335 18.355 19.375
2000 25.493 26.513 27.532 28.552 29.572
3000 35.690 36.710 37.729 38.749 39.769
4000 45.887 46.907 47.927 48.946 49.966
5000 56.084 57.104 58.124 59.144 60.163
6000 66.282 67.301 68.321 69.341 70.360
7000 76.479 77.498 78.518 79.538 80.558
8000 86.676 87.696 88.715 89.735 90.755
9000 96.873 97.893 98.912 99.932 100.951
10000 107.071 108.090 109.110 110.130 111.149
1 - 64
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
5-6 Moment of rotation
From Ft/Pounds to Kilogrammeters
ft. Ibs. 0 1 2 3 4
Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m
- 0.138 0.276 0.415 0.553

10 1.382 1.520 1.658 1.796 1.934
20 2.764 2.902 3.040 3.178 3.316
30 4.146 4.284 4.422 4.560 4.698
40 5.528 5.666 5.804 5.942 6.080
50 6.910 7.048 7.186 7.324 7.462
60 8.292 8.430 8.568 8.706 8.844
70 9.674 9.812 9.950 10.088 10.227
80 11.056 11.194 11.332 11.470 11.609
90 12.438 12.576 12.714 12.855 12.991
100 13.820 13.958 14.096 14.235 14373
ft. Ibs. 5 6 7 8 9
Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m
- 0.691 0.829 0.967 1.106 1.244

10 2.073 2.211 2.349 2.487 2.625
20 3.455 3.593 3.731 3.869 4.007
30 4.837 4.975 5.113 5.251 5.389
40 6.219 6.357 6.495 6.633 6.771
50 7.601 7.739 7.877 8.015 8.153
60 8.983 9.121 9.259 9.397 9.535
70 10.365 10.503 10.641 10.779 10.918
80 11.747 11.885 12.023 12.161 12.300
90 13.129 13.267 13.405 13.544 13.682
100 14.511 14.649 14.787 14.925 14.064
From Kilogrammeters to Ft/Pounds

Kg-m 0 1 2 3 4
ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs.
- 7.23 14.47 21.70 28.93

10 72.33 79.57 86.80 94.03 101.27
20 144.67 151.90 159.13 166.37 173.60
30 217.00 224.23 231.46 238.70 245.93
40 289.34 296.57 303.79 311.04 318.27
50 361.66 368.89 376.12 383.36 390.59
60 434.00 441.23 448.45 455.70 462.93
70 506.34 513.57 520.80 528.04 535.27
80 578.68 585.91 593.14 600.38 607.61
90 651.00 658.23 665.46 672.70 679.93
100 723.34 730.57 737.80 745.04 752.27
Kg-m 5 6 7 8 9
ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs.
- 36.17 43.40 50.63 57.87 65.10

10 108.50 115.74 122.97 130.20 137.43
20 180.84 188.08 195.30 202.54 209.77
30 253.17 260.41 267.63 274.87 282.10
40 325.50 332.75 339.98 347.21 354.44
50 397.82 405.07 412.30 419.53 426.76
60 470.17 477.41 484.64 491.87 499.10
70 542.50 549.75 556.98 564.21 571.44
80 614.85 622.09 629.41 636.55 643.78
90 687.17 694.41 701.63 708.87 716.10
100 759.51 766.75 774.07 781.21 788.44
1 - 65
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
From Kilogrammeters to Newton meters
Kg - m 0 1 2 3 4
N-m N-m N-m N-m N-m
- - 9.81 19.61 29.42 39.23

10 98.07 107.87 117.68 127.49 137.29
20 196.13 205.94 215.75 225.55 235.36
30 294.20 304.01 313.81 323.62 333.43
40 392.27 402.07 411.88 421.69 431.49
50 490.33 500.14 509.95 519.75 529.56
60 558.40 598.21 608.01 617.82 627.63
70 686.47 696.27 706.08 715.89 725.69
80 784.53 794.34 804.15 813.95 823.76
90 882.60 892.41 902.21 912.02 921.83
100 980.66 990.47 1000.30 1010.08 1019.89
Kg - m 5 6 7 8 9
N-m N-m N-m N-m N-m
- 49.03 58.81 68.65 78.45 88.26

10 147.10 156.91 166.71 176.52 186.33
20 245.17 254.97 264.78 274.59 284.39
30 343.23 353.04 362.85 372.65 382.46
40 441.30 451.11 460.91 470.72 480.53
50 539.37 549.17 558.98 568.79 578.59
60 637.43 647.24 657.05 666.85 676.66
70 735.50 745.31 755.11 764.92 774.73
80 833.57 843.37 853.18 862.99 872.79
90 931.63 941.44 951.25 961.05 970.86
100 1029.69 1039.47 1049.31 1059.11 1068.92
From Newton meters to Kilogrammeters

N-m 0 1 2 3 4
Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m
- - 1.020 2.039 3.059 4.079

100 10.197 11.217 12.237 13.256 14.276
200 20.394 21.414 22.434 23.453 24.473
300 30.591 31.611 32.631 33.651 34.670
400 40.789 41.808 42.828 43.848 44.868
500 50.986 52.006 53.025 54.045 55.065
600 61.183 62.203 63.222 64.242 65.262
700 71.380 72.400 73.420 74.439 75.459
800 81.577 82.597 83.617 84.636 85.656
900 91.774 92.794 93.814 94.834 95.853
1000 101.972 102.990 104.011 105.031 106.051
N-m 5 6 7 8 9
Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m
- 5.099 6.118 7.138 8.158 9.177

100 15.296 16.315 17.335 18.355 19.375
200 25.493 26.513 27.532 28.552 29.572
300 35.690 36.710 37.729 38.749 39.769
400 45.887 46.907 47.927 48.946 49.966
500 56.084 57.104 58.124 59.144 60.163
600 66.282 67.301 68.321 69.341 70.360
700 76.479 77.498 78.518 79.538 80.558
800 86.676 87.696 88.715 89.735 90.755
900 96.873 97.893 98.912 99.932 100.951
1000 107.071 108.090 109.110 110.130 111.149
1 - 66
INTRODUCTION
Conversion tables
5-7 Temperature
From degrees Fahrenheit to degrees Centigrade From degrees Centigrade to degrees Fahrenheit
°F °C °F °C °C °F °C °F
-20 -28.9 90 32.2 -30 -22.0 28 82.4

-15 -26.1 95 35.0 -28 -18.4 30 86.0
-10 -23.3 100 37.8 -26 -14.8 32 89.6
-5 -20.6 105 40.6 -24 -11.2 34 93.2
-22 -7.6 36 96.8
0 -17.8 110 43.3
-20 -4.0 38 100.4
1 -17.2 115 46.1 -18 -04 40 104.0
2 -16.7 120 48.9 -16 3.2 42 107.6
3 -16.1 125 51.7 -14 68 44 112.2
4 -15.6 130 54.4 -12 10.4 46 114.8
5 -15.0 135 57.2 -10 14.0 48 118.4
10 -12.2 140 60.0 -8 17.6 50 122.0
-6 21.2 52 125.6
15 -94 145 62.8
-4 24.8 54 129.2
20 -6.7 150 65.6 -2 28.4 56 132.8
25 -3.9 155 68.3 0 32.0 58 136.4
30 -1.1 160 71.1 2 35.6 60 140.0
35 1.7 165 73.9 4 39.2 62 143.6
40 4.4 170 76.7 6 42.8 64 147.2
8 46.4 66 150.8
45 7.2 175 79.4
10 50.0 68 154.4
50 10.0 180 82.2
12 53.6 70 158.0
55 12.8 185 85.0 14 57.2 75 167.0
60 15.6 190 87.8 16 60.8 80 176.0
65 18.3 195 90.6 18 64.4 85 185.0
70 21.1 200 93.3 20 68.0 90 194.0
75 23.9 205 96.1 22 71.6 95 203.0
80 26.7 210 98.9 24 75.2 100 212.0
26 78.8 - -
85 29.4 212 100.0
00
1 - 67
INTRODUCTION
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
1 - 68
INTRODUCTION
CHAP. 1
Sealants
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 6 Sealants. ................................................................................ 1-70
1 - 69
INTRODUCTION
Sect. 6 - Sealants
DESCRIPTION TYPE USE
Weak locking and sealing of screws, adju-

Weak thread locking Loctite 222 ster screws.
gripping and sealing
Thread coupling
Medium locking and sealing of threaded

Medium thread locking Loctite 243 parts in general.
Highly resistant fixing, locking and sea-

Strong thread locking Loctite 271 ling of stud bolts, bolts, screws.
Locking and sealing of already mounted

Penetrating thread locking Loctite 290 parts by capillarity. Microporosity sea-
ling.
Locker Loctite 601 Highly resistant bonding.

Smooth coupling
Medium resistant fixing for bushes, bea-

Fixer Loctite 641 rings, etc. Parts can be demounted with
normal tools.
Fast, highly heat resistant fixing of cylin-

Super-bonding Loctite 638 drical parts. Dynamic operation.
Fast, highly heat resistant fixing of cylin-

High temperature bonder Loctite 648 drical parts.
Sealing of threaded unions on hydraulic

couplings
Sealer for hydraulics Loctite 542 and air pipes of up to 3/4".

Wet
Pipe sealer Loctite 572 Sealing of threaded unions in general.
Sealing of flat surfaces.

Thick sealer for flat surfaces Loctite 510 Applied by hand.
sealers
Flat
Sealing of precise flat surfaces. Applied

For flat surfaces Loctite 573 by hand or with screen-printing systems.
Sealing of cylinder head surfaces.

Plastic-spray hermetic type
Engine
Perkins
power part
hylomar Sealing of sump surfaces, covers.
Hermetic paste type
1 - 70
INTRODUCTION
CHAP. 1
Bolt driving torques
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 7 Table of bolt driving torques. ................................................... 1-72
1 - 71
INTRODUCTION
Sect. 7 - Bolt driving torques

MATERIAL 8.8 10.9 12.9
BOLT Z B Z B Z B
M 8 x 1 25 27 36 38 43 46
M 8 (1.25) 23 25 33 35 40 42
M 10 x 1.25 50 55 70 75 85 90
M 10 (1.5) 46 50 66 70 80 85
M 12 x 1.25 90 97 127 135 143 155
M 12 (1.75) 82 86 115 120 138 145
M 14 x 1.5 142 153 200 215 240 260
M 14 (2) 130 140 182 195 220 235
M 16 x 1.5 215 230 300 320 360 390
M 16 (2) 200 215 280 300 340 360
M 18 x 1.5 310 330 435 470 520 560
M 18 (2.5) 270 295 385 415 460 495
M 20 x 1.5 430 460 610 660 720 770
M 20 (2.5) 390 415 550 585 660 705
3/8" -24 UNF 44 47 62 67 75 80

3/8" -16 UNC 40 43 56 60 68 72
1/2" -20 UNF 105 112 147 157 175 190
1/2" -13 UNC 95 102 135 145 160 173
9/16" -18 UNF 150 160 210 225 250 270
9/16" -12 UNC 135 145 190 205 230 245
5/8" -18 UNF 205 215 285 305 345 365
5/8" -11 UNC 185 200 260 280 315 335
3/4" -16 UNF 355 380 500 535 600 645
3/4" -10 UNC 325 345 455 490 550 585
Torque values in Nm Z = galvanized bolt B = burnished bolt
TORQUING TOLERANCES
Critical assembly +5% / -5%
Important assembly +5% / -15%
Secondary assembly +5% / -30%
1 - 72
INTRODUCTION
CHAP. 1
General assembly instructions
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 8 General assembly instructions.

8-1 Seals ........................................................................... 1-74
8-2 O-rings ........................................................................ 1-75
8-3 Bearings ...................................................................... 1-76
1 - 73
INTRODUCTION
Sect.8 - General assembly instructions

8-1 Seals
8 - 1.1 GENERAL RULES
One single seal is normally enough to ensure reten-

tion. The sealing lip must point towards the fluid that
needs to be retained, or the side on which a pres-
sure is exercised.
Mechanical parts must be prevented from touching
the sealing lip. Besides impairing the retention prop-
erties, this would considerably shorten the life of the
seal itself.
Thoroughly lubricate the sealing ring with grease be-
fore fitting to prevent the assembly from operating
dry when the shaft turns for the first few times.
Retention rings with scorings must not be lubricated Fig.27-1
with grease, but with oil, as grease would fill the
grooves and annul the effect.
8 - 1.2 ASSEMBLY
1 -To fit the seal on the shaft, this latter must be

equipped with a chamfer.
2 - Protect the retaining border from possible dam-

age due to threads, races, sharp edges, spline
slots, etc. These parts of the shaft must be cov-
ered when the seal is mounted.
3 - Seals should preferably be fitted into their hous-

ings with the aid of a mechanical hydraulic press.
4 - The insertion force must be exercised as near to Fig.28-1

the outer diameter of the seal as possible. Take
particular care to ensure that the seal is perpen-
dicular to the axis of the hole.
5 - It is not advisable to glue the seal to the housing,

as even when all the possible precautions are
taken, the sealing lip could still become dirtied
and this would spoil the fluid and cause it to leak
right from the very first shaft turns.
1 - 74
INTRODUCTION

8-1.3 REPLACEMENT
If an assembly is overhauled, it is always advisable

to replace the retention rings on the spinning shafts
and the seals in general.
Make sure that the sealing border of the new ring
does not work on the sealing track of the previous
one.
8-2 O-ring seals

8 -2.1 ASSEMBLY
1 - O-ring seals must not be forced on to sharp edg-

es, threaded parts or grooves. If this cannot be
Fig.29-1
avoided, it is advisable to use a tapered assem-
bly sleeve or some other similar tool.
2 - Before assembling, check to make sure that the

O-ring seal corresponds to the required type. Take
great care to clean the housing and all other parts.
Impurities can damage both the seals and the
sliding surfaces.
3 - To make the assembly operations easier and

ensure the necessary lubrication right from the
start, it is advisable to immerse the seal in the oil
it must retain, or to spread it with a light film of
lubricating grease compatible with the type of
material with which the seal is made.
4 - Fit the O-ring into its housing, making sure that it

is not twisted.
Fig.30-1
5 - Take care not to damage the seal when the re-
maining components are assembled.
Fig.31-1
1 - 75
INTRODUCTION

8-3 Bearings
8 - 3.1 INTRODUCTION
Experience and cleanliness when mounting bearings coated before they leave the factory must gener-
are essential if good performances are to be en- ally be removed from the external cylindrical sur-
sured and premature yielding avoided. It is prefera- face and hole, unless the bearings must be lubri-
ble to assemble bearings in a dust-free, dry place cated with grease and used at very high or very
well away from machine tools that remove swarf and low temperatures. If this is the case, the bear-
machines that create dust. ings must be washed and dried to prevent harm-
ful effects on the lubricating properties of the
8 - 3.2 PREPARATION FOR ASSEMBLY grease products used for these extreme temper-
atures.
1 - Before the bearings are assembled, all the re- 5 - Bearings which have been impaired through neg-
quired parts, tools and fixtures must be placed ligent handling (damaged wrappings, etc.) must
ready to hand and in the order in which they are also be washed and dried before they are as-
needed. This assembly order is established by sembled. Bearings which, when removed from
the instructions or drawings supplied by the man- their original wrappings, have a relatively thick
ufacturer. and sticky layer of rust-inhibitor, will have been
2 - All parts where bearings are to be fitted (hous- hot-dipped and must be washed and dried (the
ings, shafts, etc.), should be thoroughly cleaned. hot-dip method is still used, mainly for large bear-
Take care to remove all machining residues. The ings). Bearings supplied already lubricated and
rough internal surfaces of cast iron housings must equipped with watertight screens or protective
be free from foundry sand. All the components shields on both sides must not be washed before
relating to the bearings must be checked as re- they are assembled.
gards dimensions and shape defects. Bearings
will only operate perfectly when the prescribed
tolerances have been complied with.
3 - To prevent foreign bodies from penetrating, bear-
ings must only be removed from their wrappings
just before they are actually assembled.
4 - The rust-inhibitor with which new bearings are
1 - 76
INTRODUCTION

8 -3.3 ASSEMBLY
1 - During the assembly operations, it is very impor-

tant to avoid directly striking the rings, cages and
rolling components as this could damage them.
In no case must a pressure be applied to a ring in
order to indirectly assemble the other. The sur-
faces of the relative housings must be lightly oiled
before the bearings are assembled.
2 - Generally speaking, the ring that creates larger
interference must be mounted first. Small bear-
ings coupled with only a slight interference can
be fitted into their housings by lightly tapping with
a mallet and using a soft metal punch or, prefera-
bly, with a piece of tubing placed adjacent to the
face of the ring itself. These blows must be suc- Fig.32-1
cessively applied to the entire face to prevent
the ring from setting off-center to the housing.
The cup-shaped tool shown in Fig.20-1 allows a
well-centered force to be applied, one that acts
on the entire face of the ring. Mechanical or hy-
draulic presses are generally used for mass-pro-
duction assembly.
3 - When a non-modular bearing must be installed
with interference on the shaft and in the housing
at the same time, it is advisable to place a disc
between the actual bearing and the tubular tool
(Fig.21-1) so as to evenly distribute the assem-
bly force over the faces of the two rings. This
method is particularly recommended in the case
of positionable bearings as it prevents the rela-
tive external ring from fitting off-center to the
housing. As an alternative, use a cap with two
bearing surfaces, one for the inner ring and one
for the outer ring (Fig.22-1): these surfaces must Fig.33-1
be co-planar.
4 - The inner and outer rings of modular bearings
can be assembled separately: this makes as-
sembly much easier especially if forced couplings
are required for both the rings. However, to pre-
vent the tracks from being damaged, make sure
that the axes of the two rings and row of rolling
bodies are not tilted when the two parts of the
bearing, already mounted in their housings, are
re-coupled.
5 - Rather large bearings cannot always be mounted
cold on the shaft or in the housing owing to the
entity of the force required (the assembly force
increases with the size of the bearing). In this
case, the bearings and their rings or supports
(hubs, etc.) must first be heated and then as-
sembled.
Fig.34-1
1 - 77
INTRODUCTION

6 - The required temperature difference between the
ring and the part being coupled depends on the
required interference and on the diameter of the
housing. However, the bearing must not be heat-
ed more than 125°C as this would lead to struc-
tural changes in the material and consequent di-
mensional variations and reduced hardness. Lo-
calized heating must also be prevented. Bear-
ings with protective screens and watertight bear-
ings should not be heated before they are as-
sembled as this would impair the characteristics
of the lubricant.
7 - Bearings should be heated in an oil bath or muf-
fle furnace. If electric plates are used, the bear-
ings must be turned several times to make sure
that they are heated in a uniform way. Fig.35-1
8 - 3.4 DEMOUNTING
1 - When bearings are reused after being removed

from their housings, the forces to apply must nev-
er be transmitted through the rolling bodies. If
the bearings are the non-modular type, first dis-
mount the ring whose coupling is the least tight.
The tools and fixtures described below should be
used to remove rings installed with considerable
interference, depending on the type of bearing in
question and its size.
2 - Small bearings can be removed from their hous-
ings with a mallet and soft metal punch. Use
these tools to tap lightly all over the face of the
ring. Better still, use a mechanical puller: this lat-
ter can be applied straight to the face of the ring
being removed (Fig.23-1), or to a part adjacent to
this. Disassembly is made easier when notches
for the puller jaws or threaded holes for the ex-
traction bolts have been provided on the shaft or
housing.
3 - To disassemble the inner rings of bearings with
borderless parallel rollers or ones with a border
alone, there are special tools with which the rings
themselves can be quickly heated before the shaft
heats too much and expands.
1 - 78
ENGINE
CHAP. 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Precautions and safety warnings. .......................................................... 2-2

Sect. 1 Technical specifications. .......................................................... 2-5
1-1 Main technical specifications - Atlantis 70-75-85 ........... 2-6
1-2 Main technical specifications -
Atlantis-Ghibli 80-90-100 ............................................... 2-8
Sect. 2 Driving torque values. ............................................................. 2-11

2-1 Standard driving torques ............................................. 2-12
2-2 Recommended driving torques: engine 4.41 ............... 2-13
2-3 Recommended driving torques:
engine 1004.40/1004.42/1004.40T.................................... 2-17
Sect. 3 4.41 engine timing. .................................................................. 2-21

3-1 Introduction ................................................................. 2-22
3-2 Finding the compression TDC of cylinder N° 1............ 2-23
3-3 Checking the camshaft timing ..................................... 2-24
3-4 Checking the the injection pump locking angle ........... 2-25
3-5 Checking the injection pump timing ............................. 2-25
3-6 Checking the engine locking angle .............................. 2-27
Sect. 4 1004.40 / 1004.42 / 1004.40T engine timing. ........................... 2-29

4-1 Introduction ................................................................. 2-30
4-2 How to find the compression TDC of cylinder N° 1...... 2-32
4-3 How to check camshaft timing ..................................... 2-33
4-4 How to check injection pump timing ............................ 2-34
Sect.5 Special tools. ......................................................................... 2-35
2-1
ENGINE
Precautions and safety warnings

This section describes certain precautions and sa- - Do not remove the fill plug of the cooling circuit
fety recommendations. It is important to comply with whilst the engine is hot and the coolant under pres-
these instructions as they can help to prevent inju- sure as boiling fluid could spurt out.
ries. Always remember to comply with the safety - Do not produce sparks or near naked flames to
instructions in the Operation and Maintenance ma- batteries (especially when they are being charged)
nual and in chapter 1 of this manual. as the gas issued by the electrolyte is highly in-
Pay the greatest attention to the Warnings identified flammable. Battery fluid is dangerous for the skin
by this symbol: and especially for the eyes.
- Disconnect the battery terminals before you begin
to repair the electrical system.
- Make sure that the engine is only operated from
the control panel or driving seat.
WARNING - Immediately seek medical help if fuel under pres-

sure hits the skin.
- Diesel fuel and lubricating oil (especially old used
oil) can be harmful to the skin of certain persons.
Wear gloves or apply a special protective creme to
- Do not fill the engine with lubricating oil beyond the protect the hands.
mark on the dipstick as such action could damage - Do not wear clothes dirtied by lubricating oil. Do
the actual engine itself. not put material dirtied with lubricating oil into your
- Lubricate the rocker arm and camshaft before star- pockets.
ting the engine to prevent this from being damaged - Dispose of used lubricating oil safely in order to
if the lubrication circuit has been emptied. safeguard the environment. Do not litter.
- These engines must only be used for the type of - Make sure that the gearshift lever is in neutral be-
application for which they have been designed. fore starting the engine.
- Do not modify the technical characteristics of the - Take the greatest care if you must make emergen-
engine. cy repairs in difficult conditions.
- Do not smoke while refuelling. - The combustible material with which some of the
- Clean up any fuel spilt. Materials polluted by fuel engine components are made (e.g. certain seals)
must be taken to a safe place. can become extremely damgerous if burnt. Never
- Do not fuel the tank when the engine is running allow such burnt material to come into contact with
(unless this is absolutely necessary). the skin and eyes.
- Do not clean, add lubricating oil or tune up the - Do not allow compressed air to come into contact
engine while this is running (unless you have been with the skin. Immediately seek medical help if this
adequately trained to do so. Even in this case, you should happen.
must proceed with the greatest care in order to - Turbosuperchargers operate at high speeds and
avoid accidents). temperatures. Keep your fingers, tools and other
- Do not attempt to make adjustments that you do objects well away from the intake and exhaust of
not understand. the turbosupercharger and do not touch hot surfa-
- Make sure that the engine is not allowed to operate ces.
where it could produce a concentration of toxic fu- - Do not clean the engine while it is running. Cold
mes. cleaning fluids applied to hot engines could dama-
- Unauthorized persons must remain at a safety di- ge some of the components.
stance while the engine or auxiliary equipment are - Only use genuine spare parts.
operating.
- Keep loose garments and long hair well away from
moving parts.
- Keep well away from moving parts whilst the engi-
ne is running. Danger! Some of the moving parts
are not clearly visible when the engine is running.
- Do not run the engine if a guard has been remo-
ved.
2-2
ENGINE

How to lift the engine safely
WARNING : make sure that there are no

bystanders near the load.
WARNING : the engine is very heavy.

Proceed with great care and comply with
all the safety instructions.
Before lifting the engine :
- Always use the appropriate, approved equipment

of the correct capacity to lift the engine.
Use lifting equipment of the type illustrated in figu-
re 1a - 2. This equipment must be able to lift the
engine vertically above the lifting brackets (1). Ne-
ver ever use a single lifting bracket to lift the engi-
ne.
- Make sure that the lifting brackets are not dama-
ged and that they are firmly fixed before you begin
to lift the engine.
- To prevent the rocker arm cover from being dama-
ged, make sure that there is a gap between the
hooks and the actual cover itself.
- Use lifting equipment or ask for help from another
technician if you must lift heavy engine componen-
ts, such as the engine block, the cylinder head,
flywheel housing, drive shaft and flywheel. Fig.1-2
2-3
ENGINE
CHAP. 2
Technical specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.1 Technical specifications
1-1 Main technical specifications - Atlantis 70-75-85 .................. 2-6

1-2 Main technical specifications - Atlantis-Ghibli 80-90-100 ...... 2-8
2-5
ENGINE
Sect.1- Technical specifications

1-1 Main technical specifications - Atlantis 70-75-85
Engine Landini Landini Landini
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Make Perkins Engine co. Perkins Engine co. Perkins Engine co.
Type 1004.40 4.41 4.41
List5633 / 2200
Cycle Diesel natural aspiration Diesel natural aspiration Diesel natural aspiration
with direct injection with direct injection with direct injection
Cylinders 4 4 4
Swept volume 3.99 liters 4.1 liters 4.1 liters
Compression ratio 18.5 : 1 18.5 : 1 18.5 : 1
Bore 100 mm 101 mm 101 mm
Stroke 127 mm 127 mm 127 mm
POWER RATING
DIN 70020 49 kW / 67 HP 52.5 kW / 71.5 HP 60 kW / 82 HP
Max. speed with no load 2310 RPM 2310 RPM 2310 RPM
Idling rate 750 RPM 750 RPM 750 RPM
MAX TORQUE
DIN 70020 263 Nm at 1300 RPM 255 Nm at 1200 RPM 281 Nm at 1300 RPM
FUEL PUMP
Make AC Dlx XD AC Dlx AC Dlx XD
Pressure 0.4-0.7 bar 0.5-0.8 bar 0.4-0.7 bar
INJECTION PUMP
Make Lsx Lsx Lsx
Type DP202 DPA DPA
Injection pipe length 400 mm 400 mm 400 mm
Pipe diameter 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 1.5 mm
INJECTORS
Make Perkins Perkins Perkins
Injector casing 2645 A311
Atomizer sprayer 2645 K609
Pressure setting 296 ± 5 bar 290 ± 5 bar 294 ± 5 bar
SPEED GOVERNOR
Make Cvx Cvx Cvx
Type mechanical mechanical mechanical
COLD STARTING DEVICE

Make Ix Ix Ix
Type glow plug glow plug glow plug
COOLING SYSTEM
Type Water type with centrifugal Water type with centrifugal Water type with centrifugal
pump 0.7 bar radiator plug pump 0.7 bar radiator plug pump 0.7 bar radiator plug
pressure and thermostat with pressure and thermostat with pressure and thermostat with
by-pass; 70 kpa (0.7 bar) by-pass; 70 kpa (0.7 bar) by-pass; 70 kpa (0.7 bar)
2-6
ENGINE
Motore Landini Landini Landini
FAN
Type Landini Landini Landini
VALVE CLEARANCE
Cold intake 0.20 mm 0.20 mm 0.20 mm
Cold exhaust 0.45 mm 0.45 mm 0.45 mm
2-7
ENGINE
1-2 Main technical specifications - Atlantis - Ghibli 80-90-100
Engine Landini Landini Landini
Atlantis-Ghibli 80 Atlantis-Ghibli 90 Atlantis-Ghibli 100
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Make Perkins Engine co. Perkins Engine co. Perkins Engine co.
Type 1004-42 1004.40T 1004.40T
List5702 / 2200 5632 / 2200 5783 / 2200
Cycle Diesel natural aspiration Diesel turbocharged Diesel turbocharged
with direct injection with direct injection with direct injection
Cylinders 4 4 4
Swept volume 4.233 liters 3.99 liters 3.99 liters
Compression ratio 17.25:1 17.25 : 1 18.5 : 1
Bore 103 mm 100 mm 100 mm
Stroke 127 mm 127 mm 127 mm
POWER RATING
DIN 70020 57 kW / 77 HP 65 kW / 88 HP 68 kW / 93 HP
Max. speed with no load 2310 RPM 2375 RPM 2310 RPM
Idling rate 750 RPM 800 RPM 750 RPM
MAX. TORQUE
DIN 70020 284 Nm at 1400 RPM 358 Nm at 1400 RPM 368 Nm at 1400 RPM
FUEL PUMP
Make AC Dlx AC Dlx AC Dlx XD
Pressure 0.5-0.8 bar 0.5-0.8 bar 0.4-0.7 bar
INJECTION PUMP
Make Lsx Lsx Lsx
Type DP202 DP202 DP202
Injection pipe length 400 mm 400 mm 400 mm
Pipe diameter 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 1.5 mm
INJECTORS
Make Lsx Lsx Lsx
Injector casing U2645 A311 U2645 A044 U2645 A051
Atomizer sprayer 2645 K609 2645 A628 2645 A635
Pressure setting 296 bar 294 bar 294 bar
SPEED GOVERNOR
Make Cvx Cvx Cvx
Type mechanical mechanical mechanical
COLD STARTING DEVICE

Make Ix / Lsx Ix / Lsx Ix / Lsx
Type glow plug glow plug glow plug
COOLING SYSTEM
Type Water type with centrifugal Water type with centrifugal Water type with centrifugal
pump 0.7 bar radiator plug pump 0.7 bar radiator plug pump 0.7 bar radiator plug
pressure and thermostat with pressure and thermostat with pressure and thermostat with
by-pass; 70 kpa (0.7 bar) by-pass; 70 kpa (0.7 bar) by-pass; 70 kpa (0.7 bar)
2-8
ENGINE
Motore Landini Landini Landini
Atlantis-Ghibli 80 Atlantis-Ghibli 90 Atlantis-Ghibli 100
FAN
Type Landini Landini Landini
VALVE CLEARANCE
Cold intake 0.20 mm 0.20 mm 0.20 mm
Cold exhaust 0.45 mm 0.45 mm 0.45 mm
2-9
ENGINE
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 10
ENGINE
CHAP. 2
Driving torques
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 2 Driving torques
2-1 Standard driving torques ............................................. 2-12

2-2 Driving torque recommended for
engine 4.41 ................................................................. 2-13
2-3 Driving torques recommended for
engines 1004.40/1004.42/1004-40T ........................... 2-17
2 - 11
ENGINE
Sect. 2 - Driving torques

2-1 Standard driving torques Standard driving torques for stud bolts (metal
The below listed driving torques refer to componen- ended)
ts slightly lubricated with clean engine oil before being
torqued. DRIVING TORQUE
Thread size Nm Kgfm

M 6 x 1.00 5 0.5
Driving torques for fixing bolts and nuts
M 8 x 1.25 11 1.1
DRIVING TORQUE M10 x 1.50 18 1.8
M12 x 1.75 25 2.5
Thread size Nm Kgfm
M 6 x 1,00 9 0.9
M 8 x 1,25 22 2.2
Standard torque values for pipe unions, plugs
M10 x 1,50 44 4.5 and adapters
M12 x 1,75 78 8.0
DRIVING TORQUE
M14 x 2,00 124 12.6
M16 x 2,00 190 19.3 Thread size Nm Kgfm
1/8 PTF 9 0.9
1/4 PTF 17 1.7
3/8 PTF 30 3.0
3/4 PTF 45 4.5
2 - 12
ENGINE
Driving torques
2-2 Recommended driving torques for
engine 4.41
CYLINDER HEAD
Torque all the screws to 110 Nm in compliance with
the numeric order of Fig. 2-2.
With the aid of the tool (1) shown in Fig. 3-2 or making
a mark on the screws and on the cylinder head, ti-
ghten the screws further in compliance with the nu-
meric order and the rotation degrees shown in Fig.
4-2
Screws S by 150°, screws M by 180° and screws L
by 210°.
Fig.2-2
Fig.3-2
S M L
150° 180° 210°
Fig.4-2
2 - 13
ENGINE
Driving torques
DRIVING TORQUE
DESCRIPTION Thread Nm Kgfm
Engine block
Fixing screw for sump fixing bracket M12 78 8.0
Mazak plug to hold front cylinder block support M12 3.5 0.4
Front engine support bracket nut M12 78 8.0
Intake system
Screws that fix intake manifold on cylinder head M8 22 2.2
Cylinder head exhaust manifold nuts M8 22 2.2
Turbocompressor and manifold nuts M8 44 4.5
Turbocompressor oil outlet elbow 1/2 PTF 24 2.4
Induction heater 7/8 UNF 30.5 3.1
Induction heater M22 30.5 3.1
Fuel system
High pressure pipe nuts M12 22 2.2
Low pressure pipe nut (tank to pump intake union) 1/2 UNF 9 0.9
Low pressure fuel pipe nut (breather to tank) 1/2 UNF 9 0.9
Low pressure fuel pipe nut (breather) M10 6 0.6
Positionable fuel filter union bolt 1/2 UNF 23 2.3
Injector clamp fixing screws M8 22 2.2
Injector packing gland bolt 30 3.1
Fixing screws for pump or cylinder block bearing bracket M8 22 2.2
Nut for pump support bracket on injection pump M8 22 2.2
Injection pump hub nut M14 80 8.2
Injection pump flange nuts M8 22 2.2
Screw fixing hub to injection pump gear M8 28 2.9
Fuel pump fixing screws M8 22 2.2
2 - 14
ENGINE
Driving torques
DRIVING TORQUE
Cylinder head
Cylinder head fixing screws M12/M14
Metal cover – tappet cover flanged nuts M10 30 3.0
Plastic cover – tappet cover flanged nuts M10 20 2.0
Screws fixing intake manifold on cylinder head M8 22 2.2
Nuts fixing exhaust manifold to cylinder head M8 22 2.2
Engine lifting bracket fixing screws M10 44 4.5
Temperature switch 5/8 UNF 30 3.1
Temperature switch 3/8 PTF 30 3.1
Pistons and connecting rods

Connecting rod nuts 7/16 UNF 77.5 7.9
Drive shaft
Main bearing fixing screws 9/16 UNF 152.5 15.6
Drive shaft pulley fixing screws 7/8 UNF 325 33.2
Drive shaft pulley fixing screws with washer 7/8 UNF 365 37.2
Screws fixing flywheel to drive shaft 1/2 UNF 105 10.7
Rear oil seal casing fixing screws M8 22 2.2
Flanged screw fixing adapter to pulley 3/8 UNC 37 3.8
Valve gear housing and respective control

Screws fixing valve gear housing to engine block M8 22 2.2
Screws fixing lower cover of valve gear housing M8 22 2.2
Screws fixing front cover to valve gear housing M8 22 2.2
Screws fixing front cover to valve gear housing M6 9 0.9
Camshaft gear fixing screw M8 27 2.8
Intermediate gear fixing screw 1/2 UNF 65 6.6
Intermediate gear fixing screw M12 78 8.0
2 - 15
ENGINE
Driving torques
DRIVING TORQUE
Lubrication system
Lubricating oil sump plug 3/4 UNF 34 3.5
Nuts of lubricating oil sump fixing screws M8 22 2.2
Screw fixing sump to engine block (CR) M8 30 3.1
Nut of union that delivers oil to turbo
Nut of connection to oil exchanger spacer
Turbocharger oil outlet union nut
Screw that fixes sump to engine block bearing bracket (CR) M16 170 17.3
Nut fixing sump to valve gear housing stud bolt (CR) M8 25 2.5
Countersunk nut of lubricating oil pump pipe union 7/8 UNF 55 5.6
Screws fixing oil pump to front bearing cap M8 22 2.2
Screws fixing draw pipe to main bearing support M6 9 0.9
Filter top fixing screws M10 44 4.5
Cooling system
Screws fixing connecting plate to valve gear housing M8 22 2.2
Screws and nuts fixing cooling system pump to valve
gear housing front cover and connecting plate M8 22 2.2
Nuts fixing fan to pulley of cooling system pump M8 22 2.2
Flywheel and housing

Screws fixing flywheel housing connecting plate M10 44 4.5
Alternator pulley nut (Lsx A 127) M17 80 8.2
Screw fixing adjuster lever to alternator pulley M8 18 1.8
Adapter for adjuster lever 3/4 UNF 35 3.6
Starter motor nut screw M10 55 5.6
Wax cap unit 2 0.2
Oil pressure switch 1/8 PTF 9.5 1.0
Stops
Up to 19 mm including outer diameter Width 09 mm 3 0.3
Diameter between 16 mm and 25 mm Width 13 mm 5 0.5
Outer diameter more than 25 mm and up to 41 mm Width 13 mm 5 0.5
Outer diameter more than 41 mm and up to 63 mm Width 13 mm 6 0.6
Outer diameter more than 63 mm Width 13 mm 7 0.7
2 - 16
ENGINE
Driving torques
2-3 Recommended driving torques for
engines1004.40/1004.42/1004.40T
CYLINDER HEAD
Torque all the screws to 110 Nm in compliance with
the numeric order of Fig. 5-2.
With the aid of the tool (1) shown in Fig. 6-2 or making
a mark on the screws and on the cylinder head, ti-
ghten the screws further in compliance with the nu-
meric order and the rotation degrees shown in Fig.
7-2
Screws S by 150°, screws M by 180° and screws L
by 210°.
Fig.5-2
Fig.6-2
S M L
150° 180° 210°
Fig.7-2
2 - 17
ENGINE
Driving torques
DRIVING TORQUE
Cylinder head
Cylinder head fixing screws 1/2 UNF
Fixing components, rocket arm pin supports:
- Aluminium supports M12 40 4.1
- Cast iron and sintered steel supports M12 75 7.6
Flanged nuts, plastic rocker arm cover M12 20 2.1
Flanged nuts, aluminium rocker arm cover M12 30 3.0
Screws fixing intake manifold to cylinder head M10 44 4.5
Screws between exhaust manifold and cylinder head M10 44 4.5
Fixing screws of engine lifting bracket M10 44 4.5
Piston and connecting rods

Connecting rod nuts 1/2 UNF 125 12.7
Connecting rod fixing screws 1/2 UNF 155 15.8
Bolts for positionable piston cooling nozzle unions 3/8 UNF 27 2.7
Drive shaft
Main bearing fixing screws 5/8 UNF 265 27.0
Drive shaft pulley fixing screws 7/16 UNF 115 11.8
Screws fixing viscous dampener to drive shaft pulley M12 75 7.6
Flanged screws between viscous dampener and drive shaft pulley M8 35 3.6
Flanged screws between glued dampener and drive shaft pulley M8 35 3.6
Screws fixing rear oil retainer casing to engine block M8 22 2.2
Flanged screws fixing bridge to engine block M6 16 1.6
Flanged screws fixing rear oil retainer casing to bridge M6 13 1.3
Torx screws fixing oil retainer casing to bridge M8 18 1.9
Flanged screws of balancer unit intermediate gear hub M12 93 9.5
Balancer unit counterweight gear nut 1/2 UNF 82 8.4
Screws to fix rear cover of housing M10 54 5.5
Screws to fix balancer unit on engine block M10 30 3.1
Screws to fix oil pump to balancer housing M8 27 2.8
Screws to fix balancer to engine block M10 54 5.5
2 - 18
ENGINE
Driving torques
DRIVING TORQUE
Valve gear housing and relative control

Screws fixing intermediate gear hub M10 44 4.5
Camshaft gear fixing screw M12 95 9.5
Screw fixing cover on valve gear housing M8 22 2.2
Nuts for cover on valve gear housing M8 22 2.2
Engine block
Fixing screws mounted instead of piston cooling jets 3/8 UNF 27 2.7
Fuel system
High pressure pipe nuts M12 22 2.2
Bolt for recovery pipe positionable union M8 9 0.9
Injector unit gland bolt - 40 4.1
Fixing screws for injection pump gear M10 28 2.8
Torx screws for injection pump gear M10 22 2.2
Fuel pump fixing screws M8 22 2.2
Nuts for injection pump flange M8 22 2.2
Retainer screw for Bx VE injection pump M10 27 2.8
Retainer screw for DP 200 injection pump 10 A/F 10 1
Lubrication system
Lubricating oil sump plug 3/4 UNF 34 3.5
Screws fixing oil pump to front bearing cap M8 22 2.2
Oil pump cover fixing screws M8 28 2.9
Lubricating oil sump retainers M8 22 2.2
Cooling system
Coolant pump driving pulley nut M8 22 2.2
(engines type AP, AQ, AS)
Screws fixing fan control housing to valve gear M10 44 4.5
housing
Screws fixing fan control pulley to hub M8 22 2.2
Screws fixing fan control pulley to hub M10 44 4.5
Fan fixing screws M8 22 2.2
Union fixing oil radiator to oil filter head 3/4 UNF 58 5.8
Screws between coolant pump and pump casing (engine type AS) M8 29 2.9
Screw between cooler and oil filter head 3/4 UNF 37 3.7
2 - 19
ENGINE
Driving torques
DRIVING TORQUE
Flywheel and housing

Screws fixing cast iron flywheel housing to engine block M10 44 4.5
8.8 punching on head M12 75 7.6
Screws fixing aluminium flywheel housing on engine block M10 70 7.1
Intake system
Nuts for supercharger on manifold M10 44 4.5
Cvx AC5RA and AC5RS 5/8 UNF 55 5.6
Thin nut A127, and pulley Mtx, 22 mm across flats M17 60 6.1
Tall nut A127, and pulley Mtx, 24 mm across flats M17 80 8.2
Bx 55° M14 45 4.5
Bx 55° M16 50 5.1
Heater for opening towards intake manifold M22 60 6.1
Starter motor nut/screw 3/8 UNF 30 3.0
Auxiliary equipment
Nut fixing compressor control gear to compressor drive 5/8 UNF 120 12.0
shaft
Compressor gear nut (30 across flats) M20 130 13.0
Flanged screws between bracket and intermediate gear hub M10 60 6.0
Flanged screws of bracket and valve gear housing M8 35 3.5
2 - 20
ENGINE
CHAP. 2
4.41 engine timing
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 3 4.41 engine timing
3-1 Introduction ................................................................. 2-22

3-2 Finding the compression TDC of cylinder N°1............. 2-23
3-4 Checking the the injection pump locking angle ........... 2-25
3-6 Checking the engine locking angle .............................. 2-27
2 - 21
ENGINE
4.41 engine timing

4-1 Introduction
To achieve the correct fuel injection able to meet
the requirements of the anti-pollution standards in
force, the more recent injection pumps operate with
a static advance near to TDC.
Timing marks are stamped on the gears of the ti-
ming system so that they can be mounted in the
correct way (A). The teeth marked on the gears of
the drive shaft, the camshaft and the injection pump
will be aligned with the intermediate gear when pi-
ston number 1 is near to top dead center (TDC) on
the compression stroke.
It may be very difficult to align all the marks since A
the ratio of the intermediate gear is much different
from that of the others. Fig.8-2
The injection pump is timed on the TDC of the com-
pression stroke of cylinder number 1. It is important
to ensure that injection is accurately timed in order
to comply with the regulations governing emissions.
2 - 22
ENGINE
4.41 engine timing

3-2 Finding the compression TDC
of cylinder N°1 2
1 - Fix a temporary indicator on the cover of the

valve gear housing with the tip near to the outer
edge of the pulley or drive shaft damper (6 Fig.
8-2).
2 - Slacken off the packing gland bolts that fix the

injectors.
3 - Demount the tappet cover.
4 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the

front) until the rod of the intake valve tappet of
1
Fig.9-2
the rear cylinder is about to close.
5 - Remove the elastic clamp and spacer from the onthe pulley or on the damper and remove the
front part of the rocker arm. Unscrew the bolts other two.
of the two front pedestals of the rocker arm and
demount the front rocker arm. Tighten the bolts 9 - Turn the drive shaft through 45° in an anti-
of the rocker arm pedestals. clockwise direction (viewed from the front) and
then clockwise until the mark on the pulley or
6 - Demount the valve springs from the front valve damper aligns with the indicator. Piston number
using - Perkins tool PD 6118B - and adapter PD 1 will be on TDC of its compression stroke.
6118-7 for the pedestal stud bolts, or adapter
PD 6118-8 for the pedestal fixing screws.
Warning: Mount a suitable collar near the upper part

of the valve to hold it if the drive shaft is turned too
much.
7 - Allow the valve to be held by the top part of the

piston.
8 - Fix a dial comparator with its feeler resting on

the top part of the valve stem (2 Fig. 8-2) in
order to make a eading.
Slowly turn the drive shaft clockwise until the
pointer of the comparator stops turning clockwise.
Make a suitable mark on the pulley or damper of
the drive shaft in order to align it with the tempo-
rary indicator.
Keep turning the drive shaft in the same direc-
tion until the comparator pointer starts to move
anticlockwise.
Make another mark on the pulley or damper to
align it with the pointer.
Mark the central point between the two marks
2 - 23
ENGINE
4.41 engine timing

3-3 Checking the camshaft timing
1 - Move the piston of cylinder number 1 to the TDC 7 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the
of its compression stroke. front) until the intake valve of the rear cylinder is
completely open.
2 - Remove the dial comparator from intake valve Adjust the play of the intake valve of cylinder N°
number 1 and mount the valve spring and tap- 1 to 0.20 mm.
pet. Make sure that the bolts of the rocker arm
pedestals are tightened to the correct torque va- 8 - Mount the tappet cover.
lue.
9 - Remove the temporary indicator from the valve
3 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the gear housing and the timing mark from the pul-
front) until the intake valve of the rear cylinder is ley or damper.
completely open.
4 - Set the play of the intake valve of cylinder N° 1

to 1.5 mm.

cylinder number 1 just closed. In this position,
check whether the mark on the pulley or damper
of the drive shaft is +/-2.5° from the temporary
indicator. Use the following formula to find the
measurement that corresponds to 2.5° on the
pulley or damper.
CXP
360
C = circumference of the pulley or damper
P = 2.5 degrees
6 - If timing is more than 2.5° off range, the gears of

the timing system are probably not aligned in
the correct way.
Note: A tooth of the camshaft gear corresponds to

23 mm on the circumference of a pulley whose dia-
meter is 203 mm. If the damper mounted is larger, a
tooth of the camshaft corresponds to 35 mm on the
circumference of a 310 mm diameter damper or 37
mm on that of a 327 mm diameter damper.
2 - 24
ENGINE
4.41 engine timing

3-4 Checking the injection pump ti-
ming
3
As a rule, when the mark on the injection pump flan-
ge is aligned with the one on the valve gear housing,
the injection pump timing is correct. If, however, a
doubt should arise due to poor engine performance,
check that both above mentioned marks are still cor-
rectly positioned.
Fig.10-2
3-5 Checking the injection pump

locking angle 4
1 - Demount the injection pump from the engine (3
Fig.10-2).
2 - Mount the adapter (4 Fig.11-2) on the driving

shaft of the pump. Use the nut of the driving
gear to lock the adapter.
3 - Replace the outlet coupler number 1, complete

with check valve, from the hydraulic head of the
injection pump - "W" outlet for 4-cyl. engines -
with a coupler without a valve.
Fig.11-2
4 - Connect this coupler to an injector control pump.
Pump by hand until the pressure gauge reads 30
atm (440 lbf in2 - 31 kgf/cm2).
5 - Slacken off the screw (5 Fig.12-2) on the timing

6
tool MS.67B and set the tool to the correct pha-
se angle: 291° for Atlantis - 75 and 293° for At-
lantis - 85. Tighten the screw.
6 - Mount the timing tool on the adapter on the pump

drive shaft. Turn by hand the drive shaft in the
normal direction - see arrow on pump plate -
until you clearly feel the fuel pressure blocking
the rotation. In this position the injection pump is
exactly at the beginning of the injection from the
outlet number 1, therefore to the corresponding 7
cylinder.
5 Fig.12-2
2 - 25
ENGINE
4.41 engine timing

7 - Hold tightly this position and slacken off the screw
(6 Fig.12-2). Move the indicator (7 Fig.12-2) 6
forward until it is in the center o f the pump face,
and check that the timing mark is exactly in the
center of the indicator notch.
8 - If the center does not collimate, remove the ti-

ming tool and deface the existing mark line. Then
mount the tool again and turn the rotor to the
position where the injection to cylinder 1 begins.
Slacken off the screw (6) again to move the indi-
cator forward against the whole flange thickness,
then tighten the screw again. Mark a new line on
the pump flange through the notch in the indica- 7
tor.
5 Fig.12-2
9 - Remove the tools and the adapter.
10- Detach the injection pump fron the injector con-

trol pump and fit the original coupler with valve
on the outlet number 1 of the hydraulic head.
11- Mount the injection pump again.
12- Bleed air from the fuel system.
2 - 26
ENGINE
4.41 engine timing

3-6 Checking the engine locking
angle
1 - Set the piston of cylinder 1 at the compression
TDC. 8
2 - Remove the injection pump and its gasket.
3 - Insert the conical hub (8 Fig.13-2) into the drive

gear of the injection pump, after the key has ben-
ne correctly mounted and aligned. Make sure
that the hub touches the timing case. Fix the
hub on the gear by the nut supplied.
4 - Slacken off the screw (9 Fig.14-2) on the tool Fig.13-2

MS.67B and adjust it at the correct timing angle:
A = 280.5° for Atlantis 75-85. Tighten the screw
(9 Fig.14-2). Slacken off the screw (10 Fig.14-2)
and insert the broached shaft (13 Fig.14-2) into
the timing tool. Slacken off the screw (12 Fig.14- 12 13
2). Mount the liner (11 Fig.14-2) and tighten the 11
screw.
5 - Insert the broached shaft (13 Fig.14-2) of the

timing tool into the hub. Let the tool slide along
the broached shaft until it contacts the hub flan-
ge, then tighten the screw (12 Fig.13-2).
10
6 - Slacken off the screw (12 Fig.14-2). Slide the
liner (11 Fig.14-2) forward until the square arm 9
contacts the timing case, then tighten the screw.
The timing mark on the timing case is correct if
aligns with the upper edge of the liner arm (11
Fig.14-2). If it does not align, remove the timing Fig.14-2
tool, deface the mark on the timing case and
mount the tool again. Bring the liner again in con-
tact with the timing case and trace a new mark
along the edge of the liner arm.
7 - Remove the timing tool and the conical hub.
8 - Mount the injection pump again with a new

gasket.
2 - 27
ENGINE
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
2 - 28
ENGINE
CHAP. 2
1004-40 / 42 / 1004-40T engine timing
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.4 1004-40 / 42 / 1004-40T engine timing
4-1 Introduction ................................................................. 2-30

4-2 Finding the compression TDC of cylinder N°1............. 2-32
2 - 29
ENGINE
Sect.4-1004-40 / 42 / 1004-40T engine timing

4-1 Introduction
To achieve the correct fuel injection able to meet
the requirements of the anti-pollution standards in
force, the more recent injection pumps operate with
a static advance near to TDC.
Timing marks are stamped on the gears of the ti-
ming system so that they can be mounted in the
correct way (A). The teeth marked on the gears of
the drive shaft, the camshaft and the injection pump
will be aligned with the intermediate gear when pi-
ston number 1 is near to top dead center (TDC) on
the compression stroke.
It may be very difficult to align all the marks since A
the ratio of the intermediate gear is much different
from that of the others. Fig.15-2
The injection pump is timed on the TDC of the com-
pression stroke of cylinder number 1. It is important
to ensure that injection is accurately timed in order
to comply with the regulations governing emissions.
Warning: The injection pump has a lock bolt (14

Fig. 15-2) that blocks the shaft.
It is important to slacken off the lock bolt and for
the pump shaft to freely turn.
The pump drive shaft must nut be turned without the
spacer (15 Fig. 15.2) mounted under the lock bolt.
The drive shaft would be damaged if it were to be
turned with the lock bolt toghtened on it.
More recent injection pumps are equipped with a 14

hub (16 Fig. 16-2) permanently mounted on the
control shaft. 15
The manufacturer mounts the hub on the pump to Fig.16-2
ensure very accurate timing. Engines with this con-
figuration are equipped with a driving gear fixed to
the hub and not to the pump shaft. A plug (17 Fig.
16-2) is used to accurately time these pumps when
serviced.
17 16
18
Fig.17-2
2 - 30
ENGINE
1004-40 / 42 / 1004-40T engine timing

Warning: Do not unscrew the nut (5) from the injec-
tion pump. Fig.17-2 shows the position of the nut (5)
when the injection pump is mounted on the engine.
The hub of the injection pump is mounted on the
shaft in the factory to ensure that the injection pump
is in the correct position for timing. If the nut is re-
moved and the hub shifts, it must be accurately fixed
back on the pump using a special tool before the
pump can be fitted back on the engine.
The injection pump gear is fixed to the pump hub
6
with four fixing bolts. These bolts pass through the
slits in the gear and allow the play to be eliminated.
Note: In recent engines equipped with belt type co-

olant pumps, four anti-tamper bolts are used to fix 5
the gear of the injection pump. Special tools are re- Fig.18-2
quired to unscrew these bolts. Consult your nearest
Perkins dealer.
Just unscrew the four bolts (6) that fix the pump
gear to the hub in order to demount the injection
pump from the engine.
2 - 31
ENGINE
1004-40 / 42 / 1004-40T engine timing

4-2 Finding the compression TDC
of cylinder n° 1 7
1 - Fix a temporary indicator on the cover of the

valve gear housing with the tip near to the outer
edge of the pulley or drive shaft damper (6 Fig.
19-2).
2 - Slacken off the packing gland bolts that fix the

injectors.
3 - Demount the tappet cover.

6
Fig.19-2
the rear cylinder is about to close.
5 - Remove the elastic clamp and spacer from the on the pulley or on the damper and remove the
front part of the rocker arm. Unscrew the bolts other two.
of the two front pedestals of the rocker arm and
demount the front rocker arm. Tighten the bolts 9 - Turn the drive shaft through 45° in an anti-
of the rocker arm pedestals. clockwise direction (viewed from the front) and
then clockwise until the mark on the pulley or
6 - Demount the valve springs from the front valve damper aligns with the indicator. Piston number
using - Perkins tool PD 6118B - and adapter PD 1 will be on TDC of its compression stroke.
6118-7 for the pedestal stud bolts, or adapter
PD 6118-8 for the pedestal fixing screws.
Warning: Mount a suitable collar near the upper part

of the valve to hold it if the drive shaft is turned too
much.
7 - Allow the valve to be held by the top part of the

piston.
8 - Fix a dial comparator with its feeler resting on

the top part of the valve stem (7 Fig. 19-2) in
order to make a reading.
Slowly turn the drive shaft clockwise until the
pointer of the comparator stops turning clockwise.
Make a suitable mark on the pulley or damper of
the drive shaft in order to align it with the tempo-
rary indicator.
Keep turning the drive shaft in the same direc-
tion until the comparator pointer starts to move
anticlockwise.
Make another mark on the pulley or damper to
align it with the pointer.
Mark the central point between the two marks
2 - 32
ENGINE
1004-40 / 42 / 1004-40T engine timing

4-3 Checking the camshaft timing
1 - Move the piston of cylinder number 1 to the TDC 7 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the
of its compression stroke. front) until the intake valve of the rear cylinder is
completely open.
2 - Remove the dial comparator from intake valve Adjust the play of the intake valve of cylinder N°
number 1 and mount the valve spring and tap- 1 to 0.20 mm.
pet. Make sure that the bolts of the rocker arm
pedestals are tightened to the correct torque va- 8 - Mount the tappet cover.
lue.
9 - Remove the temporary indicator from the valve
3 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the gear housing and the timing mark from the pul-
front) until the intake valve of the rear cylinder is ley or damper.
completely open.
4 - Set the play of the intake valve of cylinder N° 1

to 1.5 mm.

cylinder number 1 just closed. In this position,
check whether the mark on the pulley or damper
of the drive shaft is +/-2.5° from the temporary
indicator. Use the following formula to find the
measurement that corresponds to 2.5° on the
pulley or damper.
CXP
360
C = circumference of the pulley or damper
P = 2.5 degrees
6 - If timing is more than 2.5° off range, the gears of

the timing system are probably not aligned in
the correct way.
Note: A tooth of the camshaft gear corresponds to

23 mm on the circumference of a pulley whose
diameter is 203 mm. If the damper mounted is
larger, a tooth of the camshaft corresponds to
35 mm on the circumference of a 310 mm dia-
meter damper or 37 mm on that of a 327 mm
diameter damper.
2 - 33
ENGINE
1004-40 / 42 / 1004-40T engine timing

4-4 Checking the injection pump ti-
ming
Warning: Do not unscrew the nut (5) that fixes the
hub on the injection pump shaft. The hub is mounted
on the shaft in a permanent way. If the hub moves,
an injection pump specialist will have to re-position 10 5
it correctly on the shaft with a special test device
used by Perkins dealers.
9
1 - Set the piston of cylinder number 1 to TDC on
its compression stroke.
7
2 - Demount the gear cover from the valve gear hou- 8
sing. For gear operated coolant pumps. Demount Fig.20-2
the coolant pump.
Note: In more recent engines with belt operated co-

olant pumps, four anti-tamper bolts are used to fix
the fuel pump gear. These bolts can only be un-
screwed by specially trained technicians using spe-
cial tools. Contact your nearest Perkins dealer.
3 - Insert the timing plug (10) into the hole in the

gear of the injection pump (9) through the hub
slit (8). Fit the plug fully into the hole (7) in the
injection pump casing. If the plug can be fully
inserted, this means that the pump has been
correctly timed. It should not have to be forced
in any way.
Note: The position of the timing plug for Lucas and

Stanadyne injection pumps is illustrated in (Fig. 20- 10
2). The position of the timing plug for Bosch EPVE Fig.21-2
injection pumps is indicated in (Fig. 21-2).
4 - Remove the timing plug.
5 - If the timing plug cannot be fitted into the pump

casing, make sure that the engine has been cor-
rectly set to TDC on the compression stroke of
cylinder number 1.
If the engine has been correctly set to TDC on
the compression stroke of cylinder number 1 but
the plug does not fit into the hole, demount the
injection pump and have it set up by an authori-
zed pump expert.
6 - Mount the gear cover on that of the valve gear

housing.
2 - 34
ENGINE
CHAP. 2
Special tools
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.5 Special tools. ........................................................................... 2-36
2 - 35
CLUTCH
CHAP.3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Precautions and safety warnings . ......................................................... 3-2
Sect.1 General description................................................................... 3-3

1-1 Drawing of assembly and components .......................... 3-4
1-2 Description of operation................................................. 3-6
Sect.2 Technical specifications. .......................................................... 3-7

2-1 Main technical specifications ......................................... 3-8
Sect.3 Inspection, overhaul and adjustment. ..................................... 3-9

3-1 Inspection and overhaul .............................................. 3-10
3-2 Adjustment................................................................... 3-11
3-1
CLUTCH

Certain precautions and safety recommendations are WARNING: Thoroughly clean the parts
described in this section. It is important for opera- before proceeding with the any of the
tors to comply with these instructions in order to operations.
prevent accidents. Moreover, always bear in mind
the safety measures described in the Operation and WARNING: Do not use solvents to clean
Maintenance Manual and in chapter 1 of this ma- the parts. Use cleaning products that
nual. comply with the standards in force.
Carefully comply with the Warnings indicated by me-
ans of this symbol:
WARNING: treat the clutch with caution to

avoid injuries to the hands.
WARNING: if the bolts that fix the safety

frame or cab are loosened or if the actual
safety frame or cab are removed, make
sure that the parts are re-installed correctly
so that adequate protection is provided for
the operator.
WARNING: make sure that all persons

keep a due distance away from the danger
zone. Avoid vibrations when bolts are loo-
sened.
WARNING: lift and handle all heavy parts

with lifting means of adequate carrying ca-
pacity. Make sure that the assemblies or
parts are supported by appropriate harness
and hooks. Make sure that there are no
bystanders near the load as it is lifted.
WARNING: avoid twisting the chains or

metal ropes used for lifting purposes.
Always wear safety gloves when handling
cables or chains.
WARNING: use the right tools to align ho-

les. NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR
HANDS.
WARNING: handle all parts with the grea-

test care. Do not insert your hands or fin-
gers between one part and another.
WARNING: if you remove the bolts from

parts that are liable to drop, always leave
two opposed bolts in place for safety rea-
sons. Only remove these bolts after you
have hooked the assembly to a lifting me-
ans or after you have positioned bearing
blocks underneath the actual part itself.
3-2
CLUTCH
CHAP. 3
General description
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.1 General description
1-1 Drawing of assembly and components .......................... 3-4

1-2 Description of operation................................................. 3-6
3-3
CLUTCH
Sect.1 - General description

1-1 Drawing of assembly and components
1 21 24 22 16 12 13
2
3
4
6 11
7
8
9
10
17
18
20 14 15 23 19 5
Fig.1-3
1- Axle housing 13 - Collar bearing

2- Flywheel 14 - Collar lever
3- Belleville washer 15 - Lever
4- Gearbox plate 16 - PTO plate disengaging lever
5- Servo clutch cylinder (Ghibli only) 17 - Gearbox pressure plate
6- Drive shaft 18 - Gearbox lever adjuster lock nut
7- PTO shaft 19 - Cylinder stem
8- Gearbox plate disengaging levers 20 - Gearbox lever adjuster
9- PTO clutch pressure plate 21 - PTO lever adjuster nut
10 - PTO plate 22 - Clutch assembly
11 - Gearbox main shaft 23 - Fork
12 - Collar 24 - PTO lever rod
3-4
CLUTCH
General description
22
10
17
20 24
3
9
18 8
21 16
14
5
19
15
23
Fig.2-3
3-5
CLUTCH
General description
24 16 12 13
10 14 15 23 19 5
Fig.3-3
1-2 Description of operation

The clutch is the component that transmits drive from
the engine to the transmission unit.
It is engaged or disengaged as required by means
of the pedal lever for the gearbox and by means of
the hand lever (25 Fig. 4-3) for the PTO.
This lever activates a hydraulic control (Ghibli only)
that allows oil to flow to the cylinder (5), thus mo-
ving the collar (12) by means of a lever (15).
This collar presses on the levers (16) and disenga-
ges the PTO plate (10) by means of rod (24).
Fig.4-3 25
3-6
CLUTCH
CHAP. 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3-7
CLUTCH
Sect.2 - Technical specifications

2-1 Main technical specifications
Manufacturer Lx (Ox)
Type Twin plate
Dimensions 11" (gearbox plate) Atlantis 70-75-80-85

12" (gearbox plate) Atlantis 90-100
Ghibli 80-90-100
Material Gearbox plate: cerametallic

Atlantis-Ghibli all models
PTO plate: organic
Atlantis-Ghibli all models
3-8
CLUTCH
CHAP. 3
Inspection, overhaul and adjustment
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Inspection, overhaul and adjustment
3-1 Inspection and overhaul .............................................. 3-10

3-2 Adjustment ................................................................... 3-11
3-9
CLUTCH
Sect.3 - Inspection, overhaul and adjustment

3-1 Inspection and overhaul 125±0,5 (12")
123±0,5 (11")
WARNING: Handle the clutch very care- 24 10±0,3 22
fully to avoid injuring your hands.
21
WARNING: Thoroughly clean the parts
before proceeding with the any of the
operations. 9
WARNING: Do not use solvents to clean 10

the parts. Use cleaning products that
comply with the standards in force. 16
1 - Thoroughly clean all parts and then check them
17
visually;
23
2 - Replace any worn part;
3 - Check the sealed bearings (13 Fig.1-3). Make

sure that they turn in a regular way and ensure a
4
good seal;
8
4 - Check the friction surface on the flywheel and
on the pressure plates (9-17) and clutch hou-
sing (22 Fig. 5-3). 3
The friction surfaces can be ground in complian-
ce with the minimum tolerated dimensions shown
in Fig.6-3.
20
18
8,5±0,3
98±0,5 (11")
102±0,5 (12") Fig.5-3
9 17 22
5 16,7 23,2 68 17
Fig.6-3
3 - 10
CLUTCH
Inspection, overhaul and adjustment

3-2 Adjustment 17
1 - Fit tool 01 FRI REX on to the clutch, inserting it 18
on to plate (3) and then inserting the PTO plate
(10);
20
8
2 - Mount this assembly on the flywheel. Make sure
the two plates are perfectly centered by turning
tool 01 FRI REX;
3
3 - Tighten the screws that fix the clutch to the
01 FRI REX
flywheel after spreading a little Loctite 243 on
them;
4 - Check the height of the levers (8-16) and make

sure that they are coplanar, using tool 01 FRI
REX, which can be set in two different positions:
one position allows the height of levers (16) to
be adjusted by means of adjuster nut (21) while
in the overturned position, it allows the height of
levers (8) to be adjusted by means of screw (20)
and nut (18);
10
5 - After the adjustments have been made, lock the
nut (21), clinch it and tighten nut (18 Fig.7-3)
against the pressure plate (17).
16
21
Fig.7-3
3 - 11
CLUTCH
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
3 - 12
CLUTCH
CHAP. 3
Special tools
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3 - 13
CLUTCH
Special tools
01 FRI REX
Clutch unit centering tool and rings to check coplanarity of lever heights
3 - 14
TRANSMISSION
CHAP.4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.1 General description................................................................... 4-3

1-1 Introduction .................................................................... 4-4
1-2 Drawing of transmission assembly ................................ 4-5
Sect.2 Technical specifications. .......................................................... 4-7

2-2 Kinematics diagrams for Atlantic tractors ....................... 4-9
2-3 Kinematics diagrams for Ghibli tractors ....................... 4-11
2-4 Driving torques and sealants ....................................... 4-17
Sect.3 Main components. ................................................................... 4-19

A - Engine-gearbox axle assembly .................................... 4-21
B - Gearbox ....................................................................... 4-33
C - Bevel gear pair and rear differential ............................. 4-39
D - Side final drives ............................................................ 4-49
4-1
TRANSMISSION

Certain precautions and safety recommendations are WARNING: used oil must be collected and
described in this section. It is important for opera- disposed of in compliance with the correct
tors to comply with these instructions in order to anti-pollution laws.
the safety measures described in the Operation and WARNING: the hub is very heavy and dif-
Maintenance Manual and in chapter 1 of this ma- ficult to handle. Take all the necessary pre-
nual. cautions when demounting and remounting
Carefully comply with the Warnings indicated by me- this part.
ans of this symbol:
WARNING: if you remove the bolts from
WARNING: take care of the sharp edges parts that are liable to drop, always leave
around the top of the gearbox housing. two opposed bolts in place for safety rea-
sons. Only remove these bolts after you
WARNING: if the bolts that fix the safety have hooked the assembly to a lifting me-
frame or cab are loosened or if the actual ans or after you have positioned bearing
safety frame or cab are removed, make blocks underneath the actual part itself.
sure that the parts are re-installed correctly
so that adequate protection is provided for WARNING: use safety gloves when remo-
the operator. ving the differential locking spring. Also
hold the spring tightly with your hand.
keep a due distance away from the danger WARNING: the differential unit is very he-
zone. Avoid vibrations when bolts are loo- avy and difficult to handle. Take all the ne-
sened. cessary precautions when demounting and
remounting this part.

cables or chains.

HANDS.

4-2
TRANSMISSION
CHAP. 4
General description
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-1 Introduction .................................................................... 4-4

1-2 Drawing of transmission assembly ................................ 4-5
4-3
TRANSMISSION

1-1 Introduction
The transmission mounted in Atlantis and Ghibli
tractors is the modular type and consists of 6 sec-
tions:
1 - Clutch
Fig.1-4 REVERSE SHUTTLE Fig.2-4 SPEED GEARS
2 - Reverse shuttle and optionals AND OPTIONAL
3 - Four synchronized speeds
4 - Slow-Normal-Fast ranges
5 - Pinion/crown wheel and differential
Fig.3-4 RANGES Fig.4-4 RANGES

6 - Power take-off - SLOW - SLOW
- NORMAL - NORMAL
- FAST - FAST
- REVERSE
Transmission configurations
Reverse 12 forward speeds
shuttle + 4 gears x 3 ranges = 12 reverse speeds
Reverse 24 forward speeds

Creeper
shuttle + (-80%) + 4 gears x 3 ranges = 12 reverse speeds
24 forward speeds
Reverse Underdrive
shuttle + (-20%) + 4 gears x 3 ranges = 12 reverse speeds
24 forward speeds
Reverse Overdrive
shuttle + (+28%) + 4 gears x 3 ranges = 12 reverse speeds
36 forward speeds
Creeper
+ Underdrive + 4 gears x 3 ranges = 12 reverse speeds
36 forward speeds
Creeper
+ Overdrive + 4 gears x 3 ranges = 12 reverse speeds
36 forward speeds
Underdri-
ve + Overdrive + 4 gears x 3 ranges = 12 reverse speeds
4-4
TRASMISSIONE
Descrizione generale
1-2 Disegno complessivo della trasmissione
1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig.5-4
4-5
TRANSMISSION
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4-6
TRANSMISSION
CHAP. 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2-2 Power train diagrams for Atlantis tractors ...................... 4-9
2-3 Power train diagrams for Ghibli tractors....................... 4-11
4-7
TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
Speeds With four synchronized infinitely meshed gears with

helical toothing
Type of reduction range Three forward speed ranges (Slow-normal-fast)
Creeper (80% reduction).
Reverse shuttle Synchronized with gearbox input
Numbetr of speeds 12 forward and 12 reverse speeds with standard gear-
box
24 forward and 12 reverse speeds with underdrive
24 forward and 12 reverse speeds with creeper
24 forward and 12 reverse speeds with overdrive
36 forward and 12 reverse speeds with creeper and
underdrive
36 forward and 12 reverse speeds with creeper and
overdrive
36 forward and 12 reverse speeds with underdrive
and overdrive
Rear axle
Bevel gear pair 9/44 Gleason type with helical toothing: Atlantis 70-75-
80
85-90-100; Ghibli 80-90
11/51 Gleason type with helical toothing: Ghibli 100
Final drive ratios 5.2 (60) ; 5.077 (65-70-80-90-100)
Type of Differential With two planetaries

Differential lock With electrohydraulic control and mechanical engage-
ment
Disengaged by brake operation
Brakes
Type Oil-cooled multiple-plate with hydraulic control
Number of friction discs 2 per side ATLANTIS 70

5 per side ATLANTIS 80, GHIBLI 80-90
6 per side ATLANTIS 100, GHIBLI 100
Friction disc material Graphitized resin
Disc diameter 174 x 141 mm
Brake cylinder diameter 25.4 mm
Parking brake Mechanical and activated by hand lever
4-8
43 34 30 23 37 15 27 REV
540 E
1000
NORMAL
540 15 24
25
19
MOTORE
4 3 9 44
22
p.d.f.
18 30
30 35 29
39 49
47
ATLANTIS DT 70-75 (40 KPH)
2 1
43 27
VELOCE LENTA 11
41 54 46
62
11 31
63
15 23
4-9
TRANSMISSION
2-2 Power train diagrams for Atlantis tractors
R A MOL A MOL A
55 46 37 46 55 37 15 55 37
29
30 39 54
MOL 32 26 MIC 30 26 SR 30
26
Fig.6-4
REVERSE SHUTTLE + OVERDRIVE + OVERDRIVE +
OVERDRIVEE UNDERDRIVE CREEPER
REV
43 34 30 23 37 15 27
1000 540 E
NORMAL
540 15 24
25
19
ENGINE
4 3
9 44
22
PTO
18 29 30
30 49
35 39
47 27
2 1
43 46
FAST SLOW
12 54
31
8 73
ATLANTIS DT 80 - 85 - 90 - 100 (40 KPH)
63 31
15 23
4 - 10
TRANSMISSION
R A MOL A MOL A
55 46 37 46 55 37 15 55 37
29
30 39 54
MOL 32 26 MIC
30 26 SR 30 26
Fig.7-4
REVERSE SHUTTLE + OVERDRIVE + OVERDRIVE +
OVERDRIVE UNDERDRIVE CREEPER
43 34 30 23 37 NORMAL
25 1000 15 24
15
4 3
15
31 47 18 43 29 30
19
4 3 46
8 2 1 SLOW 27 9 44 54
FAST
73
31
12
4 - 11
GHIBLI DT 80 - 90 REVERSE SHUTTLE + OVERDRIVE
31
TRANSMISSION
2 - 3 Power train diagrams for Ghibli tractors
23 15 29
37
46 R A
55
63
30 32 26
OVERDRIVE
REVERSE SHUTTLE + Fig.8-4

OVERDRIVE
43 34 30 23 37 NORMAL
25 1000 15 24
15
4 3
15
31 47 18 43 29 30
19
8 4 3 9 44 46
1 SLOW 54
2 27
FAST
GHIBLI DT 80 - 90 UNDERDRIVE + OVERDRIVE
73
31
4 - 12
12
31
TRANSMISSION
15
37
55 R A
46
63
39 30 26
UNDERDRIVE
OVERDRIVE +
UNDERDRIVE Fig.9-4
43 34 30 23 37 NORMAL
25 1000
24
15 15
4 3
15
31 47 18 43 29 30
19
8 4 3
54 46
1 SLOW 44
2 27 9
FAST
GHIBLI DT 80 - 90 CREEPER + OVERDRIVE
73
4 - 13
31
12
31
TRANSMISSION
15
37
55 R A
15
63
54 30 26
CREEPER
OVERDRIVE + Fig.10-4
CREEPER
43 34 30 23 37 NORMAL
25 1000 15 24
15
4 3
15
31 47 18 43 29 30
19 11 51 54 46
4 3
8 1 SLOW
2 27
FAST
73
GHIBLI DT 100 REVERSE SHUTTLE + OVERDRIVE
31
12
4 - 14
31
TRANSMISSION
23 15
37
46 R A
55
63
30 32 26
OVERDRIVE
REVERSE SHUTTLE + Fig.11-4

OVERDRIVE
43 34 30 23 37 NORMAL
15 25 1000 15 24
4 3
15
31 47 18 43 29 30
8 19 54 40
4 3
1 SLOW 51
2 27 11
FAST
GHIBLI DT 100 UNDERDRIVE + OVERDRIVE
73
4 - 15
31
12
31
TRANSMISSION
15
37
55 R A
46
63
39 30 26
UNDERDRIVE
OVERDRIVE + Fig.12-4
UNDERDRIVE
43 34 30 23 37 NORMAL
25 1000 15 24
15
4 3
15
31 47 18 43 29 30
19
8 4 3
1 SLOW 11 51 54 46
2 27
GHIBLI DT 100 CREEPER + OVERDRIVE
FAST
73
4 - 16
31
31 12
TRANSMISSION
15
37
55 R A
15
63
54 30 26
CREEPER
Fig.13-4
TRANSMISSION
General description
2-4 Driving torques and sealants
Driving torque
Sealant
157 Nm
Loctite 242
Play = 0,20 - 0,30mm
147 Nm 200 Nm Loctite 510 Pinion M.R. = 2,5 - 3 Nm 350 Nm
Fig.14-4
4 - 17
TRANSMISSION
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 18
TRANSMISSION
CHAP. 4
Main components
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Main components. ................................................................... 4-19

A - Engine-gearbox axle assembly .................................... 4-21
B - Gearbox ....................................................................... 4-33
C - Bevel gear pair and rear differential ............................. 4-39
D - Side final drives ............................................................ 4-49
4 - 19
TRANSMISSION
CHAP. 4
Main components
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Main components
A - Engine-gearbox axle assembly

A1 - Assembly drawing and main components ............. 4-22
A2 - Description of operation ........................................ 4-24
A3 - Assembly drawings of the options ......................... 4-26
A4 - Inspection and adjustment .................................... 4-32
4 - 21
TRANSMISSION
A - Engine-gearbox axle assembly

A1 - Drawing of assembly and main components
18
2 4 9
3 5 6 7 8
1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Fig.15-4
1 - Clutch 10 - Transmission shaft
2 - Transmission shaft 11 - Ball bearing
3 - Ball bearing 12 - Reverse shuttle transmission shaft gear
4 - Axle housing 13 - Creeper engaging sleeve
5 - Reverse shuttle gear 14 - Creeper transmission shaft gear
6 - Synchromesh unit 15 - Ball bearing
7 - Upper underdrive gear 16 - Ring nut
8 - Ball bearing 17 - Cover
9 - Main gearbox shaft 18 - Reversing gear
4 - 22
TRANSMISSION
Engine-gearbox axle assembly
18
2
9
6
7
15
16 10
17 11
12
13
14
Fig.16-4
4 - 23
TRANSMISSION
18
2 9
7 8
4
3 5 6
1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Fig.17-4
A2- Description of operation

Drive from the clutch reaches the group of optionals shaft of the gearbox (9).
via the shaft (2). When the speeds are reversed, the synchromesh
The reverse shuttle and creeper combination is sleeve (6) is moved towards the right to make gear
shown in the drawing. (5) enbloc with the shaft (2).
When the creeper is selected, the sleeve (13) is Drive is transmitted via the reverse gear (18) to the
moved towards the left and shaft drive (2) is tran- gear (12) keyed to the shaft (10) which is infinitely
smitted via gear (14) to the shaft (10) which is infini- meshed with gear (7) keyed to the main shaft of the
tely meshed with the gear (7) keyed to the main gearbox (9).
4 - 24
TRANSMISSION

ATLANTIS TRACTORS
The gearbox is available with various options. The

user can therefore choose the combination that ac-
tually meets his work requirements.
Each combination provides a gearbox with 24 forward
gears and 12 reverse gears.
Three control levers (Fig.18-4) carry out the following

functions:
A - Gearshift lever
B - Range control lever, to select slow, normal and
fast range
C - Control lever for reverse shuttle and options:
creeper Fig.18-4
GHIBLI TRACTORS
Speed and range selection are separately controlled

by two levers: gearshift lever (A) and range selector
lever (B). (Fig.19-4)
Gearshift lever (A - Fig.19-4)
The lever has four positions, corresponding to four

totally synchronized speeds.
Range selector lever (B - Fig.19-4)
The lever has three positions, corresponding to three

ranges: slow, normal, fast.
Each range is marked by a symbol on the lever knob.
Fig.19-4
Reverse shuttle and option selector lever (Fig.
19a - 4)
The lever can be shifted into two or three positions,

according to the speed required.
Each position corresponds to 12 different ground
speeds.
Each position is marked by a symbol on the gear-
shift lever knob.
A Forward speeds
N Neutral
R Reverse speeds
S Options
Fig.19a-4
4 - 25
TRANSMISSION

A3 - Option assembly drawings
A3-1 Reverse shuttle - creeper
S-R I
Fig.20-4
I S-R
REVERSE SHUTTLE CREEPER
Fig.21-4
4 - 26
TRANSMISSION

A3-2 Reverse shuttle - underdrive
MIC I
Fig.22-4
I MIC
REVERSE SHUTTLE UNDERDRIVE
Fig.23-4
4 - 27
TRANSMISSION

A3-3 Reverse shuttle - overdrive
MOL I
Fig.24-4
I MOL
REVERSE SHUTTLE OVERDRIVE
Fig.25-4
4 - 28
TRANSMISSION

A3-4 Creeper - underdrive
S-R MIC
Fig.26-4
MIC S-R
UNDERDRIVE CREEPER
Fig.27-4
4 - 29
TRANSMISSION

A3-5 Creeper - overdrive
S-R MOL
Fig.28-4
MOL S-R
OVERDRIVE CREEPER
Fig.29-4
4 - 30
TRANSMISSION

A3-6 Overdrive - underdrive
MOL MIC
Fig.30-4
MIC MOL
UNDERDRIVE OVERDRIVE
Fig.31-4
4 - 31
TRANSMISSION

A4 - Inspection and adjustment
INSPECTION
1 - Thoroughly clean all components and check them

visually;
2 - Replace the retention rings;
3 - Make sure that the retention bearings turn cor-

rectly and that the seals are in a good condition;
4 - Check the rolling tracks and the needle bearings

and replace any damaged components;
Fig.32-4
5 - Using a jet of compressed air, check the oil lu-
brication ducts and make sure there is no clog-
ging;
6 - Check the synchro-rings. The grooves on the

syntherized material should be clearly visible.
Otherwise, the rings should be replaced (Fig.33a/
33b-4);
7 - Replace any defective or worn components.
ADJUSTMENT
No adjustments are required when the unit is as-

sembled.
Fig.33a-4
Fig.33b-4
4 - 32
TRANSMISSION
CHAP. 4
Main components
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B - Gearbox
B1 - Assembly drawing and main components ....... 4-26

B2 - Description of operation .................................. 4-28
B3 - Inspection and adjustment ............................... 4-29
4 - 33
TRANSMISSION
B-Gearbox
B1 - Drawing of assembly and main components
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
21
32
20
33
36 50
34
49
35
48
37
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Fig.34-4
20 - Main shaft 36 - Ring nut

21 - Ball bearing 37 - Lower gear of 4th speed gear
22 - Upper gear of 4th speed gear 38 - Engaging sleeve of 4th and 3rd speed gears
23 - Upper gear of 3rd speed gear 39 - Lower gear of 3rd speed gear
24 - Upper gear of 2nd speed gear 40 - Lower gear of 2nd speed gear
25 - Upper gear of 1st speed gear 41 - Engaging sleeve of 2nd and 1st speed gear
26 - Gearbox housing 42 - Lower gear of 1st speed gear
27 - Ball bearing 43 - Slow and fast speed engaging sleeve
28 - Upper shaft gear 44 - Slow speed gear
29 - Ball bearing 45 - Reverse speed gear
30 - Normal speed engaging sleeve 46 - Ring nut
31 - Normal speed gear 47 - Normal speed gear
32 - Ball bearing 48 - Taper bearings to support pinion
33 - PTO shaft 49 - Bevel pinion
34 - Transmission shaft 50 - Bevel pinion adjuster shims
35 - Ball bearing
4 - 34
TRANSMISSION
Gearbox
31 32
30
28
29
27
25
24
23
34
22
21 42
41
20 40
39
38
37
35
36
50
47
46
49
48
45
43 44 Fig.35-4
4 - 35
TRANSMISSION
Gearbox
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
21
32
20
33
36 50
34
49
35
48
37
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Fig.36-4
B2 - Description of operation
Main shaft (20) drive reaches the four speed control
gears: (25) 1st, (24) 2nd, (23) 3rd, (22) 4th and de-
pending on the selected speed (lever A), sleeve (41)
engages for the 1st and 2nd or (38) for the 3rd and
4th.
Drive thus reaches the transmission shaft which is
infinitely meshed with gear (28) which allows drive
to reach the upper part.
The fast range is selected (lever B) if the sleeve is
moved towards the left, while the slow range is se-
lected if it is moved towards the right. The normal
range is selected if sleeve (30) is moved towards
the right. Fig.37-4
4 - 36
TRANSMISSION
Gearbox
B3 - Inspection and adjustment
INSPECTION
WARNING: Thoroughly clean the parts

before proceeding with the any of the
operations.
WARNING: Do not use solvents to clean

comply with the standards in force.
1 - Thoroughly clean and check all components;
2 - Replace the retention rings;

Fig.38-4
3 - Make sure that the retention bearings turn cor-
rectly and that the seals are in a good condition;
4 - Check the rolling tracks and the needle bearings

and replace any damaged components;
5 - Using a jet of compressed air, check the oil lu-

brication ducts and make sure there is no clog-
ging;
6 - Check the synchro-rings. The grooves on the

syntherized material should be clearly visible.
Otherwise, the rings should be replaced (Fig.40-
4);
7 - Replace any defective or worn components.
Fig.39-4
ADJUSTMENT
The only adjustment required when the gearbox is

remounted concerns the bevel pinion and is descri-
bed in the next section.
Fig.40-4
4 - 37
TRANSMISSION
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 38
TRANSMISSION
CHAP. 4
Main components
TABLE OF CONTENTS
C - Bevel gear pair and differential

C1 - Assembly drawing and main components .......... 4-40
C2 - Inspection and adjustments ................................ 4-42
C2-1 - Pinion position adjustment in
relation to the crown wheel ....................... 4-43
C2-2 - How to preload the supporting
bearings ................................................... 4-45
C2-3 - How to preload the differential bearings
and achieve the correct play between
the crown wheel-pinion teeth .................... 4-45
C2-4 - How to achieve the correct play between
the pinion teeth and crown wheel teeth .... 4-46
4 - 39
TRANSMISSION
C - Bevel gear pair and rear differential

C1 - Drawing of assembly and main components
60 59
62
49 46 26
57
63
61
56
55
47 48b 48a
50
58
52 53 54
Fig.41-4
26 - Gearbox housing 56 - Differential housing

46 - Nut 57 - Bevel ring gear
47 - Normal speed gear 58 - RH differential support
48a - Front pinion taper bearing 59 - Taper bearing
48b - Rear pinion taper bearing 60 - Adjuster shims
49 - Bevel pinion 61 - Planetary
50 - Adjuster shims 62 - Crown wheel
52 - LH differential support 63 - Planetary pin
53 - Taper bearing
54 - Adjuster shims
55 - Differential locking ring
4 - 40
TRANSMISSION
Bevel gear pair and rear differential
62
61
54
53 63
55 61
62
56
52
59
49 57
60
Fig.42-4
4 - 41
TRANSMISSION

C2 - Inspection and adjustments
Inspection Adjustments
WARNING: Do not use solvents to clean There are four adjustments to make to the bevel
the parts. Use cleaning products that gear pair in order to ensure optimum operating con-
comply with the standards in force. ditions:
1 - Clean and check all components; 1 - Adjustment of the position of the pinion in
relation to the crown wheel to ensure the two
2 - Replace all the retention rings and the bevel pi- components mesh perfectly; (1 Fig.43-4)
nion nut;
2 - Correct preload for the two taper bearings that
3 - Check the rolling tracks of all bearings and make support the pinion in order to obtain the exact
sure that the rolling action is not obstructed in moment of rotation; (2 Fig.43-4)
any way;
3 - Correct preload for the taper bearings that
4 - Using a jet of compressed air, check the oil lu- support the differential in order to obtain the
brication ducts and make sure there is no clog- exact moment of rotation; (3-4 Fig.43-4)
ging;
4 - Correct play between the pinion teeth and tho-
5 - Replace all worn or defective components. se of the crown wheel; (3-4 Fig.43-4)
4 Fig.43-4
4 - 42
TRANSMISSION
48a 49
sp C B
A
Fig.44-4
C2-1 ADJUSTMENT OF THE PINION POSITION

IN RELATION TO THE CROWN WHEEL where:
WARNING: Handle all parts with the ut- A is the distance between the surface on which
most care. Do not put your hands or fin- the rear taper bearing rests and the axis of the
gers between one part and the next. Wear crown wheel (Fig.44-4)
approved safety garments such as gog- This dimension is measured in the assembly line
gles, gloves and safety footwear. and is stamped on the differential housing
(Fig.45-4);
FOREWORD: this adjustment must be made whe-
never the rear taper bearing (2) or the bevel gear B this is the nominal dimension (102 mm.) that
pair or the differential are replaced during a ge- must be complied with in order to have the pi-
neral overhaul. nion perfectly centered on the crown wheel.
(Fig.44-4)
This dimension can be corrected by writing with
1 - The purpose of this adjustment is to determine the electric pen on the pinion end (Fig.46-4).
the value of shim Sh mounted between the outer These values should be added to or subtracted
bearing ring (48a) and relative stop point on the from the 102 mm nominal value, depending on
housing (Fig.44-4); whether the + or - sign precedes the value:
2 - It is calculated by means of the following ex- C distance between the bearing surface of the be-
pression: aring (48a) and the pinion head. This measure-
ment must be made with tool 01 CMB REX and
SP = A - ( B + C ) a depth gauge after the pinion has been set in
the position shown in Fig.47-4. Before measu-
ring dimension C, preload the bearings by tighte-
ning nut (46) so that the pinion (49) has a rota-
tion torque of 0.25 - 0.30 Kgm.
4 - 43
TRANSMISSION

Example:
If + 0.15 is written on the end of the pinion, dimen-

sion B will be 102 + 0.15 = 102.15 mm
If - 0.10 is written on the end of the pinion, dimen- 166,85

sion B will be 102 - 0.10 = 101.9 mm
Example 1
a - If 166.85 mm is stamped on the housing
b - If + 0.15 is written on the end of the pinion
c - If the measured C dimension is 63.5 mm Fig.45-4
Shim SP will be :
SP = 166.85 - (102.15 + 63.5) = 1.2 mm
Example 2
a - If 166.55 mm is stamped on the housing
b - If - 0.10 is written on the end of the pinion

01 CMB Rex
c - If the measured C dimension is 63.35 mm
Shim SP will be:

49
SP = 166.55 - (101.9 + 63.35) = 1.3 mm
C
46
Fig.46-4 Fig.47-4
4 - 44
TRANSMISSION

C2-2 HOW TO CORRECTLY PRELOAD
THE TWO TAPER BEARINGS
THAT SUPPORT THE PINION
1 - Fit the bevel pinion back in the differential hou-

sing;
2 - Tighten the nut until a 2.5-3 Nm moment of rota-

tion is obtained. This should be checked with
the special wrench (Fig.48-4). Using a plastic
mallet, bed the pinion on the two bearings and
then check again, varying the extent to which
the nut is torqued until the required moment of
rotation has been obtained;
Fig.48-4
3 - Clinch the outer edge of the nut near the two
cavities made on the pinion.
C2-3 HOW TO CORRECTLY PRELOAD

THE TWO TAPER BEARINGS THAT
SUPPORT THE DIFFERENTIAL
1 - Mount the bevel ring gear on the complete diffe-

01 DIF MYT
rential assembly, tightening the screws to a 140
Nm torque and applying Loctite 243 to them;
2 - Mount the two dummy bearings (Tool 01 DIF

MYT) on the differential housing without inser-
ting any shim between them and the differential
housing itself. Now fit the entire assembly, in-
cluding the ring gear, into the differential hou- Fig.49-4
sing (Fig.49-4);
3 - Adequately fix the two supports and consider that

from this moment onwards, the two supports
must not be exchanged with each other;
4 - Using a lever, move the differential assembly

fully against the support (B) and measure the
distance between the dummy bearing and the
stop point of the bearing on the differential hou-
sing (X Fig.50-4) with a thickness gauge.
Measure a couple of times, making sure that the
differential assembly is fully against the dummy
bearing on the support (B).
Fig.50-4
4 - 45
TRANSMISSION

The dimension measured corresponds to the total
value of the shims that must be inserted to eliminate
the float (X = X1 + X2). However, to correctly preload
the two taper bearings in order to obtain the exact
moment of rotation, 0.1mm must be added to the
measured value: thus the total value of the shims
will be: X + 0.1.
These shims must then be distributed between flan- min
0,20
ge A and flange B to achieve the correct play betwe-
en the teeth of the pinion and those of the ring gear. ax
0,30m
C2-4 HOW TO OBTAIN THE CORRECT

PLAY BETWEEN THE PINION TEETH
AND RING GEAR TEETH Fig.51-4
1- Keep the differential assembly fully shifted on
support B and apply a comparator perpendicu-
larly on the center line of one flank of a ring gear
tooth (Fig.53-4).
2 - Delicately move the differential assembly axial-

ly towards the support (A) while measuring the
variation in play between the pinion teeth and
those of the ring gear. When the rotational play
between the pinion and ring gear teeth is betwe-
en 0.20 and 0.30 mm, stop the axial movement
and measure its entity by inserting the thickness
gauge between support A and the relative dum-
my bearing (X1);
3 - Since maximum float X and that of movement

X1 are now known, the value of X2 can be easily
found: Fig.52-4
X2 = X - X1 Obviously, the same procedure and the same cal-

culation must be applied for the X2 value.
4 - The values of X1 and X2 would correspond to
the effective values of shims Sh1 and Sh2 if the Example:
thickness of the dummy bearings was the same If the measured value X is 3.5 mm, X = 3.5+0.1 =
as that of the taper bearings to be subsequently 3.6 mm is obtained by adding a 0.1 mm preload;
mounted. It is therefore necessary to check for
differences by using a depth gauge to measure If the measured value X1 is 1.6 mm, X2 will be:
the difference in thickness between the dummy X2 = X - X1 = 3.5 -1.6 = 1.9 mm;
bearing and the true bearing to be mounted
(Fig.52-4). This difference must then be added If Z1 is 21,1 and V1 is 21, Sh1 will be:
or subtracted from the values of X1 and X2: 21.1 - 21 = 0.1
Sh1 = 1.6 + 0.1 = 1.7 mm
Z1 - V1 = Difference to add to X1 if positive and
to subtract from X1 if negative, in order to obtain If Z2 is 20 and V2 is 20.1, Sh2 will be:
Sh1 21 - 21.1 = -0.1
Sh2 = 1.9 - 0.1 = 1.8 mm
4 - 46
TRANSMISSION

5 - Proceed by definitively assembling the entire dif-
ferential unit, inserting the calculated shims, ti-
ghtening the screws of the supports to a 75 Nm
torque and using Loctite 243 on the screws. Af-
ter assembly, check again to make sure that the
play between the pinion/ring gear teeth is betwe-
en 0.20-0.30 mm, with a maximum tolerated va-
riation of 0.1 mm (Fig.53-4) and that the mo-
ment of rotation of the pinion-ring gear assem-
bly measured on the pinion nut is between 2.8
and 3.5 Nm. Repeat all the previously descri-
bed operations if differences are found.
Fig.53-4
4 - 47
TRANSMISSION
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 48
TRANSMISSION
CHAP. 4
Main components
TABLE OF CONTENTS
D - Side final drives

D1 - Assembly drawing and main components ........... 4-50
D2 - Inspection and adjustments ................................. 4-54
D3 - Driving torques and sealants ............................... 4-48
4 - 49
TRANSMISSION
Side final drives

D1 - Drawing of assembly and main components
6 5 4 3 2 1
16
7
8 15
14
9 13
9
10
12
11
1 - Axle shaft 9 - Tapered roller bearing

2 - Retainer ring 10 - Final drive cover
3 - Shims 11 - Cover fixing screws
4 - Tapered roller bearing 12 - Driven gear
5 - Drive gear 13 - Shims
6 - Spacer 14 - Washer
7 - Hub for wheel final drive 15 - Snap ring
8 - Retainer ring 16 - Spacer Fig.54-4
4 - 50
TRANSMISSION
Side final drives
15
16
9
8
6
12
13
9
8
10
11
7
Fig.55-4
Category Toothing type Tractors
1 Straight teeth Atlantis 70 - 75

2 Helical teeth Atlantis 80 - 85 - 90
Ghibli 80 - 90
4 - 51
TRANSMISSION
Side final drives

Reinforced final drive
19 18 20 17
21
25
25
31
24
29
23
23 28 26
17 - Axle shaft 25 - Tapered roller bearing

18 - Retainer ring 26 - Final drive cover
19 - Shims 27 - Cover fixing screws
20 - Tapered roller bearing 28 - Driven gear
21 - Drive gear 29 - Shims
22 - Spacer 30 - Washer
23 - Hub for wheel final drive 31 - Rear cover
Fig.56-4
24 - Retainer ring 32 - Spacer
4 - 52
TRANSMISSION
Side final drives
19
18
31
18
29
27 26
29
22
25
24
23
30
25
32
28
Fig.57-4
Category Toothing type Tractors
Reinforced Helical teeth Atlantis 100

Ghibli 100
4 - 53
TRANSMISSION
Side final drives

D2 - Ispezione e registrazioni
INSPECTION 2 - PRELOAD OF CROWN WHEEL HUB BEARINGS
WARNING: Do not use solvents to clean The pack of shims S2 to be installed on the tapered
the parts. Use cleaning products that roller bearings supporting the crown wheel hub can
comply with the standards in force. be easily calculated by the following formula:
1 - Clean and visually check all parts. S2 = (A2 - B2) + P

2 - Replace any defective or worn out parts.
Where:
ADJUSTMENTS S2 - Required shim
A2 - Measure to be taken by a depth gauge
Tractors series Atlantis 70-75-80-85-90 B2 - Measure to be taken by the tool R502
Ghibli 80-90 P - Value of the preload to be given to the tapered
roller bearings (0.10)
Final drives mounted on Atlantis/Ghibli tractors
need two adjustments:
1 - preload of axle shaft bearings

2 - preload of crown wheel hub bearings
1 - PRELOAD OF AXLE SHAFT BEARINGS

gers between one part and another. Always
use protective garments, e.g. goggles, glo-
ves, safety shoes.
The pack of shims S1 to be installed on the tapered

roller bearings supporting the longer axle shaft can
be easily calculated by the following formula:
S1 = (A1 - B1) + P
Where:
S1 - Required shim
A1 - Measure to be taken by a depth gauge
B1 - Measure to be taken by the tool R502
P - Value of the preload to be given to the tapered
roller bearings (0.10)
4 - 54
TRANSMISSION
Side final drives
B1 A1
S1
S2
B2 A2
Fig.58-4
4 - 55
TRANSMISSION
Side final drives
19 20 17
C
25
29
23 28
17 - Axle shaft
19 - Shims to adjust preload of axle shaft bearings
23 - Crown wheel hub
29 - Shims to adjust preload of crown wheel bearings
C - End float of axle shaft
Fig.59-4
D - End float of crown wheel hub
4 - 56
TRANSMISSION
Side final drives

Tractors series Atlantis/Ghibli 100
3 - As the preload P is required to give the correct
The final drives mounted on tractors of the series rotation moment to the axle shaft (19) and the
Atlantis/Ghibli 100 need three adjustments: hub (2), corresponding to an axial preload of 0,2
mm, the thickness of the shims to be installed is
1 - CALCULATION OF THE SHIMS (19) NEEDED given by the following formulas:
TO PRELOAD THE AXLE SHAFT BEARINGS Axle shaft shims
(17) Sh (19) = (x) - (C + 0.2) = 2.9 - (0.50 + 0.2) = 2.2
mm
2 - CALCULATION OF THE SHIMS (29) NEEDED Crown wheel shim
TO PRELOAD THE CROWN WHEEL Sh (29) = (y) - (D + 0.2) = 3.1 - (0.65 + 0.2) =
BEARINGS 2.25 mm
3 - CALCULATION OF THE SHIM (Z) TO TAKE The values so obtained must then be rounded to
UP THE END FLOAT OF THE CROWN WHEEL the lower tenth.
HUB (23)
All the above mentioned adjustmente must be carried

out only after mounting the rear cover (31).
3 - CALCULATION OF THE SHIM (Z) NEEDED TO
TAKE UP THE END FLOAT OF THE CROWN
WHEEL HUB (23)
1 - CALCULATION OF THE SHIMS (19) NEEDED
TO PRELOAD THE AXLE SHAFT BEARINGS To calculate these shims, the measure Z between
(17) bearing (25) and wheel hub must be taken. The actual
shim thickness is obtained by rounding the read value
2 - CALCULATION OF THE SHIMS (29) NEEDED to the lower 5 tenths.
TO PRELOAD THE CROWN WHEEL
BEARINGS
The shim thickness (19) and (29) can be calculated

in both cases by an identical procedure:
1 - Add a shim of about 1 mm to obtain an end float.

The two shim packs thus established are (x) and
(y).
Example:
Axle shaft shim pack
X = 1.9 + 1 = 2.9 mm
Crow wheel shim pack
Y = 2.1 + 1 = 3.1 mm
2 - Read the end float C of the axle shaft (1) by a

centesimal dial gauge with magnetic base to
calculate the shims (19) or the end float D of the
crown wheel to calculate the shims (29).
Example:
End float read on axle shaft
C = 0.50
End float read on crown wheel hub
D = 0.65
4 - 57
TRANSMISSION
Side final drives

D3 - Driving torques and sealants
115 Nm
Driving torque
Loctite 275 Type of sealants
Fig.60-4
4 - 58
TRANSMISSION
Side final drives

D3 - Driving torques and sealants
80÷90Nm
510
Driving torque
Type of sealants
Fig.61-4
4 - 59
TRANSMISSION
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
4 - 60
TRANSMISSION
CHAP. 4
Special tools
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4 - 61
TRANSMISSION
Attrezzi speciali
01 CMB REX
"C" dimension gauge
01 DIF MYT
Dummy bearings
R502
Plate to adjust side final drive bearings
4 - 62
4 WD FRONT AXLE
CHAP. 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Precautions and safety warnings. .......................................................5-2
Sect. 1 General description................................................................... 5-3

1-1 Assembly drawing and main components ..................... 5-4
1-2 Types of axle ................................................................. 5-5
1-3 Mechanical 4 WD engagement...................................... 5-6
1-4 Spring-on type 4 WD engagement ................................ 5-8
Sect. 2 Technical specifications. ..................................................... 5-11

2-1 Main technical specifications .................................... 5-12
2-2 Driving torques and sealants .................................... 5-13
Sect. 3 Inspections and adjustments. ................................................ 5-15

3-1 Inspections .................................................................. 5-16
3-2 A-B-C-D-E-F Cat. front axle adjustments ..................... 5-17
3-3 HC (high clearance) front axle adjustments................. 5-23
5-1
4 WD FRONT AXLE

Certain precautions and safety recommendations are
described in this section. It is important for opera- WARNING: when using adhesive or de-
tors to comply with these instructions in order to tergent products, follow the istructions of
prevent accidents. Moreover, always bear in mind their manufacturers.
the safety measures described in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual and in chapter 1 of this ma- WARNING: the side final drive assembly
nual. is very heavy and difficult to handle. Take
Carefully comply with the Warnings indicated by me- all the necessary precautions when de-
ans of this symbol: mounting and remounting this part.
WARNING: if the bolts that fix the safety WARNING: if you remove the bolts from
frame or cab are loosened or if the actual parts that are liable to drop, always leave
safety frame or cab are removed, make two opposed bolts in place for safety rea-
sure that the parts are re-installed correctly sons. Only remove these bolts after you
so that adequate protection is provided for have hooked the assembly to a lifting me-
the operator. ans or after you have positioned bearing
blocks underneath the actual part itself.
keep a due distance away from the danger
zone. Avoid vibrations when bolts are loo-
sened.


cables or chains.

HANDS.

WARNING: used oil must be collected and

disposed of in compliance with the correct
anti-pollution laws.
WARNING: the differential assembly is

very heavy and difficult to handle. Take all
the necessary precautions when demoun-
ting and remounting this part.
5-2
4 WD FRONT AXLE
CHAP.5
General description
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 1 General description.

1-1 Assembly drawing and main components ..................... 5-4
1-2 Types of axle ................................................................. 5-5
1-3 Mechanical 4 WD engagement...................................... 5-6
1-4 Spring-on type 4 WD engagement ................................ 5-8
5-3
ASSALE ANTERIORE DT
Sez. 1 - Descrizione generale

1-1 Disegno complessivo
14
41
44 43 45 42 34 7 8 9 13 1 15 16 17
12
6 18
33 5 19
2 3 4 21
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
35 32
36
39 10 11 29 31 30
37
38
46 40 Fig.1-5
5-4
4 WD FRONT AXLE
General description
Main components
1 - Tapered plug 24 - Differential gear
2 - Retention ring 25 - Plate
3 - Spacer ring 26 - Outer circlip
4 - Axle shaft guard 27 - Spacer
5 - Retention ring for steering pin 28 - Circlip for pins
6 - Bevel roller bearing 29 - Tapered plug
7 - Adjuster shims 30 - Retainer ring for bull gear
8 - Steering angle pin 31 - Flange
9 - Upper cover 32 - Flange collar
10 - Lower cover 33 - Axle body
11 - Cover fixing screw 34 - Axle brake housing
12 - Nipple 35 - Bevel crown wheel and pinion
13 - Rh fork, complete 36 - Bearing
14 - Lh fork, complete 37 - Adjuster shims
15 - Boxed retention ring 38 - Bearing
16 - Bevel roller bearing 39 - O-ring
17 - Standard hub 40 - Collar
18 - Differential spider cover 41 - Screw
19 - Bull gear 42 - Brake piston
20 - Swivel ring for differential pinion 43 - Brake disc
21 - Differential pinion 44 - Counterdisc
22 - Roll 45 - Floating plate
23 - Pinion stud 46 - O-ring
1-2 Types of axle

On Atlas and Ghibli tractors the following types of axle are mounted:
AXLE CAT. TRACTOR
A Atlantis 80/85/90 Ghibli 80/90 (with brakes)

B Atlantis 70/75 (with brakes)
C Atlantis 100 Ghibli100 (with brakes)
D Atlantis 70/75 (without brakes)

E Atlantis 80/850/90 Ghibli 80/90 (without brakes)
F Atlantis /Ghibli 100 (without brakes)
DANA H.C. tractors
5-5
4 WD FRONT AXLE
General description
1-3 Mechanical 4 WD engagement
56 55 54
47 48 49 50 51 52 53
47 - Output drive shaft

48 - Retention ring
49 - Washer
50 - Driven gear
51 - Shift collar
52 - O-ring
53 - Cover
54 - Spring pin
55 - Bevel pinion
56 - Idler gear
Fig.2-5
5-6
4 WD FRONT AXLE
General description
Operation
When the lever (A) at the left of the driver’s place is
shifted forwards, moves the shift collar (51). In this
way the drive from the bevel pinion (55) can reach
the gear (50) through gear (56). The gear (50),
through the collar (51), drives the shaft (47) con-
nected to the front axle.
Fig.3-5
4 WD engaged - lever forwards
4 WD disengaged - lever backwards
5-7
4 WD FRONT AXLE
General description
1-4 "Spring-on" 4WD engagement
Fig.4-5
62 61 60
57 58 59
Fig.5-5
5-8
4 WD FRONT AXLE
General description
Description of the operating mode
63
“Spring-on” provides mechanical engagement of
four-wheel drive, whereas the disengagement is
hydraulically controlled by means of button (63).
When the tractor is at a standstill, 4WD is always
engaged, thus assuring safe braking.
When the tractor is at work, 4WD can be engaged
or disengaged by means of the button (63).
The 4WD is disengaged by oil flowing into the
chamber (x) at a pressure of 18 bar, thus displacing
the piston (57), the rod (59) and the shift collar (60),
and compressing the spring (58 Fig.5-5)
The collar (60) shifts and disconnects the drive
transmitted by the gear (61) to the shaft (62).
Fig.6-5
5-9
4 WD FRONT AXLE
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5-10
4 WD FRONT AXLE
CHAP.5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 2 Technical specifications
2-1 Main technical specifications ....................................... 5-12

5-11
4 WD FRONT AXLE

ATLANTIS TRACTORS
Make Landini
Axle type In spheroidal cast iron, swinging with central pivot

around two bearings
Type of reductions Central bevel gear pair 9/41 (Mod. 70-75)

8/31 (Mod. 80-85-90-100)
Clutch control Mechanic
Front to rear axle ratio No data available

Rapporto tra assale ant. e post.
Brakes
N. of brake discs 2 each side, all models
GHIBLI TRACTORS
Make Landini
Axle type In spheroidal cast iron, swinging with central pivot

around two bearings
Type of reductions Central bevel gear pair 8/31 (Mod. 80-90-100)
Clutch control Electro-hydraulic
Front to rear axle ratio 1.381 (Mod. 80-90)

1.384 (Mod. 100)
N. of brake discs 2 each side, all models
5-12
4 WD FRONT AXLE
23 ÷ 25 Nm 80 ÷ 85 Nm 23÷25 Nm
Loctite 243 Loctite 270 Loctite 243
70 ÷ 86 Nm 6 Nm 70 ÷ 86 Nm
Loctite 243 Loctite 510 Loctite 243 Loctite 510 Loctite 243
- Driving torque
- Sealant
Fig.7-5
5-13
4 WD FRONT AXLE
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
5-14
4 WD FRONT AXLE
CHAP.5
Inspections and adjustments
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 3 Inspections and adjustments
3-1 Inspections .................................................................. 5-16

3-2 A-B-C-D-E-F Cat. front axle adjustments ..................... 5-17
3-3 HC (high clearance) front axle adjustments................. 5-23
5-15
4 WD FRONT AXLE
Sect.3 - Inspections and adjustments

3-1 Inspection
WARNING: Do not use solvents to clean
comply with the standards in force.
1 - Clean and inspect visually all components.
2 - Replace all retention rings and the collar of the

bevel pinion.
3 - Check the races in all bearings.
4 - Check for dents or wear signs on all gears, on

pinion and ring bevel gear. Replace the part if
required.
5 - Blow all oil channels with compressed air to check

for obstructions.
6 - Replace any faulty or worn parts.
5-16
4 WD FRONT AXLE

3-2 A-B-C-D-E-F Cat. front axle
adjustments
Z
The “axle” assembly has to be adjusted as follows: 05 DT MYT
1 - Position of the bevel pinion on the ring gear

2 - Preload of the support bearings of the bevel
pinion
3 - Adjustment of play between the pinion teeth
and preload of the differential bearings.
4 - Adjustment of play between brake discs and
thrust plate
5 - Preload of the bevel bearings for fork
1 - POSITION OF THE BEVEL W

PINION ON THE RING GEAR
gers between one part and another. Always
use protective garments, e.g. goggles, glo-
ves, safety shoes.
To calculate the shim (B), that centers the pinion on

the crown wheel, the distance (dimension R Fig.10-5)
between the crown wheel centre and the resting plane
of the bevel gear is to be measured (Fig. 10-5) . It is
easier to measure dimensions (R1) by means of the
special tool 05 DT MYT, made up of two dummy bear-
ings (W) and a pin (Z Fig.8-5).
Measure dimension (R1 Fig.9-5) after mounting the Fig. 8-5
tool.
R1 Z
Fig.9-5
5-17
4 WD FRONT AXLE

Calculate a shim pack (B) by means of the following
formula:
Sp (B) = R1 - (R ± S)
where:
R= rated dimension:
118 mm
R1 = dimension measured with tool 05 DT MYT
S= real tolerance of dimension “R”

(value stamped on the pinion)
Sp
D B
Fig.10-5
5-18
4 WD FRONT AXLE

2 - PRELOAD OF THE SUPPORT BEARINGS OF
THE BEVEL PINION
Mount the pinion on the housing together with bear- After the adjustment, upset the ring nut lip over two
ings (E) and (D), retention ring (F) and ring nut (G). opposite teeth.
Tighten the ring nut (G) until a rotation moment be-
tween 0.20 ÷ 0.25 Kgm is reached.
Fig.11-5
5-19
4 WD FRONT AXLE

3 - ADJUSTMENT OF PLAY BETWEEN THE PI- By means of the ring nut (I), take up the axial play
NION TEETH AND PRELOAD OF THE DIFFE- between inner and outer rings of the bearings (L).
RENTIAL BEARINGS Turn the ring nut further until a total rotation is ob-
tained that, measured on the bevel pinion, is be-
Turn the ring nut (H) in order to obtain the required tween 0.32 ÷ 0.35 Kgm, also taking into account the
play (0.20 ÷ 0.30 mm) between the pinion-crown retainer ring resistance. Make 1+1 caulkings in op-
wheel teeth. The play should be measured in 4 points posite positions to lock the nuts.
staggered by 90°.
H I
Fig.12-5
5-20
4 WD FRONT AXLE

4 - Adjustment of play between
brake discs and thrust plate ADJUSTMENT
The oil-cooled front brakes provided on a few Atlas To obtain a play between the brake discs and the
and Ghibli 4WD models ensure integral IBS brak- thrust plate, the following adjustment must be car-
ing on all four wheels with control valve. This latter ried out:
ensures braking on the rear wheels only, when - Mount the pins completely on the thrust plate.
the brake pedals are not latched together during work - Mount the brake disc pack completely.
on field or when turning in a tight space, or braking - Use a press to bring the brake assembly to a halt.
on all 4 wheels when pedals are latched (transport - Tighten the 3 screws (64) with a 7 Nm torque.
or towing on road). - Loosen the 3 screws (64) to obtain a play between
0.3÷0.35 mm (play between discs and thrust pla-
te).
64
Fig.13-5
5-21
4 WD FRONT AXLE

5 - PRELOAD OF THE BEVEL BEARINGS (N) FOR
FORK
Apply such a force “M” to put inner and outer rings

of the bottom bearing into contact.
- Measure dimensions “x” and “y”
- Calculate a shim pack Sp (O) by means of the
following formula:
Sp (O) = x - y + (0.1 mm)
O
x
y
M
Fig.14-5
5-22
4 WD FRONT AXLE

3-3 Adjustment of the front axle
H.C. (High Clearance)
The axle requires the following adjustments: example: Sp = shim pack
1 - Position of the bevel pinion on the ring gear
2 - Preload of the support bearings of the bevel pi- c = real distance between the axis of the ring bevel
nion gear (C) bearings and the end of the fronte bea-
3 - Adjustment of play between the pinion teeth and ring (D) of the bevel pinion.
preload of the differential bearings.
4 - Preload of the bevel bearings for fork pins e = real thickness of the front bearing (D) of the
bevel pinion.
1 - Position of the bevel pinion d = rated dimension: 99 mm

on the ring gear
Calculate a shim pack (B) by means of the following r = real machined tolerance of dimension “d” (va-
formula: lue stamped on the pinion)
Sp (B) = c - e - (d + r)
E D C
Sp e d
c
Fig.15-5
5-23
4 WD FRONT AXLE

2 - PRELOAD OF THE SUPPORT BEARINGS OF
THE BEVEL PINION
Calculate a shim pack by means of the following Lock the ring nut (F) at 360 + 400 Nm. The pinion
formula: rolling torque must be 2.1- 3.6 Nm including the re-
sistance offered by seal (M).
Sp l = g - f
After the adjustment, upset the ring nut lip over two
g = Difference between outer and inner ring of bea-
opposite teeth.
ring (E)
f = Difference between support surface of bearing

(E) and spacer (H)
g
f P
spl
F
g
Spn
M H
Fig.16-5
5-24
4 WD FRONT AXLE

3 - ADJUSTMENT OF PLAY BETWEEN THE PI-
NION TEETH AND PRELOAD OF THE DIFFE-
RENTIAL BEARINGS (Fig. 16/17-5)
Calculate a shim pack (Spn) suitable to obtain a

play of 0.18 - 0.23 mm between the teeth of pinion
and crown wheel. Turn the nut (P) to take up all
float. Turn the ring nut (P) further until the third in-
ter-tooth space corresponds to the safety plate (about
60° rotation).
Fig.17-5
5-25
4 WD FRONT AXLE

4 - PRELOAD OF THE BEVEL BEARINGS FOR
FORK (R)
Apply such a force “F” to put inner and outer rings of

the bottom bearing into contact.
- Measure dimensions “x” and “y”
- Calculate a shim pack sp (T) by means of the
following formula:
Sp (T) = x - y + (0.20 mm)
X
y
Fig 18-5
5-26
4 WD FRONT AXLE
CHAP.5
Special tools
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 4 Special tools. .................................................................................... 5-26
5-27
4 WD FRONT AXLE
Special tools
01 DT 60
Key for side final drive ring nut (Dana axle)
01 DT MYT
Key for side final drive ring nut (Landini axle)
03 DT MYT
Key for differential bearing ring nut
05 DT MYT
Dummy bearings with bevel gear adjustment shaft
5-28
4 WD FRONT AXLE
Special tools
05 DT LG
Extractor for fork pivot pin
03 DT REX
"Spring-on" spring compressor.
04 DT MYT
Differential lock spring compressor.
5-29
POWER TAKE-OFF
CHAP.6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Precautions and safety warnings. ....................................................... 6-2
Sect.1 General description. ................................................................ 6-3

1-1 Assembly drawing and main components
(Atlantis 70-75-80-85-90-100) ....................................... 6-4
(Ghibli 80-90-100) ......................................................... 6-6
1-3 Operation....................................................................... 6-7
1-4 Control type ................................................................... 6-8
1-5 Sensor adjustment....................................................... 6-10
Sect.2 Technical specifications. ........................................................ 6-11

6-1
POWER TAKE-OFF

described in this section. It is important for operators
to comply with these instructions in order to prevent
accidents. Moreover, always bear in mind the safety
measures described in the Operation and Maintenan-
ce Manual and in chapter 1 of this manual.
ans of this symbol:
WARNING: take care of the sharp edges

around the top of the gearbox housing.
WARNING: make sure that all persons keep

a due distance away from the danger zone.
Avoid vibrations when bolts are loosened.

and hooks. Make sure that there are no by-
standers near the load as it is lifted.
WARNING: avoid twisting the chains or me-

tal ropes used for lifting purposes. Always
wear safety gloves when handling cables or
chains.
WARNING: use the right tools to align holes.

NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS.


6-2
POWER TAKE-OFF
CHAP. 6
General description
TABLE OF CONTENTS

(Atlantis 70-75-80-85-90-100) .....................................6-4
(Ghibli 80-90-100) ........................................................6-6
1-3 Operation ......................................................................6-7
1-4 Control type..................................................................6-8
1-5 Sensor adjustment .................................................... 6-10
6-3
POWER TAKE-OFF

1-1 Assembly drawing and main components (Atlantis70-75-80-85-90-100)
1 2 3 4 5
7 11 12
10
8 9
Fig.1-6
1 - PTO upper shaft 7- Ring nut
2 - Ball bearing 8- 540 RPM gear
3 - Double gear, 540/540E or 540/1000 9- 540E or 1000 RPM gear
4 - Ball bearing 10 - Ball bearing
5 - Cover 11 - Cover
6 - Engaging sleeve 12 - PTO output shaft
6-4
POWER TAKE-OFF
General description
6
1
8
11
9
10
12
Fig.2-6
6-5
POWER TAKE-OFF
General description
1-2 Assembly drawing and main components (Ghibli 80-90-100)
27 6 13 14 15 16 17
18
28 29
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Fig.3-6
13 - PTO upper shaft 22 - Engaging sleeve

14 - Upper 540 RPM gear 23 - Central hub
15 - Upper 540E or 1000 RPM gear 24 - Lower 540/540E or 540/1000 gear
16 - Ball bearing 25 - Lower PTO shaft
17 - Cover 26 - Interchangeable end
18 - Retainer nut for interchangeable ends 27 - Gear for PTO proportional speed
19 - Ring nut 28 - Gear
20 - Ball bearing 29 - Bevel pinion
21 - Upper 540 RPM gear
6-6
POWER TAKE-OFF
General description
A B
Fig.4-6
1-3 Operation (Fig. 3/4-6)

The sleeve (6) allows the speed of the independent
PTO to be selected when moved towards the right
and the speed proportional to the wheel revolutions
when moved towards the left. In these conditions,
drive reaches gear (27) from gear (28) keyed to the
bevel pinion (29).
The sleeve (22) or the double gear (3 Fig.1-6) select
the 540 RPM speed when moved towards the left
and the 540E or1000 RPM speed when moved towar-
ds the right. The lever (A Fig.4-6) disengages the
clutch by means of a hydrostatic control activated
by the control valve (B).
6-7
POWER TAKE-OFF
General description
1-4 Control type
A - Mechanical cluth
Engaging lever for PTO mechanical clutch.(35 Fig.5- 36

6)
Lever down - engaged
35
Lever up - disengaged
Fig.5-6
PTO speed selector lever (Fig.6-6) PTO engaging lever (36 Fig.5-6)
To switch from the 540 RPM speed to the 1000 RPM

speed (or 540E RPM) and vice versa, use the speed Independent PTO engaged -
selector lever (39, Fig.4-6) which can assume two Lever (36) backwards.
positions:
• forwards (1) = 540 RPM PTO

PTO in neutral position -
• backwards (2) = 1000 RPM PTO or 540E RPM Lever (36) in central position.
PTO
The PTO must be disengaged to change the

speed. Proportional PTO engaged -
Lever (36) forwards.
Economy power take-off
A PTO speed of 540 RPM can be achieved (for

implements that do not require maximum power
such as fertilizer spreaders, sprayers, etc.) by
using the PTO at 540E RPM and decelerating to
1390 RPM.
The PTO economy mode has a number of advan-
tages including a reduction in fuel consumption,
noise and vibrations.
39
Fig.6-6
6-8
POWER TAKE-OFF
General description
B - Hydraulic PTO clutch
Forwards = PTO engaged
Backwards = PTO disengaged
Pull the lever to the hitch point to disengage the PTO

clutch. To engage the clutch, release the lever pu- 41
shing on the control (40 Fig. 7-6) on the lever.
40
Symbols on the decal placed beside the control le-
ver (43 Fig. 8-6):
Fig.7-6
Fig.7-7
Independent PTO engaged
PTO in neutral position
Proportional PTO engaged
To switch from the 540 RPM speed to the 1000 RPM 43

speed (or 540E RPM) and vice versa, use the speed 42
selector lever (42, Fig.8-6) which can assume two
positions:
- Tortoise = 540 RPM PTO
- Hare = 1000 RPM or 540E RPM PTO
Fig.8-6
6-9
POWER TAKE-OFF
General description
1.5 PTO RPM rate sensor adjustment
44
WARNING: Always disengage the PTO when
you get off the tractor.
The inductive type sensor (44) indicated in Fig.9/10/

11/12-6 has an internal cylinder in magnetic material
wound up in a coil.
By placing the sensor in front of the teeth of a rotating
gear, an alternate (induction) voltage is created on the
outer winding of the sensor.
The magnetic field of the barrel envelopes the teeth of
the gear and its continuity is influenced by the rotation
of this latter.
By the frequency of the voltage thus obtained the ro-
tational speed rate can be calculated- Fig.9-6
Adjustment:
44
- Screw the sensor down until it touches the PTO gear.
- Loosen it by approximately 1/2 turn.
- Tighten the jam nut to fix the adjustment.
Inductive sensor inspection:

By means of a tester, measure the resistance value
in the sensor. Such value should be about 450 ohm.
Fig.10-6
44
44
Fig.11-6 Fig.12-6
6 - 10
POWER TAKE-OFF
CHAP. 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6 - 11
POWER TAKE-OFF

Type Independent
Type of clutch Mechanical with two speeds

540/540E or 540/1000 RPM
PTO output shaft 13/8 in compliance with Asae standard

PTO speed 540 RPM at 1944 RPM engine rate

(for Atlantis tractors) 540E RPM at 1392 RPM engine rate
1000 RPM at 1916 RPM engine rate
PTO speed 540 RPM at 1944 RPM engine rate

(for Ghibli tractors) 540E RPM at 1932 RPM engine rate
(for Ghibli 80-90)
540E RPM at 1376 RPM engine rate
(for Ghibli 100)
(for Ghibli 80-90)
(for Ghibli 100)
RPM with PTO at proportional

speed (PTO shaft RPM / rear wheel) 9.185 PTO RPM at 540 {
12.822 PTO RPM at 540E Atlantis 70-75
17.522 PTO RPM at 1000
9.914 PTO RPM at 540 {

13.839 PTO RPM at 540E Atlantis 80-90
18.620 PTO RPM at 1000 Ghibli 80-90
10.625 PTO RPM at 540 {

14.479 PTO RPM at 540E Atlantis 100
19.264 PTO RPM at 1000 Ghibli 100
6 - 12
LOW PRESSURE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
CHAP.7
Low pressure hydraulic circuit

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Sect.1 General description. .................................................................7-3
1-1 Low pressure hydraulic circuit - Atlantis tractors...........7-4
1-2 Description of the low pressure hydraulic circuit -
Atlantis tractors ................................................................ 7-5
1-3 Low pressure hydraulic circuit - Ghibli tractors ................ 7-6
Ghibli tractors .................................................................. 7-7
Sect.2 Technical specifications............................................................ 7-9

2-1 Main technical specifications .......................................... 7-10
Sect.3 Main components. ................................................................. 7-11

A) Hydraulic pump .............................................................. 7-12
B) Power steering system .................................................. 7-15
C) Power clutch control valve ............................................ 7-29
D) Differential lock oil supply .............................................. 7-53
E) PTO power clutch cylinder supply ................................ 7-59
F) 4WD engagement supply (Spring-on) .......................... 7-63
Sect.4 Checking the operating pressure values. .............................. 7-67

4-1 Low pressure hydraulic circuit - Atlantis tractors........ 7-68
4-2 Pressure checks in the low pressure circuit -
Atlantis tractors ............................................................ 7-69
4-3 Low pressure hydraulic circuit - Ghibli tractors .......... 7-70
4-4 Pressure checks in the low pressure circuit -
Ghibli tractors .............................................................. 7-71
Sect.5 Special tools . ........................................................................... 7-45

7- 1

described in this section. It is important for opera-
tors to comply with these instructions in order to
Maintenance Manual and in chapter 1 of this ma-
nual.
ans of this symbol:
WARNING: do not begin to work until the

pressure in the hydraulic circuit has drop-
ped to zero.
WARNING: squirting fluid under pressure

can penetrate under the skin and cause
serious injuries. If accidents of this type
occur, immediately seek medical help to
prevent serious infections.
WARNING: always comply with the safety

and operating instructions supplied by the
manufacturer when adhesives or detergen-
ts are used.

WARNING: take care to prevent yourself

from being burned when you work with boi-
ling oil. Never heat oil to over 190°C as oil
and its vapours can spontaneously ignite.
7-2
CHAP. 7
General description
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.1 General description. .................................................................7-3
1-1 Low pressure hydraulic circuit - Atlantis tractors ............. 7-4

Atlantis tractors ................................................................ 7-5
1-3 Low pressure hydraulic circuit - Ghibli tractors ................ 7-6
Ghibli tractors .................................................................. 7-7
7- 3

1-1 Low pressure hydraulic circuit - Atlantis tractors
3
8
10
6 4
Fig.1-7
1- Pump 6- Front diff lock

2- Steering ass'y control valve 7- Rear diff lock
3- Control valve 8- Solenoid valve
4- Steering cylinder 9- Filter
5- Orbitrol outlet 10 - Reservoir
7-4
General description
1-2 Description of the low pressu-
re hydraulic circuit - Atlantis
tractors
The pump (1) supplies oil to the Orbitrol unit (2) af-
ter passing through the filter (9).
The Orbitrol unit (5) uses this oil to supply the con-
trol valve 17-18 bar (3). This latter, if the solenoid
valve (8) on it is excited, supplies oil to the front diff
lock (6) and to the rear diff lock (7) at the same
time.
9 - FILTER ON INTAKE
1 - LOW PRESSURE PUMP

MAX. FLOW AT MAX
ENGINE SPEED 18.7 l/min
SUPPLIED HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS
2 - HYDROSTATIC POWER STEERING

CIRCUIT
max. operating pressure 155 ± 5 bar
4 - STEERING CYLINDER
3 - DIFF LOCK CONTROL VALVE
6 - FRONT DIFF LOCK
7 - REAR DIFF LOCK
7- 5
General description
1-3 Low pressure hydraulic circuit - Ghibli tractors
Fig.2-7
1- Pump 7- Rear diff lock

2- Steering ass'y control valve 8- 4WD engagement (spring-on)
3- Power clutch control valve 9- Filter
4- Steering cylinder 10 - Reservoir
5- Power clutch cylinder 11 - Filter
6- Front diff lock 12 - Cylinder outlet
7-6
General description
1-4 Description of the low pressu-
re hydraulic circuit - Ghibli
tractors
Oil in the reservoir (10) in the front part of the tractor the unit ensures that there is the correct pressure
is drawn in by the pump (1), after passing through for activating the users, where necessary, i.e.:
the filter (9), and is sent to the steering valve system - PTO power clutch cylinder (5).
(2) as absolute priority. Thus supplied, the Orbitrol - Front (6) and rear (7) diff lock
system can either use the oil to supply the steering - 4WD engagement (spring-on) (8)
cylinder (4) under the control of the safety valve Each user can be activated, either individually or
(155 bar), or direct it towards the outlet as supply jointly, by respective electro-hydraulic controls in
line of the power clutch valve system (3). the cab.
This system (3) is permanently supplied as oil from Discharge oil from the users flows back to the re-
the pump always flows to the outlet of the Orbitrol servoir through the same line used for their supply
system both when the function is not being used and through the outlet of the power clutch control
and when the supply is in excess. Thus supplied, valve.
9 - FILTER ON INTAKE
1 - LOW PRESSURE PUMP

MAX. FLOW AT MAX
ENGINE SPEED 18.7 l/min
SUPPLIED HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS
2 - HYDROSTATIC POWER STEERING

CIRCUIT
max. operating pressure 155 ± 5 bar
4 - STEERING CYLINDER
3 - POWER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE
5 - PTO POWER CLUTCH CYLINDER
6 - FRONT DIFF LOCK
7 - REAR DIFF LOCK

8 - 4WD ENGAGEMENT (SPRING-ON)
7- 7
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
7-8
CHAP. 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7- 9

PUMP
Type Single type with gears
Manufacturer Bx/Srx
Model A - 510 - 845 - 262
Max. operating pressure 155 ± 5 bar
Max. flow rate at 2200 RPM engine rate 18.7 l/min
Positioning Right-hand
Drive Engine valve system
Reservoir capacity 2.3 l
STEERING SYSTEM
System Hydrostatic distribution
Manufacturer Danfoss
Type Orbitrol ospc 100 4 WD / Orbitrol ospc 80 2 WD
4WD nominal cylinder 100 cc per rev.
2WD nominal cylinder 80 cc per rev.
Steering cylinder Quantity:1

Type Balanced double-acting
DIFF LOCK ENGAGEMENT CONTROL VALVE

Make Oleodinamica Sx
Type Electro-hydraulic
PTO power clutch calibration valve 30 bar
Differential lock calibration valve 16 bar
Users BLc - PTO - Spring-on

Engagement Electro-hydraulic
7 - 10
CHAP. 7
Main components of the low pressure circuit
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 3 Main components
A - Hydraulic pump. ........................................................ 7-12

A1 - Description of operation ....................................... 7-13
7- 11
Main components
A - Hydraulic pump
2 3 4
Atlantis tractors
Fig.3-7
2 3 4 5
Ghibli tractors
1
Fig.4-7
1 - Intake pipe 4 - Pump casing

2 - Pump closing cover 5 - Front pump cover
3 - Delivery pipe
7 - 12
Hydraulic pump
A1 - Description of operation
The gear hydraulic pump consists of a single block
with two separate stages and two different flow ra-
tes. The common intake hole (1 Fig.3/4-7) is on the
pump casing (4 Fig.3/4-7) under the delivery hole (3
Fig3/4-7).
The whole pump block is fixed onto the engine valve
system casing.
7- 13
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
7 - 14
CHAP. 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 3 Main components
B - Hydrostatic power steering system

B1 - Low pressure hydraulic circuit ............................. 7-16
B2 - Hydrostatic power steering circuit ........................ 7-17
B3 - Drawing of assembly and components ................ 7-18
B4 - Description of operation ....................................... 7-20
B5 - Dismantling .......................................................... 7-24
B6 - Inspection ............................................................ 7-24
B7 - Remounting and adjustment ................................ 7-26
B8 - Steering angles .................................................... 7-28
7- 15
Hydrostatic power steering system

B1 - Steering low pressure hydraulic circuit
2
Power clutch
(GHIBLI)
Control valve
(ATLANTIS)
11
1
9 10
Fig.5-7
1 - Pump 9 - Filter
2 - Steering distributor 10 - Reservoir
4 - Steering cylinder 11 - Filter (Ghibli tractors only)
7 - 16

B2 - Hydrostatic power steering cir- the various users through a low pressure circuit.
cuit The steering system mounted in Atlantis-Ghibli
tractors is the hydrostatic type and there is no
The low pressure circuit consists of an initial high mechanical connection between the steering wheel
pressure section to operate the hydrostatic power and steering cylinder. Each slightest turn of the
steering system. steering wheel corresponds to an equivalent steering
Oil from the low pressure stage of the pump (1 Fig. movement of the wheels.
6-7) supplies the Orbitrol steering valve system, after If the engine breaks down or the hydraulic pump
which it supplies the relative steering cylinder (4 Fig. fails to operate, the Orbitrol unit acts like a manual
6-7). pump operated by the steering wheel, allowing the
Oil discharged from the Orbitrol assembly supplies steering action to be accomplished.
USERS 2
11
Fig.6-7
7- 17

B3 - Drawing of the ass'y and main parts of the "Orbitrol" valve system
Fig.7-7
7 - 18
Fig.8-7
1 - Screw 11 - Connecting shaft 21 - “Orbitrol”valve system

2 - Screw 12 - Washer 22 - One-way valve
3 - Seal 13 - Centering springs 23 - Anti-cavitation valve
4 - Closing plate 14 - Needle bearing 24 - Ring
5 - O-Ring 15 - Ring 25 - Drum
6 - Stator 16 - Washer 26 - Check valve
7 - Pin 17 - O-Ring 27 - Sleeve
8 - O-Ring 18 - Safety valve 28 - O-Ring
9 - Rotor 19 - Retention ring 29 - Distribution plate
10 - Spacer 20 - Antishock valve
7- 19

B4 - Description of operation
A - Neutral position (engine running) Two antishock valves (20) and two anti-cavitation
In this position, the drum (25) is centered in relation valves (23) are set in holes L and R of the valve
to the sleeve (27) thanks to the springs (13 Fig.8/9- system. The antishock valves (20) protect the circuit
7). between the steering cylinder and the valve system
No oil is supplied to ducts P1-L-R. against impact on the wheels.
Oil from duct P flows straight through to duct T to The anti-cavitation valves (23) allow the oil from the
supply the hydraulic power pack. The circuit is the antishock valves (20) to flow from the right-hand
open-center type. duct into the left-hand one and vice versa, depending
on the movement of the piston in the steering cylinder.
20
25 27
23
6
13
18
26
22
Fig.9-7
A - Steering cylinder
L - Oil supply towards the left-hand union of the steering cylinder
P - Low pressure oil supply from the hydraulic pump
P1- Oil supply towards the metering device (Stator (6) and Rotor (9))
R - Oil supply towards the right-hand union of the steering cylinder
T - Discharge towards the hydraulic power pack
7 - 20

Steering position by the springs (13). The rotor will cease to be supplied
with oil and will block.
(engine running) This reasoning can be extended to wider angles. The
quantity of oil discharged by the power steering
Steering wheel turning (to the right or left) causes system towards cylinder A is therefore proportional
an angular rotation of the drum (25) in relation to the to the angle of rotation of the steering wheel. The
sleeve (27). The oil flowing from the pump is directed drum (25) allows the oil delivered by the metering
towards the metering device (Stator (6) and Rotor device (Stator (6) and Rotor (9)) towards hole L or
(9)). The rotor (9) is turned and returns a quantity of R, depending on whether the driver steers towards
oil proportional to the rotation angle towards the the left or right. During rotation, the sleeve (27)
cylinder. The rotor (9) turns to the same extent as ensures synchronous communication of the cavities
the steering wheel. of the metering device with the circuit from the pump
on the one hand, and with the circuit towards cylinder
Example: A on the other. A check valve (26) is screwed into
Supposing that the steering wheel is turned through the supply hole of the valve system. This is a one-
5°, this will cause a 5° angular rotation of the drum way valve that prevents excessive pressures
(25) in relation to the sleeve (27). The rotor (9) is exercised on the wheels from being transmitted to
turned for as long as it is supplied with oil. It, in turn, the pump when the wheels themselves are steered.
turns the connecting shaft (11) and the sleeve (27). If the pressure in the steering circuit is too high, the
When they have turned through 5°, the drum (25) safety valve (18) in the valve system is activated
and the sleeve (27) will have been newly centered and the excess pressure directed towards duct T.
25 27
22
Fig.10-7
7- 21

Manual steering (engine at a springs (13) are compressed, the angular play
between the pin (7) and sleeve (27) is annulled and
standstill) the rotor (9) is mechanically turned. The valve
system thus operates like a hand pump.
When the pump does not deliver oil or when the The oil returning from cylinder A passes through the
available pressure is too weak, the rotor (9) will no non-return valve (22) and supplies the metering
longer be hydraulically turned. In this case, there is device. The pressure generated is proportional to
no assistance. the torque exercised on the steering wheel. In this
When the steering wheel is operated, the centering case, the strain on the steering wheel is high.
25 27
13
22
Fig.11-7
7 - 22

Mechanical connection
T L
P R
Fig.12-7
L - LH steering cylinder supply line

P - Low pressure circuit supply
R - RH steering cylinder supply line
T - Discharge towards hydraulic power pack
7- 23

B5 - Dismantling (Fig. 13-7) bearing (14) and the bush (24) of the sleeve/
drum unit. Remove the plug (7) and the cente-
1 - Remove the valve system from the tractor. ring springs (13), pressing on one of the ends.
2 - Place the valve system in a vice with plastic Split the sleeve (27) from the drum (25).
jaws. 11 - Unscrew the cap of the safety valve (18). Using
3 - Remove the screws (1). Mark the position of an 8 mm Allen wrench, demount the threaded
screw (2) and remove it. sleeve and take out the seal, the spring and the
4 - Remove the closing plate (4), the O-Ring (5), valve (the recessed housing cannot be demoun-
the stator (6) and the O-ring (8). ted).
5 - Remove the spacer (10), the rotor (9), the di- 12 - Unscrew the caps oif the antishock valves (20)
stributor plate (29) and the O-Ring (28). and remove the seals. Using a 6 mm Allen wren-
6 - Take out the splined connecting shaft (11). ch, demount the threaded sleeves and remove
7 - Unscrew the threaded sleeve and recover the the springs, the balls and their housings (the
ball of the non-return valve (22). recessed balls cannot be demounted).
8 - Take out the two plugs with spring pin and the 13 - Remove the retention ring (19), the bush (15)
two balls of the anti-cavitation valves (23) of and the O-Ring (17).
the valve system. 14 - Demount the check valve (26).
9 - Push to remove the sleeve unit (27) and drum
(25), checking that the plug (7) is on the hori- B6 - Inspection
zontal axis.
10 - Remove the washers (12) and (16), the needle 15 - Carefully examine all parts and replace them if
necessary.
16 - Replace all the retention rings, the washers and
the springs.
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
7 - 24
Fig.13-7
1 - Screw 11 - Connecting shaft 21 - “Orbitrol” valve system

2 - Screw 12 - Washer 22 - One-way valve
3 - Seal 13 - Centering springs 23 - Anti-cavitation valve
4 - Closing plate 14 - Needle bearing 24 - Ring
5 - O-Ring 15 - Ring 25 - Drum
6 - Stator 16 - Washer 26 - Check valve
7 - Pin 17 - O-Ring 27 - Sleeve
8 - O-Ring 18 - Safety valve 28 - O-Ring
9 - Rotor 19 - Retention ring 29 - Distributor plate
10 - Spacer 20 - Antishock valve
7- 25

B7 - Remounting and adjustment
After thoroughly cleaning and lubricating all the com-
ponents, proceed by remounting, following the demoun-
ting instructions in reverse order and complying with
the below listed indications:
17- Remount the check valve (26 Fig. 13-7).
18- Mount the retention ring (19 Fig. 13-7).
19- Mount the O-Ring (17) and ring (15) on the control
valve housing.
20- Set the balls and springs into the antishock valve
housings (20). Tighten the threaded sleeves, fit
on the washers and tighten the plugs. Fig.14-7
21- Fit the valve and spring in the discharge valve
housing (18) and tighten the threaded sleeve. Fit
on the seal and tighten the valve.
22- Fit the drum (25) into the sleeve (27).
23- Fit the centering springs (13) through the slit in the
order shown in Fig. 15-7 and position the pin (7
Fig. 13-7).
Fig.15-7
Fig.16-7
7 - 26

24- Position the bush (24) on the sleeve and drum unit
so that the chamfer facilitates assembly in the
valve system.
25- Position the washers (12) and (16) with the chamfer
of washer (12) pointing towards the centering sprin-
gs (13) and fit the needle bearing (14) in between.
26- Mount the sleeve and drum unit in the valve sy-
stem, applying a slight oscillating movement. Take
care to keep the pin (7) in a horizontal position.
27- Place the two balls and two plugs with spring pin
in the intake valve housing (23).
28- Place the ball in the housing of the non-return val-
ve (22) and tighten the threaded sleeve.
29- Position the splined connecting shaft (11).
30- Position the O-Ring (28) and the distributor plate
(29). Fig.17-7
31- Mount the rotor (9) so that the two cavities C are
on the splining axis of the splined shaft (11 Fig.17-
7). Remount the spacer (10 Fig. 13-7).
32- Place the O-Rings (5) and (8) on the stator (6).
33- Mount the stator (6) without moving the rotor (9).
Now move its fixing holes so that they correspond
to those of the valve system.
Note: the rotor (9) and indent C must be in the position

indicated in (Fig. 18-7).
34- Remount the closing plate (4).

35- Fit on the screw (in the position marked before
demounting) and screws (1) with their seals (3).
Tighten the opposing screws.
36- Use an appropriate plug to check the setting and
operation of the valve system.
37- Fit the valve system back into the tractor.
Fig.18-7
Fig.18a-7
7- 27

B8 - Steering angles
DT
Fig.19-7
Fig.20-7
DT R
X Y Tractor type
50 60 Atlantis 70-75-80-85-90-100
32 52 Atlantis 80 HC-90HC
50 60 Ghibli 80-90-100
7 - 28
CHAP. 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS

C - Power clutch control valve
C1 - Main components and ducts .......................................... 7-28
C2 - Operation phases of the power clutch control valve ..... 7-30
C2.1 Phase with engaged PTO clutch, not engaged
diff lock and engaged 4WD .................................. 7-31
C2.2 Phase with engaged PTO clutch, engaged
diff lock and engaged 4WD .................................. 7-32
C2.3 Phase with engaged PTO clutch, engaged
diff lock and not engaged 4WD ............................ 7-34
C2.4 Phase with not engaged PTO clutch, not engaged
C2.5 Phase with not engaged PTO clutch, engaged
C2.6 Phase with Q link in progressive engagement of PTO
clutch, not engaged diff lock and not engaged 4WD ... 7-40
C2.7 Phase with engine off and PTO clutch control lever
in engaged position ............................................... 7-42
C3 - Solenoid valves ............................................................... 7-44
C4 - Adjustments and inspections .......................................... 7-46
C4.1 Calibration of 30 bar control valve spring ............. 7-47
C4.2 Control and adjustment of PTO progressive
engagement .......................................................... 7-47
C4.3 Calibration of 16 bar control valve ........................ 7-48
C4.4 Control of 4WD engagement pressure................. 7-49
7- 29
Power clutch control valve

C 1 - Main components and ducts
Q
H F P G R
Z T 0 L
Fig.21-7
F -Spring-On supply Q - PTO power clutch disengagement

G -30-bar fitting plug R - PTO power clutch feeding
H -Spring-On solenoid valve T - Discharge channel
O -Diff lock solenoid valve Z - Rod/lever link cable
P -Power clutch feeding duct L - 16-18 bar fitting plug
7 - 30

15 16 T1 F 17 P G 18 19 20 21
14
1
13
2
12
T 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 L 4 N
Fig.22-7
1 - Plug of pilot plunger port 17 - 1mm throttle
2 - Pin 18 - Progressive PTO clutch engagement spring
3 - 1.5mm throttle 19 - 30-bar adjustment spring
4 - Valve system housing 20 - Progressive control adjustment shims
5 - Diff lock solenoid valve housing 21 - 30-bar adjustment shims
6 - Diff lock solenoid valve coil 22 - Piston
7 - 18-bar control valve housing plug F - Commun. chamber with Spring-on supply
8 - 18-bar control valve spring G - 30-bar pressure tap
9 - 18-bar control valve plunger L - 18-bar pressure tap
10 - 18-bar control valve adjustment shims N - Diff locks supply
11 - 18- bar control valve housing P - Oil incoming from Orbitrol
12 - Diaphragm R - PTO disengagement cylinder supply
13 - Rod guide plug T - Discharge channel
14 - Auxiliary control valve rod T1 - Chamber communicating with discharge
15 - Spring-on solenoid valve coil
16 - Spring-on solenoid valve housing
7- 31

C 2 - Operation phases of the power clutch control valve
15 T1 a P
14
e
T 12 g
9 h 6
5 bar
0 bar Fig.23-7
7 - 32

C 2.1 - Phase with engaged PTO clutch, not engaged diff lock
and engaged 4WD (Fig.23-7)
In this phase, the rod (14) is pulled to the outside of opening the passage of oil to discharge (T).
the control valve by the lever (Q) and neither solenoid If the solenoid valve (6) is not energized, chamber (h)
valve (6 and 15) is energized. communicates with discharge (T) through chamber (e).
Oil incoming from Orbitrol enters the control valve In chamber (g) a 5-bar pressure builds up, caused by
through port (P), and through the groove (a), enters throttle (12).
the chamber (g) and displaces the plunger (9) thus
Phase C2.1
PTO clutch Engaged
Diff lock Not engaged
4 WD Engaged
7- 33
15 a P
14
T g i 9
f h 6
18 bar
0 bar Fig.24-7
7 - 34

C 2.2 - Phase with engaged PTO clutch, engaged
diff lock and engaged 4WD (Fig.24-7)
In this phase, the rod (14) is pulled to the outside of
the control valve by the lever (Q), the diff lock sole-
noid valve (6) is energized, while the 4WD solenoid
valve (15) is not-energized.
Oil incoming from Orbitrol enters the control valve
through port (P), and through the groove (a), enters
the chamber (g).
Because the solenoid valve (6) is energized, chamber
(h) does not communicate with chamber (e) that, on
its part, communicates with discharge (T).
Oil enters the chamber (f) through the port (i) and sup-
plies the diff lock (N) through the passage (h) at a
pressure of 18 bars. Once this value is reached, the
plunger (9) moves and opens the passage of oil to the
discharge (T), while keeping up a 18 bar pressure in
the diff lock supply passage (h).
Phase C2.2
PTO clutch Engaged
Diff lock Engaged
4 WD Engaged
7- 35
15 T1 F a P
Q 17
14
g i
f h 6
18 bar
0 bar Fig.25-7
7 - 36

C 2.3 - Phase with engaged PTO clutch, engaged
diff lock and not engaged 4WD (Fig.25-7)
In this phase, the rod (14) is pulled to the outside of pressure of 18 bars. Once this value is reached, the
the control valve by the lever (Q) and both solenoid plunger (9) moves and opens the passage of oil to the
valves (6 and 15) are energized. discharge (T), while keeping up a 18 bar pressure in
Oil incoming from Orbitrol enters the control valve the diff lock supply passage (h).
through port (P), and through the groove (a), enters Oil incoming from Orbitrol enters the groove (a) through
the chamber (g). the throttle (17) and comes into chamber (F). In this
Because the solenoid valve (6) is energized, chamber way it feeds the Spring-On unit and disengages 4WD
(h) does not communicate with chamber (e) that, on as the energized solenoid valve closes the communi-
its part, communicates with discharge (T). cation with discharge (T1).
Oil enters the chamber (f) through the port (i) and sup-
plies the diff lock (N) through the passage (h) at a
Phase C2.3
PTO clutch Engaged
Diff lock Engaged
4 WD Not engaged
7- 37
15 F a P b c R
Q 17
2
14
22
e
T 12 g
9 h 6
Fig.26-7
30 bar
5 bar
0 bar
7 - 38

C 2.4 - Phase with not engaged PTO clutch, not engaged
In this phase, the rod (14) is within the control valve Oil in the chamber (g) pushes on plunger (9), thus open-
as the lever (Q) was pulled back, the diff lock solenoid ing the communication with discharge (T) of oil incom-
valve (6) is not-energized, and the 4WD solenoid valve ing from Orbitrol, keeping up the 30-bar pressure in
(15) is energized. channel (c).
Oil incoming from Orbitrol enters the control valve As the solenoid valve (6) is not energized, chamber
through port (P), and through the groove (b) enters the (h) communicates with discharge (T) through chamber
passage (c) and so communicates with the cylinder (e).
that disengages the PTO clutch (R). In chamber (g), though it communicates with discharge
When a 30 bar pressure has built up, the clutch disen- (T), a 5-bar pressure builds up, caused by throttle (12).
gages and the oil pressure pushes the groove pin (2) Thus, oil incoming from Orbitrol enters the groove (a)
through channel (l), thus pushing on piston (22) and through the throttle (17) and comes into chamber (F).
causing the communication of chamber (a) with cham- In this way it feeds the Spring-On unit and disengages
ber (g) to open. 4WD as the energized solenoid valve closes the com-
munication with discharge (T1).
Phase C2.4
PTO clutch Not engaged
4 WD Not engaged
7- 39
15 T1 F a P b c R
Q
17
14
22 N
T g i
9 f h 6
Fig.27-7
30 bar
5 bar
0 bar
7 - 40

C 2.5 - Phase with not engaged PTO clutch, engaged
In this phase, the rod (14) is within the control valve Oil enters the chamber (f) through the port (i) and sup-
as the lever (Q) was pulled back, the diff lock solenoid plies the diff lock through the passage (h) at a pres-
valve (6) is energized, and the 4WD solenoid valve sure of 18 bars. Once this value is reached, the plung-
(15) is energized. er (9) moves and opens the passage of oil to the dis-
Oil incoming from Orbitrol enters the control valve charge (T), while keeping up a 18 bar pressure in the
through port (P), and through the groove (b) enters the diff lock supply passage (h) and in chamber (g).
passage (c) and so communicates with the cylinder Oil also comes in through the groove (a) and, after
that disengages the PTO clutch (R). passing through the throttle (17), comes into chamber
When a 30-bar has built up, the clutch disengages and (F). In this way it feeds the Spring-On unit and disen-
the oil pressure pushes the groove pin (2) through chan- gages 4WD at a 18-bar pressure as the energized so-
nel (l), thus pushing on piston (22) and causing the lenoid valve closes the communication with discharge
communication of chamber (a) with chamber (g) to open. (T1).
Because the solenoid valve (6) is energized, chamber
(h) does not communicate with chamber (e) that, on
its part, communicates with discharge (T).
Phase C2.5
PTO clutch Not engaged
Diff lock Engaged
4 WD Not engaged
7- 41
15 T1 a P 18 m c
14
22
T g
9 6
Fig.28-7
30 bar
5 bar
0 bar
7 - 42

C 2.6 - Phase with Q link in progressive engagement of PTO clutch,
not engaged diff lock and not engaged 4WD (Fig.28-7)
In this phase, the rod (14) is gently pushed forward Oil incoming from Orbitrol enters the control valve
and engages thus the PTO clutch. As a consequence, through port (P), and through the groove (a) enters the
the rod (14) is pulled out of the control valve, the diff chamber (g) and displaces the plunger (9) thus open-
lock solenoid valve (6) is not-energized, and the 4WD ing the passage of oil to discharge (T).
solenoid valve is energized. As the solenoid valve (6) is not energized, chamber
The progressive displacement of the rod (14) out of (h) communicates with discharge (T) through chamber
the control valve compresses the progressive control (e).
spring (18), that gradually moves piston (22) and opens In chamber (g) a 5 bar pressure builds up, caused by
the communication between the passage (c), the throttle (12).
groove (m) and chambers (d) and (e), this latter com- Oil also comes in through the groove (a) and, after
municating with discharge (T). Therefore the oil in the passing through the throttle (17), comes into chamber
cylinder (R) flows gradually out and the engagement (F). In this way it feeds the Spring-On unit and disen-
of the PTO clutch begins. gages 4WD at a 5-bar pressure as the energized sole-
At the first displacement of lever (Q), the pressure noid valve closes the communication with discharge
quickly falls from 30 to 17 bar, then slowly falls to 9 (T1).
bar and, quickly again, to 0 bar.
Phase C2.6
PTO clutch Progressive
4 WD Not engaged
7- 43
15
14
0 bar Fig.29-7
7 - 44

C 2.7 - Phase with engine off and PTO clutch control lever
in engaged position (Fig.29-7)
In this phase, the rod (14) is pulled to the outside of
the control valve by the lever (Q) and neither solenoid
valve (6 and 15) is energized.
The control valve is completely filled with oil at 0 bar.
Phase C2.7 - Engine off
PTO clutch Engaged
4 WD Engaged
7- 45

C3 - Solenoid valves
The solenoid valve has the task to open or close the on whether the coil is energised by the mobile core
feed line and the discharge of oil to the respective (5). The first position of plunger (10) with energised
user. solenoid valve does not allow the oil incoming from
This result is obtained by sending or interrupting an the pump (P) to flow through ports (12) to the discharge
electric voltage to the solenoid valve to energise or (T). In this case the oil supplies the respective user.
de-energize it and causing the oil passage to be opened The second position of plunger (10) with not-energised
or closed. The solenoid valve is composed by a coil solenoid valve allows the oil incoming from the pump
(3), a housing (9), a mobile core (5) with a spring (4) (P) to flow through the ports (12) to the discharge (T).
and a plunger (10).
The stem can have two different positions, depending
2 1
3
5 11
6 10
T
12 9
7 P 8
Fig.30-7
1 - Sleeve 6 - O-ring
2 - Plug 7 - Oil intake port (P) 11 - O-ring
3 - Coil 8 - Discharge ports(T) 12 - Plunger ports
4 - Spring 9 - Valve housing P - Oil intake
5 - Mobile core 10 - Plunger T - Discharge
7 - 46
C3-1 - Check controls

The correct operation of the solenoid valves can be
checked as follows:
1 - checking the coil resistance

2 - checking the voltage value
NOTE: The above mentioned check-controls are purely

indicative. They have no absolute value and concern
the electrical nature of the solenoid valve. A fault in
the solenoid valve could also be caused by a mechan-
ical or hydraulic problem, e.g. a jammed plunger.
1 - CHECKING THE COIL RESISTANCE

Fig.31-7
- Check the coil windings continuity with a tester.
- Position the tester points at each coil end, i.e. the
connection terminals (Fig.31-7).
- Read the coil’s resistance value. V
- This value must be between 8 and 9, at a tempera-
ture of about 20 °C.
NOTE: The coil resistance can be checked without

removing the component.
Coil
2 - CHECKING THE VOLTAGE VALUE
- Check the voltage at the coil winding end with a test-

er.
- Position the tester points in “parallel connection” with
the coil (Fig.32-7).
- Power the solenoid valve coil.
- The value indicated by the tester must match the Fig.32-7
rated value stamped on the coil itself (generally 12
V ± 10%).
7- 47

C4 - Adjustments and inspections
Q
H F P G R
Z T 0 L
Fig.33-7
F - Spring-On supply Q - PTO power clutch disengagement lever

G - 30-bar fitting plug R - PTO power clutch feeding
H - Spring-On solenoid valve T - Discharge channel
O - Diff lock solenoid valve Z - Rod/lever link cable
P - Power clutch feeding duct L - 16-18 bar fitting plug
7 - 48

The power clutch assembly has to be checked and
adjusted as follows: G
4.1 Setting the 30-bar control valve spring (2)
4.2 Checking and adjusting the PTO progressive
engagement
4.3 Setting the 18-bar control valve
4.4 Checking the 4WD disengagement pressure
C4.1 - Setting the 30-bar control

valve spring (2)
a) Replace the plug (G) with the tool 122 IDR GL and
connect the pressure gauge (Fig.34-7). 122 IDR GL Fig.34-7
b) Start the tractor and bring the engine to 900/1000
RPM with the oil at a temperature of 30-40°C, then
disengage the PTO clutch.
c) The set pressure of the PTO clutch disengage-

ment valve spring (2 Fig.35-7) must be
30 ± 2 bar. 26
27
d) Add or remove shims (27 Fig.35/36-7) to change
the setting; each 1mm of shims change the set
pressure of about 2 bar.
2
C4.2 - Checking and adjusting

the PTO progressive en-
gagement Fig.35-7
a) Replace the plug (G) with the tool 122 IDR GL and
connect the pressure gauge (Fig.34-7).

RPM with the oil at a temperature of 30-40°C. 26
27
c) Gently depress the lever (Q Fig.33-7) and check
on the gauge the oil pressure in the very first mo-
ment when the lever is moved. The pressure should
quickly fall to about 17 bar.
While the lever is displaced still further, the pres-
sure must gradually drop until about 9 bar. When
this pressure value is reached, and displacing the
lever still further, the oil pressure must quickly
reach 0 bar (Fig.34-7).
2
Fig.36-7
7- 49

d) Both the beginning and the end of this progressive
phase of PTO engagement can be changed by add-
ing or removing shims (26 Fig.35/ 38-7); in any case
the interval must be 8 bar; each 1mm shims chang-
es the pressure of about 1/1.5 bar.
Fig.37-7 shows how the pressure changes depend-
PRESSURE
ing on the rod travel.
OILPRESSURE
C4.3 - Setting the 18-bar control
OIL
valve
a) Replace the plug (L) with the tool 122 IDR GL and ROD TRAVEL
connect the pressure gauge (Fig.36-7).
Fig.37-7
RPM with the oil at a temperature of 30-40°C, then
disengage the diff lock.
c) The set pressure of the control valve (14) must be

18 bar.
d) Add or remove shims (16 Fig.40-7) to change the 26

setting; each 1mm of shims changes the set pres-
sure of about 1/1.5 bar.
Fig.38-7
122 IDR GL Fig.39-7
7 - 50

C4.4 - Checking the 4WD disen-
gagement pressure
a) Mount the tool 125 IDR GL with adapter 122 IDR 16
GL on the channel (F) that feeds the Spring-on
assembly and connect the pressure gauge.

RPM with the oil at a temperature of 30-40°C. En-
ergize the solenoid valve that controls the Spring-
on assembly supply. The solenoid valve is thus in
delivery position,
c) The supply pressure of this assembly must be 5

bar at least in order to be able to disengage the 4- Fig.40-7
wheel drive. When the diff lock supply solenoid
valve (H) is energised, the Spring-on assembly
supply oil can reach 18 bar without any conse-
quences for the assembly itself.
F
125 IDR GL
7- 51
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
7 - 52
CHAP. 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
D - Differential lock supply
D1 - Low pressure circuit - Atlantis tractors ............... 7-52

D2 - Description of operation - Atlantis tractors ......... 7-53
D3 - Description of operation of the 17-18 bar
control valve ....................................................... 7-56
D4 - Low pressure circuit - Ghibli tractors .................. 7-57
D5 - Description of operation - Ghibli tractors ........... 7-58
7- 53
Differential lock supply

D1 - Low pressure circuit - Atlantis tractors
3
8
10
6
4
Fig.42-7
1- Pump 6- Front differential lock

2- Steering auxiliary valve 7- Rear differential lock
3- Governor valve 8- Solenoid valve
5- Orbitrol discharge 10 - Reservoir
7 - 54

D2 - Description of operation
The pump (1 Fig. 42-7) feeds oil to the orbitrol unit (2)
through the filter (9).
The orbitrol unit outlet (5) feeds the valve system (3)
at 17-18 bar (3). This system, if the solenoid valve (8)
is activated, sends oil simultaneously to the front (6)
and rear (7) differential lock.
The front (6 Fig. 43-7) and rear differentials (7 Fig. 44-
7) are locked through the movement of two mechani-
cal clutch assemblies activated by a piston with oil at
a pressure of 18 bar.
This happens when the driver activated the solenoid
valve by the control button (A Fig. 45-7) thus enabling 6
the simultaneous flow of oil to the rear (7) and front (6)
Fig.43-7
differential lock. Operate one or both brake pedals (B
Fig. 45-7) to unlock the differential. The solenoid valve
is disactivated, thus blocking oil supply and opening
the port to the outlet.
The internal return springs return both locking devices
to the rest position and disactivate their action upon
the respective differentials.
7
Fig.44-7
Fig.45-7
7- 55

D3 - Description of the operation
of the 17-18 bar control valve T P
When the solenoid valve is not energised, the oil com-

ing from the pump flows through the port (k) and en-
8
ters the chamber (W). The through the channel (X) it
communicates with solenoid valve (8 Fig.46-7) that 3
lets oil flow to the discharge.
When the solenoid valve is energised, it does not al-

low the oil to flow from channel (X) to discharge (T),
but lets oil flowing through the port (K) to flow to the
diff locks (6 Fig.46-7). 6
When the pressure reaches 17-18 bar, the plunger (Y)
T
moves downward and lets the oil coming from the pump Fig.46-7
through the ports (M) to flow to the discharge (T) while
keeping up in chamber (W) the required pressure of
17-18 bar for the diff locks.
P
K 3
M
T Solenoid valve(8)
Y X
Z W
To the diff
locks 6 Fig.47-7
7 - 56

D4 - Low pressure circuit - Ghibli tractors
Fig.48-7
1- Pump 7 - Rear differential lock

2- Steering auxiliary valve 8 - 4WD engagement (Spring-on)
3- Power clutch control valve 9 - Filter
6- Front differential lock 12- Cylinder discharge
7- 57

D5 - Description of operation
The front (6 Fig.49-7) and rear differentials (8 Fig.49-7)
are locked through the movement of two mechanical
clutch assemblies activated by a piston fed with oil at
a pressure of 18 bar
when the driver energises the solenoid valve by means
of the button (A Fig.50-7).
The energised solenoid valve can supply oil to the rear
(7) and front (6) lock at the same time. The differen-
tials are unlocked when, by means of the brake ped-
als (5 Fig.52-7), the solenoid valve is de-energised,
closing the oil supply and opening the communication
to the discharge.
The internal return springs set both lock mechanisms
6
Fig.49-7
to the rest position, deactivating their effect on the
respective differential.
8
Fig.50-7 Fig.51-7
Fig.52-7
7 - 58
CHAP. 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
E - PTO power clutch cylinder supply
E1 - Low pressure circuit - Ghibli tractors ....................... 7-60

E2 - Description of operation .......................................... 7-61
7- 59
PTO power clutch cylinder supply

E1 - Low pressure circuit
Fig.53-7
1- Pump 7- Rear differential lock
2- Steering auxiliary valve 8- Engagement (Spring-on)
6- Front differential lock 12-Cylinder discharge
7 - 60
PTO power clutch cylinder supply

E2 - Description of operation
11 16 12 13
When the PTO clutch is engaged no oil reaches cylin-
der (5) and springs (18) keep the piston (17) pushed to
the end of the stroke, while the stem (19), by means
of lever (15) and other links, allows a play between
collar (12) and the levers (16) that disengage the PTO
disc (11).
When the lever for the PTO clutch disengagement is

activated, the control valve (3) sends oil at a pressure
of 30 bar to the cylinder (5), thus displacing the piston
(17) and compressing the springs (18).
The movement of the stem (19) makes the lever (15)
rotate and the collar (12) to move, thus disengaging
the PTO disc (11).
When the clutch is engaged again, there is a modula-
tion phase so that the PTO shaft resumes movement
in a smooth and gradual way.
14 15 23 19 5
Fig.54-7
21 22 18
19 20 17
Fig.55-7
5 - Power clutch cylinder 17 - Piston

11 - Clutch disc 18 - Springs
12 - Collar 19 - Stem
13 - Transmission shaft 20 - Cylinder head
14 - Collar lever 21 - Oil union
15 - Lever 22 - Cylinder
16 - Clutch disengagement lever 23 - Fork
7- 61
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
7 - 62
CHAP. 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F - 4WD engagement supply (spring-on)
F1 - Low pressure circuit ................................................ 7-64

F2 - Description of operation .......................................... 7-65
7- 63

F1 - Low pressure circuit
Fig.56-7
1- Pump 7- Rear differential lock
2- Steering auxiliary valve 8- Engagement (Spring-on)
6- Front differential lock 12-Cylinder discharge
7 - 64
20 19 18 17 16
11
12 13 14 15 Fig.57-7
A- Oil supply 16- Engagement sleeve

11 - Cover 17 - Front teeth
12 - Piston 18 - Gear driven by the crown gear
13 - Spring 19 - 4WD drive transmission shaft
14 - Piston stem 20 - Sleeve
15 - Engagement fork
F2- Description of operation

Oil arriving from the power clutch control valve unit
reaches piston (12) through the passage (A) that sup-
plies the Spring-on unit. This oil, at a pressure of about
5 or 18 bar, makes the piston (12) move to the right,
thus compressing the spring (13) and moving the stem
(14) too; on this latter the engagement fork (15) is
fitted , that makes the engagement sleeve (16) move
to the right following the movement caused by the
stem (14). This does not mesh therefore with the gear A 11 Fig.58-7
(18) driven by the crown gear, that turns now in neu-
tral position without driving the 4WD transmission shaft
(19) any longer. If the 4WD is engaged, the oil in the the front teeth (17). The gear (18) driven by the crown
passage (A) has a pressure of 0 bar so that the spring wheel is now able to drive the 4WD through the shaft
(13) keeps the piston (12) against the cover (11). The (19) and the sleeve (20).
stem (14) lets therefore the fork (15) keep the engage-
ment sleeve (16) meshed with gear (18) by means of
7- 65
Note
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
7 - 66
CHAP. 7
Checking the operating pressure values
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 4 Controlli delle pressioni di esercizio
4-1 Low pressure circuit - Atlantis tractors...................... 7-68

4-2 Checking the operating pressure values in the
low pressure circuit - Atlantis tractors ....................... 7-69
4-3 Low pressure circuit - Ghibli tractors ........................ 7-70
4-4 Checking the operating pressure values in the
low pressure circuit - Ghibli tractors ......................... 7-71
7- 67
Sect.4 - Checking the operating pressure values

4-1 Low pressure circuit - Atlantis tractors
3 8
10
6
4
Fig.59-7

3- Governor valve 8- Solenoid valve
5- Orbitrol discharge 10 - Reservoir
7 - 68

The operating pressure values must be checked
whenever the various users operate in a faulty way or
when the tractor is generally overhauled.
Remember that a low setting of the maximum valves
in the circuit can prevent the various components from
engaging perfectly or the steering system from
operating in an efficient way.
If the setting value of the valves is too high, this will
stress all the components in question and, in the case
of the valve that monitors the lubricating pressure, will
break all the retention rings of the transmission unit.
After checking, reset the correct valve setting value
by means of the relative adjusters.
04 IDR MYT
The hydraulic tests must be carried out with the engine
running at a rate of about 1000 RPM, with oil at a tem- Fig.60-7
perature of between 30-40° C and using the special
tools required plus a set of pressure gauges.
4-2 Checking the pressure in the T 3 P 8

low pressure circuit
WARNING: Do not start any works on the
system until the pressure in the hydraulic
system has sunk to zero.
WARNING: Fluid under pressure can pene-

trate the skin and cause injury. In case of
such an accident, seek medical help imme-
diately to avoid the risk of severe infections.
A - Checking the steering cylinder pressure 6

(Fig.60-7). 125 IDR GL Fig.61-7
Mount tool 04 IDR MYT in the connection point
between the rubber tube and the rigid tube, along
with union 122 IDR GL and apply a pressure gau- B - Checking the calibrating pressure of the 16 bar
ge with a 0 to 500 bar scale. control valve (3 Fig.61-7)
When the steering cylinder reaches end of stroke, Fit tool 125 IDRGL (Fig.61-7) along with union 122
the pressure gauge must indicate a value betwe- IDR GL on the unit in the position shown in Fig.61-
en 155 and 160 bar. 7, with a 0 to 60 bar gauge. When the engine is
running, engage the diff lock. Engage the diff lock
while the engine is running. The pressure gauge
must indicate a value of about 16 bar.
7- 69

4-3 Low pressure circuit - Ghibli tractors
Fig.62-7
3- Power clutch control valve 8- Engagement (Spring-on)
5- Power clutch cylinder 10 - Reservoir
11 - Filter
7 - 70

The operating pressure values must be checked
whenever the various users operate in a faulty way or
when the tractor is generally overhauled.
Remember that a low setting of the maximum valves
in the circuit can prevent the various components from
engaging perfectly or the steering system from
operating in an efficient way.
If the setting value of the valves is too high, this will
stress all the components in question and, in the case
of the valve that monitors the lubricating pressure, will
break all the retention rings of the transmission unit.
After checking, reset the correct valve setting value
by means of the relative adjusters.
04 IDR MYT
The hydraulic tests must be carried out with the engine
running at a rate of about 1000 RPM, with oil at a tem- Fig.63-7
perature of between 30-40° C and using the special
tools required plus a set of pressure gauges.
4-4 Checking the pressure in the G

low pressure circuit
WARNING: Fluid under pressure can pene-

trate the skin and cause injury. In case of
such an accident, seek medical help imme-
diately to avoid the risk of severe infections.
A - Checking the steering cylinder pressure

(Fig.63-7). 122 IDR GL Fig.64-7
Mount tool 04 IDR MYT in the connection point
between the rubber tube and the rigid tube, along
with union 122 IDR GL and apply a pressure gau- B - Checking the calibrating pressure of the 30 bar
ge with a 0 to 500 bar scale. control valve (3 Fig.64-7)
When the steering cylinder reaches end of stroke, Fit tool 122 IDRGL (Fig.64-7) in the place of the
the pressure gauge must indicate a value betwe- plug (G), with a 0 to 60 bar gauge. Disengage the
en 155 and 160 bar. PTO clutch while the engine is running. The pres-
sure gauge must indicate a value of about 30 ± 2
bar.
7- 71

C - Checking the calibrating pressure of the 18 bar
control valve (diff lock supply) L
Fit tool 122 IDRGL (Fig.65-7) in the place of the
plug (L), with a 0 to 60 bar gauge. Disengage the
PTO clutch while the engine is running. The
pressure gauge must indicate a value of about 16
bar.
D - Checking the operation pressure that supplies

the 4WD disengagement (Fig.66-7)
a) Mount the tool 125 IDR GL with adapter 122 IDR

GL on the channel (F) that feeds the Spring-on
assembly and connect the pressure gauge.
b) Start the tractor and bring the engine to 900/1000 122 IDR GL Fig.62-7
RPM with the oil at a temperature of 30-40°C. En-
ergize the solenoid valve that controls the Spring-
on assembly supply. The solenoid valve is thus in
delivery position,
F
c) The supply pressure of this assembly must be 5
bar at least in order to be able to disengage the 4-
wheel drive. When the diff lock supply solenoid
valve (H) is energised, the Spring-on assembly
supply oil can reach 18 bar without any conse-
quences for the assembly itself.
125 IDR GL Fig.63-7
7 - 72
CHAP. 7
Special tools
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7- 73
Special tools
04 IDR MYT
Tool to check steering circuit pressure
125 IDR GL
Tool to check differential lock circuit pressure
122 IDR GL
Universal adapter union
7 - 74
HIGH PRESSURE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
CHAP.8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Precautions and Safety Recommendations. ......................................8-2
Sect.1 General description. ................................................................8-3

1-1 High pressure hydraulic circuit ....................................8-4
1-2 Description of the circuit ...............................................8-5
Sect.2 Technical specifications. ........................................................8-7

2-1 Main technical specifications .......................................8-8
Sect.3 Main components. ...................................................................8-9

A - Pump .......................................................................... 8-11
B - Trailer brake valve ..................................................... 8-15
C - Auxiliary control valves .............................................. 8-25
D - Mechanical power lift oil supply................................. 8-31
E - Lubrication circuit ....................................................... 8-33
Sect.4 Operating pressure tests. .................................................... 8-37

4-1 Introduction ................................................................ 8-38
4-2 Circuit pressure testss .............................................. 8-38
8-1
Precautions and Safety Recommendations

ans of this symbol:

ped to zero.

can penetrate under the skin and cause se-
rious injuries. If accidents of this type oc-
cur, immediately seek medical help to pre-
vent serious infections.

manufacturer when adhesives or detergents
are used.


8-2
CHAP. 8
General description
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-1 High pressure hydraulic circuit ....................................8-4

1-2 Description of the circuit ...............................................8-5
8-3

1-1 High pressure hydraulic circuit
GEARBOX
2 3
Fig.1-8
1- Oil filter 5- Auxiliary control valves

2- Gear pump (low pressure) 6- Power lift valve system
3- Gear pump (high pressure) 7- Hydraulic power lift
4- Trailer brake valve 8- 1.5 bar governor valve
8-4
General description
1-2 Description of the circuit
Oil from the pump (3) is sent to the trailer brake valve
(4 Fig.1-8), then to the auxiliary control valves (5 Fig.1-
8) and to the 1.5 bar governor valve at the same time,
in order to lubricate the transmission.
When these components are not activated, the oil sup-
plies the valve system of the hydraulic power lift (6
Fig.1-8).
Filter
Pump (3)
Supplies
Trailer brake valve
Auxiliary control valves
Lubricating oil circuit
Hydraulic power lift
8-5
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
8-6
CHAP. 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2-1 Main technical specifications .......................................8-8
8-7

Hydraulic pump
- Manufacturer Bx
- Type Double gear pump
- Model
- Max. operating pressure 170 ±0.5 bar
- Max. pump flow rate 53.9 l/min
- Position Front rh side of engine
- Driven by Timing system gears
- Quantity of hydraulic oil / transmission 35 l
- Oil type API GL4 (MF1135)
Filters
- Type (on the intake) with single washable metal gauze cartridge
- Filtering degree 40 micron
- Type (on the delivery) with replaceable paper cartridge
- Filtering degree 15/20 micron

- Make Hx
- Operation Standard-Single / double-acting, floating effect for
hydraulic engines, with "Kick out" automatic
release
- Type Open-center with "Push - Pull" quick couplings
- Calibration valve 170 ± 0.5 bar
- Max. flow rate 35 l/min
- Max. quantity 3
- Connection to the circuit in series
- Position on rear
8-8
CHAP. 8
Main components of the high pressure circuit
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Main components.
A - Pump .......................................................................... 8-11

B - Trailer brake valve ..................................................... 8-15
C - Auxiliary control valves .............................................. 8-25
D - Mechanical power lift oil supply................................. 8-31
E - Lubrication circuit ....................................................... 8-33
8-9
CHAP. 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A - Hydraulic pump
A1 - Main components ............................................. 8-12
A2 - Description of operation ................................... 8-13
8 - 11
A - Pump
A1 -Main components
1 - Double housing pump
2 - Seals kit
3 - OR for flange
4 - Pump drive gear
2B 1 6 - Pump shaft
2A 7 - Engine coupling flange
7 8 - High pressure intake port
8A - Low pressure intake port
4 9 - Pump delivery port (low pressure) 2A
10 - Pump delivery port (high pressure) 2B
9 10
6
10
9 8A 8
3
2B
2
2A
10
7
9
Fig.2-8
8 - 12
Pump
A2 - Description of operation
The hydraulic gear pump is made up of a single block vates any time the engine is running, taking in filtered
with two separate stages, with two intake channels (8- oil from the transmission and sending it both to the
8A) and two separate supplies (9 and 10) with different low pressure and to the high pressure system at the
flow rates. same time.
As it is directly linked to the engine, the pump acti-
8 - 13
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 14
CHAP. 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B - Trailer brake valve

B1 - General description ................................................. 8-16
B2 - Trailer brake valve - Type for Italy ........................... 8-18
B2-1 Phase with trailer hitched and pedal
brakes not used ............................................... 8-19
brakes activated .............................................. 8-20
B2-3 Phase with parking brake activated
and pedal brakes not used ............................. 8-21
B3 - Trailer brake valve - Export type ............................. 8-22
brakes not used ............................................... 8-23
brakes activated .............................................. 8-24
8 - 15
B - Trailer brake valve

B1 - General description
1
The trailer brake valve (A Fig.3a-8) is mounted in the
rear part of the tractor and supplies the trailer itself by
means of the oil union (1).
The oil reaches the high pressure circuit in absolute
priority.
Any oil that is not used by the trailer braking action is A
sent towards the auxiliary control valves.
The trailer brake operates at the same time as the
tractor brakes and when engaged, an indicator light
comes on on the dashboard.
The tractor can be equipped with two types of valve:
1 – Trailer brake valve - Type for Italy (Fig.4-8)
2 – Trailer brake valve - Export type (Fig.5-8)
As compared to the Export type, the trailer brake val- Fig.3a-8
ve for the Italian market has an additional device in
the lower part with a rod connected to the parking brake.
Italian laws require the trailer to be equipped with a
self-braking device. It must allow the trailer to brake WARNING: it is extremely important to carry
the moment in which it detaches from the tractor. Mo- out this operation always and before the trai-
reover, this braking mechanism must operate the mo- ler is detached from the tractor since it ensu-
ment in which the tractor stops and the parking brake res immediate activation of the automatic
is applied. Consequently, to tow the trailer, oil must be safety braking system with which this type
delivered to the "trailer braking" device at a constant of trailer braking system is obligatorily equip-
pressure of between 10-15 bar (in order to keep the ped.
mechanical brake disengaged) even when the brakes
are not being used.
When the trailer brake valve designed for the Italian

market is installed, comply with the following instruc-
tions to correct couple and uncouple the flexible pipe
of the trailer brakes to and from the union (1 Fig.3a-8)
at the rear of the tractor and to always work in condi-
tions of the utmost safety.
The tube that connects the trailer to the tractor can be
coupled and uncoupled with the engine either running
or at a standstill:
With the engine at a standstill: coupling and uncou-

pling can be carried out without difficulty as there is no
oil pressure in the circuit.
With the engine running: it is absolutely essentisl to

apply the hand brake sice this ensures that the brake
circuit does not remain under pressure.
8 - 16
Trailer brake valve

VALVE TYPE FOR ITALY
Fig.4-8
VALVE EXPORT TYPE
Fig.5-8
8 - 17
Trailer brake valve

B2 -Trailer brake valve for Italy
Italian laws require the trailer to be equipped with a
self-braking device. It must allow the trailer to brake
the moment in which it detaches from the tractor.
Moreover, this braking mechanism must operate the
moment in which the tractor stops and the parking
brake is applied.
Consequently, to tow the trailer, oil must be delivered
to the trailer braking device at a constant pressure of
between 10-15 bar (in order to keep the mechanical
brake disengaged) even when the brakes are not being
used.
Fig.6-8
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMSCHEMA FUNZIONALE
with trailer quick

coupling disengaged
H P N T
H P N T
with trailer quick

coupling engaged
parking
brake
Fig.7-8
8 - 18
Trailer brake valve

E1 E2 P N T
K2 C G Q G2 K
G1
W
A B
H
K1 Y
O
M
G3
L R F D S Fig.8-8
A- Quick coupling connecting the trailer brake B2-1 PHASE WITH TRAILER HITCHED AND
B- Control valve activating plunger PEDAL BRAKES NOT USED (FIG.8-8)
C- Pump - power lift connecting race
D- Chamber Oil delivered by the pump passes through duct “P”
E1 / E2 - Pressure switch until it reaches race “C” after which it proceeds on one
F - Chamber side in channel “R”, thus reaching and supplying the
G- 140 bar pressure upkeep spring trailer via chamber “H”, deactivating the below indica-
G1 - 10-15 bar pressure upkeep spring ted self-braking device. This same oil delivered by the
G2 - Liner return spring (W) pump also flows to duct "N" via race "C" and supplies
G3 - Plunger spring (L) the power lift. This flow is ensured by the position as-
H- Trailer brake outlet chamber sumed by main plunger “Q”.
K- 10-15 bar pressure adjuster shims Acting on this latter, spring “G1” ensures a constant
K1 - Plunger travel adjuster shims (Q) pressure of around 10-15 bar on the delivery, in order
K2 - 140 bar pressure adjuster shims to deactivate the trailer brake.
L - Trailer brake supply control plunger
M - Rod connecting to parking brake
N- Power lift supply
O- Return plunger
P - Pump supply
Q- Main plunger
R- Trailer brake supply channel
S - Internal brake rod channel
T - Discharge channel
Y - Supply from tractor brakes
W- Liner
8 - 19
Trailer brake valve
E1 E2 P N T
K2 C G Q G2 K
G1
W
A B
H
K1 Y
O
M
G3
L R F D S Fig.9-8
A- Quick coupling connecting the trailer brake B2-2 PHASE WITH TRAILER HITCHED AND
B- Control valve activating plunger PEDAL BRAKES ACTIVATED (FIG.9-8)
D- Chamber Oil flowing from the activated pedal brakes shifts plun-
E1 / E2 - Pressure switch ger "B" which thus compresses spring "G" and moves
F - Chamber the main plunger "Q". This latter movement allows the
G- 140 bar pressure upkeep spring oil delivered by the pump to completely flow into chan-
G1 - 10-15 bar pressure upkeep spring nel "R" and to then reach chamber "H" through race
G2 - Liner return spring (W) "F", thus supplying the trailer brake to a max pressure
G3 - Plunger spring (L) of 140 bar. Once the braking action has been obtai-
H- Trailer brake outlet chamber ned, the pressure increase shifts plunger "O" which
K- 10-15 bar pressure adjuster shims returns main plunger "Q" to the neutral position, thus
K1 - Plunger travel adjuster shims (Q) reopening the passage to channel "N" in order to sup-
K2 - 140 bar pressure adjuster shims ply the power lift.
O- Return plunger
P - Pump supply
Q- Main plunger
W- Liner
8 - 20
Trailer brake valve
E1 E2 P N T
K2 C G Q G2 K
G1
W
A B
H
K1 Y
O
M
G3
L R F D S
Fig.10-8
A- Quick coupling connecting the trailer brake B2-3 PHASE WITH PARKING BRAKE ACTIVATED
B- Control valve activating plunger AND PEDAL BRAKES NOT USED (FIG.10-8)
D- Chamber When the parking brake is operated with rod "M", out-
E1 / E2 - Pressure switch let "T" is set in communication with chamber "S" in
F - Chamber the actual rod itself. Since this latter is connected to
G- 140 bar pressure upkeep spring chamber H" which supplies the trailer, almost null pres-
G1 - 10-15 bar pressure upkeep spring sure is obtained in it. This allows the automatic trailer
G2 - Liner return spring (W) braking device to release. Oil delivered by the pump
G3 - Plunger spring (L) flows into chamber "D" and supplies the hydraulic power
H- Trailer brake outlet chamber lift via duct "N" which communicates with race “C”.
K- 10-15 bar pressure adjuster shims
K1 - Plunger travel adjuster shims (Q)
K2 - 140 bar pressure adjuster shims
O- Return plunger
P - Pump supply
Q- Main plunger
W- Liner
8 - 21
Trailer brake valve

B3 - Trailer brake valve - Export
type
Owing to different laws, the trailer brake valve Export
type, installed on tractors for markets outside Italy,
differently from trailer brake valves for the Italian
market, needs no device that triggers the trailer's self-
braking device.
Fig.11-8
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
with trailer quick

coupling disengaged
H P N T
H P N T
with trailer quick

coupling engaged
Fig.12-8
8 - 22
Trailer brake valve
C P N T
Q
G
A B
H
O Y
R J
Fig.13-8
A- Quick coupling connecting to the trailer brake B3-1 PHASE WITH TRAILER HITCHED AND
B- Control valve activating plunger PEDAL BRAKES NOT USED (FIG.13-8)
G- 140 bar pressure upkeep Oil delivered by the pump through duct "P" and race
H- Trailer brake outlet "C" proceeds towards duct "N", thus supplying the
N- To power lift hydraulic power lift.
O- Return plunger Oil in chamber "H" which communicates with the trai-
P- From pump ler, has more or less null pressure since it is in com-
Q- Main control valve plunger munication with outlet "T" through race "R" and spring
R- Trailer brake supply race chamber "G". The trailer is thus free of all braking de-
T- To outlet vices in this phase.
Y- From tractor brakes
J - Plug
8 - 23
Trailer brake valve
P N T
C Q
G
A B
H
Y
O
Fig.14-8
A- Quick coupling connecting to trailer brake B3-2 PHASE WITH TRAILER HITCHED AND
B- Control valve activating plunger PEDAL BRAKES ACTIVATED (FIG.14-8)
C- Pump - power lift duct connecting race
G- 140 bar pressure upkeep spring Oil arriving from the brake pedals shifts plunger "B"
H- Trailer brake outlet which thus compresses spring "G" and moves the
N- To power lift main plunger "Q". This movement allows oil from the
O- Return plunger pump delivery to fully flow through duct "P" into race
P- From pump "R" and to then reach chamber "H", thus supplying
Q- Main control valve plunger the trailer brake up to a max. pressure of 140 bar.
R- Trailer brake supply race Once the braking action has been obtained, the pres-
T- To outlet sure increase shifts plunger "O" which returns main
Y- From trailer brakes plunger "Q" back to the neutral position, reopening
the passage to channel "N" in order to supply the
hydraulic power lift.
8 - 24
CHAP. 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
C - Auxiliary control valves

C1 - General description ................................................. 8-26
C2 - Distributor types and controls ................................. 8-27
C2-1 Standard single and double-acting
control valve .................................................... 8-28
C2-2 Single and double-acting control valve
with floating position ........................................ 8-29
C2-3 Single and double-acting control valve
with automatic release..................................... 8-30
8 - 25
C - Auxiliary control valves

C1 - General description
The auxiliary control valves that are mounted on re-
quest are the open center type with “push-pull” quick
couplings. They are supplied by the same circuit as
the power lift.
The oil coming from the pump (3) supplies the trailer
brake valve (4) with priority, then the auxiliary control
valves (5), and finally the power lift valve system (6).
GEARBOX
2 3
Fig.15-8

8 - 26

C2- Control valve types and
controls A
The following control valves can be mounted:
1 - Standard single and double acting control valve

2 - Single and double-acting control valve with floa-
ting position 1
3 - Single and double-acting control valve with auto-
matic release 2
On Atlantis and Ghibli tractors the control valves are B 3
mounted on the right of the driver's seat, with two dif-
ferent configurations:
Fig.16-8 shows the control valves for Atlantis tractors, Fig.16-8
Fig.17/18-8 for Ghibli tractors.
The levers (A) control the control valves, while the

knobs (B) select the single acting operation (position
3), double acting operation (position 1) and lock the
lever (A) in neutral position (knob in position 2 (B Fig.16-
8). A
Fig.17-8
Fig.18-8
8 - 27
H T1 B Pc A T2 2
4 L 5 1 Pa P2 P 3 P1
Fig.19-8
C2-1 STANDARD SINGLE AND DOUBLE-ACTING

CONTROL VALVES
Oil from the pump reaches chanmber P and continues other side of the external cylinder.
on to Pa at the same time. Oil returning from hole A passes through duct T2 and
When the stem is in the hold position, oil from the flows to the outlet.
pump and chamber P moves the non-return valve (3) Once lever operation terminates, the stem is always
and reaches chambers (P1 and P2) where there is no returned to the neutral position by the spring.
outlet. The race of stem (1) allows oil from chamber To obtain single-acting operation, turn the knob (28) to
Pa to flow to chamber Pc which ensures a constant allow the pawl (L) to move to the top part of the pin (5)
supply to the auxiliary control valves or to the hydrau- in order to limit the stem's (1) travel towards the left.
lic power lift. Hole (B) must be plugged.
If the stem is moved towards the left, the oil from cham- When the stem (1) is in the neutral position, it can be
ber P can proceed through hole A to supply the exter- locked by turning knob (4) so as to set pawl (H) inside
nal cylinder. Oil returning from hole B passes through the race on the stem (1) (as shown in Fig.19-8).
duct T1 to the outlet.
If the stem is moved towards the right, the oil from
chamber P can proceed through hole B, supplying the
8 - 28
0 1 3
2
5 B A d 11
Ta Pc P Tb 9
Fig.20-8
C2-2 SINGLE AND DOUBLE-ACTING CONTROL

VALVE WITH FLOATING POSITION
(FIG. 20-8)
As compared to the standard single and double-acting

control valve, this type has a further stem setting towar-
ds the left where the floating position is obtained. This
position mechanically locks the stem (5) thanks to the
balls (9) which move into the race (d).
In these conditions, oil from the pump (P) passes throu-
gh continuity duct Pc and proceeds towards the suc-
cessive control valves or the hydraulic power lift, whi-
le the two supply holes, A and B, both communicate
with outlets Ta and Tb.
Single and double-acting operation are obtained nor-
mally, as described for the standard control valve.
8 - 29
0 1
2
B X A E F 8
5 12 1 9 15 14
Fig.21-8
C2-3 SINGLE OR DOUBLE-ACTING CONTROL

VALVE WITH AUTOMATIC RELEASE FOR
REX VINEYARD (FIG. 21-8)
As compared to the standard single and double-acting

control valve, this version allows the control lever
lockied to supply outlets A and B with automatic re-
turn to the neutral position when the external cylinder
reaches end of stroke.
Stem (5) is locked thanks to the action of plunger (15)
which, by means of the ball (14), presses on balls (9)
so that they remain housed in cavities E or F, thus
locking stem (5).
When the external cylinder reaches end of stroke, the
increase in pressure shifts the stem (12) and ball (14)
by means of holes (X). This action frees the balls (9).
Spring (8) returns the stem (5) to the neutral position.
8 - 30
CHAP. 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
D - Mechanical power lift oil supply ................................ 8-38
8 - 31
D - Mechanical power lift oil supply

After supplying the trailer brake valve (4, if mounted),
the auxiliary control valves (5) and the 1.5 bar gover- P
nor valve (8), oil from the pump (3) reaches the control
valve of the power lift (6) through tube (P) (Fig.22-8) .
After the auxiliary control valve, the oil supplies the
power lift (7) when the control lever is activated, or
returns to the oulet in the gearbox housing.
8
Fig.22-8
8
Fig.23-8
5
P
8
4
GEARBOX
2 3
1
Fig.24-8
8 - 32
CHAP. 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
E - Lubrication circuit ..................................................... 8-33

E1 - General description ......................................... 8-34
E2 - 1.5 bar governor valve .................................... 8-35
8 - 33
Sect.3 - Main components

E Lubrication circuit
E1 General description
The "high pressure" circuit includes the forced lubrica-
tion circuit for the transmission.
Oil sent to the auxiliary control valves supplies the
lubrication circuit at the same time, through a duct
formed in the cover (15) where the 1.5 bar pressure
limiting valve is installed (6), and lubricates the tran-
smission through tube (13).
4
13
CAMBIO
2 3
Fig.25-8

8 - 34
Main components
E2 1.5 bar governor valve
The purpose of the governor valve (8) is to ensure that
oil is supplied to the transmission at a pressure of 1.5
bar. 9 10 11 12
It is mounted on the cover (15) and is connected to
the gearbox by means of a flexible hose (13).
Oil enters the valve through unions (9/10) at supply
pressure required by the auxiliary control valves or
power lift (0 to 180 bar).
The unit is fitted with a plunger (11) with a spring that
regulates the maximum outlet pressure from the valve
casing (12) at a value of 1.5 bar for forced lubrication
of the gearbox.
Fig.26-8
8 15
13
Fig.27-8
15 8 13
Fig.28-8
8 - 35
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 36
CHAP. 8
Operating pressure tests
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.4 Operating pressure tests
4-1 Introduzione.............................................................. 8-38

4-2 Circuit pressure tests ............................................... 8-38
8 - 37
Sect.4 - Operating pressure tests

4-1 Introduction 02 IDR MYT
The operating pressures must be tested whenever

components operate in a faulty way or if the tractor is
generally overhauled.
Consider that a low setting for the maximum valves in
the circuit will reduce the lifting capacity of the power
lift and the potential of the auxiliary control valves.
An excessively high valve setting will dangerously
stress all the components involved.
After checking, set the valves to their correct pressu-
re values by means of the relative adjusters.
The hydraulic tests must be conducted with the engi-
ne at a rate of about 1200 RPM, with the oil at a tem-
perature of between 30/40 °C, using the special tools Fig.29-8
required and a set of pressure gauges.

01 IDR REX
ped to zero.

can penetrate under the skin and cause se-
rious injuries. If accidents of this type oc-
cur, immediately seek medical help to pre-
vent serious infections.
4-2 Circuit pressure tests

A - How to check the disengaging pressure of the
trailer brake for the Italian market. (Fig.29-8)
Fit a 0 to 25 bar pressure gauge on the quick cou-
pling using tool (02 IDR MYT). Fig.30-8
The correct disengaging pressure for the mecha-
nical trailer brake must be between 10 and 15 bar.
B - How to check the calibration pressure of the

trailer brake valve - tractors for the Italian and
Export markets. (Fig.29-8)
Fit a 0 to 400 bar pressure gauge to the quick
coupling using tool (02 IDR MYT).
The valve calibrating pressure is 140 bar.
C - How to check the implement lifting pressure

values.
Fit tool 01 IDR REX with union 122 IDR GL on the
union indicated in Fig.30-8 and apply a 0 to 500
bar pressure gauge. The valve calibrating pressu-
re is 180 bar.
8 - 38
Operating pressure tests

D - How to check the valve calibration pressure for
the auxiliary control valves. (Fig.31-8) 03 IDR MYT
Fit tool 03 IDR MYT with union 122 IDR GL on one
of the four quick couplings. Activate the lever of
the relative control valve. The pressure gauge rea-
ding must be 180-185 bar.
Fig.31-8
8 - 39
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
8 - 40
CHAP. 8
Special tools
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8 - 41
Special tools
02 IDR MYT
Union to check pressure in the trailer brake valve system
01 IDR REX
Union to check pressure in the power lift
03 IDR MYT
Union to check pressure in the auxiliary control valves
122 IDR GL
Union for universal adapter
8 - 42
MECHANICAL POWER LIFT
CHAP.9
Mechanical power lift
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Precautions and Safety Recommendations. ......................................... 9-2
Sect. 1 General description. ................................................................... 9-3

1-1 Drawing of assembly and main components ........................ 9-4
1-2 Power lift operating modes.................................................... 9-6
1-3 Main components of the valve system ................................ 9-10
1-4 Operating phases of the valve system ................................ 9-12
Sect. 2 Technical specifications. ......................................................... 9-19

2-1 Main technical specifications .............................................. 9-20
2-2 Driving torques and sealants .............................................. 9-21
Sect. 3 Inspections, adjustments and troubleshooting...................... 9-23

3-1 Hydraulic tests for valve system ......................................... 9-24
3-2 Power lift adjustments ......................................................... 9-28
3-3 Operating pressure tests .................................................... 9-34
3-4 Troubleshooting .................................................................. 9-35
Sect. 4 Special tools. ............................................................................ 9-37
9-1
Precautions and Safety Recommendations

described in this section. It is important for opera-
tors to comply with these instructions in order to
Maintenance Manual and in chapter 1 of this ma-
nual.
ans of this symbol:

ped to zero.

can penetrate under the skin and cause
serious injuries. If accidents of this type
occur, immediately seek medical help to
prevent serious infections.

manufacturer when adhesives or detergen-
ts are used.



9-2
CHAP.9
General description
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 1 General description.
1-1 Drawing of assembly and main components ........................ 9-4

1-2 Power lift operating modes.................................................... 9-6
1-3 Main components of the valve system ................................ 9-10
1-4 Operating phases of the valve system ................................ 9-12
9-3

1-1 Drawing of assembly and main components
11 12 13 14 15
10 9 8 7 6 5
1 - Control auxiliary valve 9 - External draft control lever

2 - Lift housing 10 - Lift link
3 - Cylinder 11 - Swinging support
4 - Piston 12 - Spring
5 - Link 13 - Position control cam
6 - Draft control lever 14 - End of stroke telescopic rod
7 - Link holder shaft lever 15 - Spring rod
8 - Link holder shaft Fig.1-9
9-4
General description
15
8
13 14
10
1
7 2
12
11 4
Fig.2-9
9-5
General description
1-2 Power lift operating modes
The hydraulic power lift mounted on 60 Series
tractors can operate in four different modes:
1 - Position control
2 - Draft control
3 - Mixed control
4 - Float position
Each of these four operating modes must be chosen B

to suit the type of job in hand and the surface consi-
stency of the soil.
A
1 - POSITION CONTROL (FIG.3/4-9) Fig.3-9
To work in position control mode, move the lever Movement of the lift links in height is proportional to
(B) up as shown in (Fig.3-9) and select the work the movement of the control lever.
depth with lever (A).
Position control allows the operator to bring the im-
plement to a certain position (any one between the The depth at which the implement works will not vary
highest and lowest setting, either in or out of the even if it encounters soil of a different consistency
soil) and to keep it there, depending on the position (example: zone d = sandy soil; zone e = compact
to which the control lever is set. soil; zone c = clayey soil).
Fig.4-9
c d c e
9-6
General description
2 - DRAFT CONTROL (FIG.5/6-9)
A
To work in draft control mode, move the knob (B)
fully forwards on the sector, then establish the work
depth with lever (A). Draft control mode keeps the
draft exercised by the tractor at a constant level,
automatically varying the depth at which the imple-
ment works as the soil conditions change. In this
operating mode, the implement can also change dep-
th to a considerable extent if it encounters soil of a
different consistency (e.g.: zone d = sandy soil; zone
e = compact soil), while the depth remains more or
less uniform if the soil is homogeneous (zone c =
clayey soil), whether the ground is flat or irregular.
Use of draft control mode is particularly suitable for B
jobs that require a high amount of lugging power using Fig.5-9
mounted implements, since they transfer a good part
of this to the rear driving wheels, thus increasing Maximum sensitivity is obtained with the lever in
wheel grip on the ground. the (+) position and minimum sensitivity with the
A lever at the top of the valve system regulates the lever in the (-) position.
response sensitivity of draft control mode since it
creases or reduces the travel the third point must
make to change from the neutral phase to the di-
scharge phase.
Fig.6-9
c d c e
9-7
General description
3 - MIXED POSITION AND DRAFT CONTROL
MODE A
When the tractor works on uneven ground in draft
control mode, the work depth may vary to an exces-
sive extent. This may not be acceptable for the tilla-
ge work required on that type of ground.
In these conditions, the mixed position-draft control
operating mode must be used.
To operate in this particular mode, dig the imple-
ment into the ground and find the desired work dep-
th as described for the draft control mode. B
Once the required depth has been reached, lower
lever (A), gradually move lever (B) towards position
control to increase the influence of the position con-
trol mode. The power lift will operate in draft control Fig.7-9
mode but will prevent the implement from digging
excessively into the ground when it encounters loo-
ser soil and from producing an irregular result.
When the power lift is set for mixed position and The selector lever can be set in as many posi-
draft control mode (intermix), the maximum and mi- tions as there is space between the two ends
nimum depths at which the implement can work are and its vicinity to one end or the other leads ei-
limited in relation to the average value (see zone d = ther the position or draft control modes exerci-
sandy soil; zone e = compact soil) since movement sing a greater influence.
of the lever towards the position control mode will During work, the operator must find the best posi-
have reduced the operating sensitivity of draft con- tion for the selector lever in order to achieve the
trol by introducing a little position control. best compromise between draft and depth variation.
Fig.8-9
c d c e
9-8
General description
4 - FLOATING POSITION
To work in float mode, move lever (A) fully down on

the sector.
The float position allows the lift links to freely swing.
Float mode is thus used for all implements that must
simply rest on the ground and follow its profile or for
semi-mounted implements with special components
that rest on the ground.
9-9
General description
1-3 Main components of the valve system
16 15 14 1 9 2
19
20
3
11
8
5
6 12 18 7 13 10 21 22
Fig.9-9
a - Tunnel for oil flowing from the pump

b - Pump outlet
c - Servo-valve pilot duct
d - Servo-valve piloting pressure chamber
e - Servo-valve piloting outlet
f - Tunnel delivering oil to the cylinder
g - Lifting cylinder outlet duct
i - Maximum valve outlet
m - Antishock valve outlet
9-10
General description
16
15 17
4 14 19 2
3 1 8
11
5
20
21
22
9
6
27 12 10
18 13
1 - Discharge valve stem 13 - Servo-valve plug

2 - Screw 14 - Discharge valve spring
3 - Non-return valve ball spring 15 - Discharge valve casing
4 - Non-return valve plug 16 - Discharge valve ring nut
5 - Calibration valve ball 17 - Adjuster lever
6 - Valve system stem 18 - Safety valve spring
7 - Safety valve adjuster plug 19 - Cover
8 - Spring for stem 20 - Valve system casing
9 - Spring for servo valve 21 - Calibration valve spring
10 - Servo-valve 22 - Calibration valve adjuster plug
11 - Non-return valve ball 27 - Throttle
12 - Safety valve ball Fig.10-9
9-11
General description
1-4 Valve system operating which blocks the delivery route to the control (c).
phases Meanwhile, the oil flows through the duct (a) formed
around the valve system and reaches the check valve
Three phases always occur when the power lift ope- (11) which supplies the ram (17). However, this re-
rates, regardless of whether it is used in the posi- mains closed because oil from the pump is unable
tion control, draft control or mixed position and draft to reach a sufficient pressure to open it owing to the
control (Intermix) positions. poorer opening resistance of the servo valve (10)
which is thus able to open thanks to the open pilo-
A - Valve system is neutral phase ting hole (c). This allows the oil in the piloting cham-
B - Valve system in lifting phase ber (d) to discharge into the casing through ducts
C - Valve system in discharging phase (c) and (e). Oil from the pump thus discharges into
the casing through duct (b).
These three phases will now be described indivi- Note that ducts (a) and (f) in the valve system have
dually for reasons of clarity. However, remember races all around the casing (20) so that oil is able to
that when the power lift operates, particularly in the reach the various valves.
draft control and intermix modes, the three phases The oil in the ram (17) and duct (f) is blocked by the
occur alternatively without any specific order. discharge valve (15) which is closed, thus the cir-
cuit is tight.
The anti-shock valve (12) protects the circuit between
A- VALVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL PHASE (FIG.11/ the ram (17) and the discharge valve (15), opening
12-9) and discharging the pressure peaks due to the tractor
jolting or the implement hitting against the ground.
As soon as the engine starts, the pump (23) draws
oil from the reservoir (24) through the filter (25) and
sends it through the duct (a) where it encounters the
valve stem (6) in the central position of its travel,
Fig.11-9
9-12
General description
Neutral phase
15 1 11
d
c
f
a a
6 12 10
Oil from pumo

Stationary oil
Discharged oil
Fig.12-9
9-13
General description
B - VALVE SYSTEM IN LIFTING PHASE (FIG.13/14-9)
When the operator uses the position lever to raise While the servo valve starts to close, preventing the
the implement or when, in draft control mode, the oil from discharging into the reservoir, the pressure
implement transmits the signal to indicate that it has begins to rise unti, once it has reached a sufficient
encountered greater resistance in the soil, the lever value, the oil from the pump opens the check valve
(26) moves away from the valve stem (6) and this, (11) and flows to the ram (17).
stressed by its spring (8), accompanies the move- Having reached the required height, the lever (26)
ment of the lever towards the left, thus setting to the sets the valve system back to the neutral position.
lifting phase. The rear part of the servo valve (10) is set back to
The discharge valve (15) remains closed during this the discharge position through ducts (c) and (e), thus
movement. oil on the delivery opens the servo valve again and
Oil on the delivery from duct (a) can now reach the discharges into the transmission housing.
servo valve (10), the valve stem (6) and the duct This allows the pressure to drop in the supply duct
8c9 and, seeing that the surface on this side of the and the check valve (11) closes thanks to the spring
servo valve is larger than that on the duct (b) side and the greater pressure in the user circuit, stop-
and that force is also exercised by the spring, the ping the links from lifting.
servo valve is blocked in the closed position.
Fig.13-9
9-14
General description
Lifting phase
1 11
d
c
f
a a
e
10 5
Pressurized oil
Discharged oil
Fig.14-9
9-15
General description
C- VALVE SYSTEM IN DISCHARGE PHASE (FIG.15/16-9)
When, owing to the effect of the draft control mode When the links are lowering, the valve stem (6) kee-
or following a command given by the operator, the ps the servo valve (10) released thanks to duct (c)
links must lower, the lever (8) pushes the valve stem in the discharge phase thanks to duct (e). Thus the
(6) completely into the valve body. This manoeuvre pump delivery discharges through the actual servo
also involves the discharge valve (15) which is mo- valve itself and duct (b).
ved and opened by the mechanical action of the val- The adjuster device (16) allows the discharge valve
ve system. (15) to be neared or furthered from the valve stem
Opening of valve (15) sets the ram (17) in commu- (6) in order to increase or decrease the sensitivity
nication with the outlet through duct (g). of the power lift.
Note that since the discharge valve (15) is the sli-
ding cylinder type, the valve itself will not clatter.
The advantage of this is regular link descent, while
the throttle (27) also limits the lowering speed.
Once the required height has been reached, the con-
trol lever (26) moves back and the valve stem (6),
pushed by its spring (8), returns to the neutral posi-
tion. Consequently, the discharge valve (15), af-
fected by the spring (14), returns to the hold posi-
tion, gradually shutting off the flow of oil towards the
outlet and making the user circuit tight.
Fig.15-9
9-16
General description
Discharge phase
15 14 1
27
d
c
f
a a
6 10
Oil from the pump

Discharged oil
Fig.16-9
9-17
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
9-18
CHAP.9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2-1 Main technical specifications ............................................. 9-20

2-2 Driving torques and sealants ............................................. 9-21
9-19
Sect. 2 - Technical specifications

Type of operation Position, draft and intermix
Type of control Hand lever and selector lever
Lifting cylinders:
- Type Single-acting
- Nominal diameter 100 mm
- Stroke 125 mm
- Swept volume 981 cc
Maximum valve setting 170 bar

Antishock valve setting 190 bar
Sensitivity regulation Lever on valve system
Quantity of oil in
gearbox housing 33 liters
Quantity of oil available

for external rams 10 liters
Atlantis tractors
Max. nominal lifting capacity at

lower link ends in horizontal
position, without auxiliary cylinders 2400 kg
with two auxiliary cylinders 3700 kg
Ghibli tractors
Max. nominal lifting capacity at

lower link ends in horizontal
position, without auxiliary cylinders 2400 kg
with two auxiliary cylinders 3700 kg Ghibli 80-90
with two auxiliary cylinders 4350 kg Ghibli 100
9-20
One-pack Loctite 510

silicon type
Loctite 243
Loctite 510
Loctite 510
183 ÷ 225 Nm
183 ÷ 225 Nm
- Driving torque
- Type of sealant Fig.17-9
9-21
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
9-22
CHAP.9
Inspections, adjustments and troubleshooting
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect. 3 Inspections, adjustments and troubleshooting
3-1 Hydraulic tests for valve system ......................................... 9-24

3-2 Power lift adjustments ......................................................... 9-28
3-3 Operating pressure tests .................................................... 9-35
3-4 Troubleshooting .................................................................. 9-36
9-23
Sect.3 - Inspections, adjustments and troubleshooting

3-1 Hydraulic tests for valve system C D
During the hydraulic tests, the valve system is set
in the various conditions that occur when the power
lift on the tractor is used. E
These tests allows the valves to be calibrated. It
also allows the operator to make sure that there are
no leaks and to thus establish whether the functio-
nality of the system falls within the established plan-
ning and operating limits.
The following tests are conducted:
A - Check for leaks from the discharge valve

B - Inspection and adjustment of the safety
valve A B
C - Check for leaks from the non-return valve on Fig.18-9
the user duct
D - Inspection and setting of the calibration
valve At this point, the pressure should slowly lower. If
this fails to occur, there could be excessive leaks
between the stem (13) and its housing or between
A - CHECKING FOR LEAKS FROM THE the retention rings (21) and the body of the control
DISCHARGE VALVE (FIG.18/19-9) valve.
The maximum leak tolerated at a pressure of 150
Fit control valve (C) into tool CR-342 (A), positio- bar and a temperature of 25-30°C is 3 cc in 3 minu-
ning the supply holes so that they are not closed by tes.
the body of the valve. If this value is reached, remount the valve and re-
Connect the high pressure pump duct to the top union place the retention rings (21), then repeat the test. If
(B) of the tool (lifting ram duct). the fault persists, replace the discharge valve.
Place a suitable bolt between the base of tool CR-
342 and the control valve stem (6) then, unscrewing B - CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE SAFETY
the nut of the bolt, raise the stem until its stop point VALVE (FIG.18/19-9)
is about 4 mm from the lower surface of the control
valve casing. Keep the pump connected to the same fitting on the
Operate the pump and check to make sure that the tool and operate it until the antishock valve opens
discharge valve (15) discharges the oil from the duct (12).
(G). Failing this, turn the sensitivity lever clockwise This opening action must take place at 190 bar.
until the valve opens. If this fails to occur, adjust the valve by means of
Continue to operate the pump, then begin to slowly the spring retention cap.
turn the sentivity lever anti-clockwise to begin clo- Tighten the cap to increase the setting value, un-
sing the valve. screw it to lower the value.
Stop the action as soon as oil ceases to flow from Having adjusted the valve, place a graduated test
the duct (G) and the pressure gauge shows the pres- tube under the control valve and maintain the pres-
sure increase (position 1). sure in the circuit at the value of 150 bar.
Turn the lever anti-clockwise again through to about The maximum tolerated leak in two minutes at an
280° so that the valve covers the outlet gaps in its ambient temperature of 25-30°C must not exceed
housing by 1 mm. (position 2). Operate the pump 10 cc.
until the pressure reaches the value of 150 bar. If this is not the case, check to identify the leaking
component.
9-24

Without considering the discharge valve, which was create the sharp edge again.
checked previously, make sure that the antishock The housings should be machined with an upright
valve (12) is tight by checking that no oil oozes from drill to ensure that the mill works in a perfectly per-
the duct (M). pendicular way.
If this should occur, machine its housing with the The drill should operate at 100-200 RPM at most.
CR-373 mill to create the sharp edge again. If the leaks persist, check the upper and lower re-
tention rings of the valve system.
C - CHECKING THE NON-RETURN VALVE
Note: do not attempt to re-create the housings
Another cause for leaks can be the non-return valve by tapping on the balls since this would only en-
(11). To make such leaks easier to locate and repa- large them.
ir, it is necessary to remove the calibrating valve
which is in direct communication with the delivery
duct of the valve.
This allows oil to flow straight out of the duct (L).
If this should occur, machine its housing with a mill
with a 12 mm diameter (e.g. CM 53 SLH 124) to
11
13
21
D
4 mm
6 G 12 M 10 Fig.19-9
9-25

D - CHECKING THE SETTING OF THE CALIBRA-
TION VALVE (FIG.20/21-9)
This test must also be carried out with tool CR-342.

It is essential to move the delivery pipe of the pump
to the lower fitting (D) and to tighten the closing pipe
on to fitting (B) used for the previous test (Fig.20-9).
Mount the previously removed calibration valve (5)
on the control valve assembly.
Operate the pump and check the pressure gauge to
see at which value the maximum valve (5) opens.
The exact setting is 170 bar.
Work on the retention plug of the spring if the valve
needs adjusting.
Once the valve has been adjusted, maintain a pres-
sure of 150 bar in the circuit and, after having posi- Fig.20-9
tioned a graduated test tube, make sure that the servo
valve (10) does not leak more than 100 cc in 2 mi-
nutes.
If it leaks more, the part must be replaced.
Make sure that no oil leaks from the calibration val-
ve duct (L).
If required, machine its housing with a mill with a 12
mm diameter (e.g. CM 53 SLH 124) to create the
sharp edge again.
If oil leaks from duct (g), this will be due to the play
between the top part (X) of the stem (6) and the
body of the control valve (the discharge valve will
not be responsible for this since it will have already
been checked in test A).
If oil leaks from duct (e), this will be due to the play
between the lower part (Y) of the stem and the body
of the valve system.
This leak cannot be eliminated. On the other hand, it
will not cause problems for the functionality of the
system.
However, it must not exceed 100 cc in 2 minutes.
9-26
g L
Fig.21-9
9-27

3-2 Power lift adjustments
A - FOREWORD A
The power lift will not normally need any regulation

or periodic adjustment since there are no parts su-
bject to appreciable wear.
However, it will need to be adjusted during a general

overhaul or if the power lift controls operate in a
faulty way, such as a delayed reaction to the ma-
nual and automatic commands.
It is not particularly difficult to adjust the hydraulic

B
power lift nor are special tools required. However,
the operations must be carried out with particular Fig.22-9
care so it is advisable to have them done by specia-
lized persons.
Before beginning the operations described below,
make sure that the entire hydraulic circuit is per-
fectly functional, particularly the valve system. Car-
ry out the hydraulic tests described in the previous
chapter if necessary.
B - ADJUSTMENTS
4 ajustments are required and they must be carried

out in the order listed below: WARNING: Before starting the engine, make
sure that the screws fixing the control valves
1 -Control lever coupling to the power lift output to the lift cover and the screws of the
levers; discharge valve cover are well tightened.
2 - Valve system sensitivity adjustment;
3 - Adjustment of link end travel in draft control WARNING: Keep well clear of the moving parts
mode; when the engine is running.
4 -Adjustment of link end travel in position con-
trol mode; WARNING: Before loosening the screws of
5 -Draft control mode adjustment. the discharge valve, stop the engine and
lower the lift links to the ground to bring
Note: these adjustments must be made whenever down to zero the pressure in the cylinder.
the lifting unit is overhauled or whenever the power
lift operates in a faulty way that cannot be ascribed
to the hydraulic circuit.
9-28

1 - CONTROL LEVER COUPLING TO THE POW-
ER LIFT OUTPUT LEVERS (FIG.22/23-9) A
This adjustment is carried out to make sure that when

the two control levers are at end of travel on the
sector, the two levers on the power lift must also be
at end of travel.
Proceed in the following way to make the adjust-
ments:
a - Move the mode selector knob (B Fig. 23-9)) fully

back on the sector.
Now move the internal lever (b1 Fig. 24-9) on the
power lift fully forwards against the stop. B
Now connect the two levers with the rod, appro-
priately varying its length by tightening or loos- Fig.23-9
ening rod (b) as required.
Lock the check nut after the adjustments have
been made.
b1 a1
b - Without moving the mode selector again, move
the link lifting lever (A Fig. 23-9) fully back on the
sector.
Perfectly align the external lever (a1 Fig. 24/25-
9) mounted on the power lift with the mode selec-
tor lever (b1) and connect the two levers with the
rod (a), appropriately varying its length as need-
ed. a
Note: Figure 24-9 refers to ATLANTIS tractors, fig- b

ure 25-9 refers to GHIBLI tractors. The coupling pro-
cedure of the levers is the same.
Fig.24-9
Fig.25-9
9-29

2 - VALVE SYSTEM SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT
(FIG.27/28-9)
16 X
To obtain the utmost draft control, you need to ob-
tain the maximum reaction sensitivity from the valve
plunger.
17
1 - To get access to the valve system, remove the
seat and the protections. On Ghibli tractors also
disconnect the rod (G) connecting the sensitivi-
ty control lever (D Fig. 26/27-9) with the lever on
the valve systems (F).
2 - Apply a weight of at least Kg 100 to the lift links. G
3 - Start the engine and bring it to a rate or 1000 to
1500 RPM, then wait for the transmission oil to
2 F
reach a temperature of about 20 to 30°C. 15 Fig.26-9
4 - Move the selector knob (B) to the position con-
trol position, i.e. fully back (Fig.28-9).
5 - Move the control lever (A) to about halfway along
the sector so that the lift links reach an interme-
diate position of their travel.
6 - Remove the sensitivity lever (17) so that the
discharge valve (15) can turn freely.
7 - Turn the discharge valve (15) clockwise (17) to
find the point at which it starts to open. A rhyth-
mic swinging motion of the lift links shows when
the valve has opened.
8 - Now turn the discharge valve (15) anti-clockwise D
until the links stop swinging.
Stop turning the lever, stop the engine and lower
the lift links.
Now turn the valve a further 30° or so in the anti-
clockwise direction.
9 - The position to which the discharge valve sets,
is thus the valve's point of maximum sensitivity. Fig.27-9
Since this point can be located with the spring
pin (E) on the lever against the lower counter-
sunk hex screw (x):
a - remount the lever (17) on the discharge valve A
(15)
b - loosen the four screws (2) and simultaneously
turn the lever (17) and the ring nut (16) in order
to bring the point of maximum sensitivity to the
required position.
Fig.28-9
9-30

3 - ADJUSTMENT OF LINK END OF TRAVEL IN
DRAFT CONTROL MODE A
The purpose of this adjustment is to make the lift

links stop with the due play by adjusting the end of
travel device.
Proceed in the following way to make the adjust-
ments:
A - Release the lift links from the articulated lower

rods.
B - Move the lift links (10 Fig.30-9) completely up

by hand so that the inner stay lever moves to
B
end of travel against the power lift casing. Now
make a permanent reference mark (S1 and S2) Fig.26-9
Fig.29-9
on both the power lift casing and the lift link.
C - Start the engine and bring it to a 1000-1500 RPM

rate, then wait until the transmission oil reaches
a temperature of at least 20-30 °C.
10
D - Move the operating mode selector knob (B) to
the draft control position, i.e fully forwards.
mm
E - Lower the links and apply a weight of not less 4-5
than 100 Kg to them.
F - Move the control lever (A) to the upper part of S2

the sector so that the links reach their maximum
height. S1
G - The links must stop when the reference mark

(S2 Fig.30-9) made on the link is 4-5 mm lower
Fig.30-9
than that made on the power lift housing. Make a
reference mark on the casing to match the mark
on lift link S2.
H - If the difference is higher or lower than the indi-

cated value, operate the adjuster screw (H
Fig.31-9) of the telescopic lever of the limit switch
(14 Fig.31-9) through the opening in the upper
part of the power lift housing.
Unscrew to advance activation of the limit switch
or tighten to delay it.
H
14
Fig.31-9
9-31

4 - ADJUSTMENT OF LINK END TRAVEL IN POSI-
TION CONTROL MODE (FIG.32/33-9)
A
The purpose of this adjustment is to make link trav-
el the same in both the position control and draft
control modes by contenporaneous action of the limit
switches.
a - Keep a 100 kg load applied to the lift links.
b - Start the engine and bring it to a 1000-1500 RPM B

rate.
c - Move the operating mode selector knob (B

Fig.32-9) to the position control mode, i.e. com-
pletely back on the sector. Fig.32-9
d - Move the control lever (A) upwards to end of

travel on the sector. The links must lift and stop
in the identical position to the previous adjust-
ment, i.e. the mark on the link must match the 15 T 13
end of travel mark previously made on the cas-
ing, 4-5 mm from the S1 mark (coincides with
the previously made S2 mark).
e - If the free travel is the same as the previous end

of travel adjustment made for draft control, make
sure that the spring stay (15) activates at the
same time as the telescopic lever (14 Fig.33-9).
To check this, unscrew, thus lengthening, the G
screw (T) of the spring stay to advance the acti-
vation of the link limit switch.
In this case, the lift links will lower to an extent 14 H
proportional to screw lengthening.
Now tighten, thus shortening, the same screw Fig.33-9
by small extents to allow the links to lift again.
Stop when the last movement obtained allows
the same maximum lift as the previous adjust-
ment to be obtained.
This operation will also annul the play between
the spring stay (15), the lever (G) and the cam
mounted on the link bearing shaft (13).
f - If the free travel exceeds the indicated value (e.g.:

6-7 mm), tighten the spring stay (15) adjuster
screw (T) to lift the links and bring the free trav-
el to the required value (4-5 mm).
9-32

5 - DRAFT CONTROL ADJUSTMENT (Fig.34/35/36-9)
The purpose of this adjustment is to allow the swing- A

ing support to travel to the exact extent (11 Fig.35-
9) and synchronized with full use of lever travel (A)
on the sector. This adjustment is made by means of
the screw (1 Fig. 36-9) and rod (9 Fig.35-9), appro-
priately varying the length of this latter.
a - Keep a 100 Kg load applied to the lift links and

make sure that when the links are fully lowered,
the load does not touch the ground. Now start
the engine and bring it to a 1300-1500 RPM rate.
B
b - Move the selector knob (B) to the draft control
mode, i.e. fully forwards (Fig.34-9). C
Fig.34-9
c - Move the link lifting lever (A) fully forwards on

the sector, past the adjustable pawl (C).
d - Push the swinging support (9) forwards until it

stops against the nut (2 Fig.36-9), thus reaching
the maximum positive draft mark.
e - With the engine running, move the control lever

(A) beyong the pawl (C). The links should now
begin to lift.
The links must lower when the lever is moved
below the pawl.
The purpose of this test is to set the point at
which draft control is cut-out when the lever is
fully forwards and the links down, this to allow
the implement to quickly dig into the soil when
the furrow begins. 11 9 Fig.35-9
In the absence of these conditions, lengthen rod
(9 Fig. 35-9) to advance and shorten it to delay
the action.
Lock the rod (9) check nut after adjusting.
Fig.36-9
11
2 1
9-33

f - Move the lever (A) up to about 10 mm from end
of travel on the sector. Fig.37-9
Unscrew the screw (1 Fig. 37-9) about two turns
and, with the aid of a lever, keep the swinging
support (11) pulled back and touching the actual
screw itself.
Start the engine and tighten the screw (1) until
the links start to lift.
Stop tightening and lock the nut (2).
The purpose of this adjustment is to be certain
the links lift with the maximum negative draft.
11
2 1
m
10 m
Fig.38-9
9-34

3-3 How to check the operating 01 IDR REX
pressure values
WARNING: Fluid under pressure can pe-

netrate the skin and cause injury. In case
of such an accident, seek medical help im-
mediately to avoid the risk of severe in-
fections.
Fit tool 01 IDR REX with adapter 122 IDR GL and

apply a 0 to 400 pressure gauge as indicated in Fig.39-9
Fig.35-9.
With the engine running, lift the implement and mea-
sure the operating pressure.
The maximum tolerated pressure is 180 bar.
9-35

3-4 Troubleshooting
FAULTS PROBABLE CAUSES REMEDIES
The power lift fails to lift when - Servovalve (10 Fig.9-9) locked - Check to make sure that the
empty in the open position valve slides smoothly and
check it for tightness
- The pump fails to deliver oil be- - Prime by filling the pump and
cause it is not primed suction pipe with transmission
oil
The power lift fails to lift the im- - Clogged filter on the intake - Demount and clean the filter
plement or is slow to lift it
- Inefficient pump - Replace the pump
- Imperfect servovalve tightness - Check tightness

(10 Fig.9-9)
- Calibration (5) or safety valve - Check and calibrate the two

(12 Fig.9-9) with a low setting valves
- Lower retention ring of valve - Replace the ring

gear housing faulty
- Leaking discharge valve - Check and overhaul the di-

(1 Fig.9-9) scharge valve
- Faulty switch retention rings - Replace the rings
- Implement too heavy - Change the implement or move

the hitch nearer
The power lift fails to keep the im- - Defective seal of the non-return - Conduct hydraulic bench tests
plement in the raised position ball (11 Fig.9-9) on the valve system to locate
the leaks
- Leaking discharge valve - Check and if necessary repla-
(1 Fig.9-9) ce the discharge valve
- Leaking safety valve - Check and overhaul the safety
(12 Fig.9-9) valve
- Upper retention ring of valve - Replace the ring
gear housing faulty
- Faulty switch retention ring - Replace the ring
- Faulty seals on lifting cylinder - Replace the ring

piston
- Aluminium plugs that shut the - Replace the plugs

machined holes on the cylin-
der and power lift cover
9-36
CHAP.9
Special tools
INDEX
Sect. 4 Special tools. ........................................................................... 9-38
9-37
Sect.4 - Special tools

01 IDR REX
Union to check lift pressure
CR 342
Valve system checking device
122 IDR GL
Universal adapter union
9-38
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GHIBLI TRACTORS
CHAP. 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Precautions and safety warnings. .................................................... 10-2
Sect.1 General description. ............................................................. 10-3

1-1 Basic concepts .......................................................... 10-4
1-2 Electrical symbols ................................................... 10-13
1-3 Main wiring diagram ................................................ 10-21
1-4 Main wiring diagram (NAO version)........................ 10-28
Sect.2 Technical specifications. ................................................... 10-33

2-1 Main technical specifications .................................. 10-34
2-2 Relays and fuse boxes ........................................... 10-35
Sect.3 Wiring ................................................................................. 10-39

3-1 Introduction ............................................................. 10-40
3-2 General description ................................................ 10-42
3A - Battery-starter motor line (positive) ........................ 10-45
3B - Front engine line ..................................................... 10-51
3C- Inner cab line .......................................................... 10-65
3D- Inner cab line (NAO version).................................. 10-79
3E - Roof-cab line .......................................................... 10-93
3F - Roof-cab line (NAO version) ................................ 10-109
3G- Rear line ............................................................... 10-125
Sect.4 Main components. ............................................................ 10-135

4-1 Introduction ........................................................... 10-136
4A - Sensors ................................................................ 10-137
4B - Solenoid valves ................................................... 10-143
4C - Switches and buttons .......................................... 10-149
4D - Instrument ............................................................ 10-155
Sect.5 Check-control and troubleshooting. .............................. 10-161

5-1 How to diagnose and identify a fault .................... 10-162
5-2 Electric system tests ............................................. 10-162
10-1

ans of this symbol:
WARNING: always consult the instructions

in the operation and maintenance manual
when you work on the battery.
WARNING: take all the necessary precau-

tions when installing batteries containing
sulphuric acid. Immediately rinse the af-
fected parts under running water is the acid
accidentally splashes on to the skin or into
the eyes.
WARNING: when you mix acid with water,

SLOWLY POUR THE ACID INTO THE WA-
TER, NEVER POUR THE WATER INTO
THE ACID.
WARNING: explosive gases are released

when batteries are charged. Always work in
a well ventilated place, well away from fla-
mes and sparks.
WARNING: always switch off the charging

equipment before disconnecting the cables.
WARNING: keep the battery well out of chi-

ldren's reach.
WARNING: do not smoke when you are

cheking or handling batteries.
WARNING: disconnect the negative termi-

nal first. When you install the battery again,
connect the positive terminal first. Always
take care to check the polarity of the termi-
nals.
WARNING: always disconnect the ground

wire (-) of the battery before working on the
electrical system.
10-2
CHAP. 10
General description
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-1 Basic concepts .......................................................... 10-4

10-3

1-1 Basic concepts
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
This is the term that describes all the practical

applications of the electrical phenomena.
E.g.: industrial and civil systems, process controls,
automatisms in general.
ELECTRONICS
Branch of engineering that studies how to control

electrons for “useful purposes”. Electrons can flow in
a vacuum, in a gas, in a liquid solution or in solid
materials (semiconductors, conductors,
superconductors).
ANALOG ELECTRONICS
Part of electronics that deals with all the equipment or

systems that manage and process electrical signals
without changing their nature.
E.g.: resistances, sensors, condensers and diodes are
typical components of an analog circuit.
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
From the English term “Digital” or “Digit” (figure of a

numbering system). Part of electronics that deals with
all the equipment or systems that use magnitudes in a
numerical form, i.e. in numbers, of a particular
numbering system.
E.g.: operational amplifiers, microprocessors, digital
sensors and digital displays are typical parts of a digital
circuit.
SENSORS
Device that converts a physical magnitude into an

electrical signal.
POTENTIOMETERS
Components that convert a movement into a voltage

variation, using the resistive divider concept.
10-4
General description
ELECTRIC VOLTAGE
The value of the potential energy assumed by the Voltage is measured by means of a Voltmeter
unitary electric charge is called electric potential of a
point in space, if located in that point. Multiples and submultiples
The symbol of electric potential is V. Its defining for-
mula is expressed by the ratio Kilovolt (Kv) = 1000 V
Volt (V) =1V
Millivolt (mv) = 0.001 V
W
V=
Q
between the potential energy value W possessed by a
charge Q positioned in the considered point and the
value of the charge itself. According to this definition,
the unit of measurement of the potential is the joule a
coulomb, i.e. the Volt (V).
The meaning of this physical magnitude is very
important. The electric potential expresses a
measurement of the energy content of a charge
positioned in a certain point. There will be a higher
energy content if the charge is positioned in points
with a higher potential. On the other hand, the energy
content will be lower if the points in which the same
charge is positioned have a lower potential.
To be more exact, one could say that the energy of an
electric charge depends on both the Q value of that Voltage
charge and on the potential value V in the point in V
which the charge is to be found. The following relation
is used to calculate this energy VA
A B
W =Q V
When the electric potentials VA and VB of two different

points A and B in space are different from each other, VB
the difference
UAB = VA - VB
is called potential difference (p.d.) between the two

points, or “electric voltage”.
One could say that the voltage between two points
Battery
represents the quantity of energy yielded by the unitary
charge in the passage between the first and second
point, or the work accomplished by the same unitary
charge in the process of transfer between the same Fig.1-10
two points.
10-5
General description
ELECTRIC CURRENT
An orderly movement of electric charges, however it Current is measured with the aid of an amperometer
is produced and through whichever physical medium, (tester function)
is called electric current.
In technical applications, the type of current more
generally used is the one caused by the circulation of
free electrons throuch conducting materials connected Multiples and submultiples
to electric generators.
However it is connecdted to generators and users, Kiloampere (KA) = 1000 A
every complex of conductors forms an electric circuit. Ampere (A) =1A
Thus defined, the electric circuit contains a current Milliampere (mA) = 0.001 A
whenever it is closed, i.e. whenever electrical continuity
is formed in it amongst all the components with which
it is formed. If this continuity is broken, the circuit is
known as open and no current can be produced in it.
The migratory movement of the electric charges along
a circuit containing current can possess uniform and
constant, fade-free characteristics: in this case, the
current is called direct current. Variable current is when
the electrons do not circulate in a uniform and constant
way.
The greater or lesser intensity of an electric current
can be completely defined by means of the quantity of Current
electricity that passes through any section of the circuit I
within one second.
This unit of measurement has been intentionally named
ampere and is indicated by the symbol A.
By and large, if any section of the circuit is crossed by
a Q coulomb quantity of electricity within ∆t seconds,
one can say that the circuit is crossed by an electric
current whose intensity I, expressed in amperes, is
given by the ratio
Q
I=
∆t
Battery
By measuring the CURRENT, one measures the
intensity of a flow of electrons in a determined branch
of the electric circuit.
Fig. 2-10
10-6
General description
ELECTRIC RESISTANCE
Different conductor wires offer a different “electric re- Multiples and submultiples
sistances” to the passage of current; the ratio betwe-
en any voltage value applied to the ends of the wire KiloOhm (K ) = 1000
and the corresponding intensity value of the current Ohm ( ) =1
that passes through the wire being the electric resi- MilliOhm (m ) = 0.001
stance of each wire in question. Thus, if a metal wire
is crossed by a current with intensity I under the ac-
tion of voltage V, this means that the wire possesses
a resistance R expressed by the ratio
R= V
I
If the number of volts that measures voltage V applied
to the ends of the conductor in question equals the
number of amperes that measures the current I, the
value of the ratio between voltage and current will be
1: this means that the conductor in question has unitary
electrical resistance. A similar wire with a 1 V voltage
applied to its ends is crossed by a 1A current and
under a 10V voltage is crossed by a 10A current and
so forth.
Each conductor that complies with this condition forms
within itself the electrical resistance called unit of
measurement of resistance.
The unit of measurement of electrical resistance is
therefore represented by the resistance of the
conductor that requires 1V at its ends in order to be Electrical resistance
crossed by a 1A current.
The unit of electrical resistance is called Ohm and is R
indicated by symbol Ω. Thus:
1 ohm = 1 volt ; (1 = 1 V/A )

ampere
By saying that a wire has a 10 Ω electrical resistance,

one expresses the fact that that wire requires a 10V
voltage at its ends for each ampere of current that
crosses it. If that wire must be crossed by 2A, it will
require 20V voltage at its ends.
To understand the concept, one can compare
resistance to the effort water makes when it flows
through a pipe; proportional to the roughness of the
internal walls, the section of the pipe and its length.
The electrical resistance does not change as the Battery
voltage or current changes but varies as the tempera-
ture varies (even only slightly). It should thus be
considered as a physical characteristics of the material. Fig. 3-10
10-7
General description
OHM'S LAW
Given the resistance R of the conductor, one could Now consult a second series of measurements.
say that each time any voltage V is applied to its ends, Maintain the voltage value constant and calculate the
the conductor will be crossed by a current whose current values as the resistance varies (potentiometer
intensity will be expressed by the relation type):
V Table 2 V = constant = 18 V
I=
R Resistance
in Ohms ( ) 300 600 1200 2400
Inversely, each time the conductor with resistance R
is crossed by a current with intensity I, there must be Current
a voltage at its ends whose vaue is given by the pro- In Milliamperes (mA) 60 30 15 7.5
duct.
V=RI
Similarly:
V
R=
I
The corresponding relations form Ohm’s law which

expresses the basic relation amongst the three
Amperometer
magnitudes described previously: Voltage (V),
Resistance (R), Current (I). A
This allows you to calculate one of the three magnitudes
if the other two are known.
Example
Voltage gen.
Resistance
Let’s consider a series of measurements; maintain a

Voltmeter
constant resistance value R = 300 Ω, consult the

following which gives a first series of current values
V
R
as the voltage varies:
Table 1 R = constant = 300

Voltage
in Volts (V) 3 6 9 12
Current Fig. 4-10

in Milliamperes (mA) 10 20 30 40
10-8
General description
OPERATING FAULTS IN ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
There can be four types of fault in an electrical circuit:
1- excessive resistance in the circuit

(high resistance)
2- broken circuit (open circuit)
3- grounded circuit
4- short-circuit
In a simple circuit like the one illustrated in Fig.5-10,

there are only three parts where these operating faults
may occur:
- prior to the control switch (A)
- between the control switch (A) and the load (B)
- after the load (B)
It is easy to mistake an operating fault with a fault in
the circuit. Great care must therefore be taken when
identifying the cause of the fault so that it can be easi-
ly and correctly remedied.
Example: a component may not operate before To

connector is disconnected and operate after this con-
nector has been re-connected. The reason for this could
be excessive resistance which created a voltage drop
on the terminals of the connector, thus preventing the
right amount of current to pass through to the compo-
nent.
A B
Fig.5-10
10-9
General description
1- HIGH RESISTANCE
2- OPEN CIRCUIT
A circuit with high resistance could lead to a slow NOTE: the example refers to an excessive resistance
movement, a weak light or failure of a component to between (D) and (F), and a circuit opening between (F)
work (e.g.: owing to slackened, corroded, dirty or gre- and (G).
asy terminals, or a wire whose diameter is too small,
or the cables having been pulled). - Repair the circuit as required.
In the case of an "open" circuit, the component may
not operate since the circuit is broken (e.g.: a torn - Repeat the inspection procedure after having repai-
wire, disconnected terminals, switch protection devi- red the circuit
ce open).
Proceed in the following way to identify the location of
an "excessive resistance" or "open circuit":
- with the monitoring switch (C) "on" and the load (I)
connected in the circuit, check to make sure that the-
re is the right voltage in an easily accessible point
between (D) and (H).
If the voltage is low, move towards the current source
(A) until you find the point in which the voltage drops.
If the voltage is correct, move towards the load (I) and
the ground terminal (J) until you find the point in which
the voltage drops.
B C D E F G
H I
A J
A - Battery F - Connector of circuit

B - Fuse G - Connector of circuit
C - Switch H - Terminal of component
D - Terminal of component I - Lamp
E - Circuit resistance J - Ground Fig.6-10
10-10
General description
3- CIRCUIT GROUNDED
A grounded circuit will prevent the components from

working and the fuse or automatic switch will open
(e.g.: the power supply flex has a grounded contact).
a "grounded circuit":
- check whether there is continuity towards ground

between (C) and (D) with the control switch (D) off.
If there is no break, the circuit is grounded between
(C) and (D). Eliminate the fault from this part of the
circuit.
If there is a break towards ground between (C) and
(D), disconnect the load (H) in point (G). With the con-
trol switch (D) off, now check whether there is continu-
ity between (D) and (F). If there is no break, the circuit
is grounded between (E) and (F). Eliminate the fault
from this part of the circuit.
NOTE: there is a ground between (E) and (F) in the

example.
- Repeat the functional test after the repairs have been

made.
B C D E F
G H
A - Battery E - Terminal of component

B - Fuse terminal F - Ground circuit
C - Fuse terminal G - Terminal of component
D - Switch H - Lamp
Fig.7-10
10-11
General description
4- SHORT-CIRCUIT
A short-circuit in the electrical system usually causes Wires not housed in a protective tube: bind the wire
two components to operate by activating only one of in question with insulating tape or replace it and bind
the switches (e.g.;: improper contact between two with insulating tape as required.
wires).
One component can also be short-circuited; however, Wires housed in a protective tube:
this usually causes the protection device of the circuit - replace the entire wiring in the case of hot points in
to open. short-circuited zones of pre-assembled wiring.
Proceed in the following way to identify the location of - If there are no hot points, install a new wire of an
a "short circuit": appropriate gauge between the last two connectors
and bind the wire with insulating tape to suit the ex-
- move switch (A) so that it operates the right lamp ternal shape of the wiring itself.
(B).
- Repeat the functional test after repairing.
- Begin with control switch (D) of lamp (I), which should
not come on, and disconnect the wire at terminal (E).
- Following the circuit, disconnect the wire at con-

nectors (F,G or H) until the supplementary lamp (I)
stops operating.
- The short-circuit or improper connection will be betwe-

en the last two points in which the wire was con-
nected. In the example, it is between (F) and (G).
- Repair the circuit in the following way:
A B
C D E F G H I
A - Switch F - Connector of circuit

B - Lamp G - Connector of circuit
C - Fuse H - Terminal of component
D - Switch I - Lamp
E - Terminal of component
Fig.8-10
10-12
General description
1-2 Electrical symbols Connector terminal
box between cable
lines
This section indicates the main symbols used in the
main wiring diagram.
The symbols comply with CEI standards.
Alternator
Sensor
Battery
Diode
Relay coil
Solenoid valve
Relay contact
Thermostarter
Sensor
Ignition switch Fuse
Fig.9-10
10-13
General description
Horn Starter motor
Switch Power socket for

trailer
Lamp Sensor
Radio with loudspeakers Button
Sensor Connector for

electronic power
lift
Sensor Resistance
Fig.10-10
10-14
General description
Connector to instrument Cigarette lighter
Selector A/C switch
Selector A/C fan switch
Hazard lights A/C water and tem-

perature regulation
valve
Beacon switch
Windscreen washer motor
Fig.11-10
10-15
General description
HOW TO READ AND INTERPRETATE A FUNCTIO-
NAL ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
Each component (electrical device) and main connector

(terminal boards) is identified by a letter. The letter
goes together with a number, to keep all the compo-
nents within the same letter group separated and iden-
tified.
IDENTIFICATION
LETTER
TYPE EXAMPLE
A System, subgroup, unit Control unit, jack box,

two-way radio, logical module
B Transducer to convert non electrical Speed sensors, pressure sensors, horns, pressure
in electrical variables and vice versa switches, sensors, detectors, limit value sensors,
pulse generators, loudspeakers, inductive detectors,
probes, air flow sensors, oil pressure switches,
temperature sensors, ignition-voltage detectors
C Condenser Generical condensers
D Binary device, memory Digital devices, integrated circuits, pulse counters,

tape recorders
E Various devices and appliances Heaters, air conditioners, lights, headlights,

spark plugs, electromagnetic switches
F Safety devices Release devices, safety devices against

polarity, fuses, safety electrical circuits
G Power unit, generator Battery, generators, alternators, battery chargers
H Monitor, warning light, signals Acoustic alarms, indicator lights, turn indicators,
brake lights, warnings, warning lights, buzzers
K Relays Battery relay, turn indicator relay, solenoid

switches, starter relay, blinkers
L Inductor Cut-off coils, coils, windings
M Motors Fan motors, starter motors
N Governor, amplifier Governors (electronic or electro-mechanical),

voltage stabilizers
P Gauge Amperometer, diagnostic connectors, tachometer,

fuel gauge, pressure gauges, measure points,
test points, speed indicators
10-16
General description
IDENTIFICATION
LETTER
TYPE EXAMPLES
Q Control equipment for power Normally open microswitches

circuits Normally closed microswitches
R Resistor Flame glow plugs, flame glow plugs with sheathed

element, glow plugs, heating resistors, NTC
resistors, PTC resistors, potentiometers,
regulation resistors
S Switch Switches and buttons, universal key-switch,

light switch, horn switch, blinker switch
T Transformer Ignition coil, ignition transformer
U Modulator, converter Direct current transformers
V Semiconductor, thermionic tubes Transistors, diodes, thermionic tubes, rectifiers,

semiconductors, thiristors, Zener diodes
W Transmission way, conductor, Antenna, shielding components, shielded

antenna conductors, harness, conductors
grounding cables
X Terminal, plug, plug and socket Terminal pins, electrical connections,

connection electric line couplers, line connectors,
sockets, plugs, terminals, plug and socket
connections
Y Driven mechanical device Permanent magnets, injection (solenoid) valves,

electro-magnetic clutches and brakes, breathers,
fuel pumps, solenoid valves, switch valves,
starter valves, locking systems
Z Electrical filter Interference filters
10-17
General description
FEEDER LINE
REF. COLUMN (BATTERY POSITIVE)
NUMBER
CABLE
COLOUR
REF. TO OTHER DIAGRAM

SECTIONS
TERMINAL BOX
COMPONENT
TERMINAL
TERMINALS
TERMINAL BOX
NUMBER
COMPONENT
IDENTIFICATION
NEGATIVE LINE FROM

BATTERY (GROUND)
Fig.12-10
The functional diagram of Ghibli tractors is divided into

four parts. The components are denominated in the
same way as in the matching wiring diagrams.
The functional diagram complies with CEI standards.
Each component is always preceded by an underline
sign symbol.
Example:
_EH1 - Thermostarter
10-18
General description
IDENTIFICATION OFCOMPONENTS IN THE FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM (STANDARD VERSION)
SIGN DESCRIPTION Part Column SIGN DESCRIPTION Part Column
_A01 Instrument 1 7 _F13 4WD solenoid valve 3 8

_A02 Radio 3 4 _F14 LH front main beam 3 6
_B01 Alternator 1 6 _F15 RH front main beam 3 5
_B1 LH loudspeaker 3 4 _F16 Passenger ceiling light 3 4
_B2 RH loudspeaker 3 4 _F17 Radio 3 4
_D01 Hazard lights 2 11 _F18 Electronic power lift enabling 3 3
_D1 Electronics for temperature regulation 4 6 _F19 LH front dipped beam 3 6
_D2 Recycling switch 4 6 _F20 RH front dipped beam 3 6
_E01 Water valve, cab temperature regulation 4 6 _F21 Electronic power lift enabling 4 11
_EH1 Thermostarter 1 9 _F22 Front work lights 4 10
_EH2 Fuel solenoid valve heater 3 9 _F23 Rear work lights 4 9
_EH3 Cigarette lighter 4 7 _F24 Rear window wiper 4 8
_EL1 Licence plate light 2 3 _F25 Water pump, front & rear window washer 4 8
_EL2 Beacon light 3 7 _F26 Windscreen wiper 4 7
_EL3 Cab light 3 5 _F27 Cigarette lighter, roof line 4 6
_EL4 LH front work light (outer) 4 11 _F28 Air conditioning powering 4 5
_EL5 LH front work light (inner) 4 11 _F29 Air conditioning powering (fan) 4 5
_EL6 RH front work light (inner) 4 11 _GB1 Battery 1 11
_EL7 RH front work light (outer) 4 10 _HA1 Horn 3 7
_EL8 LH rear work light (outer) 4 10 _HL1 LH brake light 3 11
_EL9 LH rear work light (inner) 4 9 _HL2 RH brake light 3 11
_EL10 RH rear work light (inner) 4 9 _HL3 LH front turn indicator light 2 10
_EL11 RH rear work light (outer) 4 9 _HL4 LH rear turn indicator light 2 9
_EL12 LH front beam 3 6 _HL5 RH front turn indicator light 2 9
_EL13 RH front beam 3 5 _HL6 RH rear turn indicator light 2 9
_EV1 AC electric fan motor 4 5 _HL7 LH front sidelight 2 5
_EV2 Fan motor 4 4 _HL8 RH rear sidelight 2 4
_FU1 Key switch power 1 11 _HL9 LH rear sidelight 2 4
_FU2 Alternator power 1 6 _HL10 RH front sidelight 2 4
_FU3 Horn and rotating beacon power 3 7 _M1 Starter motor 1 9
_FU4 Direct users feed power 3 5 _M2 Rear window wiper motor 4 8
_F1 Thermostarter 1 9 _M3 Window washer motor 4 8
_F2 Instrument positive 1 5 _M4 Windscreen wiper motor 4 7
_F3 Hazard lights direct power 2 11 _M5 Cab air circulation motor 4 5
_F4 Light switch 2 7 _SA0 General key contatc selector 1 11
_F5 Cigarette lighter 2 7 _SA01 Hazard lights selector 2 11
_F6 Hazard light, key contact powering 2 11 _SA02 Combination switch (turn ind., front beams) 2 7
_F7 Night lighiting (dashboard, controls) 2 6 Combination switch (horn button) 3 7
_F8 LH front sidelight and RH rear sidelight 2 4 _SA03 Air conditioning fan switch 4 4
_F9 RH front sidelight and LH rear sidelight, lic.plate light 2 4 _SA1 4WD switch 3 8
_F10 Brake light 3 11 _SA2 Rotating beacon switch 3 7
_F11 Diff lock fuse 3 10 _SA3 Cab light switch (in the ceiling light) 3 5
_F12 Rich mixture control 3 9 _SA4 Front work light switch 4 10
10-19
General description
IDENTIFICATION OFCOMPONENTS IN THE FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM (STANDARD VERSION)
SIGN DESCRIPTION Part Column Term. boxes
_SA5 Rear work beam switch 4 9 X1 Terminal box for front line/cab inside
_SA6 Rear switch (included in the engine block) 4 8 X2 Terminal box for rear line/cab inside
_SA7 Front switch (included in the engine block) 4 7 X3 Terminal box for roof line/cab inside
_SA8 Air recycle switch 4 6
_SA9 Air conditioning switch 4 4
_SB1 Diff lock button 3 10
_SB2 Front and rear window washer button 4 8
_SL1 Fuel level sensor 1 4
_SL2 Brake fluid level sensor 1 6
_SP1 Trailer hydraulic braking sensor 1 5
_SP2 Oil filter blockage sensor 1 5
_SP3 Engine oil pressure sensor 1 5 RELAY COIL POSITION
_SP4 Air filter blocked sensor 1 4
SIGN DESCRIPTION Part Column
_SP5 Air conditioning filter sensor 4 4
_SQ1a Shuttle lever position sensor (microswitch) 1 7 _KL1 Starter motor power relay 1 9
_SQ1b Creeper lever position sensor (microswitch) 1 7 _KL2 ProportionalPTOpower(INDICATORLIGHT) 1 8
_SQ2 Proportional PTO sensor (microswitch) 1 7 _KL3 Independ. low speed PTO power (INDICATOR LIGHT) 1 8
_SQ3 Proportional PTO engaged sensor (microswitch) 1 8 _KL4 Start enable power relay 1 7
_SQ4 Independent low speed PTO sensor (microswitch) 1 8 _KL5 Cab users power relay (UNDER KEY) 1 11
_SQ5 4WD engaged sensor (microswitch) 1 7 _KL6 Front beam ground contact power relay 1 11
_SQ6 Parking brake engaged sensor (microswitch) 1 6 _KL7 Air conditioning power relay 1 10
_SQ7 Brake pedal, brake and diff lock sensor (microswitch) 3 11 _KL8 Positive instrument, diff lock and 4WD,
_SQ8 2nd brake pedal, brake and diff lock sensor (microswitch) 3 11 hazard lights power relay 1 10
_SR1 Speed in Kmh sensor 1 7 _KL9 Main front beams contact power relay 2 6
_SR2 PTO rotation speed sensor 1 4 _KL10 Diff lock solenoid valve contact
_ST1 Radiator liquid temperature sensor 1 6 power relay 3 10
_R Cab fan speed resistor 4 4 _KL11 A/C fan contact power relay 4 4
_RP1 Temperature regulation potentiometer 4 5

_V A/C operation LED 4 3 RELAY CONTACT POSITION
_YV1 Diff lock solenoid valve 3 9
_YV2 Rich mixture solenoid valve 3 9
_KL1 Starter motor power relay 1 9
_YV3 Rich mixture solenoid valve 3 8
_KL2 ProportionalPTOpower(INDICATORLIGHT) 1 6
_YV4 4WD solenoid valve 3 8
_KL3 Independ. low speed PTO power (INDICATOR LIGHT) 1 6
_XS1 Rear trailer socket pin 3 (LH TURN INDICATOR ) 2 9
_KL4 Start enable power relay 1 9
_XS3 Rear trailer socket pin 3 (GROUND) 3 7
_KL5 Cab users power relay (UNDER KEY) 1 10
_XS4 Rear trailer socket pin 4 (RH TURN INDICATOR) 2 9
_KL6 Front beam ground contact power relay 1 6
_XS5 Rear trailer socket pin 6 (RH SIDELIGHT) 2 4
_KL7 Air conditioning power relay 1 5
_XS6 Rear trailer socket pin 4 (BRAKE) 3 10
_KL8 Positive instrument, diff lock and 4WD,
_XS7 Rear trailer socket pin 2(LHSIDELIGHT) 2 5
hazard lights power relay 1 5
_XJ1 2-way connector, electronic power lift PIN 1 1 8
_KL9 Main front beams contact power relay 2 6
_KL10 Diff lock solenoid valve contact
power relay 3 9
_XJ4 4-way connector, electronic power lift PIN 2 4 11 _KL11 A/C fan contact power relay 4 5
10-20
General description
1-3 Wiring diagram
PART -1
Fig.13-10
10-21
General description
PART -2
Fig.14-10
10-22
General description
PART -3
Fig.15-10
10-23
General description
PART -4
Fig.16-10
10-24
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
10-25
General description
IDENTIFICATION OFCOMPONENTS IN THE FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM (NAO VERSION)
_A01 Instrument 1 7 _F14 LH front main beam 3 6

_A02 Radio 3 4 _F15 RH front main beam 3 5
_B01 Alternator 1 6 _F16 Passenger ceiling light 3 4
_B1 LH loudspeaker 3 4 _F17 Radio 3 4
_B2 RH loudspeaker 3 4 _F18 Electronic power lift enabling 3 3
_D01 Hazard lights 2 11 _F19 LH front dipped beam 3 6
_D1 Electronic device for temperature regulation 4 6 _F20 RH front dipped beam 3 6
_D2 Recycling switch 4 6 _F21 Electronic power lift enabling 4 11
_E01 Water tap, cab temperature regulation 4 6 _F22 Front work lights 4 10
_EH1 Thermostarter 1 9 _F23 Rear work lights 4 9
_EH2 Fuel solenoid valve heater 3 9 _F24 Rear window wiper 4 8
_EH3 Cigarette lighter 4 7 _F25 Water pump, front & rear window washer 4 8
_EL1 Licence plate light 2 3 _F26 Windscreen wiper 4 7
_EL2 Beacon light 3 7 _F27 Cigarette lighter, roof line 4 6
_EL3 Cab light 3 5 _F28 Air conditioning powering 4 5
_EL4 LH front work light (outer) 4 11 _F29 Air conditioning powering (fan) 4 5
_EL5 LH front work light (inner) 4 11 _GB1 Battery 1 11
_EL6 RH front work light (inner) 4 11 _HA1 Horn 3 7
_EL7 RH front work light (outer) 4 10 _HL1 LH brake light 3 11
_EL8 LH rear work light (outer) 4 10 _HL2 RH brake light 3 11
_EL9 LH rear work light (inner) 4 9 _HL3 LH front turn indicator light 2 10
_EL10 RH rear work light (inner) 4 9 _HL4 LH rear turn indicator light 2 9
_EL11 RH rear work light (outer) 4 9 _HL5 RH front turn indicator light 2 9
_EL12 LH front beam 3 6 _HL6 RH rear turn indicator light 2 9
_EL13 RH front beam 3 5 _HL7 LH front sidelight 2 5
_EV1 AC electric fan motor 4 5 _HL8 RH rear sidelight 2 4
_EV2 Fan motor 4 4 _HL9 LH rear sidelight 2 4
_FU1 Key switch power 1 11 _HL10 RH front sidelight 2 4
_FU2 Alternator power 1 6 _M1 Starter motor 1 9
_FU3 Horn and rotating beacon power 3 7 _M2 Rear window wiper motor 4 8
_FU4 Direct users feed power 3 5 _M3 Window washer motor 4 8
_F1 Thermostarter 1 9 _M4 Windscreen wiper motor 4 7
_F2 Instrument positive 1 5 _M5 Cab air circulation motor 4 5
_F3 Hazard lights direct power 2 11 _SA0 General key contatc selector 1 11
_F4 Light switch 2 7 _SA01 Hazard lights selector 2 11
_F5 Cigarette lighter 2 7 _SA02 Combination switch (turn ind., front beams) 2 7
_F6 Hazard light, key contact powering 2 11 Combination switch (horn button) 3 7
_F7 Night lighting (dashboard, controls) 2 6 _SA03 Air conditioning fan switch 4 4
_F8 LH front sidelight and RH rear sidelight 2 4 _SA1 4WD switch 3 8
_F9 RH front sidelight and LH rear sidelight, lic.plate light 2 4 _SA2 Rotating beacon switch 3 7
_F10 Brake light 3 11 _SA3 Cab light switch (in the ceiling light) 3 5
_F11 Diff lock fuse 3 10 _SA4 Front work light switch 4 10
_F12 Rich mixture control 3 9 _SA5 Rear work beam switch 4 9
_F13 4WD solenoid valve 3 8 _SA6 Rear switch (included in the engine block) 4 8
10-26
General description
IDENTIFICAZIONE DEI COMPONENTI NELLO SCHEMA FUNZIONALE (VERSIONE NAO)
SIGN DESCRIPTION Part Column Term. boxes

X1 Terminal box for front line/cab inside
_SA7 Front switch (included in the engine block) 4 7 X2 Terminal box for rear line/cab inside
_SA8 Air recycle switch 4 6 X3 Terminal box for roof line/cab inside
_SA9 Air conditioning switch 4 4 RELAY COIL POSITION
_SB1 Diff lock button 3 10 SIGN DESCRIPTION Part Column
_SB2 Front and rear window washer button 4 8
_SL1 Fuel level sensor 1 4 _KL2 ProportionalPTOpower(INDICATORLIGHT) 1 8
_SL2 Brake fluid level sensor 1 6 _KL3 Independ. low speed PTO power (INDICATOR LIGHT) 1 8
_SP1 Trailer hydraulic braking sensor 1 5 _KL4 Start enable power relay 1 7
_SP2 Oil filter blockage sensor 1 5 _KL6 Front beam ground contact power relay 1 11
_SP3 Engine oil pressure sensor 1 5 _KL7 Air conditioning power relay 1 10
_KL8 Positive instrument, diff lock and 4WD,
_SP4 Air filter blocked sensor 1 4
_SP5 Air conditioning filter sensor 4 4 _KL9 Main front beams contact power relay 2 6
_SQ1a Shuttle lever position sensor (microswitch) 1 7 _KL10 Diff lock solenoid valve contact
power relay 3 10
_SQ1b Creeper lever position sensor (microswitch) 1 7 _KL11 A/C fan contact power relay 4 4
_SQ2 Proportional PTO sensor (microswitch) 1 7 _KL12 LH supplementar light contact power
_SQ3 Proportional PTO engaged sensor (microswitch) 1 8 (blinker) 2 7
_KL13 RH turn indicator contact power (blinker) 2 7
_SQ4 Independent low speed PTO sensor (microswitch) 1 8 _KL14 LH turn indicator contact power
_SQ5 4WD engaged sensor (microswitch) 1 7 (fixed light) 2 6
_SQ6 Parking brake engaged sensor (microswitch) 1 6 _KL15 RH supplementar light contact power
(blinker) 2 5
_SQ7 Brake pedal, brake and diff lock sensor (microswitch) 3 11 _KL16 RH turn indicator contact power (blinker) 2 8
_SQ8 2nd brake pedal, brake and diff lock sensor (microswitch) 3 11 _KL17 RH turn indicator contact power
_SR1 Speed in Kmh sensor 1 7 (fixed light) 2 8
_SR2 PTO rotation speed sensor 1 4
_ST1 Radiator liquid temperature sensor 1 6 RELAY CONTACT POSITION
_R Cab fan speed resistor 4 4
_RP1 Temperature regulation potentiometer 4 5
_V A/C operation LED 4 3
_KL2 ProportionalPTOpower(INDICATORLIGHT) 1 6
_YV1 Diff lock solenoid valve 3 9 _KL3 Independ. low speed PTO power (INDICATOR LIGHT) 1 6
_YV2 Rich mixture solenoid valve 3 9 _KL4 Start enable power relay 1 9
_YV3 Rich mixture solenoid valve 3 8 _KL6 Front beam ground contact power relay 3 6
_YV4 4WD solenoid valve 3 8 _KL7 Air conditioning power relay 4 5
_XS1 Rear trailer socket pin 3 (LH TURN INDICATOR ) 2 9 _KL8 Positive instrument, diff lock and 4WD,
_XS3 Rear trailer socket pin 3 (GROUND) 3 7 _KL9 Main front beams contact power relay 3 6
_XS4 Rear trailer socket pin 4 (RH TURN INDICATOR) 2 9 _KL10 Diff lock solenoid valve contact
power relay 3 9
_XS5 Rear trailer socket pin 6 (RH SIDELIGHT) 2 4
_KL11 A/C fan contact power relay 4 5
_XS6 Rear trailer socket pin 4 (BRAKE) 3 10 _KL12 LH supplementar light contact power
_XS7 Rear trailer socket pin 2(LHSIDELIGHT) 2 5 (blinker) 2 10
_KL13 RH turn indicator contact power (blinker) 2 9
_XJ1 2-way connector, electronic power lift PIN 1 1 8 _KL14 LH turn indicator contact power
_XJ2 4-way connector, electronic power lift PIN 4 1 6 (fixed light) 2 8
_XJ3 4-way connector, electronic power lift PIN 3 3 3 _KL15 RH supplementar light contact power
(blinker) 2 10
_XJ4 4-way connector, electronic power lift PIN 2 4 11 _KL16 RH turn indicator contact power (blinker) 2 9
_KL17 RH turn indicator contact power
(fixed light) 2 7
10-27
General description
1-4 Wiring diagram (NAO version)
PART -1
Fig.17-10
10-28
General description
PART -2
Fig.18-10
10-29
General description
PART -3
Fig.19-10
10-30
General description
PART -4
Fig.20-10
10-31
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
10-32
CHAP. 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS

10-33

Battery
Make Mx - Scx - Fx
Type “No Maintenance”
Voltage 12 V (negative towards ground)
Starting surge when cold at -18°C in 30 s 420 A
Capacity for 20 hours 100 Ah
Alternator
Make Ix
Type 3-phase
Voltage 14 V
Current 55 A
Starter motor
Make Ix
Type Solenoidal
Max. power 2.8 Kw
Type of engagement Automatic engagement of pinion
by means of electromagnet
Solenoid valves
Make Cx
Type On/Off
Voltage 12 V
Resistance at 20°C 6.85 Ω ±5%
Sensors
Make Jx/Stx
Type Inductive
Dashboard
Make Jx
10-34
2-2 Relays and fuse boxes
The electrical system of Ghibli tractors is protected
against short-circuits and excessive power draws by
fuses. The number of fuses installed in the electrical
system depends on the tractor version.
The fuses are installed in three boxes:
A -front fuse box (Fig.21-10) installed between the

radiator and the battery that powers the electrical
circuit, on the left-hand side;
B -main relay and fuse box (Fig.22-10) installed on A

the left-hand side of the dashboard.
Fig.21-10
C -roof-cab fuse box (Fig.23-10), installed inside the
cab, in the upper part at left, beside the work light
controls;
NOTE: before replacing a blown fuse with an equivalent

one, the cause of the fault should be identified and
removed.
Fig.22-10
C
Fig.23-10
10-35
A - FRONT FUSE BOX
The front fuses are mounted on the front wiring and _FU3
are connected to the battery-starter motor line by me-
ans of the connector (A7 Fig.29-10).
The front fuses have the following functions and am- _FU1
pere ratings:
FUSE PROTECTED CIRCUITS Amp.

_FU3 Horn + rotating beacon 15
_FU4
_FU1 Ignition switch + A/C relay

+ positive relay under key cab side 40
_FU2
_FU4 Roof relay + electronic power lift
+ main beams relay 50
_FU2 Alternator 60 Fig.24-10
B - MAIN RELAY AND FUSE BOX
The main fuses and relays are mounted on the inner

cab line wiring and have the following functions and
ampere ratings:
FUSES
_F1 Thermostarter 20
_F2 Instrument positive 5
_F3 Emergency switch 10
_F4 Combination switch 25
_F5 Cigarette lighter 10
_F6 Hazard lights 15
_F7 Instrument night lighting 5
_F8 Front lh and rear rh sidelights 7.5
_F9 Front rh & rear lh sidelights, licence plate light 7.5
_F10 Brake lights 7.5
_F11 Diff lock solenoid valve 7.5
_F12 Rich mixture 5
_F13 4WD solenoid valve 5
_F14 LH main beam 7.5
_F15 RH main beam 7.5
_F19 LH dipped beam 7.5
_F20 RH dipped beam 7.5
_F28 Air conditioning powering 7.5
_F29 Air conditioning comprfessor 25 Fig.25-10
10-36
RELAYS
_KL5 Under key positive relay (roof side)
_KL4 Ignition enabling relay
_KL1 Ignition motor relay
_KL7 A/C relay
MINI-RELAYS
_KL2 Proportional PTO mini-relay
_KL3 Independent PTO mini-relay
_KL9 Main beams mini-relay
_KL6 Ground contact mini-relays (front beams)
_KL8 Under key positive mini-relay (cab side)
_KL10 Diff lock mini-relay
_KL11 A/C mini-relay
On the tractors Ghibli for the NAO market is installed,

in addition to the previously mentioned relays, a fur-
ther relay series in the inner cab wiring (D Fig.26-10).
_KL12 D
They perform the following functions:
_KL13
MINI-RELAYS (NAO MARKET TRACTORS)
_KL14
_KL12 LH supplementar light contact power (blinker)
_KL13 RH turn indicator contact power (blinker) _KL15
_KL14 LH turn indicator contact power (fixed light) _KL16
_KL15 RH supplementar light contact power (blinker) _KL17
_KL16 RH turn indicator contact power (blinker)
_KL17 RH turn indicator contact power (fixed light)

Fig.26-10
10-37
C - ROOF-CAB FUSE BOX
The roof-cab fuses are mounted on the roof-cab line

wiring and have the following functions and ampere
ratings:
FUSES
_F16 Ceiling light 7.5
_F17 Radio 5
_F18 Electronic power lift 5
_F21 Electronic power lift 20
_F22 Front work lights 20
_F23 Rear work lights 5
_F24 Rear window wiper 7.5 _F18 _F17 _F16 _F30
_F25 Windscreen wiper trays 10 _F23 _F24 _F26 _F25

_F26 Windscreen wiper 10
_F22 _F21 _F27 _F31
_F27 Cigarette lighter 15
_F30 Not used -
_F31 Not used - Fig.27-10
10-38
CHAP. 10
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3-1 Introduction ............................................................. 10-40

3B - Front engine line..................................................... 10-51
3C- Inner cab line .......................................................... 10-65
3D- Inner cab line (NAO version).................................. 10-79
3E - Roof-cab line .......................................................... 10-93
3F - Roof-cab line (NAO version) ................................ 10-109
3G- Rear line ............................................................... 10-125
10-39
Sect.3 - Wiring
3-1 Introduction
This section gives details about the main characteri- - the connectors of each line are identified graphically
stics of the wiring installed in Ghibli tractors. with the letter of the line itself plus a progressive
The relative functional wiring diagram and the actual number.
wiring itself are indicated for each line. The position of Example:
each connector on the tractor is indicated so that it G8 - trailer brake sensor connector
can be easily and quickly found. Moreover, the relati- G: letter identifying the wiring line type
ve electrical correspondence is given for all the con- 8: progressive number
nectors.
Multiwire electric diagrams show all connections and - all connectors are viewed from the cable input side
organs in the relative line. The various components
are represented by symbols. - the cable colours are identified as follows:
Each connector has a series of numbers that identify
each individual connecting pin. These numbers are a CONNECTOR (B22) FOR OIL LEVEL SENSOR
great help during tests as they allow the electrician to
quickly locate each terminal and make the necessary Terminal Wire colour Toconnector Terminal
repairs. or component
1 BM B23 R
RULES FOR INTERPRETING SECTION 3 2 B-B B11-B21 2-1
To correctly interpret the codes used in this section, terminal 1 of connector (B22) with colour (BM)
bear in mind that: correspondes with connector (B23) terminal R; terminal
2 of connector (B22) with colour (B-B) corresponds
- each wiring line has been given an identifying letter, with connectors (B11) (B21) to terminals 2 and 1
i.e.: respectively.
letter A = starter motor-battery line (positive)
letter B = front line
letter C = inner cab line
letter D = inner cab line (NAO version)
letter E = roof-cab line
letter F = roof-cab line (NAO version)
letter G = rear line
TERMINAL OR
CONNECTION POLE
VIEW FROM
CABLE INPUT SIDE
TERMINAL OR
CONNECTION POLE Fig.28-10
10-40
Wiring
COLOUR TABLE
SYMBOL WIRE COLOUR
The colours of the cables used in the wiring lines in-
HL Grey blue
stalled on Ghibli tractors are indicated in the wiring
diagrams and in the electrical correspondances tables, HV Grey green
according to following table:
HG Grey yellow
SYMBOL WIRE COLOUR L Blue
A Light blue LB Blue white
AN Light blue black LN Blue black
AG Light blue yellow LR Blue red
AB Light blue white M Brown
AV Light blue green MB Brown white
AR Light blue red MN Brown black
B White MV Brown green
BR White red N Black
BN White black NZ Black purple
BL White blue NB Black white
BG White yellow NR Black red
C Orange R Red
CB Orange white RG Red yellow
CN Orange black RN Red black
CL Orange blue RV Red green
G Yellow S Pink
GV Yellow green SN Pink black
GN Yellow black SG Pink yellow
GR Yellow red V Green
GL Yellow blue VG Green yellow
H Grey VN Green black
HM Grey brown VB Green white
HR Grey red Z Purple
HN Grey black ZB Purple white
HB Grey white ZN Purple black
10-41
Wiring
3-2 General description
The electrical system of Ghibli tractors mainly consi- NOTE: lines (3D) and (3F), respectively inner cab and
sts of five wiring lines installed in the tractor so that roof cab, replace lines (3C) and (3E) in NAO version
the groups can be separated. tractors. Their functions and positions do not vary.
The wiring lines are named according to the location
of the main components powered:
3A- Starter motor-battery line
3B- Front line
3C- Inner cab line
3E- Roof-cab line
3G- Rear line
3B 3D 3F
3C 3E
3G
3A
Fig.29-10
10-42
Wiring
CONNECTION POINTS
Fig.30-10 shows the positions of the connection poin-

ts between the various wiring lines.
BATTERY LINE / FRONT LINE
X3
X1
X3-INNER CAB LINE / ROOF-CAB LINE
X2
X1-FRONT LINE / INNER CAB LINE

X2-REAR LINE / INNER CAB LINE Fig.30-10
10-43
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
10-44
CHAP. 10
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3A - Battery-starter motor line (positive)
3A-1 General description .............................................. 10-46

3A-2 Wiring .................................................................... 10-47
3A-3 Connector locations.............................................. 10-48
3A-4 Connector identification ........................................ 10-49
10-45
3A - Starter motor-battery line (positive)

3A-1 General description
TO STARTER MOTOR
A
This line is very important since it influences the
operation of the electrical system of the entire tractor.
It connects the positive pole of the battery with the
starter motor, from one side, thus allowing the entire A7
electrical system to be powered, and to the front fuse
box (Fig.31.10) on the other, to which all the wiring of
the tractor electrical system is connected. The fuses
in the box protect the line from short-circuits and
excessive power draws from the four fuses herein
contained.
Fig.31-10
10-46
Starter motor-battery line (positive)

3A-2 Wiring
A6
A7
A5
0Y - Insulating cap
A5 - Battery positive terminal Y
A6 - Starter motor connection terminal
A7 - Connector to the front fuse box Fig.32-10
10-47

3A - 3 Connector locations
A7
A5
A6
A5 - Battery positive terminal

A7 - Connector to front fuse box
Fig.33-10
10-48

3A-4 Connector identification
TERMINAL (A6) FOR CONNECTION TO STARTER
MOTOR
Terminal Colour of wire To connector

or component
A6 N
A6 Fig.34-10
TERMINAL (A7) FOR CONNECTION TO FRONT

FUSE BOX

or component
A7 M B5
Fig.35-10
The connection between the terminal (A7) of the bat-

tery line and the terminal (B5) of the front line, allows
the rest of the tractor's electrical system to be powe- B5
red. It connects the feed connectors (B6) (B7) with the
positive terminal of the battery. The front fuses pro-
tect the system against short-circuits and excessive
power draws.
A7
Fig.36-10
10-49
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
10-50
CHAP. 10
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3B - Engine front line
3B-1 General description .............................................. 10-52

3B-2 Wiring diagram ...................................................... 10-53
3B-3 Wiring .................................................................... 10-54
3B-4 Connector locations.............................................. 10-55
3B-5 Connector identification ........................................ 10-56
10-51

3B -1 General description
The front line installed in Ghibli tractors powers the
components (e.g.: the horn and headlights) and the B5
sensors (e.g.: engine oil pressure) located in the front
part of the tractor.
A7
The front line is connected on the one side to the bat-
tery line via connection between connector (B5) and
connector (A7)(Fig.37-10), and on the other side with
the inner cab line through connection between the ter-
minal boxes (X1) in the lower part of the cab front, on
the left-hand side (Fig.38-10).
NOTE: location of the connection terminal boxes (X1

and X2) is the same for NAO market tractors. Fig.37-10
X1
Fig.38-10
10-52
Front line
3B-2 Wiring diagram
THERMOSTARTER
ENGINE AIR
B19 FILTER SENSOR
CONNECTION TO
BATTERY LINE B5 B20
B18
STARTER MOTOR GROUND
_FU3
B21
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

FRONT FUSES _FU2 SENSOR
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTOR B22
_FU1 B7
_FU4
TERMINAL BOX FOR
POWER SUPPLY X1 CONNECTION TO INNER
CONNECTOR
CAB LINE
B6
ALTERNATOR
B8
B18
ENGINE RPM
MEASURE
B9
A/C RESISTOR
B28
JUNCTION
A/C PRESSURE B24 RICH MIXT. CONTROL
HORN SWITCH A/C
B17 FAN B26
B10
B25
A/C COMPRESSOR ENGINE STOP
SOLENOID VALVE
HIGH PRESSURE OIL
B16
FILTER CLOGGED SENSOR B27
LH FRONT HEADLIGHT
B11
B15
RH FRONT HEADLIGHT
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPREATURE SENSOR B12 B14
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

SENSOR
B13
Fig.39-10
10-53
Engine front line

3B-3 Wiring
LH FRONT HEADLIGHT
B11 B22
B15
HIGH PRESSURE OIL FILTER BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
CLOGGED SENSOR
B18 B14
STARTER MOTOR RH FRONT HEADLIGHT
B17
A/C FAN A/C PRESSURE
B25 SWITCH
A/C RESISTOR
HORN
B10
B28 A/C COMPRESSOR
ENGINE RPM
METER
JUNCTION
B24 B16 B12
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
ALTERNATOR WATER SENSOR
TEMPERATURE
X1 SENSOR
B13
TERMINAL BOX
B8 B9 FOR CONNECTION THERMOSTARTER
TO INNER CAB LINE
_FU3 B19
B6
_FU1
ENGINE FRONT FUSES B20
STOP
_FU4
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTOR _FU2 ENGINE AIR FILTER
CLOGGED SENSOR
B27
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTOR RICH MIXTURE
B7 CONTROL B26 BATTERY LINE
CONNECTION
GROUND
B5 B21
Fig.40-10
10-54
Engine front line

3B-4 Connector locations
FRONT FUSES
B5 B21 B16 B8 - Terminal for alternator

B9 - Terminal for engine RPM measure
RIGHT-HAND B10 - Faston terminals for horn
VIEW
B11 - High pressure oil filter sensor connector
B14 - Connector for RH front headlight
B15 - Connector for LH front headlight
B17 - A/C pressure switch connector
RIGHT-HAND B20 - Engine air filter sensor connector
VIEW B24 B22 - Connector for brake fluid level sensor
B25
X1
B12 B6
B22 B17 B20 B15 B14
B27 B7
B26 B18
B13
LEFT-HAND B10
Fig.41-10 VIEW
B5 - Connector for battery line connection

B9
B6 - Power supply connector
B7 - Power supply connector B8
B12 - Engine coolant temperature sensor connector
B13 - Engine oil pressure sensor connector B11
B16 - Connector for A/C compressor
B18 - Starter motor connector
B19 - Thermostarter connector
B21 - Ground
B24 - Connector for A/C resistor
B25 - Connector for A/C fan
B26 - Connector for rich mixture control
B27 - Connector for engine stop solenoid valve
X1 - Terminal box for inner cab line connection
Fig.42-10
10-55
Engine front line

3B-5 Connector identification
_FU3
FRONT FUSE (_FU3)
Terminal Wire colour To connector Terminal

or component
1 Z B5 A
2 Z-Z B10-B23 2-V
Fig.43-10
FRONT FUSE (_FU1)

or component
_FU1
1 R-R B5-B5 A-A
2 R-R B7-B7 A-B
Fig.44-10
FRONT FUSE (_FU4)

or component
1 R-R B6-B6 A-B

2 R-R B5-B5 B-B
_FU4
Fig.45-10
FRONT FUSE (_FU2)

or component
1 R-R B8-B8 1-2

2 R-R B5-B5 C-C
_FU2
Fig.46-10
10-56
Engine front line

CONNECTOR (B5) TO BATTERY LINE

or component
A R-R-Z _FU1-_FU1-B1 1-1-1

B R-R _FU4-_FU4 2-2
C R-R _FU2-_FU2 2-2
Fig.47-10
POWER CONNECTOR (B6)

or component
A R _FU4 1
B R _FU4 1
Fig.48-10
POWER CONNECTOR (B7)

or component
A R _FU1 2
B R _FU1 2
Fig.49-10
FRONT CONNECTOR (B8) FOR ALTERNATOR

or component
1 R _FU2 1
2 R _FU2 1
3 HL X1 F
Fig.50-10
10-57
Engine front line

TERMINAL (B9) FOR ENGINE SPEED SENSOR

or component
1 GR X1 G
Fig.51-10
FASTON TERMINAL (B10) FOR HORN

or component
1 NZ X1 B
2 Z _FU3 2
Fig.52-10
CONNECTOR (B11) FOR HIGH FLOW OIL FILTER

CLOGGING SENSOR

or component
1 MN X1 A
2 B B22 2
Fig.53-10
CONNECTOR (B12) FOR WATER TEMPERATURE

or component
1 BV X1 D
Fig.54-10
10-58
Engine front line

CONNECTOR (B13) FOR ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
SENSOR

or component
1 BH X1 C
Fig.55-10
CONNECTOR (B14) FOR RH HEADLIGHT

or component
1 NV X1 L
2 HN X1 J
3 B X1 P
Fig.56-10
CONNECTOR (B15) FOR LH HEADLIGHT

or component
1 V X1 K
2 H X1 H
3 B X1 W
Fig.57-10
CONNECTOR (B16) FOR A/C COMPRESSOR

or component
1 V X1 T
Fig.58-10
10-59
Engine front line

CONNECTOR (B17) FOR A/C PRESSURE SWITCH

or component
A VN X1 S
B B B21 1
Fig.59-10
CONNECTOR (B18) FOR STARTER MOTOR

or component
1 L X1 2
Fig.60-10
CONNECTOR (B19) FOR THERMOSTARTER

or component
1 N X1 1
Fig.61-10
CONNECTOR (B20) FOR ENGINE AIR FILTER

SENSOR

or component
1 LV X1 E
2 B B21 1
Fig.62-10
10-60
Engine front line

CONNECTOR (B21) TO GROUND ON CHASSIS

or component
1 B-B-B B22-B20-B17 2-2-2

B-B B27-B25 2-2
Fig.63-10
CONNECTOR (B22) FOR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

SENSOR

or component
1 BM X1 R
2 B-B B11-B21 2-1
Fig.64-10
10-61
Engine front line

TERMINAL BOX (X1) FOR CONNECTION TO INNER
CAB LINE

or component
1 N B19 1
2 L B18 1
3 not used
4 R B28 1
A MN B11 1
B NZ B10 1
C BH B13 1
D BV B12 1
E LV B20 1
F HL B8 3
G GR B9 1
H H B15 2
J HN B14 2
K V B15 1
L NV B14 1
M C B26 1
N G B24 2
P B B14 2
R BM B22 1
S NV B17 A
T V B16 1
U N B24 1
V Z _FU3 2 Fig.65-10
W B B15 3
CONNECTOR (B24) FOR A/C RESISTOR

or component
1 N X1 U
2 G X1 N
3 C B28 2
4 not used
Fig.66-10
10-62
Engine front line

CONNECTOR (B25) FOR A/C FAN

or component
1 R B28 2
2 B B21 1
Fig.67-10
CONNECTOR (B26) FOR RICH MIXTURE CONTROL

or component
1 C-C X1-B27 M-1
Fig.68-10
CONNECTOR (B27) FOR ENGINE STOP SOLENOID VALVE

or component
1 C B26 1
2 B B21 1
Fig.69-10
JUNCTION (B28)

or component
1 R X1 4
2 C-R B24-B25 3-1
10-63
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
10-64
CHAP. 10
Inner cab line
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wirings
3C - Inner cab line
3C-1 General description .............................................. 10-66

3C-2 Wiring diagram ..................................................... 10-67
3C-3 Wiring .................................................................... 10-68
3C-4 Connector locations ............................................. 10-69
3C-5 Connector identification ....................................... 10-70
10-65
3C - Inner cab line

3C -1 General description
This line is the main axis of the whole electric system
in the tractor. It includes e.g. the main fuse and relay X1
box, the connectors of the instrument and the lighting
system etc.
The inner cab line is connected both with the front line
by means of the connection between the terminal box-
es (X1), and with the rear line by means of the con- X2
nection between the terminal boxes (X2), located on
the lower left front side of the cab (Fig.70-10).
The inner cab line is also connected both with the roof-
cab line by means of the connection between the ter-
minal boxes (X3) located in the lower part under the
main fuse box (Fig.71-10).
On the Ghibli tractors two different types of inner cab Fig.70-10
lines can be installed, depending on the market. The
difference consists in a further relay block in the line
of the tractors for the NAO markets. There are no dif-
ferences for what concerns the other users on the trac-
tor.
NOTE: The location in the tractor of the through-pass-

ing connectors does not vary in the tractors for the
NAO market.
X3
Fig.71-10
10-66
Inner cab line

3C-2 Wiring diagram
DASHBOARD
TERMINAL BOX FOR

CONNECTION TO
ROOF LINE
CAB TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
FAN SPEED
ADJUSTMENT
A/C SYSTEM
TERMINAL BOX FOR
CONNECTION TO FRONT
THROUGH-PASSING LINE
TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT
IGNITION
SWITCHES
TERMINAL BOX
FOR CONNECTION
TO REAR LINE
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTORS
BRAKE
SWITCHES
EMERGENCY ROTATING NOT LIGHT SWITCH AIR RECYCLING GROUND HAZARD LIGHTS
LAMP BEACON USED
Fig.72-10
10-67
Inner cab line

3C-3 Wiring
FAN SPEED CAB INNER

ADJUSTMENT TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT NOT USED
FEELER
C3 C2 C1 C10 X3
TERMINAL BOX FOR

CONNECTION TO
ROOF LINE
A/C
SYSTEM
C4
LIGHT
SWITCH MAIN FUSE AND
C5 RELAY BOX
TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT
SWITCH TERMINAL BOX
JUNCTION
C6 FOR CONNECTION
C11 C19 TO FRONT LINE X1a
IGNITION
SWITCH
X2a
TERMINAL BOX FOR

C7 C20 DIODES CONNECTION TO
REAR LINE
BRAKE SWITCH SUPPLY

CONNECTORS B21
C8 C9 C12 C13 C14 B15
EMERGENCY ROTATING AIR GROUND HAZARD

LAMP SWITCH BEACON RECYCLING LIGHTS
SWITCH
Fig.73-10
10-68
Inner cab line

3C - 4 Connector locations
C13 C14 C12 C1
C8
C11 C9
C3 C4 C5
C6
MAIN FUSE AND RELAY BOX
X1a
C2
C15 C21 C7
X2a
X3
Fig.74-10
10-69
Inner cab line

3C-5 Connector identification
CONNECTOR (C1) FOR INSTRUMENT

or component
1 NV fuse _F15 -
2 B MRL4 87
3 HL C20 (diodes) 3
4 HV MRL2 4
5 LR X2a B
6 B C14 1
7 LR fuse _F2-C1 31
8 S X2a F
9 GS X2a G
10 HG C10 1
11 SV C14 2
12 C MRL6 5
13 HR MRL2 2
14 not used
15 HG C10 1
16 BV X1a D
17 not used
18 not used
19 BL C14 5
20 M X2a P
21 MN X1a A
22 BH X1a C Fig.75-10
23 not used
24 N X2a R
25 GR X1a G
26 not used
27 not used
28 BN junction C19 1
29 not used
30 BV X1a E
31 HL C1-X3 7-8
32 not used
33 N X3 13
34 not used
35 not used
36 not used
10-70
Inner cab line

CONNECTOR (C2) FOR CAB TEMPERATURE
FEELER

or component
1 GN RL5 8
2 Z-Z C5-RL5 3-5
3 L RL5 7
4 M-M C5-RL5 1-3
5 GR RL5 6
Fig.76-10
CONNECTOR (C3) FOR VENTILATION SPEED

ADJUSTMENT

or component
1 R fuse _F29 -
2 S C4 6
3 G X1a N
4 N X1a U
5 C X1a 3
Fig.77-10
CONNECTOR (C4) FOR AIR CONDITIONING

SYSTEM

or component
1 B-B C4-C13 (ground) 3

2 HG C4 8
3 B C4 1
4 R RL5 2
5 NV RL4 85
6 S C3 2
7 H RL6 86 Fig.78-10
8 HG-HG C4-C8 2-8
9 GV RL4 86
CONNECTOR (C5) FOR TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

or component
1 M C2 4
2 L RL5 4
3 Z C2 2
Fig.79-10
10-71
Inner cab line

IGNITION SWITCH (C6)

or component
1 R C15 A
1 R-R fuses _F3-_F4 -
2 NR-NR-NR MRL1-MRL4-MRL5 3-86-86
2 not used
3 N fuse _F1 -
4 LN RL2 30
Fig.80-10
CONNECTOR (C7) FOR BRAKE SWITCH

or component
1 C MRL6 5
2 BR MRL6 1
3 R X3 3
4 NR fuse _F10 -
5 Z C7 6
6 Z C7 5
7 NZ C7 8 Fig.81-10
8 NZ C7 7
CONNECTOR (C8) FOR HAZARD LIGHT SWITCH

or component
1 C fuse _F11 -
2 HR fuse _F6 -
3 R fuse _F3 -
4 not used
5 BN C11 5
7 not used
8 HG-HG C9-C13 (ground) 8
Fig.82-10
10 B C9 7
17 V C11 3
18 G C11 6
10-72
Inner cab line

CONNECTOR (C9) FOR ROTATING BEACON
SWITCH

or component
1 not used
2 RV C9 2
3 not used
4 Z X1a V
5 not used
6 not used
Fig.83-10
8 HG-HG C8-fuse _F7 8
CONNECTOR (C10) (NOT USED)

or component
1 HG-HG-HG C1-C1-fuse _F7 10-15

2 RV fuse _F5 -
3 B C13 (ground) -
Fig.84-10
CONNECTOR (C11) FOR COMBINATION SWITCH

or component
1 NZ X1a B
2 V MRL3 1
3 V-V X3-C8 11-17
4 G fuse _F9 -
5 BN-BN C14-C8 4-5
6 G-G X3-C8 14-18
7 H fuse _F20 -
Fig.85-10
8 B C13 (ground) -
9 R fuse _F4 -
10 not used
11 not used
10-73
Inner cab line

CONNECTOR (C12) FOR AIR RECYCLING

or component
1 HN RL6 87a
2 HR RL6 85
Fig.86-10
CONNECTOR (C13) TO GROUND ON CHASSIS
Fig.87-10
CONNECTOR (C14) FOR INTERMITTANCE

or component

2 SV C1 11
3 not used
4 BN C11 5
5 BL C1 19
6 HR fuse _F6 -
Fig.88-10
CONNECTOR (C15) FOR POWER SUPPLY

or component
A R C6 1
B R-R MRL5-MRL7 30-30
Fig.89-10
10-74
Inner cab line

CONNECTOR (C21) FOR POWER SUPPLY

or component
A R-R X3-RL1 6-30

B R-R RL1-MRL3 30-3
Fig.90-10
TERMINAL BOX (X2A) FOR REAR LINE

CONNECTION

or component
1 L RL2 86
2 LN RL2 30
3 B C13 (ground) -
4 B C13 (ground) -
A R C18 3
B LR C1 5
C HR C20 (diodes) 1
D HL C20 (diodes) 3
E HV C20 (diodes) 5
F S C1 8
G GS C1 9
H BN junction C19 2
J M fuse _F8 -
K N fuse _F9 -
L V C18 11
M G C18 14
N N C18 13
P M C1 20
R N C1 24
S C MRL6 5
T MN fuse _F11 -
U BG X3 1
V not used
W not used
Fig.91-10
10-75
Inner cab line

TERMINAL BOX (X1A) FOR FRONT LINE
CONNECTION

or component
1 N fuse _F1 -
2 L RL2 87
3 C C7 5
4 not used
A MN C1 21
B NZ C11 1
C BH C1 22
D BV C1 16
E LV C1 30
F HL X3 8
G GR C1 25
H H fuse _F19 -
J HN fuse _F20 -
K V fuse _14 -
L NV fuse _F15 -
M C fuse _F12 -
N G C3 3
P B MRL4 87
R BM junction C19 2
S NV RL4 85
T V RL4 87
U N C3 4
V Z C9 4 Fig.92-10
W B MRL4 87
TERMINAL BOX (X3) FOR ROOF LINE

CONNECTION

or component
1 BG X2a U
2 M fuse _F8 -
3 R-R X2a-C7 A-3
4 BR MRL6 1
5 N fuse _F9 -
6 R C21 3
7 RV C9 2
8 HL-HL C1-X1a 31-F
9 NR RL1 87
10 V fuse _F13 -
11 V-V X2a-C11 L-3
12 NR RL1 87
13 N-N X2a-C1 N-33
14 G-G X2a-C11 M-6
15 NR RL1 87
Fig.93-10
10-76
Inner cab line

JUNCTION (C19)

or component
1 BN C1 28
2 BN-BM X2a-X1a H-R
DIODES (C20)

or component
1 HR-HR MRL2-X2a 2-C

2 diode RL3 85
3 HL-HL X2a-C1 D-3
4 diode RL3 85
5 HV-HV MRL1-X2a 2-E
6 diode RL3 85
NOTE: Diodes have the purpose to avoid the return of a few

electric signals, in order to avoid the tractor starting when some
functions are engaged, e.g. PTO.
10-77
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
10-78
CHAP. 10
Inner cab line (NAO version)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wirings
3C - Inner cab line (NAO version)

3C-2 Wiring diagram ..................................................... 10-82
3C-3 Wiring .................................................................... 10-82
3C-5 Connector identification ....................................... 10-84
10-79
3D - Inner cab line (NAO version)

3D -1 General description
X1
This line is the main axis of the whole electric system
in the tractor. It includes e.g. the main fuse and relay
box, the connectors of the instrument and the lighting
system etc.
The inner cab line is connected both with the front line
es (X1), and with the rear line by means of the con-
nection between the terminal boxes (X2), located on
the lower left front side of the cab (Fig.94-10). X2
The inner cab line is also connected both with the roof-
cab line by means of the connection between the ter-
minal boxes (X3) located in the lower part under the
On the Ghibli tractors two different types of inner cab Fig.94-10
lines can be installed, depending on the market. The
difference consists in the absence of a further relay
block, required for control of additional beams, in the
line of the tractors for the EUROPEAN markets.
There are no differences for what concerns the other
users on the tractor.
NOTE: The location in the tractor of the through-pass-

ing connectors does not vary in the tractors for the
EUROPEAN market.
X3 Fig.95-10
10-80

3D-2 Wiring diagram
GROUND INSTRUMENT
D23
D1
_KL17 _KL16 _KL15 _KL14 _KL13 _KL12

D24
D25
TERMINAL BOX
ADDITIONAL X3 FOR CONNECTION
D22
HEADLIGHTS CONTROL TO ROOF LINE
CAB TEMPERATURE
SENSOR D2
FAN SPEED
ADJUSTMENT D3
A/C SYSTEM D4 TERMINAL BOX FOR

X1c CONNECTION TO
FRONT LINE
TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT D5
IGNITION
D6
SWITCHES
TERMINAL BOX FOR

CONNECTION TO
X2c
REAR LINE
D15
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTORS
BRAKE
D7 D21
SWITCHES
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14
EMERGENCY ROTATING NOT LIGHT SWITCH AIR RECYCLING GROUND HAZARD LIGHTS
LAMP BEACON USED
Fig.96-10
10-81

3D-3 Wiring
FAN SPEED CAB INNER

ADJUSTMENT TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT NOT USED
FEELER
CONNECTION TO
D3 D2 D1 D10 ADDITIONAL
HEADLIGHTS
D22
D24 D25
A/C
SYSTEM DIODES
D4 X3
LIGHT
SWITCH TERMINAL BOX
FOR CONNECTION
D11 TO ROOF LINE
D5
TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT MAIN FUSE AND
SWITCH JUNCTION RELAY BOX
TERMINAL BOX FOR
D6 CONNECTION TO
D19 FRONT LINE X1a
IGNITION
SWITCH X2a
TERMINAL BOX
D7 FOR CONNECTION
D20 DIODES
TO REAR LINE
BRAKE SWITCH SUPPLY

CONNECTORS D21
D8 D9 D12 D23 D13 D14 D15
EMERGENCY ROTATING AIR GROUNDS HAZARD

LAMP SWITCH BEACON RECYCLING LIGHTS
SWITCH
Fig.97-10
10-82
Roof-cab line (NAO version)

3D - 4 Connector locations
MINI-RELAY BOX
D13 D14 D12 D1
D11
D8
D9
MAIN FUSE AND RELAY BOX
X1a D3 D4 D5
D2
D15 D21 D7
D22
D6
X2a
X3
Fig.98-10
10-83

3D-5 Connector identification
CONNECTOR (D1) FOR INSTRUMENT

or component
1 NV fuse _F15 -
2 B MRL4 87
3 HL D20 (diodes) 3
4 HV MRL2 4
5 LR X2a B
6 B D14 1
7 LR fuse _F2-C1 31
8 S X2a F
9 GS X2a G
10 HG D10 1
11 SV D14 2
12 C MRL6 5
13 HR MRL2 2
14 not used
15 HG D10 1
16 BV X1a D
17 not used
18 not used
19 BL D14 5
20 M X2a P
21 MN X1a A
22 BH X1a C Fig.99-10
23 not used
24 N X2a R
25 GR X1a G
26 not used
27 not used
28 BN junction D19 1
29 not used
30 BV X1a E
31 HL D1-D18 7-8
32 not used
33 N X3 13
34 not used
35 not used
36 not used
10-84

CONNECTOR (D2) FOR CAB TEMPERATURE
FEELER

or component
1 GN RL5 8
2 Z-Z D5-RL5 3-5
3 L RL5 7
4 M-M D5-RL5 1-3
5 GR RL5 6
Fig.100-10
CONNECTOR (D3) FOR VENTILATION FAN SPEED

ADJUSTMENT

or component
1 R fuse _F29 -
2 S D4 6
3 G X1a N
4 N X1a U
5 C X1a 3
Fig.101-10
CONNECTOR (D4) FOR A/C SYSTEM

or component
1 B-B D4-D13 (ground) 3

2 HG D4 8
3 B D4 1
4 R RL5 2
5 NV RL4 85
6 S D3 2
7 H RL6 86
8 HG-HG D4-D8 2-8 Fig.102-10
9 GV RL4 86
CONNECTOR (D5) FOR TEMPERATURE

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

or component
1 M D2 4
2 L RL5 4
3 Z D2 2
Fig.103-10
10-85

IGNITION SWITCH (D6)

or component
1 R D15 A
1 R-R fuses _F3-_F4 -
2 NR-NR-NR MRL1-MRL4-MRL5 3-86-86
2 not used
3 N fuse _F1 -
4 LN RL2 30
Fig.104-10
CONNECTOR (D7) FOR BRAKE SWITCH

or component
1 C MRL6 5
2 BR MRL6 1
3 R X3 3
4 NR fuse _F10 -
5 Z D7 6
6 Z D7 5
7 NZ D7 8 Fig.105-10
8 NZ D7 7
CONNECTOR (D8) FOR HAZARD LIGHT SWITCH

or component
1 C fuse _F11 -
2 HR fuse _F6 -
3 R fuse _F3 -
4 not used
5 BN D14 4
7 not used
8 HG-HG D9-D4(ground) 8-8
Fig.106-10
10 B D9 7
17 V D24 (diodes) 1
18 G D25 (diodes) 1
10-86

CONNECTOR (D9) FOR ROTATING BEACON
SWITCH

or component
1 not used
2 RV D9 2
3 not used
4 Z X1a V
5 not used
6 not used
Fig.107-10
8 HG-HG D8-fuse _F7 8
CONNECTOR (D10) (NOT USED)

or component
1 HG-HG-HG D1-D1-fuse _F7 10-15

2 RV D11 5
3 B D13 (ground) -
Fig.108-10
CONNECTOR (D11) FOR COMBINATION SWITCH

or component
1 NZ X1a B
2 V MRL3 1
3 G MRL2a 2
4 G fuse _F9 -
5 RV-RV fuse _F5-D10 2
6 V MRL1a 2
7 H fuse _F20 -
Fig.109-10
8 B D13 (ground) -
9 R fuse _F4 -
10 not used
11 not used
10-87

CONNECTOR (D12) FOR AIR RECYCLING

or component
1 HN RL6 87a
2 HR RL6 85
Fig.110-10
CONNECTOR (D13) GROUND ON THE CHASSIS
Fig.111-10
CONNECTOR (D14) FOR INTERMITTANCE

or component

2 SV D1 11
3 not used
4 BN-BN D11-MRL1a 5-3
5 BL D1 19
6 HR fuse _F6 -
Fig.112-10
CONNECTOR (D15) FOR SUPPLY

or component
A R D6 -
B R-R MRL5-MRL7 30-30
Fig.113-10
10-88

CONNECTOR (D21) FOR SUPPLY

or component
A R-R X3-RL1 6-30

B R-R RL1-MRL3 30-3
Fig.114-10
TERMINAL BOX (X2A) FOR REAR LINE

CONNECTION

or component
1 L RL2 86
2 LN RL2 30
3 B D13 (ground) -
4 B D13 (ground) -
A R X3 3
B LR D1 5
C HR D20 (diodes) 1
D HL D20 (diodes) 3
E HV D20 (diodes) 5
F S D1 8
G GS D1 9
H BN junction D19 2
J M fuse _F8 -
K N fuse _F9 -
L V MRL2a 5
M G MRL3a 5
N N X3 13
P M D1 20
R N D1 24
S C MRL6 5
T MN fuse _F11 -
U BG X3 1
V not used
W not used
Fig.115-10
10-89

TERMINAL BOX (X1A) FOR CONNECTION TO
FRONT LINE

or component
1 N fuse _F1 -
2 L RL2 87
3 C D7 5
4 not used
A MN D1 21
B NZ D11 1
C BH D1 22
D BV D1 16
E LV D1 30
F HL X3 8
G GR D1 25
H H fuse _F19 -
J HN fuse _F20 -
K V fuse _F14 -
L NV fuse _F15 -
M C fuse _F12 -
N G D3 3
P B MRL4 87
R BM junction D19 2 3
S NV RL4 85
T V RL4 87
U N D3 4
V Z D9 4 Fig.116-10
W B MRL4 87
TERMINAL BOX (X3) FOR CONNECTION TO ROOF

LINE

or component
1 BG X2a U
2 M fuse _F8 -
3 R-R X2a-D7 A-3
4 BR MRL6 1
5 N fuse _F9 -
6 R D21 3
7 RV D9 2
8 HL-HL D1-X1a 31-F
9 NR RL1 87
10 V fuse _F13 -
11 G MRL3a 5
12 NR RL1 87
13 N-N X2a-D1 N-33
14 V MRL2a 5
15 NR RL1 87
Fig.117-10
10-90

JUNCTION (D19)

or component
1 BN D1 28
2 BN-BM X2a-X1a H-R
DIODES (D20)

or component
1 HR-HR MRL2-X2a 2-C

2 diode RL3 85
3 HL-HL X2a-D1 D-3
4 diode RL3 85
5 HV-HV MRL1-X2a 2-E
6 diode RL3 85
NOTE: Diodes have the purpose to avoid the return of a few

electric signals, in order to avoid the tractor starting when some
functions are engaged, e.g. PTO.
10-91

CONNECTOR (D22) FOR ADDITIONAL HEADLIGHT
CONTROL

or component
1 GR MRL1a 5
2 R MRL4a 5
Fig.118-10
CONNECTOR (D23) GROUND ON THE CHASSIS
Fig.119-10
DIODE (D24)

or component
1 diode D8 17
2 diode MRL6a 5
DIODE (D25)

or component
1 diode D8 18
2 diode MRL5a 5
10-92
CHAP. 10
Roof-cab line
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wirings
3E - Roof-cab line
3E-1 General description .............................................. 10-94

3E-2 Wiring diagram ...................................................... 10-95
3E-3 Wiring .................................................................... 10-96
3E-4 Connector locations.............................................. 10-97
3E-5 Connector identification ........................................ 10-98
10-93
3E - Roof-cab line
3E -1 General description
The roof line is connected with the inner cab line by
means of the connection between the terminal boxes
(X3) (Fig.120-10) located in the lower part under the
main fuse box.
The roof line of the cab mounted on Ghibli tractors
connects the work lights, the loudspeakers, the win-
dow wiper motors, the rotating beacon, the cab inner
lighting etc.
The main functions supplied by this line are protected
against short circuits and excessive power draw by X3
the fuses in the box (C Fig.121-10) located high on the
left, beside the work light controls.
Fig.120-10
NOTE: The difference of the roof line on the tractors
for the NAO markets consists in the presence of a
further connector, required for the control of addition-
al beams.
Fig.121-10
10-94
Roof-cab line
3E-2 Wiring diagram
E21 E18
E33
ELECTRONIC RH REAR
POWER LIFT WORK LIGHTS
ENABLE
E22
E32 E19
LH REAR
E1 WORK LIGHTS
E20 E6 E16
EXTENSION RH FRONT
WORK LIGHTS
E7 E15
REAR WINDOW LH FRONT
E34 WORK LIGHTS
WIPER
WINDSCREEN E5 E23 CIGARETTE

WIPER LIGHTER
LH REAR E26
LOUDSPEAKER E17 WINDOW WIPER
RESERVOIR
E27
RH REAR
LOUDSPEAKER E35
WORK LIGHT
E4 SWITCH
4WD SWITCH WINDOWSCREEN

DIFF LOCK SWITCH E39 E3
WASHER SWITCH
E38
E13 WORK LIGHT

E2 SWITCH
RADIO
E12
E25
TERMINAL BOX FOR
RH REAR
HEADLIGHT/TURN
X3a CONNECTION TO CAB
E24 INNER LINE
INDICATOR
RH FRONT E11
HEADLIGHT/TURN
INDICATOR
LH FRONT
E9 HEADLIGHT/TURN
ROTATING BEACON E31
INDICATOR
E29
LH REAR
HEADLIGHT/TURN
PASSENGER LIGHT E21 E28 INDICATOR
E30 LICENSE PLATE

LIGHT
E10 GROUND
Fig.122-10
10-95
Roof-cab line
3E-3 Wiring
WINDOWSCREEN
WINDOW WASHER
WASHER SWITCH
RESERVOIR
E26 RH REAR
E27 HEADLIGHT/TURN
LH REAR INDICATOR
HEADLIGHT/TURN
INDICATOR
LH REAR WORK E25 E24

LIGHT
E33
E29 E28
LH REAR E32
WORK WORK FUSE BOX LOUDSPEAKER
LIGHT LIGHT
SWITCH SWITCH LICENSE
PLATE LIGHT
E35
REAR WINDOW
E5 WIPER MOTOR
E30
E4 E2 E1 E14
E6 E3 ROTATING
BEACON
E34
LH FRONT
WORK LIGHT
S
DING
E7 WEL
RH REAR
E36 E16 LOUDSPEAKER
E37 RH FRONT
WORK LIGHTS
E17
E23
E15
TERMINAL BOX FOR CIGARETTE
RH REAR LIGHTER
INNER CAB LINE
JUNCTION
WORK LIGHTS E18
E19
PASSENGER
X3a LIGHT E14
ELECTRONIC
POWER LIFT
E20 ENABLING
TO 4WD AND DIFF
E9 RADIO
LOCK SWITCHES
LH FRONT HEADLIGHT/ EXTENSION
TURN INDICATOR
E21 E22
E13
RH FRONT ELECTRONIC
GROUND
E10 E12 HEADLIGHT TURN
INDICATOR
E11 POWER LIFT
ENABLING Fig.123-10
10-96
Roof-cab line
3E - 4 Connector locations
E9 E7 E6 E1 E4 E3 E2 E5 E14 E16 E15 E11 E12 E13 E17
E1 - Fuse box
E2 - Connector for work light switches
E19
E2 - Connector for window washer switches
E4 - Connector for work light switches
E18 E5 - Connector for windowscreen wiper
E33 E6 - Faston terminals for LH front work light
E32 E7 - Faston terminals for LH front work light
E10 E31 X3a - Terminal box for inner cab line junction
E39 E25
E38 E9 - Connector for LH front headlight/turn indicator
E10 - Ground
E20
E35 E11 - Connector for RH front headlight/turn indicator
E12 - Connector for radio
E24 E13 - Connector for radio
E14 - Calipers for poassenger light
E15 - Faston terminals for RH front work light
E23 E16 - Faston terminals for RH front work light
E17 - Terminals for RH rear loudspeaker
X3a E21 E18 - Faston terminals for RH rear work light
E22 E19 - Faston terminals for RH rear work light
E20 - To 4WD and diff lock switches extension
E21 - Connector for electronic power lift enabling
E22 - Connector for electronic power lift enabling
E23 - Faston terminals for cigarette lighter
E26 E24 - Faston terminals for RH rear light/turn indicator
E25 - Faston terminals for RH rear light/turn indicator
E26 - Terminal for window washer reservoir
E27 E27 - Terminal for window washer reservoir
E28 - Faston terminals for LH rear light/turn indicator
E28 E29 - Faston terminals for LH rear light/turn indicator
E30 - License plate light connector
E31 - Faston terminals for rotating beacon
E29 E32 - Faston terminals for LH rear work light
E33 - Faston terminals for LH rear work light
E30 E34 - Connector for rear window wiper motor
E35 - Terminals for LH rear loudspeaker
Fig.124-10
10-97
Roof-cab line
3E-5 Connector identification
CONNECTOR (E2) FOR WORK LIGHT SWITCH

or component
1 not used
2 H fuse _F22 -
3 H-H E6-E16 1-1
4 not used
5 not used Fig.125-10
6 not used
7 B-B E10 (ground)-E4 7
8 G-G X3a-E4 5-8
CONNECTOR (E3) FOR WINDSCREEN WASHER

SWITCH

or component
1 LR E27 1
2 BN fuse _F22 -
3 HR E26 1
4 not used
5 not used
7 B E4 7
8 G-G E23-E4 1-8
CONNECTOR (E4) FOR WORK LIGHT SWITCHES

or component
1 not used
2 HN fuse _F23 -
3 HN-HN E18-E33 1-1
4 not used
5 not used
6 not used
7 B-B E3-E2 7-7
Fig.127-10
8 G-G E3-E2 8-8
10-98
Roof-cab line
CONNECTOR (E5) FOR WINDSCREEN WIPER
MOTOR

or component
1 LR fuse _F26 -
2 B E10 (ground) -
Fig.128-10
FASTON TERMINAL (E6) FOR LH FRONT WORK

LIGHTS

or component
1 H-H E37-E2 1-3

2 B E10 (ground) -
Fig.129-10
FASTON TERMINAL (E7) FOR LH FRONT WORK

LIGHTS

or component
1 H E6 1
2 B E10 (ground) -
Fig.130-10
10-99

TERMINAL BOX (X3A) FOR CONNECTION TO CAB
INNER LINE

or component
1 BG E20 4
2 GN-GN E30-E11 2-1
3 R-R E29-E25 1-1
4 BR E20 2
5 G-G E2-E9 8-1
6 R fuse _F18 -
7 RV E31 1
8 LB E22 4
9 RN fuse _F27 -
10 V E30 3
11 L E9 2
12 RN fuse _F22 -
13 N E21 1
14 AN-AN E24-E11 2-2
15 RN fuse _F23 -
Fig.131-10
CONNECTOR (E9) FOR LH FRONT HEADLIGHT /

TURN INDICATOR

or component
1 G-G X3a-E24 5-1

2 L-L X3a-E28 11-2
3 B E10 (ground) -
Fig.132-10
CONNECTOR (E10) GROUND ON THE CHASSIS
Fig.133-10
10-100
Roof-cab line
CONNECTOR (E11) FOR LH FRONT HEADLIGHT /
TURN INDICATOR

or component
1 GN X3a 2
2 AN X3a 14
3 B junction E37 -
Fig.134-10
CONNECTOR (E12) FOR RADIO

or component
1 not used
2 SN E12 7
3 not used
4 SN fuse _F17 -
5 not used
6 not used
7 SN E12 2 Fig.135-10
8 B junction E37 -
CONNECTOR (E13) FOR RADIO

or component
1 HL E17 1
2 BN E17 2
3 not used
4 not used
5 not used
6 not used
7 MV E35 1
Fig.136-10
8 C E35 2
10-101
Roof-cab line
FASTON TERMINALS (E14) FOR PASSENGER
LIGHT

or component
1 R fuse _F16 -
2 B junction E37 -
Fig.137-10
FASTON TERMINALS (E15) FOR RX FRONT WORK

LIGHTS

or component
1 H E16 1
2 B junction E37 -
Fig.138-10
FASTON TERMINALS (E16) FOR RX FRONT WORK

LIGHTS

or component
1 H-H E15-E2 1-3

2 B junction E37 -
Fig.139-10
FASTON TERMINAL (E17) FOR RH LOUDSPEAKER

or component
1 HL E13 1
2 BN E13 2
Fig.140-10
10-102
Roof-cab line
FASTON TERMINALS (E18) FOR RX REAR WORK
LIGHTS

or component
1 HN-HN E4-E19 3-1

2 B junction E37 -
Fig.141-10
FASTON TERMINALS (E19) FOR RX REAR WORK

LIGHTS

or component
1 HN E18 1
2 B junction E37 -
Fig.142-10
CONNECTOR (E20) FOR EXTENSION OF 4WD

BUTTONS AND DIFF LOCK

or component
1 B-B-B E22-E21-junction E37 1-2

2 BR X3a 4
3 V X3a 10
4 BG X3a 1
Fig.143-10
CONNECTOR (E21) FOR ELECTRONIC POWER

LIFT ENABLE

or component
1 N X3a 13
2 B E20 1
Fig.144-10
10-103
Roof-cab line
CONNECTOR (E22) FOR ELECTRONIC POWER
LIFT ENABLE

or component
1 B E20 1
2 VN fuse _F21 -
3 M fuse _F18 -
4 LB X3a 8
Fig.145-10
FASTON TERMINALS (E23) FOR CIGARETTE

LIGHTER

or component
1 G E3 8
2 B junction E36 -
3 RN fuse _F27 -
Fig.146-10
CONNECTOR (E24) FOR HEADLIGHT/RH REAR

TURN INDICATOR

or component
1 G E9 1
2 AN X3a 14
3 B-B E25-junction E37 2
Fig.147-10
CONNECTOR (E25) FOR HEADLIGHT/RH REAR

TURN INDICATOR

or component
1 R X3a 3
2 B E24 3
Fig.148-10
10-104
Roof-cab line
RESERVOIR

or component
1 HR E3 3
Fig.149-10

RESERVOIR

or component
1 LR E3 1
2 B E26 2
Fig.150-10
CONNECTOR (E28) FOR HEADLIGHT/LH REAR

TURN INDICATOR

or component
1 GN E30 2
2 L E9 2
Fig.151-10
CONNECTOR (E29) FOR HEADLIGHT/LH REAR

TURN INDICATOR

or component
'
1 R X3a 3
2 B-B E30-E28 1-3
Fig.152-10
10-105
Roof-cab line
CONNECTOR (E30) FOR LICENCE PLATE LIGHT

or component
1 B E29 2
2 GN-GN X3a-E28 2-1
Fig.153-10
FASTON TERMINALS (E31) FOR ROTATING

BEACON

or component
1 RV X3a 7
2 B junction E36 -
Fig.154-10
FASTON TERMINALS (E32) FOR LH REAR WORK

LIGHTS

or component
1 HN E33 1
2 B junction E36 -
Fig.155-10
TERMINALI FASTON (E33) FOR LH REAR WORK

LIGHTS

or component
1 HN-HN E32-E34 1-3

2 B junction E36 -
Fig.156-10
10-106
Roof-cab line
CONNECTOR (E34) FOR REAR WINDOW WIPER
or component
1 HR fuse _F24 -
2 B junction E36 -
Fig.157-10
FASTON TERMINALS (E35) FOR LH REAR

LOUDSPEAKER

or component
1 MV E13 7
2 C E13 8
Fig.158-10
JUNCTION (E36)

or component
E28 3
E33 2
E31 2
E10 (ground) B E34 2
E26 2
E32 2
E23 2
JUNCTION (E37)

or component
E28 3
E15 2
E16 2
E11 3
E10 (ground) B E12 8
E20 1
E24 3
E19 2
E18 2
10-107
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
10-108
CHAP. 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wirings
3F - Roof-cab line (NAO version)
3F-1 General description ............................................ 10-110

3F-2 Wiring diagram.................................................... 10-111
3F-3 Wiring .................................................................. 10-112
3F-4 Connector locations ........................................... 10-113
3F-5 Connector identification...................................... 10-114
10-109
3F - Roof-cab line (NAO version)

3F-1 General description
The roof line (NAO version) is connected with the in-
ner cab line by means of the connection between the
terminal boxes (X3) located in the lower part under the
The roof line of the cab mounted on Ghibli tractors
connects the work lights, the loudspeakers, the win- F40
dow wiper motors, the rotating beacon, the cab inner
lighting etc.
The difference of the roof line on the tractors for the
NAO markets consists in the presence of a further
connector (F40 Fig.159-10), required for the control of
additional beams.
The main functions supplied by this line are protect- X3
ed against short circuits and excessive power draw Fig.159-10
by the fuses in the box (C Fig.160-10) located high
on the left, beside the work light controls.
Fig.160-10
10-110

3F-2 Wiring diagram
F21 F18
ELECTRONIC F33
RH REAR
POWER LIFT
WORK LIGHTS
ENABLE
F22
F19
F32
LH REAR
F1 WORK LIGHTS
F20 F6 F16
EXTENSION RH FRONT
WORK LIGHTS
F15
F7
REAR WINDOW LH FRONT
F34 WORK LIGHTS
WIPER
WINDSCREEN F5 F23 CIGARETTE

WIPER LIGHTER
LH REAR F26
LOUDSPEAKER F17 WINDOW WIPER
RESERVOIR
F27
RH REAR F35
LOUDSPEAKER
WORK LIGHT
F4
SWITCH
DIFF LOCK SWITCH F39 4WD SWITCH WINDOWSCREEN

F3 WASHER SWITCH
F38
F13 WORK LIGHT

F2 SWITCH
RADIO
F12 ADDITIONAL HEADLIGHT

F40
CONTROL
F25 TERMINAL BOX FOR

RH REAR X3a CONNECTION TO CAB
HEADLIGHT/TURN
INNER LINE
INDICATOR F24
RH FRONT
F11
HEADLIGHT/TURN
INDICATOR
LH FRONT
F9
ROTATING BEACON F31 HEADLIGHT/TURN
INDICATOR
F29
LH REAR
HEADLIGHT/TURN
PASSENGER LIGHT F14 INDICATOR
F28
F30 LICENSE PLATE

LIGHT
F10 GROUND
Fig.161-10
10-111

3F-3 Wiring
WINDOWSCREEN
WINDOW WASHER
WASHER SWITCH
RESERVOIR
F26 RH REAR
F27 HEADLIGHT/TURN
LH REAR INDICATOR
HEADLIGHT/TURN
INDICATOR
LH REAR WORK F25 F24

LIGHT
F33
F29 F28
LH REAR F32
WORK WORK FUSE BOX LOUDSPEAKER
LIGHT LIGHT
SWITCH SWITCH LICENSE
PLATE LIGHT
F35
REAR WINDOW
F5 WIPER MOTOR
F30
WINDOWSCREEN
WIPER
MOTOR
F4 F2 F1 F31
F6 F3 ROTATING
BEACON
F34
LH FRONT
WORK LIGHT
S
DING
F7 WEL
RH REAR
F36 F16 LOUDSPEAKER
F37 RH FRONT
WORK LIGHTS
F17
F23
F15
TERMINAL BOX FOR CIGARETTE
RH REAR LIGHTER
INNER CAB LINE
JUNCTION
WORK LIGHTS F18
F19
PASSENGER
X3a LIGHT F14
ELECTRONIC
POWER LIFT
F20
TO 4WD AND DIFF ENABLING
F40 LOCK SWITCHES
EXTENSION
ADDITIONAL RADIO
HEADLIGHTS CONTROL
F9 F21 F22
F13
LH FRONT HEADLIGHT/ RH FRONT ELECTRONIC
GROUND
TURN INDICATOR F10 F12 HEADLIGHT TURN
INDICATOR
F11 POWER LIFT
ENABLING Fig.162-10
10-112

3F - 4 Connector locations
F9 F7 F6 F1 F4 F3 F2 F5 F14 F16 F15 F11 F12 F13 F17
F1 - Fuse box
F2 - Connector for work light switches
F3 - Connector for windscreen washer switches
F19
F4 - Connector for work light switches
F5 - Connector for windowscreen wiper
F18 F6 - Faston terminals for LH front work light
F33 F7 - Faston terminals for LH front work light
F32 Xa3 - Terminal box for inner cab line junction
F10 F31 F9 - Connector for LH front headlight/turn indicator
F39 F25
F38 F10 - Ground
F11 - Connector for RH front headlight/turn indicator
F20
F35 F12 - Connector for radio
F13 - Connector for radio
F24 F14 - Terminal for passenger light
F15 - Faston terminals for RH front work light
F16 - Faston terminals for RH front work light
F23 F17 - Terminals for RH rear loudspeaker
F18 - Faston terminals for RH rear work light
X3a F21 F19 - Faston terminals for RH rear work light
F22 F20 - To 4WD and diff lock switches extension
F40 F21 - Connector for electronic power lift enabling
F22 - Connector for electronic power lift enabling
F23 - Faston terminals for cigarette lighter
F24 - Faston terminals for RH rear light/turn indicator
F26 F25 - Faston terminals for RH rear light/turn indicator
F26 - Terminal for window washer reservoir
F27 - Terminal for window washer reservoir
F27 F28 - Faston terminals for LH rear light/turn indicator
F29 - Faston terminals for LH rear light/turn indicator
F28 F30 - License plate light connector
F31 - Faston terminals for rotating beacon
F32 - Faston terminals for LH rear work light
F29 F33 - Faston terminals for LH rear work light
F34 - Connector for rear window wiper motor
F30 F35 - Terminals for LH rear loudspeaker
F40 - Connector for additional headlights
Fig.163-10
10-113

3F-5 Connector identification
CONNECTOR (F2) FOR WORK LIGHTS SWITCH

or component
1 not used
2 H fuse _F22 -
3 H-H F6-F16 1-1
4 not used
6 not used
7 B-B F10 (ground)-F4 7
8 G-G X3a-F4 5-8
CONNECTOR (F3) FOR WIDSCREEN WASHER

SWITCH

or component
1 LR F27 1
2 BN fuse _F22 -
3 HR F26 1
4 not used
5 not used
7 B F4 7
8 G-G F23-F4 1-8
CONNECTOR (F4) FOR WIRK LIGHTS SWITCH

or component
1 not used
2 HN fuse _F23 -
3 HN-HN F18-F33 1-1
4 not used
5 not used
6 not used
7 B-B F3-F2 7-7
Fig.166-10
8 G-G F3-F2 8-8
10-114

CONNECTOR (F5) FOR FRONT WINDSCREEN
WIPER MOTOR

or component
1 LR fuse _F26 -
2 B F10 (ground) -
Fig.167-10
FASTON TERMINAL (F6) FOR LH FRONT WORK

LIGHT

or component
1 H-H F37-F2 1-3

2 B F10 (ground) -
Fig.168-10
FASTON TERMINAL (F7) FOR LH FRONT WORK

LIGHT

or component
1 H F6 1
2 B F10 (ground) -
Fig.169-10
10-115

TERMINAL BOX (X3A) FOR CONNECTION TO CAB
INSIDE

or component
1 BG F20 4
2 GN-GN F30-F11 2-1
3 R-R F29-F25 1-1
4 BR F20 2
5 G-G F2-F9 8-1
6 R fuse _F18 -
7 RV F31 1
8 LB F22 4
9 RN fuse _F27 -
10 V F20 3
11 L F9 2
12 RN fuse _F22 -
13 N F21 1
14 AN-AN F24-F11 2-2
15 RN fuse _F23 -
Fig.170-10
CONNECTOR (F9) FOR LF FRONT HEADLIGHT/

TURN INDICATOR

or component
1 G-G X3a-_F23 5-1

2 L-L X3a-_F22 11-2
3 B F10 (ground) -
Fig.171-10
CONNECTOR (F10) GROUND ON CHASSIS
Fig.172-10
10-116

CONNECTOR (F11) FOR RH FRONT HEADLIGHT /
TURN INDICATOR

or component
1 GN X3a 2
2 AN X3a 14
3 B junction E37 -
Fig.173-10
CONNECTOR (F12) FOR RADIO

or component
1 not used
2 SN F12 7
3 not used
4 SN fuse _F17 -
5 not used
6 not used
7 SN F12 2 Fig.174-10
8 B junction F37 -
CONNECTOR (F13) FOR RADIO

or component
1 HL F17 1
2 BN F17 2
3 not used
4 not used
5 not used
6 not used
7 MV F35 1
Fig.175-10
8 C F35 2
10-117

FASTON TERMINALS (F14) FOR PASSENGER
LIGHT

or component
1 R fuse _F16 -
2 B junction F37 -
Fig.176-10
FASTON TERMINALS (F15) FOR RH FRONT WORK

LIGHT

or component
1 H F16 1
2 B junction F37 -
Fig.177-10
FASTON TERMINALS (F16) FOR RH FRONT WORK

LIGHT

or component
1 H-H F15-F2 1-3

2 B junction F37 -
Fig.178-10
FASTON TERMINAL (F17) FOR RH LOUDSPEAKER

or component
1 HL F13 1
2 BN F13 2
Fig.179-10
10-118

FASTON TERMINALS (F18) FOR RH REAR WORK
LIGHT

or component
1 HN-HN F4-F19 3-1

2 B junction E37 -
Fig.180-10
FASTON TERMINALS (F19) FOR RH REAR WORK

LIGHT

or component
1 HN F18 1
2 B junction F37 -
Fig.181-10
CONNECTOR (F20) FOR EXTENSION FOR 4WD

AND DIFF LOCK SWITCHES

or component
1 B-B-B F22-F21-junction F37 1-2

2 BR X3a 4
3 V X3a 10
4 BG X3a 1
Fig.182-10
CONNECTOR (F21) FOR ELECTRONIC POWER

LIFT ENABLE

or component
1 N X3a 13
2 B F20 1
Fig.183-10
10-119

CONNECTOR (F22) FOR ELECTRONIC POWER
LIFT ENABLE

or component
1 B F20 1
2 VN fuse _F21 -
3 M fuse _F18 -
4 LB X3a 8
Fig.184-10
FASTON TERMINALS (F23) FOR CIGARETTE

LIGHTER

or component
1 G F3 8
2 B junction F36 -
3 RN fuse _F27 -
Fig.185-10
CONNECTOR (F24) FOR RH REAR HEADLIGHT /

TURN INDICATOR

or component
1 RG F40 1
2 G F9 1
3 B-B F25-junction F37 2
Fig.186-10
CONNECTOR (F25) FOR RH REAR HEADLIGHT /

TURN INDICATOR

or component
1 R X3a 3
2 B F24 3
Fig.187-10
10-120

CONNECTOR (F26) FOR WINDSCREEN WASHER
RESERVOIR

or component
1 HR F3 3
Fig.188-10
CONNECTOR (F27) FOR WINDSCREEN WASHER

RESERVOIR

or component
1 LR F3 1
2 B F26 2
Fig.189-10
CONNECTOR (F28) FOR LH REAR HEADLIGHT /

TURN INDICATOR

or component
1 R F40 2
2 GN F30 2
Fig.190-10
CONNECTOR (F29) FOR LH REAR HEADLIGHT /

TURN INDICATOR

or component
1 R X3a 3
2 B-B F30-F28 1-3
Fig.191-10
10-121

CONNECTOR (F30) FOR LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

or component
1 B F29 2
2 GN-GN X3a-F28 2-2
Fig.192-10
FASTON TERMINALS (F31) FOR ROTATING

BEACON

or component
1 RV X3a 7
2 B junction F36 -
Fig.193-10
FASTON TERMINALS (F32) FOR LH REAR WORK

LIGHT

or component
1 HN F33 1
2 B junction F36 -
Fig.194-10
TERMINALI FASTON (F33) FOR LH REAR WORK

LIGHT

or component
1 HN-HN F32-F4 1-3

2 B junction F36 -
Fig.195-10
10-122

CONNECTOR (F34) FOR REAR WINDOW WIPER
MOTOR
or component
1 HR fuse _F24 -
2 B junction F36 -
Fig.196-10
FASTON TERMINALS (F35) FOR LH REAR

LOUDSPEAKER

or component
1 MV F13 7
2 C F13 8
Fig.197-10
CONNECTOR (F40) FOR ADDITIONAL HEADLIGHT

CONTROL

or component
1 RG F24 1
2 R F28 1
Fig.198-10
JUNCTION (F36)

or component
F28 3
F33 2
F31 2
F10 (ground) B F34 2
F26 2
F32 2
F23 2
10-123

JUNCTION (F37)

or component
F28 3
F15 2
F16 2
F11 3
F10 (ground) B F12 8
F20 1
F24 3
F19 2
F18 2
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
10-124
CHAP. 10
Rear line
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wirings
3G - Rear line
3G-1 General description ........................................... 10-126

3G-2 Wiring diagram ................................................... 10-127
3G-3 Wiring ................................................................. 10-128
3G-4 Connector locations........................................... 10-129
3G-5 Connector identification ..................................... 10-130
10-125
3G - Rear line
3G -1 General description
The rear line installed on Ghibli tractors supplies the
components (e.g. trailer power socket, solenoid valves)
and the sensors (e.g. PTO RPM, ground speed) locat-
ed in the rear of the tractor.
The rear line is connected both with the inner cab line
es (X2) located on the lower left front side of the cab
(Fig.199-10). X2
NOTE: The difference of the rear line on Ghibli trac-
tors for the NAO markets consists in the presence
of a reinforced trailer power socket.
Fig.199-10
10-126
Rear line
3G-2 Wiring diagram
(NAO VERSION)
SAFETY SWITCH
TRAILER POWER SOCKET
G1
DIFF LOCK SOLENOID

VALVE G14
FUEL LEVEL
G2
4WD SOLENOID VALVE

G13
G3
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
G4 TERMINAL BOX FOR

X2 CONNECTION TO INNER CAB
LINE
4WD ENGAGE/DISENGAGE
SWITCH
G5
PTO RPM SENSOR
G11
GROUND SPEED
SENSOR
G6
PROPORTIONAL PTO G10
SWITCHES
SLOW/FAST
PTO SWITCH
G7
G9
TRAILER BRAKE
SENSOR
G8
Fig.200-10
10-127
Rear line
3G-3 Wiring
SAFETY SWITCH
G1
4WD SOLENOID
VALVE
FUEL LEVEL
G3 G13
G2
DIFF LOCK
SOLENOID VALVE
X2
TERMINAL BOX FOR
CONNECTION TO
INNER CAB LINE
SLOW/FAST PTO
SWITCH G9
GROUND SPEED
SENSOR 4WD ENGAGE/DISENGAGE
INDICATOR SWITCH
G10
G8
TRAILER BRAKE
SENSOR
G11
G5
PTO RPM SENSOR
PARKING BRAKE
SWITCH
TRAILER POWER
SOCKET G6 G4
G7
G14 PROPORTIONAL PTO
SWITCHES
(NAO VERSION) G14a
Fig.201-10
10-128
Rear line
3G-4 Connector locations
X2 G1 G4 G8
RIGHT-HAND VIEW
G2 - Connector for diff lock solenoid valve
G3 - Connector for 4WD solenoid valve
G11 - PTO RPM rate connector
G14 - Terminal for trailer power socket
G14a - Plug terminal for trailer power socket (NAO version)
G14a (NAO version)

G14 G3 G2
LEFT-HAND VIEW
G13
G5
G10 G7 G6 G9 G11
Fig.202-10
G1 - Faston terminals for safety switches

G4 - Terminals for parking brake switches
G5 - Faston terminals for 4WD engage/disengage indication
G6 - Terminals for proportional PTO switches
G7 - Terminals for proportional PTO switches
G8 - Connector for trailer brake sensor
G9 - Slow/fast PTO switch connector
G10 - Ground speed sensor connector
G13 - Connector for fuel level sensor
X2 - Terminal box for inner cab line junction Fig.203-10
10-129
Rear line
FASTON TERMINALS (G1) FOR SAFETY SWITCH

or component
1 L X2 1
2 LN X2 2
Fig.204-10
CONNECTOR (G2) FOR DIFF LOCK SOLENOID

VALVE

or component
1 MN X2 T
2 C X2 S
Fig.205-10
CONNECTOR (G3) FOR 4WD SOLENOID VALVE

or component
1 BG X2 U
2 B X2 4
Fig.206-10
CONNECTOR (G4) FOR PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

or component
1 BN X2 H
2 B-B G7-G5 2-2
Fig.207-10
10-130
Rear line
FASTON TERMINALS (G5) FOR SWITCH
INDICATING ENGAGED/DISENGAGED 4WD

or component
1 LR X2 B
2 B G4 2
Fig.208-10
TERMINALS (G6) FOR PROPORTIONAL PTO

SWITCHES

or component
1 HR X2 C
2 B-B X2-G7 3-2
Fig.209-10
TERMINALS (G7) FOR PROPORTIONAL PTO

SWITCHES

or component
1 GR G9 2
2 B-B G6-G4 2-2
Fig.210-10
CONNECTOR (G8) FOR TRAILER BRAKE SENSOR

or component
1 M X2 P
2 B G14 3
Fig.211-10
10-131
Rear line
CONNECTOR (G9) FOR SLOW/FAST PTO

or component
1 GR G9 2
2 GR-GR G7-G9 2-1
3 HV X2 E
4 HL X2 D
Fig.212-10
CONNECTOR (G10) FOR GROUND SPEED

or component
1 N X2 N
2 B X2 3
Fig.213-10
CONNECTOR (G11) FOR PTO ROTATION SPEED

SENSOR

or component
1 N X2 R
2 B G14 3
Fig.214-10
10-132
Rear line
TERMINAL BOX (X2) FOR CONNECTION TO INNER
CAB LINE

or component
1 L G1 1
2 LN G1 2
3 B-B G10-G6 2-2
4 B-B G14-G3 3-2
A R G14 6
B LR G5 1
C HR G6 1
D HL G9 4
E HV G9 3
F S G13 2
G GS G13 1
H BN G4 1
J M G14 5
K N G14 7
L V G14 4
M G G14 1
N N G10 1
P M G8 1
R N G11 1
S C G2 2
T MN G2 1
U BG G3 1
V not used
Fig.215-10
W not used
CONNECTOR (G13) FOR FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

or component
1 GS X2 G
2 S X2 F
3 B G14 3
Fig.216-10
10-133
Rear line
POWER SOCKET (G14) FOR TRAILER

or component
1 G X2 M
2 not used
3 B-B-B-B X2-G11-G8-G13 4-2-2-3
4 V X2 L
5 M X2 J
6 R X2 A
7 N X2 K
Fig.217-10
POWER SOCKET (G14a) FOR TRAILER

(NAO VERSION)

or component
1 B-B-B-B X2-G11-G8-G13 4-2-2-3

2 N X2 K
3 G X2 M
4 R X2 A
5 V X2 L
6 M X2 J
7 not used
Fig.218-10
10-134
CHAP. 10
Main components
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4-1 Introduction .......................................................... 10-136

4A - Sensors ............................................................... 10-137
4C - Switches and buttons ......................................... 10-149
4D - Instrument ........................................................... 10-155
10-135

4-1 Introduction
This section deals with the "main" electrical compo-
nents installed in Ghibli tractors for which the repair
electrician must be familiar with particular information
and skills concerning the maintenance operations.
The sensors, solenoid valves, switches and buttons
are identified by a letter and a progressive number.
This identification remains the same in all sections of
this manual.
NOTE: unless specified differently, the information

concerning the components is also valid for tractors
designed for the NAO market.
10-136
CHAP. 10
Sensors
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4A - Sensors
4A-1 General description ............................................ 10-138

4A-2 Location .............................................................. 10-139
4A-3 Identification ........................................................ 10-140
10-137
4A - Sensors
The sensors have a double function:
- they detect any abnormal situations in the tractor;
- they detect an operating condition of the tractor.
In both cases, the operator is informed about the va-
lues measured by the indicator lights and leds on the
dashboard.
The sensors used in Ghibli tractors are the inductive
type.
INDUCTIVE SENSOR (FIG.219-10)
The inductive sensor has an internal part formed by a

Fig.219-10
cylinder in ferromagnetic material surrounded by a win-
ding.
When the sensor is set in the frontal position in rela-
tion to the teeth of a turning gear, an alternate voltage
is obtained (by induction) on the external winding of
the sensor itself. The magnetic field of the cylinder
strikes the teeth of the gear which, by turning, influen-
ces its continuity.
The frequency of the voltage obtained allows the rota-
tion rate to be calculated.
HOW TO CHECK THE INDUCTIVE SENSORS
Using a tester, measure the value of the resistance in

the sensor. This value must be about 450 ohm.
10-138
Sensors
4A - 2 Location
_ST1 _FU3 _SP1
_SR1 _SL2 _SP4
_SR2 _SP2
_SP2 - Engine high pressure oil filter clogging sensor

_ST1 - Engine coolant temperature sensor
_SP3 - Engine oil pressure sensor
_SP4 - Engine air filter clogging sensor
_SL2 - Brake fluid level sensor
_SP1 - Trailer brake sensor (Italian market only)
_SR1 - Ground speed sensor
_SR2 - PTO rotation speed sensor Fig.220-10
10-139
Sensors
4A - 3 Identification
ENGINE HIGH PRESSURE OIL FILTER CLOGGING
SENSOR
_SP2
The sensor (_SP2 Fig.221-10) installed on the tran-
smission oil filter intake, indicates whether these fil-
ters are clogged by means of an indicator light on the
dashboard.
Sensor (_SP2) is connected to the front wiring by me-
ans of connector (B11).
Fig.221-10
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Sensor (_ST1 Fig.222-10) installed on the cylinder

head, indicates the operating temperature of the engi-
ne and any overheating through an analog signal on
the instrument.
Sensor (_ST1) is connected to the front wiring by me-
B12
_ST1
Fig.222-10
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
The sensor (_SP3 Fig.223-10), installed on the left-

hand side of the engine, indicates when the engine oil
pressure is low by means of an indicator light on the
instrument.
_SP3
Fig.223-10
10-140
Sensors
ENGINE AIR FILTER CLOGGING SENSOR
B20
The sensor (_SP4 Fig.224-10) installed on the con-
nection sleeve between the intake manifold and air
filter indicates whether this latter is clogged by means
of an indicator light on the dashboard.
ans of faston terminals (B20).
_SP4
Fig.224-10
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR

B22 _SL2
The sensor (_SL2 Fig.225-10), installed on the plug of
the brake fluid reservoir, indicates whether the fluid
level is too low by means of an indicator light on the
dashboard.
Sensor (_SL2) is connected to the front wiring by me-
Fig.225-10
TRAILER BRAKE SENSOR (ITALIAN MARKET

ONLY)
The sensor (_SP1 Fig.226-10) (provided only on tractor _SP1 G8

for the Italian market), is installed on the trailer brake
valve and indicates whether the pressure in the hydrau-
lic circuit of the latter is too low.
The sensor, by means of an indicator light on the
dashboard, indicates if: 1- the oil in the valve has a
pressure below 10 bar, required to release the trailer
brake, 2- the oil in the valve has a pressure below 140
bar, required for maximum brake power.
ans of connector (G8).
Fig.226-10
10-141
Sensors
GROUND SPEED SENSOR
_SR1
The sensor (_SR1 Fig.227-10) is installed on the left-
hand side of the gearbox housing. The sensor indica-
tes the speed of the tractor on the ground by means of
the gear coupled to the crown wheel and pinion and
sends a signal to the dashboard to display the Kmh.
Sensor (_SR1) is connected to the rear wiring by me-
ans of connector (G10).
Fig.227-10
PTO ROTATION SPEED SENSOR
The sensor (_SR2 Fig.228-10) is installed on the right-

hand side of the rear of the gearbox housing. The sen-
sor feels the revolutions of the PTO shaft and sends a
signal to the dashboard to display the RPM count.
Sensor (_SR2) is connected to the rear wiring by me-
ans of connector (G11). _SR2
ADJUSTMENT:
- tighten the sensor until it contacts the PTO gear

- loosen it of about 1/2 turn
- tighten the lock nut to fix the adjustment.
Fig.228-10
10-142
CHAP. 10
Solenoid valves
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4B - Solenoid valves
4B-1 General description ............................................ 10-144

4B-2 Location .............................................................. 10-145
4B-3 Identification ........................................................ 10-146
10-143
4B-1 General description Solenoid valve assembly
The function of a solenoid valve is to open or close

the oil supply and to discharge the oil to the relative
user. This occurs by energizing or de-energizing the
solenoid valve, i.e. by transmitting or interrupting an
electric voltage, thus allowing the oil to flow or shut-
ting of the oil flow, according to the case in question.
The solenoid valves installed in Ghibli tractors are the
ON/OFF type (Fig.229-10).
P = Pressure
U = User
S = Discharge
Fig.229-10
Not-energized solenoid valve
Fig.230-10
Energized solenoid valve
Fig.231-10
10-144
Solenoid valves
4B - 2 Location
_YV2
_YV4 _YV1
_YV1 - Diff lock solenoid valve

_YV2 - Engine stop solenoid valve
_YV4 - 4WD solenoid valve
Fig.232-10
10-145
Solenoid valves
4A -3 Identification
SOLENOID VALVES ON THE POWER CLUTCH VALVE SYSTEM
_YV4
_YV1
_YV1 - Diff lock solenoid valve
_YV4 - 4WD solenoid valve Fig.233-10
The solenoid valves installed on the power clutch val-

ve system open and shut off the oil supply or dischar-
ge to and from the relative user.
To this purpose, an electric voltage is sent or interrup-
ted to energize or disenergize the solenoid valve thus
opening or shutting off the oil flow.
The solenoid valves are connected to the rear wiring
of the tractor by means of the following connectors:
_YV1- Diff lock solenoid valve ........... connector (G2)

_YV4- 4WD solenoid valve ................. connector (G3)
Solenoid valves Q2 and Q3 are of the ON/OFF type.
10-146
Solenoid valves
MOTOR STOP SOLENOID VALVE
Solenoid valve (_YV2 Fig.234-10) on the injection pump

opens or shuts off the fuel flow to the engine.
The solenoid valve (_YV2) energizes when the igni-
B27
tion key is turned clockwise, thus allowing fuel to flow
in order to start the tractor. On the other hand, when
the key is turned in the anti-clockwise direction, the
solenoid valve disenergizes, thus shutting off the fuel _YV2
flow and stopping the engine.
The solenoid valve (_YV4) is connected to the front
wiring by means of connector (B27).
Fig.234-10
10-147
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
10-148
CHAP. 10
Switches and buttons
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4C - Switches
4C-1 General description ............................................ 10-150

4C-2 Location .............................................................. 10-151
4C-3 Identification ........................................................ 10-152
10-149
4C - Switches and buttons

4C-1 General description
The purpose of the switches installed in Ghibli tractors
is to activate or deactivate a certain user. The tran-
smitted signals may be of two types: permanent and
temporary.
Permanent signal means a signal that indicates a de-
termined situation in a fade-free way.
Temporary signal is a control pulse sent to the moni-
toring plant in order to modify an already existing si-
tuation.
For example, the safety switch indicating 4WD enga-
gement/disengagement sends a permanent signal, that
is kept constant by means of a hydraulic system. On
the other hand, the diff lock engagement/disengage-
Fig.235-10
ment button transmits a temporary signal that modi-
fies an existing situation.
The pictures on the right depict a few types of switches

installed in Ghibli tractors.
Fig.236-10
Fig.237-10
10-150

4C - 2 Location
_SQ1b
_SQ1a _SQ2 _SQ4
_SQ8
_SB1 _SA1 _SA0 _SQ7
_SQ5
_SQ7-_SQ8 - Brake light and diff lock disengagement switches

_SA0 - Ignition switch
_SA1 - 4WD engagement/disengagement button
_SB1 - Diff lock engagement/disengagement button
_SQ1a-_SQ1b - Safety switches
_SQ5 - 4WD engagement/disengagement switches
_SQ2 - Proportional PTO selector switches
_SQ4 - PTO speed selector switches
Fig.238-10
10-151

4C-3 Identification
_SQ7 _SQ8
BRAKE LIGHT AND DIFF LOCK DISENGAGEMENT D7 C7
SWITCHES
Switches (_SQ7-_SQ8 Fig.239-10), in contact with

the brake pedals, have two functions:
1- they allow the brake lights to come on,
2 - they disengage the diff lock.
These functions take place when the pedals are used
both singly and latched.
Switches (_SQ7-_SQ8) are connected to the inner
cab wiring by means of connectors (C7) or (D7),
depending on the tractor version.
NOTE: If both switches are replaced, they must be Fig.239-10

mounted so that they are lightly pressed when the brake
pedals are not used.
IGNITION SWITCH
The ignition switch (_SA0 Fig.240-10) on the right-hand D6

side under the steering wheel allows the battery to power
the starter motor, thus enabling the engine to start. C6
The ignition switch (_SA0) is connected to the inner
cab wiring by means of faston terminals (C6) or (D6),
depending on the tractor version.
_SA0
Fig.240-10
4WD ENGAGEMENT/DISENGAGEMENT BUTTON

(SPRING-ON)
_SA1
The button (_SA1 Fig.241-10), located inside the cab
on the right of the driver's seat, allows the 4WD to be
engaged or disengaged.
The button (_SA1) is connected to the roof-cab wiring
by means of connector (E38) or (F38), depending on
the tractor version.
Fig.241-10
10-152

DIFF LOCK ENGAGEMENT/DISENGAGEMENT
BUTTON _SB1
The button (_SB1 Fig.242-10), located inside the cab
on the right of the driver's seat, allows the diff lock to
be engaged or disengaged.
The button (_SB1) is connected to the roof-cab wiring
by means of connector (E39) or (F39), depending on
the tractor version.
Fig.242-10
SAFETY SWITCHES
The switches (_SQ1a-_SQ1b Fig.243-10), located on

the housing between gearbox and axle, are a safety _SQ1a _SQ1b
device as they do not allow the engine to be ignited
when:
- the PTO is engaged
- a gear is engaged
- the reverse shuttle lever is not in neutral.
The switches (_SQ1a-_SQ1b) are connected to the
rear wiring by means of the faston terminal (G1).
Fig.243-10
4WD ENGAGEMENT/DISENGAGEMENT SWITCHES
The switch (_SQ5 Fig.244-10), installed in the Spring-

on unit housing, indicates whether 4WD is engaged or
disengaged by means of an indicator light on the
dashboard.
The switch (_SQ5) is connected to the rear wiring by
means of the faston terminals (G5).
_SQ5
Fig.244-10
10-153

PROPORTIONAL PTO SELECTOR SWITCHES
The switches (_SQ2 Fig.245-10), installed on the left-

G7 G6
hand side, in contact with the PTO engagement / di-
sengagement lever, indicates whether the PTO is being
used in standard or proportional mode, by means of
indicator lights in the dashboard.
The switches (_SQ2) are connected to the rear wiring
with terminals (G6) and (G7).
_SQ2
Fig.245-10
PTO SPEED SELECTOR SWITCHES
The switch (_SQ4 Fig.246-10), on the left-hand side

behind the final drive, indicates when the PTO is used
in fast or slow mode by means of indicator lights on
the dashboard.
means of connector (G9).
G9
_SQ4
Fig.246-10
10-154
CHAP. 10
Instrument
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4D - Instrument
4D-1 Indicators ............................................................ 10-156

4D-2 Wiring diagram.................................................... 10-158
4D-3 Settings ............................................................... 10-159
10-155
4D - Instrument
4D-1 Indicators
Fig.247-10
Warning lights Function indicators
Battery charging warning light - red. Direction indicator light for tractor - green.
Should go out as soon as engine starts.
Direction indicator light for 1st trailer -

Engine oil pressure warning light - red.
green.
Should go out as soon as engine starts. It is
quite normal for this light to come on if a hot
engine is allowed to idle. Side light indicator - green.
Dry air filter blockage warning light - red.

Main beam indicator - blue.
Warning light for transmission and

hydraulic circuit filter blockage - red.
Diff lock engagement indicator - orange.
Warning light for low pressure in the 4WD engaged indicator - orange (if instal-
transmission hydraulic circuit - red. When led).
it lights up, a warning buzzer sounds on the
dashboard. Refer to the Dealer's for repair.
1000 RPM PTO engaged indicator - oran-
ge
Red warning light. Lights up when the
parking brake is applied and when there Proportional PTO engaged indicator -
is insufficient fluid in the brake fluid orange.
reservoir or clutch disengagement circuit
reservoir. In this case, top up with fluid.
Not used
Indicator of low pressure in the trailer
brake circuit - red (if installed and depen-
ding on the market). 540 RPM PTO or 540ECO/1000 RPM PTO
engaged - yellow (depending on type moun-
ted)
10-156
Instrument
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.
- White area = temperature normal.

- Red area = temperature high.
Fig.248-10 The overheating warning light comes on at 105-110°C
(221-230°F). Possible causes of overheating:
a - Low engine coolant level.
c - RPM meter
b - Radiator caked with mud, dust, straw, etc.
c - Build-up of deposits in coolant circuit
The engine rate is shown on an analog gauge "B" on
d - Loose fan belt.
which, as the engine rate increases, a pointer moves e - Faulty thermostat valve.
up the scale. The pointer should never reach the red
zone which shows excessive engine speed. The gre- CAUTION: if the engine temperature is too high, let
en zone with the PTO symbol, indicates nominal engi- the engine idle immediately but do not switch it off. If
ne rate. The hour counter "A" at the bottom of the the temperature gauge stays in the red, identify the
gauge indicates the total hours worked, irrespective of cause immediately and seek expert advice if neces-
engine speed. sary.
5 white digits indicate the hours
1 yellow digit indicates 1/10th of an hour
1 yellow sector indicates 100/th of an hour.
d - Speed indicator
Fuel level gauge. When the poin-
ter moves into the red zone and
the reserve warning light comes on,
there is still about 10 liters of fuel
in the tank (2.25 gal.)(2.64 US gal.).
This indicator displays the ground speed of the tractor,
without considering any wheel slippage. The speed can
be displayed in Kph or Mph, depending on the coun-
try.
NOTE: If the original tyres must be changed for any special
applications, the indicator can be programmed again with the
new tyre sizes (see page 10-159).
e - PTO RPM meter
This indicator displays with great accuracy the PTO

rated speed. In this way it is possible to constantly
control the rotation speed of implements requiring a
precise rotation speed selection.
10-157
Fig.249-10
4D-2 Wiring diagram
10-158
Instrument
26 - Proportional PTO indicator light

16 - Ground speed and PTO shaft RPM electronic indicator 27 - PTO engaged indicator light
17 - Alternator indicator light 28 - Differential lock indicator light
18 - Engine oil pressure indicator light 29 - 1000 RPM PTO engaged indicator light
19 - Clogged air filter indicator light 30 - Vacant - Not used
20 - Clogged hydraulic oil filter indicator light 31 - Turn indicator indicator light
21 - Low pressure in hydraulic steering clutch circuit indicator light 32 - 1st trailer turn indicator indicator light
22 - Hand brake engaged and brake fluid level indicator light 33 - Tractor sidelight indicator light
23 - Trailer brake fluid pressure indicator light 35 - RPM meter
24 - 4WD engaged indicator light 36 - Fuel level gauge
25 - Headlights indicator light 37 - Engine coolant temperature indicator light
Instrument
4D-3 Settings
Fig.250-10
Ghibli 90
If the tyres must be replaced with different ones, the MICROSWITCH POSITION
ground speed indicator must be set again. Remove TYRE
the rubber plug that protects the microswitches on the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
rear of the instrument (1 Fig.241-10), then set the mi- 16.9 R30 OFF ON OFF ON
croswitches as indicated by the following tables. 18.4 R30 OFF ON OFF OFF
The tables show the position of each of the seven 13.6 R38 OFF OFF ON ON ON
microswitches, depending on the tractor model and (Mph)
16.9 R34
the tyres installed.
500/70 R34 OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON OFF
540/65 R34 OFF
480/70 R34 (Kph)
18.4 R34
520/70 R34 OFF OFF OFF ON
600/65 R34
16.9 R38 OFF OFF OFF OFF
Ghibli 80 Ghibli 100

MICROSWITCH POSITION MICROSWITCH POSITION
TYRE TYRE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
16.9 R30 OFF ON OFF ON 18.4 R30 OFF ON OFF ON
18.4 R30 OFF ON OFF OFF 13.6 R38 OFF ON OFF OFF
13.6 R38 OFF OFF ON ON ON 16.9 R34
ON
(Mph) (Mph)
16.9 R34 500/70 R34
500/70 R34 OFF ON OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 540/65 R34 OFF OFF
540/65 R34 OFF OFF
480/70 R34
480/70 R34 (Kph) (Kph)
18.4 R34 18.4 R34
520/70 R34 OFF OFF ON OFF
520/70 R34 OFF OFF OFF ON
600/65 R34 600/65 R34
16.9 R38 OFF OFF OFF OFF 16.9 R38 OFF OFF OFF ON
10-159
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
10-160
CHAP. 10
Check-control and troubleshooting
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.5 Check-control and troubleshooting

10-161
Sect.5 - Check-control and troubleshooting

5-1 How to diagnose and identify
a fault
Troubleshooting tests are carried out to establish whi-
ch element or elements have become faulty.
If a fault occurs, it is first necessary to establish its
nature. A fault can be mechanical, hydraulic or electri-
cal, depending on the components involved.
Associated with the experience of the repair engineer,
the presence of certain typical signals, such as: bre-
akages in the transmission system which lead to
excessive noise and difficulties in engaging the ge-
ars, allow the mechanical nature of the fault to be iden-
tified. In such cases, the faulty component must be
either repaired or replaced, bearing in mind the guide
lines illustrated in the previous chapters.
To identify the hydraulic nature of a fault, first check
the pressure of the oil in the point where the relative
component is supplied, as described in chapters 7 and
8.
Three types of test can be conducted to correctly esta-
blish the electrical nature of a fault:
A- continuity test, grounded short-circuit

B- continuity test, open circuits
C- short-circuit, voltage measurement
5-2 Electrical circuit tests

By conducting these tests, the repair engineer should
be able to establish the electrical nature of a fault:

Following the above mentioned tests, diagnosis and

repair of an electrical fault in the locking system of the
differential lock unit is also given as an example.
10-162

A - CONTINUITY TEST, GROUNDED SHORT-CIR C - VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT, SHORT-CIRCUIT
CUIT AT 12 VOLTS
1 - Move the ignition switch to the Off position. 1 - Move the ignition switch to the On position.
2 - Disconnect the connectors involves at each end, 2 - Disconnect the connector in question at both ends.
or at each end of the circuit to prevent false All the other connectors must be re-connected
indications. before the test is conducted.
3 - Measure the resistance of the circuit. Using a tester 3 - Measure the voltage in the circuit. Using a tester
prod, make contact with a metal part of the chassis prod, touch the terminals of the connector one by
so as to create a jumper (make sure that there is one, without touching the metal ground connection
no corrosion on the surface of the part). Touch the of the connectors. Using the other prod, touch a
terminals of the connector one at a time with the metal part of the chassis in order to create a jumper.
other prod, but do not touch the ground connection Make sure that the surface is not corroded.
of the connector.
4 - If the measured voltage value is 12 Volts, there is
4 - If the measured resistance value is almost 0, there a short-circuit towards the power supply.
is a short-circuit towards the chassis which should
be located and repaired. If the resistance value is
decidedly higher than 0, there are probably internal
ways of the circuit through the modules.
B - CONTINUITY TEST, OPEN CIRCUITS
1 - Move the ignition switch to the Off position.
2 - Disconnect the connects involves at both ends. All

the other connectors must be re-connected before
the test is conducted.
3 - Measure the resistance of the circuit. Using a tester

prod, touch the terminals of the connector one by
one without touching the metal ground connection
of the connectors. Using the other prod, touch the
terminals of the connector at the other end of the
circuit. Do not make contact with the other terminals Fig.251-10
of the connector or the ground connection of this
latter if it is made of metal.
4 - If the measured resistance value is almost 0, the

circuit is continuous. If the resistance value is more
than 0, this generally indicates that the terminals
of the connectors are dirty or tarnished. If the circuit
is open, the most commonly used testers will indi-
cate OL (“open line”).
10-163

EXAMPLE OF AN ELECTRICAL FAULT
R4
Type of tractor: Ghibli 90
Diagnosis: the diff lock doesnot work
Troubleshooting:
1 - Make sure that fuse _F11 and replace it if neces-

sary
NOTE: it is always advisable to identify the cause of

the overload and to eliminate it before changing the
fuse.
2 - Make sure that the button (R4 Fig.243-10) opera- Fig.252-10

tes correctly. Using a tester, disconnect the but-
ton and check if:
switch released = CIRCUIT OPEN
switch pressed = CIRCUIT CLOSED (about 0
Ohm). In this case the button operates correctly.
Otherwise it should be replaced.
3 - Make sure that the solenoid valve controlling the

differential (Q2 Fig.244-10), placed on the power
clutch control valve group, operates correctly.
4 - If the solenoid valve operates correctly, conduct

the continuity tests described on the previous page
between the terminals of the electrical circuits of
the above mentioned components. The path fol-
lowed by the electrical signal can be identified by
means of the indications given in Section 3 and Q2
the wiring diagram. Fig.253-10
In this particular case, the connectors are the fol-
lowing:
Connector (E39) terminal 5 colour BR connector (E20) terminal 2 - connector (X3a) terminal 4
connector (E38) terminal 5
Connector (E39) terminal 7 colour B
junction (E37) - connector (E10) (ground)
Connector (X3) terminal 4 colour BR MRL6 terminal 1

connector (C7) terminal 1
MRL6 terminal 5 colour C connector (C1) terminal 12
connector (X2a) terminal S
Connector (X2a) terminal S colour C connector (X2) terminal S

Connector (X2) terminal S colour C connector (G2) terminal 2
Connector (G2) terminal 1 colour MN connector (X2) terminal T
Connector (X2) terminal T colour MN connector (X2a) terminal T - fuse F16
10-164

CONNECTOR (E39) FOR DIFF LOCK BUTTON
CONNECTOR (E39)

or component
E39
1 not used
2 not used
3 not used
4 not used
5 BR E20 2
6 not used
7 B E20-E38 1-5
Fig.254a-10
CONNECTOR (G2) FOR DIFF LOCK SOLENOID VALVE
G2
CONNECTOR (G2)

or component
1 MN X2 T
2 C X2 S
Fig.254b-10
10-165
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
10-166
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ATLANTIS TRACTORS
CHAP. 11
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Precautions and safety warnings. .................................................... 11-2

1-1 Basic concepts .......................................................... 11-4

Sect.3 Wiring ................................................................................. 11-37

3-1 Introduction .............................................................. 11-38
3A - Battery-starter motor line ........................................ 11-43
3B - Engine front line...................................................... 11-49
3C- Dashboard line ....................................................... 11-55
3D- Dashboard line (NAO version) ............................... 11-61
3E - Left-hand headlight line .......................................... 11-67
3F - Right-hand headlight line ....................................... 11-71
3G- Rear line ................................................................. 11-75
3H- Left-hand headlight line (NAO version) ................. 11-81
3I- Right-hand headlight line (NAO version) ............... 11-85
3L- Rear line (NAO version) ......................................... 11-89
Sect.4 Main components. .............................................................. 11-95

4-1 Introduction ............................................................. 11-99
4A - Sensors .................................................................. 11-97
4C - Switches and buttons .......................................... 11-105
4D - Instrument ............................................................ 11-111
Sect.5 Check-control and troubleshooting. .............................. 11-115

11-1

ans of this symbol:
WARNING: always consult the instructions

in the operation and maintenance manual
when you work on the battery.
WARNING: take all the necessary precau-

tions when installing batteries containing
sulphuric acid. Immediately rinse the af-
fected parts under running water is the acid
accidentally splashes on to the skin or into
the eyes.
WARNING: when you mix acid with water,

SLOWLY POUR THE ACID INTO THE WA-
TER, NEVER POUR THE WATER INTO
THE ACID.
WARNING: explosive gases are released

when batteries are charged. Always work in
a well ventilated place, well away from fla-
mes and sparks.
WARNING: always switch off the charging

equipment before disconnecting the cables.
WARNING: keep the battery well out of chi-

ldren's reach.
WARNING: do not smoke when you are

cheking or handling batteries.
WARNING: disconnect the negative termi-

nal first. When you install the battery again,
connect the positive terminal first. Always
take care to check the polarity of the termi-
nals.
WARNING: always disconnect the ground

wire (-) of the battery before working on the
electrical system.
11-2
CHAP. 11
General description
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-1 Basic concepts .......................................................... 11-4

11-3

1-1 Basic concepts
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
This is the term that describes all the practical

applications of the electrical phenomena.
E.g.: industrial and civil systems, process controls,
automatisms in general.
ELECTRONICS
Branch of engineering that studies how to control

electrons for “useful purposes”. Electrons can flow in
a vacuum, in a gas, in a liquid solution or in solid
materials (semiconductors, conductors,
superconductors).
ANALOG ELECTRONICS
Part of electronics that deals with all the equipment or

systems that manage and process electrical signals
without changing their nature.
E.g.: resistances, sensors, condensers and diodes are
typical components of an analog circuit.
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
From the English term “Digital” or “Digit” (figure of a

numbering system). Part of electronics that deals with
all the equipment or systems that use magnitudes in a
numerical form, i.e. in numbers, of a particular
numbering system.
E.g.: operational amplifiers, microprocessors, digital
sensors and digital displays are typical parts of a digital
circuit.
SENSORS
Device that converts a physical magnitude into an

electrical signal.
POTENTIOMETERS
Components that convert a movement into a voltage

variation, using the resistive divider concept.
11-4
General description
ELECTRIC VOLTAGE
The value of the potential energy assumed by the Voltage is measured by means of a Voltmeter
unitary electric charge is called electric potential of a
point in space, if located in that point. Multiples and submultiples
The symbol of electric potential is V. Its defining for-
mula is expressed by the ratio Kilovolt (Kv) = 1000 V
Volt (V) =1V
Millivolt (mv) = 0.001 V
W
V=
Q
between the potential energy value W possessed by a
charge Q positioned in the considered point and the
value of the charge itself. According to this definition,
the unit of measurement of the potential is the joule a
coulomb, i.e. the Volt (V).
The meaning of this physical magnitude is very
important. The electric potential expresses a
measurement of the energy content of a charge
positioned in a certain point. There will be a higher
energy content if the charge is positioned in points
with a higher potential. On the other hand, the energy
content will be lower if the points in which the same
charge is positioned have a lower potential.
To be more exact, one could say that the energy of an
electric charge depends on both the Q value of that Voltage
charge and on the potential value V in the point in V
which the charge is to be found. The following relation
is used to calculate this energy VA
A B
W =Q V
When the electric potentials VA and VB of two different

points A and B in space are different from each other, VB
the difference
UAB = VA - VB
is called potential difference (p.d.) between the two

points, or “electric voltage”.
One could say that the voltage between two points
represents the quantity of energy yielded by the unitary Battery
charge in the passage between the first and second
point, or the work accomplished by the same unitary
charge in the process of transfer between the same
Fig.1-11
two points.
11-5
General description
ELECTRIC CURRENT
An orderly movement of electric charges, however it Current is measured with the aid of an amperometer
is produced and through whichever physical medium, (tester function)
is called electric current.
In technical applications, the type of current more
generally used is the one caused by the circulation of
free electrons throuch conducting materials connected Multiples and submultiples
to electric generators.
However it is connecdted to generators and users, Kiloampere (KA) = 1000 A
every complex of conductors forms an electric circuit. Ampere (A) =1A
Thus defined, the electric circuit contains a current Milliampere (mA) = 0.001 A
whenever it is closed, i.e. whenever electrical continuity
is formed in it amongst all the components with which
it is formed. If this continuity is broken, the circuit is
known as open and no current can be produced in it.
The migratory movement of the electric charges along
a circuit containing current can possess uniform and
constant, fade-free characteristics: in this case, the
current is called direct current. Variable current is when
the electrons do not circulate in a uniform and constant
way.
The greater or lesser intensity of an electric current
can be completely defined by means of the quantity of Current
electricity that passes through any section of the circuit I
within one second.
This unit of measurement has been intentionally named
ampere and is indicated by the symbol A.
By and large, if any section of the circuit is crossed by
a Q coulomb quantity of electricity within ∆t seconds,
one can say that the circuit is crossed by an electric
current whose intensity I, expressed in amperes, is
given by the ratio
Q
I=
∆t
Battery
By measuring the CURRENT, one measures the
intensity of a flow of electrons in a determined branch
of the electric circuit.
Fig. 2-11
11-6
General description
ELECTRIC RESISTANCE
Different conductor wires offer a different “electric re- Multiples and submultiples
sistances” to the passage of current; the ratio betwe-
en any voltage value applied to the ends of the wire KiloOhm (K ) = 1000
and the corresponding intensity value of the current Ohm ( ) =1
that passes through the wire being the electric resi- MilliOhm (m ) = 0.001
stance of each wire in question. Thus, if a metal wire
is crossed by a current with intensity I under the ac-
tion of voltage V, this means that the wire possesses
a resistance R expressed by the ratio
V
R=
I
If the number of volts that measures voltage V applied
to the ends of the conductor in question equals the
number of amperes that measures the current I, the
value of the ratio between voltage and current will be
1: this means that the conductor in question has unitary
electrical resistance. A similar wire with a 1 V voltage
applied to its ends is crossed by a 1A current and
under a 10V voltage is crossed by a 10A current and
so forth.
Each conductor that complies with this condition forms
within itself the electrical resistance called unit of
measurement of resistance.
The unit of measurement of electrical resistance is
therefore represented by the resistance of the
conductor that requires 1V at its ends in order to be Electrical resistance
crossed by a 1A current.
The unit of electrical resistance is called Ohm and is R
indicated by symbol Ω. Thus:
1 ohm = 1 volt ; (1 = 1 V/A )

ampere
By saying that a wire has a 10 Ω electrical resistance,

one expresses the fact that that wire requires a 10V
voltage at its ends for each ampere of current that
crosses it. If that wire must be crossed by 2A, it will
require 20V voltage at its ends.
To understand the concept, one can compare
resistance to the effort water makes when it flows
through a pipe; proportional to the roughness of the
internal walls, the section of the pipe and its length.
The electrical resistance does not change as the Battery
voltage or current changes but varies as the tempera-
ture varies (even only slightly). It should thus be
considered as a physical characteristics of the material. Fig. 3-11
11-7
General description
OHM'S LAW
Given the resistance R of the conductor, one could Now consult a second series of measurements.
say that each time any voltage V is applied to its ends, Maintain the voltage value constant and calculate the
the conductor will be crossed by a current whose current values as the resistance varies (potentiometer
intensity will be expressed by the relation type):
V Table 2 V = constant = 18 V
I=
R Resistance
in Ohms ( ) 300 600 1200 2400
Inversely, each time the conductor with resistance R
is crossed by a current with intensity I, there must be Current
a voltage at its ends whose vaue is given by the pro- In Milliamperes (mA) 60 30 15 7.5
duct.
V=RI
Similarly:
V
R=
I
The corresponding relations form Ohm’s law which

expresses the basic relation amongst the three
Amperometer
magnitudes described previously: Voltage (V),
Resistance (R), Current (I). A
This allows you to calculate one of the three magnitudes
if the other two are known.
Example
Voltage gen.
Resistance
Let’s consider a series of measurements; maintain a

Voltmeter
constant resistance value R = 300 Ω, consult the

following which gives a first series of current values
V
R
as the voltage varies:
Table 1 R = constant = 300

Voltage
in Volts (V) 3 6 9 12
Current Fig. 4-11

in Milliamperes (mA) 10 20 30 40
11-8
General description
OPERATING FAULTS IN ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
There can be four types of fault in an electrical circuit:
1- excessive resistance in the circuit

(high resistance)
2- broken circuit (open circuit)
3- grounded circuit
4- short-circuit
In a simple circuit like the one illustrated in Fig.5-11,

there are only three parts where these operating faults
may occur:
- prior to the control switch (A)
- between the control switch (A) and the load (B)
- after the load (B)
It is easy to mistake an operating fault with a fault in
the circuit. Great care must therefore be taken when
identifying the cause of the fault so that it can be easi-
ly and correctly remedied.
Example: a component may not operate before To

connector is disconnected and operate after this con-
nector has been re-connected. The reason for this could
be excessive resistance which created a voltage drop
on the terminals of the connector, thus preventing the
right amount of current to pass through to the compo-
nent.
A B
Fig.5-11
11-9
General description
1- HIGH RESISTANCE
2- OPEN CIRCUIT
A circuit with high resistance could lead to a slow NOTE: the example refers to an excessive resistance
movement, a weak light or failure of a component to between (D) and (F), and a circuit opening between (F)
work (e.g.: owing to slackened, corroded, dirty or gre- and (G).
asy terminals, or a wire whose diameter is too small,
or the cables having been pulled). - Repair the circuit as required.
In the case of an "open" circuit, the component may
not operate since the circuit is broken (e.g.: a torn - Repeat the inspection procedure after having repai-
wire, disconnected terminals, switch protection devi- red the circuit
ce open).
an "excessive resistance" or "open circuit":
- with the monitoring switch (C) "on" and the load (I)
connected in the circuit, check to make sure that the-
re is the right voltage in an easily accessible point
between (D) and (H).
If the voltage is low, move towards the current source
(A) until you find the point in which the voltage drops.
If the voltage is correct, move towards the load (I) and
the ground terminal (J) until you find the point in which
the voltage drops.
B C D E F G
H I
A J
A - Battery F - Connector of circuit

B - Fuse G - Connector of circuit
C - Switch H - Terminal of component
D - Terminal of component I - Lamp
E - Circuit resistance J - Ground Fig.6-11
11-10
General description
3- CIRCUIT GROUNDED
A grounded circuit will prevent the components from

working and the fuse or automatic switch will open
(e.g.: the power supply flex has a grounded contact).
a "grounded circuit":
- check whether there is continuity towards ground

between (C) and (D) with the control switch (D) off.
If there is no break, the circuit is grounded between
(C) and (D). Eliminate the fault from this part of the
circuit.
If there is a break towards ground between (C) and
(D), disconnect the load (H) in point (G). With the con-
trol switch (D) off, now check whether there is continu-
ity between (D) and (F). If there is no break, the circuit
is grounded between (E) and (F). Eliminate the fault
from this part of the circuit.
NOTE: there is a ground between (E) and (F) in the

example.
- Repeat the functional test after the repairs have been

made.
B C D E F
G H
A - Battery E - Terminal of component

B - Fuse terminal F - Ground circuit
C - Fuse terminal G - Terminal of component
D - Switch H - Lamp
Fig.7-11
11-11
General description
4- SHORT-CIRCUIT
A short-circuit in the electrical system usually causes Wires not housed in a protective tube: bind the wire
two components to operate by activating only one of in question with insulating tape or replace it and bind
the switches (e.g.;: improper contact between two with insulating tape as required.
wires).
One component can also be short-circuited; however, Wires housed in a protective tube:
this usually causes the protection device of the circuit - replace the entire wiring in the case of hot points in
to open. short-circuited zones of pre-assembled wiring.
Proceed in the following way to identify the location of - If there are no hot points, install a new wire of an
a "short circuit": appropriate gauge between the last two connectors
and bind the wire with insulating tape to suit the ex-
- move switch (A) so that it operates the right lamp ternal shape of the wiring itself.
(B).
- Repeat the functional test after repairing.
- Begin with control switch (D) of lamp (I), which should
not come on, and disconnect the wire at terminal (E).
- Following the circuit, disconnect the wire at con-

nectors (F,G or H) until the supplementary lamp (I)
stops operating.
- The short-circuit or improper connection will be betwe-

en the last two points in which the wire was con-
nected. In the example, it is between (F) and (G).
- Repair the circuit in the following way:
A B
C D E F G H I
A - Switch F - Connector of circuit

B - Lamp G - Connector of circuit
C - Fuse H - Terminal of component
D - Switch I - Lamp
E - Terminal of component
Fig.8-11
11-12
General description
1-2 Electrical symbols Connector
This section indicates the main symbols used in the

main wiring diagram.
The symbols comply with CEI standards.
Alternator
Normally closed contact
Battery
Diode
Relay
Solenoid valve
Thermostarter
Photoresistor
Ignition switch Fuse
Fig.9-11
11-13
General description
Horn Starter motor
Switch Ceiling light
Lamp Pressure switch
Hazard lights Button
Normally closed Relay

microswitch
Normally open Residue relay

microswitch
Fig.10-11
11-14
General description
Resistance Fan
2-position selector
3-position selector
Sensor
Thermostat
Vacuum switch
Fig.11-11
11-15
General description
HOW TO READ AND INTERPRETATE A FUNCTIO-
NAL ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
Each component (electrical device) and main connector

(terminal boards) is identified by a letter. The letter
goes together with a number, to keep all the compo-
nents within the same letter group separated and iden-
tified.
IDENTIFICATION
LETTER
TYPE EXAMPLE
A System, subgroup, unit Control unit, jack box,

two-way radio, logical module
B Transducer to convert non electrical Speed sensors, pressure sensors, horns, pressure
in electrical variables and vice versa switches, sensors, detectors, limit value sensors,
pulse generators, loudspeakers, inductive detectors,
probes, air flow sensors, oil pressure switches,
temperature sensors, ignition-voltage detectors
C Condenser Generical condensers
D Binary device, memory Digital devices, integrated circuits, pulse counters,

tape recorders
E Various devices and appliances Heaters, air conditioners, lights, headlights,

spark plugs, electromagnetic switches
F Safety devices Release devices, safety devices against

polarity, fuses, safety electrical circuits
G Power unit, generator Battery, generators, alternators, battery chargers
H Monitor, warning light, signals Acoustic alarms, indicator lights, turn indicators,
brake lights, warnings, warning lights, buzzers
K Relays Battery relay, turn indicator relay, solenoid

switches, starter relay, blinkers
L Inductor Cut-off coils, coils, windings
M Motors Fan motors, starter motors
N Governor, amplifier Governors (electronic or electro-mechanical),

voltage stabilizers
P Gauge Amperometer, diagnostic connectors, tachometer,

fuel gauge, pressure gauges, measure points,
test points, speed indicators
11-16
General description
IDENTIFICATION
LETTER
TYPE EXAMPLES
Q Control equipment for power Normally open microswitches

circuits Normally closed microswitches
R Resistor Flame glow plugs, flame glow plugs with sheathed

element, glow plugs, heating resistors, NTC
resistors, PTC resistors, potentiometers,
regulation resistors
S Switch Switches and buttons, universal key-switch,

light switch, horn switch, blinker switch
T Transformer Ignition coil, ignition transformer
U Modulator, converter Direct current transformers
V Semiconductor, thermionic tubes Transistors, diodes, thermionic tubes, rectifiers,

semiconductors, thiristors, Zener diodes
W Transmission way, conductor, Antenna, shielding components, shielded

antenna conductors, harness, conductors
grounding cables
X Terminal, plug, plug and socket Terminal pins, electrical connections,

connection electric line couplers, line connectors,
sockets, plugs, terminals, plug and socket
connections
Y Driven mechanical device Permanent magnets, injection (solenoid) valves,

electro-magnetic clutches and brakes, breathers,
fuel pumps, solenoid valves, switch valves,
starter valves, locking systems
Z Electrical filter Interference filters
11-17
General description
FEEDER LINE REF. COLUMN

(BATTERY POSITIVE) NUMBER
COMPONENT REF. TO OTHER DIAGRAM

CABLE TERMINALS SECTIONSAND REF.
COLOUR COLUMN
CONNECTOR NUMBER AND

REF. TERMINALS
NEGATIVE LINE FROM

BATTERY (GROUND) TERMINAL BOX NUMBER
AND REF. TERMINALS
COMPONENT
IDENTIFICATION Fig.12-11
The functional diagram of Atlantis tractors is divided

into four parts. The components are denominated in
the same way as in the matching wiring diagrams.
The functional diagram complies with CEI standards.
Each component is always preceded by an underline
sign symbol.
Example:
_EH1 - Thermostarter
11-18
General description
IDENTIFICATION OFCOMPONENTS IN THE FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
_D1 Instrument connector 4 1 _HL24 License plate light 2 3

_D2 Instrument connector 4 3 _KA4 Ignition lock relay 1 4
_D3 Instrument connector 4 5 _KA5 PTO start enable relay 1 4
_D4 Instrument connector 4 7 _KA6 Diff lock relay 3 7
_EH1 Thermostarter 1 1 _KA7 Work lights relay 3 2
_FS1 Alternator fuse 1 2 _KM1 Solenoid starter 1 3
_FS2 Ignition switch fuse 1 3 _M1 Ignition 1 3
_FS3 Horn fuse 2 7 _R1 Resistance 1 2
_FU’1 Work lights 1 4 _SA1 Ignition switch 1 2
_FU2 LH main beam 2 6 _SA6 External light switch 2 3
_FU’2 Work lights 1 5 _SA7 Emergency switch 2 1
_FU3 RH main beam 2 6 _SA8 Combination light switch 2 6
_FU’3 Brake pedal 1 5 _SA10 Work lights 3 2
_FU4 LH dipped beam 2 5 _SA11 Rotating beacon switch 2 8
_FU’4 Diff lock 1 6 _SB2 Diff lock button 3 7
_FU5 RH dipped beam 2 6 _SL1 Fuel level indicator 4 1
_FU’5 D + alternator 1 2 _SP3 Trailer brake sensor 4 5
_FU6 Night lights 2 2 _SP4 Engine oil pressure switch 4 4
_FU’6 Injection pump 1 7 _SQ1 Independent PTO 1 5
_FU7 LH sidelights 2 3 _SQ2 PTO RPM 1 5
_FU’7 Hazard lights 2 2 _SQ3 PTO RPM 1 5
_FU8 RH sidelights 2 3 _SQ4 Brake pedal 3 3
_FU’8 Thermostarter fuse 1 1 _SQ5 Brake pedal 3 3
_G1 Alternator 1 2 _SQ13 Parking brake 4 6
_G2 Hazard lights 2 4 _SQ14 Proportional PTO 1 4
_GB1 Battery 1 1 _SQ18 Ignition safety lock 1 4
_HA2 Horn 2 7 _ST1 Engine coolant temperature 4 6
_HL1 RH turn indicator 2 4 _SV1 Transmission oil filter 4 5
_HL2 LH turn indicator 2 5 _SV2 Engine air filter 4 4
_HL3 LH turn indicator 2 5 _V1 Diode 1 2
_HL4 RH turn indicator 2 5 _V2 Diode 1 4
_HL5 Main beams 2 6 _V3 Diode 1 5
_HL7 Dipped beams 2 5 _V5 Diode 3 5
_HL8 Dipped beams 2 6 _YV3 Injection pump 1 7
_HL9 Work light 3 2 _YV4 Rich mixture device 1 7
_HL10 Work light 3 2 _YV6 Diff lock solenoid valve 3 5
_HL17 Rotating beacon 2 8
Term. boxes
_HL18 Brake light 3 4
_HL19 Brake light 3 4 X1 Rear
_HL20 LH front sidelight 2 3 X2 Front
_HL21 LH rear sidelight 2 4 X3 Rear
_HL22 LH rear sidelight 2 3 X4 Front
_HL23 RH front sidelight 2 4 X5 Trailer power socket
11-19
General description
1-3 General wiring diagram
PART -1
Fig.11-13
11-20
General description
PART -2
Fig.14-11
11-21
General description
PART -3
Fig.15-11
11-22
General description
PART -4
Fig.16-11
11-23
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
11-24
General description
IDENTIFICATION OFCOMPONENTS IN THE FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
_D1 Instrument connector 4 2 _KA7 Work lights relay 3 2

_D2 Instrument connector 4 4 _KM1 Solenoid starter 1 3
_D3 Instrument connector 4 5 _M1 Ignition 1 3
_D4 Instrument connector 4 7 _R1 Resistance 1 2
_EH1 Thermostarter 1 1 _SA1 Ignition switch 1 3
_FS1 Alternator fuse 1 2 _KL1 NAO relay 2 5
_FS2 Ignition switch fuse 1 3 _KL2 NAO relay 2 5
_FS3 Horn fuse 2 7 _KL3 NAO relay 2 5
_FU’1 Work lights 1 4 _KL4 NAO relay 2 5
_FU2 LH main beam 2 7 _KL5 NAO relay 2 6
_FU’2 Work lights 1 5 _KL6 NAO relay 2 6
_FU3 RH main beam 2 7 _SA6 External light switch 2 3
_FU’3 Brake pedal 1 5 _SA7 Emergency switch 2 1
_FU4 LH dipped beam 2 6 _SA8 Combination light switch 2 6
_FU’4 Diff lock 1 6 _SA10 Work lights 3 2
_FU5 RH dipped beam 2 6 _SA11 Rotating beacon switch 2 8
_FU’5 D + alternator 1 2 _SB2 Diff lock button 3 7
_FU6 Night lights 2 2 _SL1 Fuel level indicator 4 1
_FU’6 Injection pump 1 7 _SP3 Trailer brake sensor 4 5
_FU7 LH sidelights 2 2 _SP4 Engine oil pressure switch 4 4
_FU’7 Hazard lights 2 2 _SQ1 Independent PTO 1 5
_FU8 RH sidelights 2 3 _SQ2 PTO RPM 1 5
_FU’8 Thermostarter fuse 1 1 _SQ3 PTO RPM 1 5
_G1 Alternator 1 2 _SQ4 Brake pedal 3 3
_G2 Hazard lights 2 4 _SQ5 Brake pedal 3 3
_GB1 Battery 1 1 _SQ13 Parking brake 4 5
_HA2 Horn 2 7 _SQ14 Proportional PTO 1 4
_HL1 RH turn indicator 2 4 _SQ18 Ignition safety lock 1 4
_HL2 LH turn indicator 2 4 _ST1 Engine coolant temperature 4 6
_HL3 LH turn indicator 2 4 _SV1 Transmission oil filter 4 5
_HL4 RH turn indicator 2 4 _SV2 Engine air filter 4 4
_HL9 Work light 3 2 _V5 Diode 3 5
_HL10 Work light 3 3 _V6 Diode 2 1
_HL17 Rotating beacon 2 8 _V7 Diode 2 1
_HL18 RH additional light 3 4 _YV3 Injection pump 1 7
_HL19 LH additional light 3 5 _YV4 Rich mixture device 1 8
_HL20 LH front sidelight 2 2 _YV6 Diff lock solenoid valve 3 5
_HL23 LH front sidelight 2 3
_HL21 LH rear sidelight 2 3 Term. boxes
_HL22 LH rear sidelight 2 3
X1 Rear
_HL24 Licence plate light 2 3
X2 Front
_KA4 Ignition lock relay 1 4
X3 Rear
_KA5 PTO start enable relay 1 4
X4 Front
_KA6 Diff lock relay 3 7
X5 Trailer power socket
11-25
General description
1-4 General wiring diagram (NAO version)
PART -1
Fig.17-11
11-26
General description
PART -2
Fig.18-11
11-27
General description
PART -3
Fig.19-11
11-28
General description
PART -4
Fig.20-11
11-29
Note
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
11-30
CHAP. 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS

11-31

Battery
Make Mx - Scx - Fx
Type “No Maintenance”
Voltage 12 V (negative towards ground)
Starting surge when cold at -18°C in 30 s 420 A
Capacity for 20 hours 100 Ah
Alternator
Make Ix
Type 3-phase
Voltage 14 V
Current 55 A
Starter motor
Make Ix
Type Solenoidal
Max. power 2.8 Kw
Type of engagement Automatic engagement of pinion
by means of electromagnet
Solenoid valves
Make Cx
Type On/Off
Voltage 12 V
Resistance at 20°C 6.85 Ω ±5%
Dashboard
Make Jx
11-32
2-2 Relays and fuse boxes
The electrical system of Atlantis tractors is protected
against short-circuits and excessive power draws by
fuses. The number of fuses installed in the electrical
system depends on the tractor version.
The fuses are installed in two boxes:
A -front fuse box (Fig.21-11) installed on the front

side of the engine compartment, on the left-hand
side;
B -main relay and fuse box (Fig.22-11) installed on

the left-hand side of the dashboard. A
Fig.21-11
NOTE: before replacing a blown fuse with an equivalent

one, the cause of the fault should be identified and
removed.
B
Fig.22-11
Atlantis tractors are provided with 4 relays, positioned
under the dashboard coating, behind the instrument
(Fig.23-11).
Fig.23-11
11-33
A - FRONT FUSE BOX
The front fuses are mounted on the front wiring and

are connected to the battery-starter motor line by me- _FS1
ans of the connector (A7 Fig.30-11).
The front fuses have the following functions and am-
pere ratings:
_FS2
_FS1 Alternator 60
_FS3
_FS2 Ignition switch 60
_FS3 Horn + rotating beacon 15 Fig.24-11
B - MAIN FUSE BOX
The main fuses are mounted on the dashboard line

wiring and have the following functions and ampere
ratings:
FUSES
_FU'1 Work lights 7,5
_FU'2 Work lights 7,5 FU'8 FU1
_FU'3 Brake lights 7,5
FU'7 FU2
_FU'4 Diff lock 7,5
_FU'5 D + alternator 5 FU'6 FU3
_FU'6 Engine stop solenoid valve 5 FU'5 FU4
_FU'7 Rotating beacon 15
FU'4 FU5
_FU'8 Thermostarter 20
_FU 1 Non utilizzato - FU'3 FU6
_FU 2 LH main beams 7,5 FU'2 FU7
_FU 3 RH main beams 7,5
FU'1 FU8
_FU 4 LH dipped beams 7,5
_FU 5 LH dipped beams 7,5
_FU 6 Night lights 5
_FU 7 LH sidelights 7,5
_FU 8 RH sidelights 7,5 Fig.25-11
11-34
RELAY FUNCTIONS
REAYS
_KA4 Ignition lock relay
_KA5 PTO start enable relay
_KA6 Diff lock relay
_KA7 Work lights relay
On the Atlantis tractors for the NAO market is instal-

led, in addition to the previously mentioned relays, a
further relay series in the inner cab wiring (Fig.26-11).
They perform the following functions:
RELAYS (NAO MARKET TRACTORS)

_KL1 RH turn indicator
_KL2 LH turn indicator
_KL3 RH additional beam
_KL4 LH turn indicator
_KL5 RH turn indicator
_KL6 LH additional beam Fig.26-11
11-35
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
11-36
CHAP. 11
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3-1 Introduction ............................................................. 11-38

3B - Engine front line...................................................... 11-49
3C- Dashboard line ....................................................... 11-55
3D- Dashboard line (NAO version) ............................... 11-61
3E - Left-hand beam line ............................................... 11-67
3F - Right-hand beam line ............................................. 11-71
3G- Rear line ................................................................. 11-75
3H- Left-hand beam line (NAO version) ....................... 11-81
3I - Right-hand beam line (NAO version) .................... 11-85
3L - Rear line (NAO version) ......................................... 11-89
11-37
Sect.3 - Wiring
3-1 Introduction RULES FOR INTERPRETING SECTION 3
This section gives details about the main characteri- To correctly interpret the codes used in this section,
stics of the wiring installed in Atlantis tractors. bear in mind that:
The relative functional wiring diagram and the actual
wiring itself are indicated for each line. The position of - each wiring line has been given an identifying letter,
each connector on the tractor is indicated so that it i.e.:
can be easily and quickly found. Moreover, the relati- letter A = starter motor-battery line
ve electrical correspondence is given for all the con- letter B = engine front line
nectors. letter C = dashboard line
Multiwire electric diagrams show all connections and letter D = dashboard line (NAO version)
organs in the relative line. The various components letter E = LH beam line
are represented by symbols. letter F = RH beam line
Each connector has a series of numbers that identify letter G = rear line
each individual connecting pin (Fig.26a-11). These num- letter H = LH beam line (NAO version)
bers are a great help during tests as they allow the letter I = RH beam line (NAO version)
electrician to quickly locate each terminal and make letter L = rear line (NAO version)
the necessary repairs.
- the connectors of each line are identified graphically
with the letter of the line itself plus a progressive
number.
Example:
B15 - faston terminals to connect the air filter clogged
sensor
B: letter identifying the wiring line type
15: progressive number
- all connectors are viewed from the cable input side
TERMINAL OR
CONNECTION POLE
VIEW FROM
CABLE INPUT SIDE
TERMINAL OR
CONNECTION POLE
Fig. 26a-11
11-38
Wiring
COLOUR TABLE
SYMBOL WIRE COLOUR
The colours of the cables used in the wiring lines in-
HL Grey blue
stalled on Atlantis tractors are indicated in the wiring
diagrams and in the electrical correspondances tables, HV Grey green
according to following table:
HG Grey yellow
SYMBOL WIRE COLOUR L Blue
A Light blue LB Blue white
AN Light blue black LN Blue black
AG Light blue yellow LR Blue red
AB Light blue white M Brown
AV Light blue green MB Brown white
AR Light blue red MN Brown black
B White MV Brown green
BR White red N Black
BN White black NZ Black purple
BL White blue NB Black white
BG White yellow NR Black red
C Orange R Red
CB Orange white RG Red yellow
CN Orange black RN Red black
CL Orange blue RV Red green
G Yellow S Pink
GV Yellow green SN Pink black
GN Yellow black SG Pink yellow
GR Yellow red V Green
GL Yellow blue VG Green yellow
H Grey VN Green black
HM Grey brown VB Green white
HR Grey red Z Purple
HN Grey black ZB Purple white
HB Grey white ZN Purple black
11-39
Wiring
3-2 General description
The electrical system of Atlantis tractors mainly con- NOTE: lines (3D), LH beam (3H), RH beam (3I), rear
sists of six wiring lines installed in the tractor so that (3L), replace lines (3C), (3E), (3F) and (3G) in NAO
the groups can be separated. version tractors. Their functions and positions do not
The wiring lines are named according to the location vary.
of the main components powered: If a sunroof is installed, the connection system of the
3A- Starter motor-battery line rotating beacon does not change.
3B- Engine front line
3C- Dashboard line
3E- LH beam line
3F- RH beam line
3G- Rear line
3B 3C 3F 3E
3A 3G
Fig.27-11
11-40
Wiring
CONNECTION POINTS
Fig.28-11 shows the positions of the connection poin-

ts between the various wiring lines.
a b
e d c
a - Battery line / front line junction

b - Rear line / RH beam line junction
c - Rear line / LH beam line junction
d - Rear line / dashboard line junction Fig.28-11
e - Front line / dashboard line junction
11-41
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
11-42
CHAP. 10
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3A - Battery-starter motor line (positive)

3A-2 Wiring .................................................................... 11-45
3A-3 Connector locations.............................................. 11-46
3A-4 Connector identification ........................................ 11-47
11-43
3A - Starter motor-battery line (positive)

This line is very important since it influences the
operation of the electrical system of the entire tractor.
It connects, from one side, the positive pole of the
battery with the starter motor, to which the ignition
switch is connected, thus allowing the entire electrical
system to be powered, and to the front fuse box on
the other, to which all the wiring of the tractor electrical
system is connected. The three fuses in the box protect
the line from short-circuits and excessive power draws.
The battery is located on the left, in its compartment,
just under the feet rests (1 Fig.29-11).
1
Fig.29-11
WARNING: Follow carefully all safety rules!
WARNING: The battery ground cable (-) must

be disconnected.
11-44

3A-2 Wiring
A6
A7
A5
0Y - Insulating cap
A5 - Battery positive terminal Y
A7 - Connector to the front fuse box Fig.30-11
11-45

3A - 3 Connector locations
A6
TO STARTER
MOTOR
A7
A5
Fig.31-11
11-46

3A-4 Connector identification
TERMINAL (A6) FOR CONNECTION TO STARTER A6
MOTOR

or component
A6 N _M1
M1
Fig.32-11
TERMINAL (A7) FOR CONNECTION TO FRONT

FUSE BOX

or component
A7 R-R-RN B1
Fig.33-11
The connection between the terminal (A7) of the bat- B1 A7

tery line and the terminal (B1) of the front line, allows
the rest of the tractor's electrical system to be powe-
red. The front fuses protect the system against short-
circuits and excessive power draws.
Fig.34-11
11-47
Note
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
11-48
CHAP. 11
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3B-1 General description .............................................. 11-50

3B-2 Wiring diagram ...................................................... 11-51
3B-3 Wiring .................................................................... 11-52
3B-4 Connector locations.............................................. 11-53
11-49

3B -1 General description
B1 A7
The front line installed in Atlantis tractors powers the
components (e.g.: the horn and headlights) and the
sensors (e.g.: engine oil pressure) located in the front
The front line is connected on the one side to the bat-

tery line via connection between connector (B1) and
connector (A7)(Fig.35-11), and on the other side with
the dashboard line through connection between the ter-
minal boxes (X2-X4) on the engine compartment front,
on the left-hand side (Fig.36-11).
NOTE: location of the connection terminal boxes (X2

and X4) is the same for NAO market tractors.
Fig.35-11
X2
X4
Fig.36-11
11-50
Engine front line

3B-2 Wiring diagram
B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20
Terminal box for connection to dashboard line - X4
Terminal box for connection to dashboard line - X2
Engine oil filter - B6
B9 - Diff lock solenoid valve

Alternator - B21
B10 - Starter motor stop
B11 - Engine stop
Alternator - B5 B12 - Engine stop solenoid valve
B13 - Engine coolant temperature sensor
B14 - Thermostarter
B15 - Air filter sensor
60 A fuse-_FS1 B16 - Oil pressure sensor
B17 - Ground
B18 - Horn
60 A fuse - _FS2 B19 - LH headlight
B20 - RH headlight
Connection to battery line - B1 _FS3 15 A fuse
Fig.37-11
11-51
Engine front line

3B-3 Wiring
B14 B15 B16

B5
B6
B21
_V5 B9 B10 B13
X2
X4
B1 - Connection to battery line

B5 - Alternator _FS1 B17
B6 - Engine oil filter
B10 - Starter motor _FS2
B11 - Engine stop
B12 - Engine stop solenoid valve _FS3
B14 - Thermostarter
B16 - Oil pressure sensor B19
B17 - Ground B18
B18 - Horn
B19 - LH headlight
B11
B20 - RH headlight
B21 - Alternator
X2 - Terminal box for connection to dashboard line
_FS1 - 60 A fuse
_FS2 - 60 A fuse
_FS3 - 15 A fuse
B1 B12 B20
Fig.38-11
11-52
Engine front line

3B-4 Connector locations

B10 - Starter motor stop
RIGHT-HAND B11 - Engine stop
VIEW B15 B12 - Engine stop solenoid valve
B14 - Thermostarter
B16 - Oil pressure sensor
B5 _FS1 - 60 A fuse
_FS2 - 60 A fuse
B1 _FS3 - 15 A fuse
B9 X4 X2 _FS3
_FS2
_FS1
RIGHT-HAND
VIEW
B6 RIGHT-HAND
VIEW
B21
B19
B17
B20
B18
B1 - Connection to battery line

B5 - Alternator
B6 - Engine oil filter
B17 - Ground
B18 - Horn
B19 - LH headlight B10
B20 - RH headlight
B21 - Alternator
B16
B12
B11
B13
B14
Fig.39-11 Fig.40-11
11-53
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
11-54
CHAP. 11
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3C - Dashboard line

3C-2 Wiring diagram ..................................................... 11-57
3C-3 Wiring .................................................................... 11-58
11-55
3C - Dashboard line
3C -1 General description
The dashboard line powers the controls in front of the
driver's seat (Fig.41-11) and ensures connection with
the protection fuses of the electrical system in the
whole tractor.
The dashboard line is connected to the engine front
line through connection with terminal boxes (X2-X4)
(Fig.42-11) located on each wiring line.
The connection between the dashboard line and the
rear line is assured by the terminal boxes (X1-X3)
(Fig.43-11), also located on each wiring line.
NOTE: The dashboard line on NAO market tractors is Fig.41-11

distinguished by an additional relay block, supporting
the relays needed to control additional headlights.
X2
X4
Fig.42-11
X1 X3
Fig.43-11
11-56
Dashboard line
3C-2 Wiring diagram
C36
INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT ROTATING BEACON EXTERNAL LIGHT SWITCH EMERGENCY LAMP C20 WORK LIGHTS
BRAKE PEDAL
GROUND HAZARD LIGHTS CONNECTION CONNECTION SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
C10 C11 _D2 _D1 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C21 C22 C23
_V1 _R1
GROUND- C9
C24 - DIFF LOCK SWITCH
WORK LIGHT RELAY- _KA7
_D3 - INSTRUMENT CONNECTION
DIFF LOCK RELAY - _KA6
_V3
_D4 - INSTRUMENT CONNECTION
_V4
IGNITION LOCK RELAY - _KA4
_V2
C30 - FUSE BOX

PTO START ENABLE RELAY - _KA5
C28
TERMINAL BOX FOR - X4

CONNECTION TO FRONT LINE- X4 C31 - FUSE BOX
C29
IGNITION SWITCH - _SA1
C28 - Connection
C29 - Connection
TERMINAL BOX FOR - X2 _R1 - Resistance
CONNECTION TO FRONT LINE - X2 _V1 - Diode
_V2 - Diode
_V3 - Diode
_V4 - Diodoùe
X3 X1 C33 C32
TERMINAL BOX FOR TERMINAL BOX FOR COMBINATION COMBINATION
CONNECTION TO REAR LINE CONNECTION TO REAR LINE SWITCH SWITCH
Fig.44-11
11-57
Dashboard line
3C-3 Wiring
C1 - Ignition switch C23 - Brake pedal switch _KA4 - Ignition lock relay
C9 - Ground C24 - Diff lock switch _KA5 - Starting enable PTO relay
C10 - Ground C28 - Junction _KA6 - Diff lock relay
C11 - Intermittance C29 - Junction _KA7 - Work light relay
C14 - Rotary beacon switch C30 - Fuse box _SA1 - Ignition switch
_KA4 _KA6 _KA7 C15 - Rotary beacon switch C31 - Fuse box X1 - Terminal box for rear line junction
_V4 C16 - External light switch C32 - Light switch X2 - Terminal box for front line junction
C17 - External light switch C33 - Light switch X3 - Terminal box for rear line junction
X4 _V3 C18 - Hazard light switch C36 - Resistance X4 - Terminal box for front line junction
_V2 C19 - Hazard light switch _D1 - Connection to instrument _R1 - Resistance
C20 - Diode _D2 - Connection to instrument _V1 - Diode
_KA5 C21 - Work lights _D3 - Connection to instrument _V2 - Diode
C22 - Work lights _D4 - Connection to instrument _V3 - Diode
_V4 - Diode
C9 C10 C11
X2
_D4 _D3 _D1 C14 C16
_D2
C15
_R1
_SA1 C1 C17 C18
_V1
C20 C36
C29 C28
C19
X3 C22 C21
C24
X1
C33
C23
C32 C31 C30 Fig.45-11
11-58
Dashboard line
3C-4 Connector locations
_KA4
_KA5
C1 - Ignition switch
_KA6
C17 _D4 _D2 _D3 _D1 C11 - Intermittance
C30 - Fuse box
C31 - Fuse box
C22 C16 _KA7 C32 - Light switch
C9 C33 - Light switch
C21 X1 - Terminal box for rear line junction
X2 - Terminal box for front line junction
C15 C10 X3 - Terminal box for rear line junction
C14 X4 - Terminal box for front line junction
C19 C18 LEFT-HAND

VIEW
C30 C31 C33

C24 RIGHT-HAND
C11 VIEW
C32
C23
X4 C33
X2
C1 X3 X1
C9 - Ground
C10 - Ground
C14 - Rotary beacon switch
C15 - Rotary beacon switch
C16 - External light switch
C17 - External light switch
C18 - Hazard light switch
C19 - Hazard light switch
C21 - Work lights
C22 - Work lights
C23 - Brake pedal switch
C24 - Diff lock switch Fig.46a-11
_D1 - Connection to dashboard
_KA4 - Ignition lock relay
_KA5 - Starting enable PTO relay
_KA6 - Diff lock relay
_KA7 - Work light relay Fig.46b-11
11-59
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
11-60
CHAP. 11
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3C - Dashboard line (NAO version)

3C-2 Wiring diagram ..................................................... 11-63
3C-3 Wiring .................................................................... 11-64
11-61
3D - Dashboard line (NAO version)

3D -1 General description
The dashboard line powers the controls in front of the
driver's seat (Fig.47-11) and ensures connection with
the protection fuses of the electrical system in the
whole tractor.
The dashboard line is connected to the engine front
line through connection with terminal boxes (X2-X4)
(Fig.48-11) located on each wiring line.
The connection between the dashboard line and the
rear line is assured by the terminal boxes (X1-X3)
(Fig.45011), also located on each wiring line.
NOTE: The dashboard line on NAO market tractors is Fig.47-11

distinguished by an additional relay block, supporting
the relays needed to control additional headlights (Fig.
49-11).
X2
X4
Fig.48-11
X1 X3
Fig.49-11 Fig.50-11
11-62
Dashboard line (NAO version)

3D-2 Wiring diagram
D36
D20 - Diode
INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT ROTATING BEACON EXTERNAL LIGHT SWITCH EMERGENCY LAMP D20 BRAKE PEDAL
D28 - Connection
GROUND HAZARD LIGHTS CONNECTION CONNECTION SWITCH SWITCH WORK LIGHTS SWITCH
D10 D11 _D2 _D1 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D21 D22 D23 D29 - Connection
D36 - Resistance
_R1 - Resistance
_V1 - Diode
_V2 - Diode
_V3 - Diode
_V4 - Diode
_V6 - Diode
_V7 - Diode
_V1 _R1
GROUND D9
D24 DIFF LOCK SWITCH
WORK LIGHT RELAY _KA7
_D3 INSTRUMENT CONNECTION
DIFF LOCK RELAY _KA6
_V3
_D4 INSTRUMENT CONNECTION
_V4
IGNITION LOCK RELAY _KA4
_V2
D30 FUSE BOX
PTO START ENABLE RELAY _KA5
D28
TERMINAL BOX FOR X4

CONNECTION TO FRONT LINE X4
D31 FUSE BOX
TERMINAL BOX FOR X2

LINEA ANTERIORE X2
D29
_V6
IGNITION SWITCH _SA1 / D1
_V7
X3 X1 D33 D32 _KL1 _KL2 _KL3 _KL4 _KL5 _KL6

TERMINAL BOX FOR TERMINAL BOX FOR COMBINATION COMBINATION NAO RELAY NAO RELAY NAO RELAY NAO RELAY NAO RELAY NAO RELAY
CONNECTION TO REAR LINE CONNECTION TO REAR LINE SWITCH SWITCH
Fig.51-11
11-63

3D-3 Wiring
D1 - Ignition switch D24 - Diff lock switch X1 - Terminal box for rear line junction
D9 - Ground D28 - Junction X2 - Terminal box for front line junction
D10 - Ground D29 - Junction X3 - Terminal box for rear line junction
D11 - Intermittance D30 - Fuse box X4 - Terminal box for front line junction
D14 - Rotary beacon switch D31 - Fuse box _R1 - Resistance
_KA4 _KA6 _KA7 D15 - Rotary beacon switch D32 - Light switch _V1 - Diode
D16 - External light switch D33 - Light switch _V2 - Diode
_V4 D17 - External light switch D36 - Resistance _V3 - Diode
X4 _V3 D18 - Hazard light switch _D1 - Connection to dashboard _V4 - Diode
D19 - Hazard light switch _D2 - Connection to dashboard _V6 - Diode
_V2 D20 - Diode _D3 - Connection to dashboard _V7 - Diode
D21 - Work lights _D4 - Connection to dashboard _KL1 - NAO relay
D22 - Work lights _KA4 - Ignition lock relay _KL2 - NAO relay
D23 - Brake pedal switch _KA5 - Starting enable PTO relay _KL3 - NAO relay
_KA6 - Diff lock relay _KL4 - NAO relay
_KA7 - Work light relay _KL5 - NAO relay
_KA5 D9 D10 D11 _SA1 - Ignition switch _KL6 - NAO relay
X2
_D4 _D3 _D1 D14
_D2
D15
_R1
_SA1 D1 D16 D18
_V1
D20 D36
D29 D28
D34 D19
X3 _KL6 D22 D21

D24
X1
_KL1 _KL2 _KL3 _KL4 _KL5
D33
_V6 _V7 D23
D32 D31 D30 Fig.52-11
11-64

3D-4 Connector locations
_KA4
_KA5
D1 - Ignition switch
_KA6
D17 _D4 _D2 _D3 _D1 D11 - Intermittance
D30 - Fuse box
D31 - Fuse box
D22 D16 _KA7 D32 - Light switch
D9 D33 - Light switch
D21 X1 - Terminal box for rear line junction
X2 - Terminal box for front line junction
D15 D10 X3 - Terminal box for rear line junction
D14 X4 - Terminal box for front line junction
D19 D18 LEFT-HAND

NAO RELAY VIEW
D30 D31 D33

D24 RIGHT-HAND
D11 VIEW
D32
D23
X4 D33
X2
D1 X3 X1
D9 - Ground
D10 - Ground
D14 - Rotary beacon switch
D15 - Rotary beacon switch
D16 - External light switch
D17 - External light switch
D18 - Hazard light switch
D19 - Hazard light switch
D21 - Work lights
D22 - Work lights
D23 - Brake pedal switch Fig.53a-11
D24 - Diff lock switch
_KA4 - Ignition lock relay
_KA5 - Starting enable PTO relay
_KA6 - Diff lock relay
Fig.53b-11
_KA7 - Work light relay
11-65
Note
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
11-66
CHAP. 11
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3E - Left-hand headlight line
3E-1 General description .............................................. 11-68

3E-2 Wiring diagram ...................................................... 11-69
3E-3 Wiring .................................................................... 11-69
3E-4 Connector locations.............................................. 11-70
11-67
3E - Left-hand headlight line

3E -1 General description
The left-hand headlight line powers the front and rear
lamps, located on the respective mudguard (Fig.54-
11).
The line is connected to the rear line by means of
connection between connectors (E1) and (G14) (Fig.55-
11).
Fig.54-11
E1
G14
Fig.55-11
11-68
Left-hand headlight line

3E-2 Wiring diagram
LH FRONT HEADLIGHT LH REAR HEADLIGHT

E2 E3
CONNECTION TO REAR
LINE
E1
Fig.56-11
3E-3 Wiring
E1
E2
E3
E1 - Connector to rear line

E2 - Connector to left-hand front headlight
E3 - Connector to left-hand rear headlight Fig.57-11
11-69
Left-hand headlight line

3E-4 Connector locations
E3
E2
E1
E1 - Connector to rear line

E2 - Connector to left-hand front headlight
E3 - Connector to left-hand rear headlight
Fig.58-11
11-70
CHAP. 11
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3F - Right-hand headlight line
3F-1 General description .............................................. 11-72

3F-2 Wiring diagram ...................................................... 11-73
3F-3 Wiring .................................................................... 11-74
3F-4 Connector locations .............................................. 11-75
11-71
3F - Right-hand headlight line

3F-1 General description
The right-hand headlight line powers the front and rear
lamps, located on the respective mudguard (Fig.59-
11).
connection between connectors (F1) and (G9) (Fig.60-
11).
Fig.59-11
G9 F1
Fig.60-11
11-72
Right-hand headlight line

3F-2 Wiring diagram
RH FRONT HEADLIGHT RH REAR HEADLIGHT

F2 F3
CONNECTION TO REAR
LINE
F1
Fig.61-11
3F-3 Wiring
F1
F2
F3
F1 - Connectorto rear line

F2 - Connector to right-hand front headlight
F3 - Connector to right-hand rear headlight Fig.62-11
11-73
Right-hand headlight line

3F-4 Connector locations
F2 F3 F1
F1 - Connectorto rear line

F2 - Connector to right-hand front headlight
F3 - Connector to right-hand rear headlight
Fig.63-11
11-74
CHAP. 11
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3G - Rear line
3G-1 General description .............................................. 11-76

3G-2 Wiring diagram ..................................................... 11-77
3G-3 Wiring .................................................................... 11-78
3G-4 Connector locations ............................................. 11-79
11-75
3G - Rear line
3G -1 General description
X1 X3
The rear line installed on Atlantis tractors powers the
components (e.g. trailer power socket, PTO switches)
and sensors (e.g. fuel level sensor), located in the rear
The rear line is connected to the dashboard line throu-
gh connection between the terminal boxes (X1 and
X3), located under the lining, near the instrument
(Fig.64-11).
The rear line is also connected with the left-hand and
right-hand headlight lines by means of the respective
connectors (G14-E1) (Fig.65-11) and (G9-F1) (Fig.66-
11).
Fig.64-11
E1
G14
Fig.65-11
G9 F1
Fig.66-11
11-76
Rear line
3G-2 Wiring diagram
LICENSE CONNECTION CONNECTION

PLATE WORK WORK TO RH PROPORTIONAL INDEPENDENT ROTATING PTO SPEED TO LH TRAILER BRAKE TRAILER POWER
LIGHT LIGHTS LIGHTS HEADLIGHT LINE PTO SWITCH PTO SWITCH BEACON SELECTOR SWITCH HEADLIGHT LINE PRESSURE SWITCH SOCKET
G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 _SQ2/_SQ3 G14 G15 X5
G13
FUEL LEVEL - G5
PARKING - G4
BRAKE - G4
SWITCH - G4
STARTING- G3
ENABLE- G3
SWITCH - G3
TERMINAL BOX - X1
FOR CONNECTION - X1
TO REAR LINE - X1
TERMINAL BOX - X1
FOR CONNECTION - X3
TO REAR LINE - X1
Fig.67-11
11-77
Rear line
3G-3 Wiring
G5 G4
G8 G7
G9 G6
G3 X3
X1
X5 G3 - Starting enable switch

G4 - Parking brake switch
G5 - Fuel level
G6 - License plate light
G7 - Work lights
G8 - Work lights
G9 - Rh headlight line connection
G10 - Proportional PTO switch
G11 - Independent PTO switch
G12 - Rotary beacon
G15 G13 - PTO RPM rate selection switch connector
G14
G14 - Lh headlight line connection
G10 G13 G15 - Trailer brake pressure switch
G11 X1 - Terminal box for rear line junction
X3 - Terminal box for rear line junction
X5 - Trailer brake power socket
G12 _SQ2 - PTO RPM rate selection switch
_SQ3 - PTO RPM rate selection switch
_SQ2 _SQ3
Fig.68-11
11-78
Rear line
3G-4 Connector locations
G3 - Starting enable switch

X5 G8 G7 G6 G4 - Parking brake switch
LEFT-HAND G5 - Fuel level
VIEW G10 - Proportional PTO switch
G11 - Independent PTO switch
G12 - Rotary beacon
G13 - PTO RPM rate selection switch
G14 - Lh headlight line connection
G15 - Trailer brake pressure switch
X1 X3 G3 G4
RIGHT-HAND
G9 VIEW
G15
G12
Fig.69-11 G5 G14
G10 G13
G6 - License plate light G11

G7 - Work lights
G8 - Work lights
G9 - Rh headlight line connection
Fig.70-11
11-79
Rear line
The rotating beacon is powered connecting the provi-
ded plug (A Fig.71-11) to the connector (G12) in the
rear wiring line.
The power socket that powers the trailer users is in-

stalled at the rear of the tractor (B Fig.72-11). Fig.71-11
The power socket terminals are of female type for
European markets, and of male type for the NAO
markets.
According to the standards of the respective markets,
the wiring must to be connected as follows:
B
EUROPEAN MARKET CONNECTIONS
TERMINAL NUMBER WIRE COLOUR

1 yellow
2 not connected
3 white
4 green
5 brown
6 red
7 black
Fig.72-11
NAO MARKET CONNECTIONS

1 white
2 black
3 yellow
4 not connected
5 green
6 brown
7 not connected
Fig.73-11
11-80
CHAP. 11
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3H - Left-hand headlight line (NAO version)
3H-1 General description .............................................. 11-82

3H-2 Wiring diagram...................................................... 11-83
3H-3 Wiring .................................................................... 11-84
3H-4 Connector locations ............................................. 11-85
11-81
3H - Left-hand headlight line (NAO version)

3H -1 General description
A
The left-hand headlight line powers the front and rear
lamps, located on the respective mudguard, included
the additional headlight mounted on tractors for the
NAO market (A Fig.74-11).
connection between connectors (H1) and (L14) (Fig.75-
11).
Fig.74-11
H1
L14
Fig.75-11
11-82
Left-hand headlight line (NAO version)

3H-2 Wiring diagram
ADDITIONAL LH REAR
LH FRONT HEADLIGHT LH REAR HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT
H2 H3 H4
CONNECTION TO REAR
LINE
H1
Fig.76-11
3H-3 Wiring
H1
H2
H3
H1 - Connector to rear line H4

H2 - Connector to left-hand front headlight
H3 - Connector to left-hand rear headlight
H4 - Connector to additional left-hand rear headlight Fig.77-11
11-83
Left-hand headlight line (NAO version)

3H-4 Connector locations
H4
H3
H2
H1
H1 - Connector to rear line

H2 - Connector to left-hand front headlight
H3 - Connector to left-hand rear headlight
H4 - Connector to additional left-hand rear headlight Fig.78-11
11-84
CHAP. 11
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3I - Right-hand headlight line (NAO version)
3I-1 General description ................................................ 11-86

3I-2 Wiring diagram ....................................................... 11-87
3I-3 Wiring ...................................................................... 11-87
3I-4 Connector locations ............................................... 11-88
11-85
3I - Right-hand headlight line (NAO version)

3I-1 General description
A
The right-hand headlight line powers the front and rear
lamps, located on the respective mudguard, included
the additional headlight mounted on tractors for the
NAO market (A Fig.79-11).
connection between connectors (I1) and (L9) (Fig.80-
11).
Fig.79-11
L9 I1
Fig.80-11
11-86
Right-hand headlight line (NAO version)

3I-2 Wiring diagram
ADDITIONAL RH REAR
RH FRONT HEADLIGHT RH REAR HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT
I2 I3 I4
CONNECTION TO REAR
LINE
I1
Fig.81-11
3I-3 Wiring
I1
I2
I3
I1 - Connector to rear line I4

I2 - Connector to right-hand front headlight
I3 - Connector to right-hand rear headlight
I4 - Connector to additional right-hand rear headlight Fig.82-11
11-87
Right-hand headlight line (NAO version)

3I-4 Connector locations
I3
I2
I4
I1
I1 - Connector to rear line

I2 - Connector to right-hand front headlight
I3 - Connector to right-hand rear headlight
I4 - Connector to additional right-hand rear headlight Fig.83-11
11-88
CHAP. 11
Wiring
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Wiring
3L - Rear line (NAO version)
3L-1 General description ............................................... 11-90

3L-2 Wiring diagram ...................................................... 11-91
3L-3 Wiring..................................................................... 11-92
3L-4 Connector locations .............................................. 11-93
11-89
3L - Rear line (NAO version)

3L -1 General description
X1 X3
The rear line installed on Atlantis tractors NAO ver-
sion powers the components (e.g. trailer power soc-
ket, PTO switches) and sensors (e.g. fuel level sen-
sor), located in the rear part of the tractor.
The rear line is connected to the dashboard line throu-
gh connection between the terminal boxes (X1 and
X3), located under the lining, near the instrument
(Fig.84-11).
The rear line is also connected with the left-hand and
right-hand headlight lines by means of the respective
connectors (H1-L14) (Fig.85-11) and (L9-I1) (Fig.86-
11).
Fig.84-11
H1
L14
Fig.85-11
L9 I1
Fig.86-11
11-90
Rear line (NAO version)

3L-2 Wiring diagram
CONNECTION CONNECTION
LICENSE WORK WORK TO RH PROPORT. INDEPENDENT ROTATING PTO SPEED TO LH TRAILER BRAKE TRAILER POWER
PLATE LIGHT LIGHTS LIGHTS HEADLIGHT LINE PTO SWITCH PTO SWITCH BEACON SELECTOR SWITCH HEADLIGHT LINE PRESSURE SWITCH SOCKET
L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 _SQ2/_SQ3 L14 L15 X5
L13
FUEL LEVEL - L5
PARKING - G4
BRAKE - L4
SWITCH - G4
STARTING- G3
ENABLE- G3
SWITCH - G3
TERMINAL BOX - X1
FOR CONNECTION - X1
TO REAR LINE - X1
TERMINAL BOX - X1
FOR CONNECTION - X3
TO REAR LINE - X1
Fig.87-11
11-91

3L-3 Wiring
L5 L4
L8
L7
L9
L6
L3 X3
X1
L3 - Starting enable switch

L4 - Parking brake switch
L5 - Fuel level
L6 - License plate light
L7 - Work lights
L16 L8 - Work lights
L9 - Rh headlight line connection
L10 - Proportional PTO switch
L11 - Independent PTO switch
L12 - Rotary beacon
L14 L15 L13 - PTO RPM rate selection switch connector
L14 - Lh headlight line connection
L13 L15 - Trailer brake pressure switch
L10 L16 - Terminals for connection to trailer plug
L11 L12 X3 - Terminal box for rear line junction
_SQ2 - PTO RPM rate selection switch
_SQ2 _SQ3 - PTO RPM rate selection switch
_SQ3
Fig.88-11
11-92

3L-4 Connector locations
L3 - Starting enable switch

X5 L8 L7 L6 L4 - Parking brake switch
L5 - Fuel level
LEFT-HAND
L10 - Proportional PTO switch
VIEW
L11 - Independent PTO switch
L12 - Rotary beacon
L13 - PTO RPM rate selection switch
L14 - Lh headlight line connection
L15 - Trailer brake pressure switch
X1 X3 L3 L4
L9
RIGHT-
HAND VIEW
L15
Fig.89-11 L12
L5 L14
L6 - License plate light L10 L13

L7 - Work lights
L8 - Work lights L11
L9 - Rh headlight line connection
Fig.90-11
11-93
Linea posteriore (versione NAO)

The rotating beacon is powered connecting the provi-
ded plug (A Fig.91-11) to the connector (L12) in the
rear wiring line.
The power socket that powers the trailer users is in-

stalled at the rear of the tractor (B Fig.92-11). Fig.91-11
The power socket terminals are of female type for
European markets, and of male type for the NAO
markets.
According to the standards of the respective markets,
the wiring must to be connected as follows:
B
EUROPEAN MARKET CONNECTIONS

1 yellow
2 not connected
3 white
4 green
5 brown
6 red
7 black
Fig.92-11
NAO MARKET CONNECTIONS

1 white
2 black
3 yellow
4 not connected
5 green
6 brown
7 not connected
Fig.93-11
11-94
CHAP. 11
Main components
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4-1 Introduction ............................................................ 11-96

4A - Sensors ................................................................. 11-97
4C - Switches and buttons ......................................... 11-105
4D - Instrument ........................................................... 11-111
11-95

4-1 Introduction
This section deals with the "main" electrical compo-
nents installed in Atlantis tractors for which the repair
electrician must be familiar with particular information
and skills concerning the maintenance operations.
The sensors, solenoid valves, switches and buttons
are identified by a letter and a progressive number.
This identification remains the same in all sections of
this manual.
NOTE: unless specified differently, the information

concerning the components is also valid for tractors
designed for the NAO market.
11-96
CHAP. 11
Sensors
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4A - Sensors

4A-2 Location ................................................................ 11-98
4A-3 Identification .......................................................... 11-99
11-97
4A - Sensori
The sensors have a double function:
- they detect any abnormal situations in the tractor;
- they detect an operating condition of the tractor.
In both cases, the operator is informed about the va-
lues measured by the indicator lights and leds on the
dashboard.
Fig.94-11
4A-2 Location
B15
_SV2
B13
_ST1 G15
_SP3
_SV1
B6
_SP4 _SL1
_SV1-B6 - Engine oil filter clogging sensor
B16 G5
_SV2-B15 - Engine air filter clogging sensor
_ST1-B13 - Engine coolant temperature sensor
_SP3-G15 - Trailer brake oil sensor
_SP4-B16 - Engine oil pressure sensor
_SL1-G5 - Fuel level sensor
Fig.95-11
11-98
Sensori
4A - 3 Identification
ENGINE OIL FILTER CLOGGING SENSOR
The sensor (_SV1) installed on the transmission oil B6 _SV1

filter intake, indicates whether these filters are clog-
ged by means of an indicator light on the dashboard.
Sensor (_SV1) is connected to the front wiring by me-
ans of connector (B6) (Fig.96-11).
Fig.96-11
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Sensor (_ST1), installed on the cylinder head, indica-

tes the operating temperature of the engine and any
overheating through an analog signal on the instrument.
Sensor (_ST1) is connected to the front wiring by me-
ans of connector (B13) (Fig.97-11). B13
_ST1
Fig.97-11
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
The sensor (_SP4), installed on the left-hand side of

the engine, indicates when the engine oil pressure is
low by means of an indicator light on the instrument.
Sensor (_SP4) is connected to the front wiring by me- _SP4
ans of connector (B16) (Fig.98-11).
B16
Fig.98-11
11-99
Sensori
ENGINE AIR FILTER CLOGGING SENSOR
The sensor (_SV2) installed on the connection sleeve

between the intake manifold and air filter indicates
whether this latter is clogged by means of an indicator
light on the dashboard. B15
Sensor (_SV2) is connected to the front wiring by me-
ans of faston terminals (B15) (Fig.99-11).
_SV2
Fig.99-11
FUEL LOEVEL SENSOR
The sensor (_SL1), installed on the fuel tank filler plug,

indicates whether the fuel level is too low by means of G5
_SL1
an indicator light on the dashboard.
The sensor (_SL1) is connected to the front wiring by
means of connector (G5)( Fig.100-11).
Fig.100-11
TRAILER BRAKE SENSOR (ITALIAN MARKET

ONLY)
The sensor (_SP3) (provided only on tractor for the

Italian market), is installed on the trailer brake valve
and indicates whether the pressure in the hydraulic
circuit of the latter is too low.
The sensor, by means of an indicator light on the
dashboard, indicates if: 1- the oil in the valve has a
pressure below 10 bar, required to release the trailer
brake, 2- the oil in the valve has a pressure below 140 G15
bar, required for maximum brake power.
ans of connector (G15)(Fig.101-11).
_SP3
Fig.101-11
11-100
CHAP. 11
Solenoid valves
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4B-1 General description ............................................ 11-102

4B-2 Location .............................................................. 11-103
4B-3 Identification ........................................................ 11-103
11-101
4B-1 General description Solenoid valve assembly
The function of a solenoid valve is to open or close

the oil supply and to discharge the oil to the relative
user. This occurs by energizing or de-energizing the
solenoid valve, i.e. by transmitting or interrupting an
electric voltage, thus allowing the oil to flow or shut-
ting of the oil flow, according to the case in question.
The solenoid valves installed on Atlantis tractors are
the ON/OFF type (Fig.102-11).
P = Pressure
U = User
S = Discharge
Fig.102-11
Not-energized solenoid valve
Fig.103-11
Energized solenoid valve
Fig.104-11
11-102
Solenoid valves
4B - 2 Location
B12 B9
_YV4 _YV6
_YV4-B12 - Engine stop solenoid valve

_YV6-B9 - Diff lock solenoid valve Fig.105-11
4B -3 Identification
B12
MOTOR STOP SOLENOID VALVE
Solenoid valve (_YV4) on the injection pump opens or

shuts off the fuel flow to the engine.
The solenoid valve (_YV4) energizes when the igni-
tion key is turned clockwise, thus allowing fuel to flow
in order to start the tractor. On the other hand, when
the key is turned in the anti-clockwise direction, the
solenoid valve disenergizes, thus shutting off the fuel
flow and stopping the engine. _YV4
wiring by means of connector (B12) (Fig.106-11).
Fig.106-11
11-103
Solenoid valves
DIFF LOCK SOLENOID VALVE
The differentials (front and rear) are locked through A

the movement of two mechanical clutch assemblies
activated by a piston with oil at a pressure of 18 bar
when the driver energises the solenoid valve (_YV6
Fig.107-11) by means of the button (A Fig.107-11).
The energised solenoid valve supplies oil to the front
and rear diff locks at the same time. The differentials
are unlocked by depressing the brake pedals (B
Fig.107-11). The de-energised solenoid valve (_YV6)
closes the oil supply and opens the communication
with the discharge.
wiring by means of the connector (B9) (Fig.108-11).
B
Fig.107-11
_YV6
B9
Fig.108-11
11-104
CHAP. 11
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4C-1 General description ............................................ 11-106

4C-2 Location .............................................................. 11-107
4C-3 Identification ........................................................ 11-108
11-105

4C-1 General description
The purpose of the switches installed in Atlantis
tractors is to activate or deactivate a certain user. The
transmitted signals may be of two types: permanent
and temporary.
Permanent signal means a signal that indicates a de-
termined situation in a fade-free way.
Temporary signal is a control pulse sent to the moni-
toring plant in order to modify an already existing si-
tuation.
For example, the safety switch indicating 4WD enga-
gement/disengagement sends a permanent signal, that
is kept constant by means of a hydraulic system. On
the other hand, the diff lock engagement/disengage-
Fig.109-11
ment button transmits a temporary signal that modi-
fies an existing situation.
The pictures on the right depict a few types of switches

installed in Atlantis tractors.
Fig.110-11
Fig.111-11
11-106

4C - 2 Location
G4
C24
_SQ13 _SB2
_SQ5 G10 G11

_SQ4 _SQ1 _SQ14
C23
_SQ2 G13
Fig.112-11
_SQ3
_SQ18 _SA1
G3
C1
_SA1-C1-D1 (NAO) - Ignition switch

_SQ4_SQ5-C23-D23 (NAO) - Brake light and diff lock disengagement switches
_SB2-C24-D24 (NAO) - Diff lock engagement button
_SQ13-G4 - Parking lock switch
_SQ18-G3 - Ignition enable switches
_SQ1-G10 - Independent PTO selector switches
_SQ14-G11 - Proportional PTO selector switches Fig.113-11
_SQ2_SQ3-G13 - PTO speed selector switches
11-107

4C-3 Identification
_SQ5 C23
BRAKE LIGHT AND DIFF LOCK DISENGAGEMENT
SWITCHES
Switches (_SQ4 and _SQ5), in contact with the brake

pedals, have two functions: _SQ4
1- they allow the brake lights to come on,
2 - they disengage the diff lock.
These functions take place when the pedals are used
both singly and latched.
Switches (_SQ4 and _SQ5) are connected to the
dashboard wiring by means of connectors (C23) or
(D23), depending on the tractor version (Fig.114-
11).
Fig.114-11
NOTE: If both switches are replaced, they must be
mounted so that they are lightly pressed when the brake
pedals are not used.
D1
IGNITION SWITCH
C1
The ignition switch (_SA1) under the steering wheel
allows the battery to power the starter motor, thus ena-
bling the engine to start.
The ignition switch (_SA1) is connected to the dashbo-
ard wiring by means of faston terminals (C1) or (D1),
depending on the tractor version (Fig.115-11). _SA1
Fig.115-11
DIFF LOCK ENGAGEMENT BUTTON
The button (_SB2), located under the steering wheel,

D24
allows the diff lock to be engaged by means of a sole-
noid valve.
The button (_SB2) is connected to the dashboard wiring C24
by means of connector (C24) or (D24), depending on
the tractor version (Fig.116-11).
The diff lock is disengaged by depressing the brake
pedals.
_SB2
Fig.116-11
11-108

IGNITION ENABLE SWITCH
The switch (_SQ18), located on the housing between

gearbox and axle, are a safety device as they do not
allow the engine to be ignited when:
- the PTO is engaged
- a gear is engaged
- the reverse shuttle lever is not in neutral.
The switch (_SQ18) connected to the rear wiring by
means of the faston terminal (G3) (Fig.117-11). G3
_SQ18
Fig.117-11
PARKING BRAKE SWITCHES
The switch (_SQ13), located on the right-hand side in

contact with the parking brake lever, indicates that the
brake is engaged by means of an indicator light on the
instrument.
means of terminals (G4) (Fig.118-11).
_SQ13
G4
Fig.118-11
PTO SPEED SELECTOR SWITCH
The switches (_SQ2 and _SQ3), on the left-hand side

behind the final drive, indicates when the PTO is used
in fast or slow mode by means of indicator lights on _SQ3
the dashboard. _SQ2 G13
The switches (_SQ2 and _SQ3) are connected to the
rear wiring by means of connector (G13) (Fig.119-11).
Fig.119-11
11-109

PTO MODE SELECTOR SWITCHES
G10
The switches (_SQ1 e _SQ14), installed on the left-
hand side, in contact with the PTO engagement / di-
sengagement lever, indicates whether the PTO is being _SQ1 G11
used in independent or proportional mode, by means
of indicator lights in the instrument.
The switches (_SQ1 e _SQ14) are connected to the _SQ14
rear wiring with terminals (G10) and (G11)(Fig.120-11).
Fig.120-11
11-110
CHAP. 11
Instrument
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.4 Main componente
4D - Instrument
4D-1 Indicators ............................................................ 11-112

4D-2 Wiring diagram.................................................... 11-114
11-111
4D - Instrument
4D-1 Indicatori
Fig.121-11
WARNING LIGHTS FUNCTION INDICATORS
General warning light - Direction indicator light for tractor -

red. green
This comes on at the .
same time as one of the
first seven red warning li- Direction indicator light for 1st trailer -
ghts or along with the red green
coolant temperature indi-
cator if the relative component is faulty. It comes
on when the ignition key is in the contact position
and should go out as soon as the engine starts. Direction indicator light for 2nd trailer -
green
Battery charging warning light - red.
Should go out as soon as the engine starts.
Side light indicator - green
Engine oil pressure warning light - red.

Main beam indicator - blue
Should go out as soon as the engine starts.
It is quite normal for this light to come on if a
hot engine is allowed to idle or the engine is
Proportional PTO engaged indicator -
hot.
yellow. The 540 RPM PTO indicator or the
540E-1000 RPM PTO indicator should come
Dry air filter blockage warning light - (if
on at the same time.
installed).
Transmission and hydraulic system oil

540 RPM PTO engaged indicator - yellow
filter blockage warning light - red.
540E RPM or 1000 RPM PTO engaged

Parking brake engaged warning light -
indicator - yellow (according to the installed
red.
type).
Not used. On request, brake fluid level indi-
Diff lock engaged indicator - yellow
cator.
Indicator of low pressure in the trailer

brake circuit - red (if installed and depen-
4WD engaged indicator - yellow (if installed)
ding on the market).
11-112
Instrument
Engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge.
•Green area = normal temperature

•Red area = high temperature. The overheating war-
ning light comes on at about 110°C. Possible causes
of overheating are:
a - Low engine coolant level.
b - Radiator caked with mud, dust, straw a.s.o.
c - Build up of deposits in coolant circuit.
d - Loose fan belt.
e - Thermostat.
Fig.122-11
CAUTION: if the engine temperature is too high, let
RPM AND HOUR METER the engine idle immediately but do not switch it off. If
the temperature gauge stays in the red, identify the
The engine rate is shown by the pointer on the outer cause immediately and seek expert advice if neces-
scale: the yellow zone (2200 to 2470 RPM) shows sary.
where the injection pump governor comes on. The red
danger zone beyond 2470 RPM should never be rea-
ched by the pointer.
The three coloured inner scales represent the RPM
rate of the PTO shaft:
• Green scale - 540 RPM PTO with 540 RPM mark

at 1944 RPM engine rate. Fuel level gauge. When
the pointer moves into the
• Red scale - 540E RPM PTO with 750 RPM red zone and the reserve
mark at 1934 RPM engine rate (if warning light comes on,
installed). there is still about 10 liters
of fuel in the tank (2.25
• White scale - 1000 RPM PTO with 1000 RPM gal.)(2.64 US gal.).
mark at 1914 RPM engine rate (if
installed).
The hour counter at the bottom of the gauge indicates

the total hour worked, irrespective of engine speed. It
begins operating when the engine speed rate exceeds
800 RPM. The counter is so divided: the firse five white
digits on a black background indicate the actual work
hours, the two red digits on a black background indi-
cate 10ths and 100ths of an hour, respectively.
CAUTION: during work, pay particular attention to the

indications given by the indicator lights and monito-
ring instruments. If the tractor operates in a faulty way,
stop it immediately and identify the cause.
11-113
Fig.123-11
4D-2 Wiring diagram
11-114
Instrument
1 - RPM meter and hour counter

2 - Fuel level gauge 12 - Slow PTO engaged indicator light
3 - Coolant temperature gauge 13 - Fast PTO engaged indicator light
4 - Instrument lighting lamps 14 - Diff lock indicator light
5 - Tractor turn indicator indicator light 15 - Simultaneous control of 16 to 22 and 3 indicator light
6 - 1st trailer turn indicator indicator light 16 - Not used

7 - 2nd trailer turn indicator indicator light 17 - Trailer brake circuit low pressure indicator light
8 - Main beam indicator light 18 - Hand brake indicator light
9 - Turn indicator indicator light 19 - Power lift oil filter clogged indicator light
10 - 4WD engaged indicator light (if installed) 20 - Engine oil pressure indicator light
11 - PTO engaged indicator light 22 - Battery charger indicator light
CHAP. 11
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.5 Check-control and troubleshooting

11-115
Sect.5 - Check-control and troubleshooting

5-1 How to diagnose and identify
a fault
Troubleshooting tests are carried out to establish whi-
ch element or elements have become faulty.
If a fault occurs, it is first necessary to establish its
nature. A fault can be mechanical, hydraulic or electri-
cal, depending on the components involved.
Associated with the experience of the repair engineer,
the presence of certain typical signals, such as: bre-
akages in the transmission system which lead to
excessive noise and difficulties in engaging the ge-
ars, allow the mechanical nature of the fault to be iden-
tified. In such cases, the faulty component must be
either repaired or replaced, bearing in mind the guide
lines illustrated in the previous chapters.
To identify the hydraulic nature of a fault, first check
the pressure of the oil in the point where the relative
component is supplied, as described in chapters 7 and
8.
Three types of test can be conducted to correctly esta-
blish the electrical nature of a fault:

5-2 Electrical circuit tests

By conducting these tests, the repair engineer should
be able to establish the electrical nature of a fault:

Following the above mentioned tests, diagnosis and

repair of an electrical fault in the locking system of the
differential lock unit is also given as an example.
11-116

A - CONTINUITY TEST, GROUNDED SHORT-CIR C - VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT, SHORT-CIRCUIT
CUIT AT 12 VOLTS
1 - Move the ignition switch to the Off position. 1 - Move the ignition switch to the On position.
2 - Disconnect the connectors involves at each end, 2 - Disconnect the connector in question at both ends.
or at each end of the circuit to prevent false All the other connectors must be re-connected
indications. before the test is conducted.
3 - Measure the resistance of the circuit. Using a tester 3 - Measure the voltage in the circuit. Using a tester
prod, make contact with a metal part of the chassis prod, touch the terminals of the connector one by
so as to create a jumper (make sure that there is one, without touching the metal ground connection
no corrosion on the surface of the part). Touch the of the connectors. Using the other prod, touch a
terminals of the connector one at a time with the metal part of the chassis in order to create a jumper.
other prod, but do not touch the ground connection Make sure that the surface is not corroded.
of the connector.
4 - If the measured voltage value is 12 Volts, there is
4 - If the measured resistance value is almost 0, there a short-circuit towards the power supply.
is a short-circuit towards the chassis which should
be located and repaired. If the resistance value is
decidedly higher than 0, there are probably internal
ways of the circuit through the modules.
B - CONTINUITY TEST, OPEN CIRCUITS
1 - Move the ignition switch to the Off position.
2 - Disconnect the connects involves at both ends. All

the other connectors must be re-connected before
the test is conducted.
3 - Measure the resistance of the circuit. Using a tester

prod, touch the terminals of the connector one by
one without touching the metal ground connection
of the connectors. Using the other prod, touch the
terminals of the connector at the other end of the
circuit. Do not make contact with the other terminals Fig.124-11
of the connector or the ground connection of this
latter if it is made of metal.
4 - If the measured resistance value is almost 0, the

circuit is continuous. If the resistance value is more
than 0, this generally indicates that the terminals
of the connectors are dirty or tarnished. If the circuit
is open, the most commonly used testers will indi-
cate OL (“open line”).
11-117

EXAMPLE OF AN ELECTRICAL FAULT
Type of tractor: Atlantis 80
Diagnosis: the diff lock doesnot work
Troubleshooting:
1 - Make sure that fuse FU'4 and replace it if neces-

sary
NOTE: it is always advisable to identify the cause of

the overload and to eliminate it before changing the
fuse. _SB2
2 - Make sure that the button (_SB2 Fig.125-11) ope- Fig.125-11
rates correctly. Using a tester, disconnect the but-
ton and check if:
switch released = CIRCUIT OPEN
switch pressed = CIRCUIT CLOSED (about 0
Ohm). In this case the button operates correctly.
Otherwise it should be replaced.
3 - Make sure that the solenoid valve controlling the

differential (_YV6 Fig.126-11), placed in the engine
compartment, operates correctly.
4 - If the solenoid valve operates correctly, conduct

the continuity tests described on the previous page _YV6
between the terminals of the electrical circuits of
the above mentioned components. The path fol-
lowed by the electrical signal can be identified by
means of the indications given in Section 3 and
the wiring diagram. Fig.126-11
In this particular case, the connectors are the fol-
lowing:
Connector (B9) terminal 2 colour MN - terminal box (X4) terminal 12 - connector (B9) terminal 3
Connector (B9) terminal 3 colour A - terminal box (X4) terminal 15 - connector (B9) terminal 2
Connector (C24) terminal 5 colour BR - _KA6 terminal 85

- connector (C23) terminal 2
Connector (C24) terminal 7 colour B - connector (C33) terminal 2

- connector (C10) (ground)
11-118
BUTTON (_SB2)

or component
5 BR _KA6-C23 85-2
7 B C10 (ground) -
Fig.127-10
CONNECTOR (B9)

or component
2 MN X4-B9 12-3
3 A X4-B9 15-2
Fig.128-10
11-119
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
11-120
AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CHAP. 12
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1-1 Basic principles ......................................................... 12-4
1-2 Operating principle of a chilling cycle ..................... 12-12
1-3 Main components of an air conditioning system .................... 12-19

Sect.3 Air-conditioning system (AC) ............................................ 12-25

3-1 Main components ................................................... 12-26
3-2 How to use the air-conditioning system ................. 12-27
3-3 Wiring diagram ........................................................ 12-28
Sect.4 Emptying and charging the system. ................................ 12-31

4-1 Safety notes ............................................................ 12-32
4-2 Maintenance instructions ........................................ 12-33
4-3 Recharging procedure ............................................ 12-34
Sect.5 Functionality tests. ............................................................. 12-39

5-1 Equipment required................................................. 12-40
5-2 Checking the efficiency of the system (AC) ........... 12-41
5-3 Check-control tables ............................................... 12-42
12-1
12-2
CHAP. 12
General description
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-1 Basic principles ......................................................... 12-4

1-2 Operating principle of a chilling cycle ..................... 12-12
1-3 Main components of an air-conditioning system ....................12-19
12-3

1-1 Basic principles
A - INTRODUCTION
We considered it advisable to give a brief explanation

of the more important basic principles dictated by ele-
mentary notions of physics before proceeding with the
theoretic - practical analysis of the air conditioning
systems installed on Ghibli and Atlantis tractors.
Nowadays, an increasingly higher number of tractors

are being equipped with an air conditioning system. It
is therefore essential for repair engineers to acquire a
theoretic knowledge of those fundamental principles
on which a cooling system is based in order to be able Fig.1-12
to work with adequate competence when servicing and
repairing such systems.
B - PRESSURE The Newton (N) is the unit of force, i.e. force impart-
ing an acceleration of 1 m/s2 to a mass of 1 Kg., i.e. 1
In general, pressure is a physical entity defined by N = 1 Kg m/s2
the ratio between a certain force, perpendicular to a
surface, and the area of the surface itself (e.g.: 1 Kg Other units of measurement for pressure permitted or
on 1 cm2 of a horizontal surface Fig. 1-12). transitorily tolerated by the SI are:
the bar (for the pressure of fluids):
Atmospheric pressure in a determined point of the
atmosphere, is the weight of the air column of unitary 1 bar = 105 Pa
section (e.g.: 1 cm2), that goes from the above men-
tioned point to the upper limit of the atmosphere itself. the technical atmosphere (1Kg/cm2):
The higher the point in which atmospheric pressure is
measured, the less it will therefore be (e.g.: atmos- 1 at = 98066.5 Pa
pheric pressure in mountain districts is less than that
at sea level). the millimeter of mercury (torr):
The unit of measurement most commonly used in the 1 mm Hg = 133.322 Pa

past was the Atmosphere, since it corresponded to
the atmospheric pressure at sea level in determined the millimeter of water:
conditions - Normal Atmospheric Pressure - and equiv-
alent to the pressure exercised by a mercury column 1 mm H2O = 9.807 Pa
(Hg) of unitary section, 760 mm high at 0°C, at sea
level and at a latitude of 45°. In English speaking countries, the unit of measure-
This unit of measurement is the physical atmosphere ment for pressure conventionally used is pounds/
and its symbol is the atm. square inch (Ibs/sq in) (psi)
The official units of measurement are currently estab- 1 pound (Ib) = 0.4536 kg
lished by the International System of Units (SI) 1 inch (in) = 25.4 mm
The basic SI unit for pressure is the Pascal (Pa): 1 sq in = 6.452 cm2 = 645.2 mm2
1 Pa = 1 Newton/m2 (1 N/m2)
12-4
General description
The instrument used to measure the pressure of fluids
is the pressure gauge (Fig.2-12).
The pressure gauges normally used in practice are

the differential type since they indicate the difference
between the pressure of the environment in question
and the atmospheric pressure.
The dials of differential pressure gauges have scales

(in the required units of measurement) where the zero
"0" corresponds to the atmospheric pressure and where
the indicated pressure or manometric pressure is called
relative pressure.
On the other hand, absolute pressure is the pressure

measured on a scale where zero "0" is the absolute Fig.2-12
vacuum and "1" corresponds to the normal atmospheric
pressure.
The absolute pressure is therefore given by the sum
of the manometric (or relative) pressure and the nor-
mal pressure (= 1 by definition).
A relative pressure that is lower than the normal pres- 1
sure is indicated as negative pressure or vacuum or
degree of vacuum.
The instrument used to measure negative pressure is
the vacuometer (Fig. 3-12).
Main conversions between the more common units of

2
measurement for pressure:
1 - Reference pointer
1 N/m2 = 1 Pa
2 - Measuring pointer
1 N/cm2 = 104 Pa
1 bar = 105 Pa = 105 N/m2 = 10 N/cm2
Fig.3-12
1 atm = 101325 Pa = 1.01325 x 105 Pa
1 at = 98066.5 Pa = 0.980665 x 105 Pa
1 atm = 1.01325 bar = 10.1325 N/cm2
1 at = 0.980665 bar = N/cm2
1 bar = 0.98692 atm = 1.01972 at
1 psi = 0.068 atm = 0.069 bar = 6894.6 Pa
1 atm = 14.697 psi
1 bar = 14.505 psi
12-5
General description
C - HEAT AND TEMPERATURE
The terms heat and temperature are often used in 1 BTU = 0.252 kcal
daily practice.
For example, heat is received from a flame or from the Both the calorie and the BTU are units of measure-
Sun. For this reason, they are called heat sources. ment that are not permitted by the International Sys-
A person who, when touched, gives us the sensation tem (SI), according to which the unit of measurement
of being hotter than another, is said to have a higher for the heat quantity is the Joule (J):
temperature.
To explain the meanings of the terms heat and tem- 1 J = 0.000239 kcal = 0.000948 BTU
perature and to allow them to be correctly used, we
hereby give stricter definitions indicating the main pri- Other conversion formulas amongst the above men-
orities and the relative units of measurement (which tioned units of measurement are:
are widely interdependent).
1 cal = 4.186 J
1 kcal = 4.186 J = 4.186 kJ
HEAT 1 kcal = 3.968 BTU
1 BTU = 1054.87 J
Heat is a form of energy (thermal energy) generally
present in nature since it is contained in all bodies, In refrigerating, air conditioning systems and in the
although in different concentrations. cold industry in general, the commonly used unit of
The quantity of heat exchanged between bodies can- measurement is the refrigeration unit, defined as the
not be measured directly but only according to the ef- quantity of heat removed equivalent to 1 kcal.
fects produced (temperature variation, modification of In English speaking countries, the unit of measure-
the physical status, chemical reactions, production of ment for cooling is the ton of refrigeration (meaning
mechanical work, etc.). the extraction of 288000 BTU/day, hence the follow-
The conventional unit of measurement for the quantity ing equivalences:
of heat is the calorie (cal) or small calorie, defined in
the following way: quantity of heat required to increase 1 ton = 12000 BTU/h = 3027 kcal/h
the temperature of the mass of 1 gram of distilled wa- = 12672 kj/h = 3.52 kW.
ter at the normal atmospheric pressure at sea level by
12°C - from 14.5 to 15.5°C.
In practice, the large calorie (Cal) or kilocalorie or
(kcal) = 1000 cal is used and is defined as: the quan-
tity of heat required to increase the temperature of the
mass of one Kg of distilled water at normal atmos-
pheric pressure at sea level by 1 degree - from 14.5 to
15.5 °C.
In English speaking countries, the unit of measure-
ment for heat in use is the British Thermal Unit (BTU):
12-6
General description
TEMPERATURE
The temperature of a body indicates the level of heat

concentration it contains, given the weight (quantity of
matter) and the volume of the body itself.
The unit of measurement of temperature is the de-
gree.
Since the temperature can be measured with refer-

ence to the different scales in use, the temperature
interval corresponding to 1 degree differs in the vari-
ous scales themselves.
The most commonly used scales are Celsius and Kel-

vin.
The Celsius scale is obtained by dividing the interval a - Boiling point of water
between the temperature of melting ice (considered = b - Freezing point of water
0) and that of boiling water (considered = 100) into one c - Absolute zero
hundred equal parts (distilled water, atmospheric pres- Fig.4-12
sure at sea level). Thus defined, the symbol of the
Celsius degree is °C. By convention, the absolute ab-
sence of heat is –273.16 °C on the Celsius scale.
The Kelvin scale considers the same reference points

(melting ice and boiling water and the same division
(into 100 equal parts) of the relative temperature inter-
val, but the zero mark corresponds to absolute zero
(absence of heat): this is why the Kelvin scale is also
called absolute scale of temperature.
This scale includes the temperature of melting ice at
273.16 and the temperature of boiling water at 37316.
Symbol K represents the degree in the Kelvin scale.
The Fahrenheit scale is used in English speaking coun- SCALE CONVERSION FORMULAS
tries, where the temperature of ice is 32 and that of
boiling water 212, while the absolute absence of heat °F Ÿ °C °C = (°F - 32) : 1,8
is – 459.67. Symbol °F represents the Fahrenheit tem-
perature degree. °F Ÿ °C °F = (°C x 1,8) + 32
°F Ÿ K K = (°F + 459,67) : 1,8
Fig.4-12 compares the different temperature scales:
Fahrenheit (°F), Celsius (°C), Réaumur (°r), Kelvin (K) °C Ÿ K K = °C + 273,16
and Rankine (°R).
°r Ÿ K K = (°r x 1,25) + 273,16
The table on the right gives the conversion formulas
°R Ÿ K K = °R : 1,8
allowing users to switch from one unit of measure-
ment to the other. K Ÿ °F °F = (K x 1,8) - 459,67
K Ÿ °C °C = K - 273,16
12-7
General description
HEAT TRANSMISSION PROPERTIES AND MODES D - INFLUENCE OF HEAT ON TRANSFORMATIONS
OF PHYSICAL STATES IN BODIES (AT CON-
The basic property is that according to which, when STANT PRESSURE)
there are two bodies at a different temperature, heat
moves spontaneously from the higher temperature To make the general considerations given on this sub-
body (the warmer one) to that with a lower temperature ject easier to understand and justify their use in an air
(the less warm one); "or, within a single body where conditioning system, we are proposing a simple ex-
the temperature is not uniform, heat moves spontane- periment for purely indicative purposes, which will al-
ously from the higher temperature parts to those at a low certain physical phenomena to take place in a
lower temperature”. determined substance (e.g.: water) depending on the
heat administered.
Heat transfer from a cooler body to a warmer one can
only be carried out in a forced way, thus with a use of The experiment must be carried out at sea level and
energy. at normal atmospheric pressure (760 mmHg = 1 abso-
lute Atm), using a vessel, a heat source (e.g.: a flame),
The quantity of heat that can be transmitted within a a thermometer and 1 Kg of distilled water.
given time unit from a body at a higher temperature to
one of a lower temperature is directly proportional to
the temperature difference.
There are three basic methods according to which heat

can be transmitted from one body to another of a dif-
ferent temperature:
a - Transmission by conduction
This occurs by contact between the two bodies
without movement of matter (characteristic betwe-
en solid bodies).
b - Transmission by convection
occurs by movement of matter (typical in fluids).
c - Transmission by radiation
Occurs between different bodies, not in contact,
by means of electromagnetic waves (particularly
infrared rays) even if the space between the bo-
dies themselves is completely empty (without mat
ter).
Typical and the most important example in nature:
the Earth heated by the sun's rays.
12-8
General description
EXPERIMENT
During this period of time (from the beginning of evap-
The experiment begins by placing water in a freezer to oration to the end) and if the thermometer bulb is kept
form ice, i.e. so that it solidifies. in continuous contact with the boiling liquid, the tem-
Now transfer the block of ice to the vessel, place the perature indicated will have remained at 100°C.
thermometer bulb in contact with the ice and place
everything over the flame (Fig.7-12 a-b). If the steam that has developed is collected in a suit-
At the beginning of the experiment, the thermometer able vessel (Fig.7-12 h) and heat continues to be ad-
will indicate the temperature of ice as taken from the ministered, the liquid will completely disappear (Fig.7-
freezer, e.g. – 10°C. 12 i), after which the temperature of the steam will
As time goes by, you will note that the heat will cause progressively increase above 100°C (Fig.7-12 l).
the temperature of the ice to progressively rise to –
9°C. –8°C, etc., until it reaches 0°C. Graph Fig.6-12 represents the successive phases of
Drops of liquid water will now begin to form on the the experiment.
surface of the ice (Fig.7-12 c): the ice has begun to
melt and this process will continue (Fig.7-12 d) until
the solid phase disappears and the water is all in the
liquid state (Fig.7-12 e).
If you watch the thermometer, you will note that the
temperature indicated will remain at 0°C all through
the ice melting phase.
If you continue to administer heat, maintaining the ther-
mometer bulb immersed in the water, you will note
that the temperature progressively increases (Fig.7-
Temperature
12 f) until the following phenomena occur at the same

time (Fig.7-12 g):
• the thermometer indicates 100°C
• turbulent movement occurs in the water with sep- Ice melting
aration of a great quantity of steam.
Boiling or water evaporation has begun. time
kcalx 100
This phenomenon continues while a trace of water re-
mains. Fig.6-12
a b c d e
F - Bell weight compensation
f g h i l
Fig.7-12
12-9
General description
Two changes in physical state will have been observed
during the experiment, by solely administering heat
and keeping the pressure at a constant value. STEAM
- from solid (iced) to liquid -> melting
ev
- from liquid to steam -> evaporation
n
tio
ap
ion
co liquid
te)
ma
You will have also noted that heat applied when there
(to
ora
nd
so sat
sta
bli
tio
or
is one single phase (solid, liquid, steam) is shown by
en tat
(to de
su
lid
n
liq
sa
n
a temperature increase in the examined substance
ue
co
tio )
s
fac
(water):
n
e
tio
- from – 10°C to 0°C, the the solid state (ice)
n
- from 0°C to 100°C, for the liquid state
- over 100°C, for steam (water in a gaseous state). SOLID LIQUID
The heat applied within these intervals and that deter- solidification
mines the temperature variation, is called sensitive
heat.
On the other hand, you will have noted that during Fig.8-12
changes in physical state - melting and evaporation -
the heat applied caused no variations to the tempera-
ture, which remained the same:
- at 0°C during the melting phase STEAM
- at 100°C during the evaporation phase.
The heat exchanged during these intervals is known
as latent heat – of melting and evaporation –, i.e. hid- Vaporization
den, since there is no temperature variation. heat
Steam in the presence of liquid and at evaporation
Increasing energy
Condensation
temperature is called saturated steam. heat
Steam that is no longer in the presence of liquid and Sublimation
heat
with a higher temperature than that of evaporation is
called overheated steam. LIQUID
If the above described experiment is repeated begin-
ning with overheated steam and subtracting heat, one
obtains in succession: saturated steam at 100°C, liq- Melting Solidification
heat heat
Fig.9-12
uid at 100°C, liquid at 0°C, solid (ice) at 0°C, solid at a
temperature of less than 0°C (e.g. – 10°C).
SOLID
The transformation of saturated steam into liquid wa-
ter is called condensation and the quantity of heat
subtracted is called latent heat of condensation
In this particular case, 1 Kg of water: approx 100 kcal
Changes in physical state are schematized and sum- (418.6 kj) are required to heat it from 0°C to 100°C
marized in Fig.8-12 while a diagram of the relative quan- while 540 kcal (2260 kj) are required to evaporate it.
tities of exchanged heat is given in Fig.9-12.
Similar considerations can be made proceeding in re-
If the described experiment is conducted using a con- verse, i.e. when heat is subtracted.
stant source of heat and all the heat issued by this
source is transferred to the substance in question, the
quantity of heat exchanged will be proportional to the
time elapsed. You will also note (Fig. 7-12) that the
quantity of heat absorbed by the substance itself as
the physical state changes from liquid to saturated
steam (latent heat) is much more than that absorbed
during the heating phase from 0°C to 100°C (sensitive
heat).
12-10
General description
OBSERVATIONS
In view of the above, one can deduce that:

for a certain mass of substance, the quantity of
heat required to change its physical state at a con-
stant pressure is much more than that required to
change the temperature from the end of one state
to the beginning of the next (e.g.: from the end of
melting to the beginning of evaporation or vice versa).
This important property of bodies is used to form the

operating cycle of an air conditioner (cooling cycle). a
NOTE
Solid substances that melt as a given temperature,
called melting point, are those with a crystalline struc-
ture.
There are solid substances, i.e. with an amorphous

structure (e.g. glass, plastic) which, when heated, do
not melt immediately but which are subjected to a grad-
ual softening process and that become fluid within a
more or less extensive temperature range.
E - INFLUENCE OF PRESSURE ON THE

CHANGES IN PHYSICAL STATE OF BODIES
The previous section described how, if a certain quan-

tity of water is maintained at the (constant) pressure b
(p) of 1 absolute bar, boiling will occur when the tem-
perature (t) of the actual water reaches 100°C (Fig.10-
12 a).
If a pressure is created in the vessel above the liquid,

e.g. with a piston tight against the walls of the vessel,
pushed with a force F (Fig.10-12 b) - at a pressure of
more than 1 absolute atm, the water will boil at a tem-
perature of more than 100°C.
Vice versa, if a pressure of less than 1 absolute atm

(vacuum) is created in the vessel, e.g. by removing
the piston (Fig.10-12 c) - the water will boil at a tem-
perature of less than 100°C.
Fig.10-12
12-11
General description
By conducting a significant number of tests in various
conditions, one can plot a graph (Fig. 11-12) in which
the curve (Z) is formed by all the pressure/tempera-
ture conditions in correspondence to which the liquid
state and the saturated steam state of water are bal-
anced. Liquid changes into steam when heat is ap-
plied in correspondence to these combinations, while
steam changes into liquid when heat is subtracted.
p = absolute pressure (in bar)

t = temperature (in °C) ) Fig.11-12
12-12
General description
F - RELATIONS BETWEEN TEMPERATURE, G - HUMIDITY
PRESSURE AND VOLUME IN AERIFORM SUB-
STANCES Humidity is generally the percentage ratio between
the weight (or the volume) of the water in a body and
Certain laws established by Physics for ideal gases the weight (or the volume) of the body itself.
can be considered valid for aeriform fluids (gases and
vapours) used in technics, although with the appropri- In relation to atmospheric air, it is a mixture of dry air
ate approximations. and water vapour, the rate of which is atmospheric
humidity.
These laws are outlined in the Ideal gas equation of
state: Two temperature values are used to define the atmos-
pheric humidity rate:
PV = RT - dry bulb temperature (in °C):
measured with a common thermometer
Where P = pressure, T = absolute temperature, - wet bulb temperature (in °C):
V = volume, R = universal constant. measured with a thermometer whose bulb is co-
vered with a gauze soaked in water and ventila-
These means that in practice, if one of the entities is ted.
varied at least one of the other two also varies.
The following relations should be considered when use The wet bulb temperature is always lower than that of
is made in a cooling cycle: the dry bulb since the water used to soak the gauze
• a reduction in volume (compression) determines tends to evaporate, cooling the bulb itself still further.
an increase in pressure and temperature
• an increase in volume (expansion) determines a The following values can be determined using the two
reduction in pressure and temperature. values indicated above:
• the absolute humidity, defined as the mass of
In particular, for a given mass of substance one has: the water vapour contained in the unit of volume
ofair: it is expressed in grams of vapour per cubic
a) with constant temperature meter of air:
• an increase in volume involves a decrease in pres- • the relative humidity, defined as the percenta-
sure ge relation between the mass of water vapour ef-
• a decrease in volume involves an increase in pres- fectively present in a certain volume of air and
sure. the amount that could be there in saturation con-
ditions, with the same temperature and pressure.
b) with constant pressure 100% relative humidity indicates saturation point.
• an increase in temperature involves an increase
in volume When saturated air is cooled, the water vapour con-
• a decrease in temperature involves a decrease denses and produces fog, rain and snow.
in volume.
c) with constant volume

• an increase in temperature involves an increase
in pressure
• a decrease in temperature involves a decrease
in pressure.
12-13
General description
1-2 Operating principle of a cool-
ing cycle
A - DESCRIPTION OF A COOLING CYCLE AND AIR
TREATMENT
Let us now examine the basic layout and operating

principle of the air conditioning system.
In the highly simplified layout shown in Fig.12-12, the

system appears to consist of a closed circuit formed
by the chain of four components: evaporator (1), com-
pressor (2), condenser (3), expansion valve (4) (all
essential in a cooling cycle and arranged in their func-
tional sequence), plus pipes (5) which connect the Fig.12-12
components together.
The essential function of the system, i.e. that of trans-
ferring heat from one place (passenger compartment) justified. For the sake of convenience, we will also
to another (the environment surrounding the vehicle) refer to another simplified layout of the circuit (Fig.14-
is achieved by subjecting a cooling fluid with which 12), similar to the one in Fig.12-12.
the system itself must be filled, to a thermodynamic Before proceeding, and to allow readers to understand
cycle that includes pressure variations (by means of the mentioned pressure and temperature values in a
the compressor and expansion valve) and changes in better way (although for solely by way of example and
physical state (by means of two heat exchangers, the highly approximate), we also include the pressure/
evaporator and condenser). temperature diagram of the R134a coolant currently
The notions of Physics mentioned in the previous chap- used in air conditioning systems for vehicles (see
ter allow each phase in the cycle to be explained and Fig.13-12).
VAPOUR
LIQUID
p = absolute pressure (in bar)

t = temperature (in °C)
Fig.13-12
12-14
General description
By examining the previously mentioned diagram and
while waiting to go more deeply into the subject in the HIGH PRESSURE - HIGH TEMPERATURE
next chapter, note that the boiling point of R134a is -
26.1 °C at a pressure of 1 abs. bar (atmospheric pres- OUTDOOR AIR
sure at sea level) and that very low temperatures can
be obtained by expanding it at low pressure.
Vice versa, when compressed at relatively modest
pressures, vapour can remain as such at fairly high
temperatures (e.g. p = 15 bar and t = 56 °C).
Another important characteristic for the particular use

in question, is the high latent heat value of evapora-
tion and condensation (e.g. 5 1 kcal/kg at 1 abs.bar).
In short, this substance possesses characteristics that OUTDOOR OR

make it suitable for cooling circuits since both very RECIRCULATED AIR
low temperatures and relatively high temperatures can
be obtained while working with modest pressure val-
ues that therefore allow fairly lightweight and not very
bulky components to be used in the system.
To get back to the phases in the cycle, we will consid-

er Sect. A (Fig.14-12) at the entrance to the evapora-
tor as starting point.
The evaporator is the component that removes heat TREATED AIR
from the cab. It is therefore positioned either in the
actual cab itself of in close communication with it. To
allow it to carry out its function, its temperature must LOW PRESSURE - LOW TEMPERATURE
be lower than that of the environment to cool so that
the heat can spontaneously flow from this (higher tem- values:
perature) towards the evaporator itself. Let us suppose Sect.A Ÿ p = 2.5 bar; t = -5 °C
that the coolant in A is liquid at a pressure of 2.5 bar, Sect.B Ÿ p = 2.5 bar; t = -5 °C
thus at a temperature of about –5 °C (Fig.13-12). Sect.C Ÿ p = 15 bar; t = 56 °C
To cool the cab, it is necessary to: Sect.D Ÿ p = 15 bar; t = 56 °C
• either "flush" it with cold air Fig.14-12
• or remove the air it contains, cool it and then let it
in again.
In the former case, air from the outside environment is

allowed to flow towards the evaporator, is then forced
into the cab, thus expelling the hotter air inside this.
In the latter case, the air in the cab must be made to
recirculate through the evaporator.
Supposing that the air in the environment surrounding

the vehicle or the air in the cab is at a temperature of
25 °C.
12-15
General description
This air passes through the evaporator, the external NOTE
walls of which are at a temperature of 1 to 3°C for By removing heat, the outside air that passes
example. By virtue of its higher temperature of 22 to through the condenser is subjected to a tempera-
24°C, the air transfers part of the heat to the evapora- ture increase (e.g. from 25 to 32°C), but then
tor, thereby lowering its temperature from the initial spreads around the surrounding environment with-
25°C to 10°C, for example. out changing its conditions in an appreciable way.
Thus treated, the air enters the cab and, mixing with
the already existing air initially at 25°C, progressively On leaving the condenser, in Sect. D, the coolant will
lowers the temperature there. be in a liquid state and without the previously collect-
Meanwhile, the coolant that had p = 2.5 bar and t = -5 ed heat. However, compared to the initial condition
°C at the evaporator inlet, passes through this, ab- (Sect. A), it is still at a high pressure and temperature.
sorbs the heat removed from the air and, at the same The expansion valve is used to lower the pressure
pressure, converts it from a liquid state to vapour, also and temperature of the coolant.
maintaining the same temperature (latent heat).
The coolant will therefore have p = 2.5 bar and t = -5 The main purpose of this component is to throttle the
°C at the evaporator outlet (Sect. B), but will be steam circuit, upstream of which the pressure and tempera-
and charged with the quantity of heat yielded by the ture are high. Downstream, since there is a space where
air. it can expand, the coolant is subjected to a drastic
If the cycle is to have continuity and since the circuit pressure reduction (e.g.: from 15 to 2.5 bar) and, con-
is sealed, the coolant, which is now in B, will flow sequently, a temperature reduction (from 56 °C to –5
through the remaining part of the circuit and return to °C), remaining in the liquid state (even though atom-
A in the initial conditions (p = 2.5 bar, t = -5 °C). ized).
To achieve this, the coolant itself must first be freed This forms the initial conditions again. The cycle can
from the heat it absorbed as it passed through the then be repeated in a continuous way for as long as
evaporator and must then be brought to a low pres- the compressor operates.
sure and a low temperature.
The only way to dispose of the heat is expell it into the IMPORTANT NOTE
surrounding environment where, however, the temper- All this shows that when operating, the system is
ature is higher (25 °C). The temperature of the coolant partly hot and partly cold.
must therefore be raised from –5 °C to a value higher The ideal separating line between the two parts is
than 25 °C so that the heat can be spontaneously trans- represented, in the diagram in Fig.14-12, by straight
ferred from the coolant to the outside environment. line X-X which cuts through the compressor and
This is carried out by the compressor. expansion valve.
Note that this is one of the basic elements to con-
The compressor possesses these functions: it intakes sider when evaluating whether the circuit is oper-
vapour at a low pressure and low temperature from the ating correctly or when identifying faults.
evaporator, compresses it and discharges it (Sect. C)
at a high pressure and high temperature (e.g.: 15 bar –
56 °C).
Coolant, in the form of vapour, at a high pressure and

a high temperature (approximately the same values
as Sect. C), enters into the 2nd heat exchanger, the
condenser, which transfers the heat the coolant had
accumulated in the evaporator into the outside envi-
ronment.
To achieve this as efficiently as possible, its pressure
and, thus, its temperature are kept at constant levels,
but the vapour is transformed into liquid, thus the trans-
ferred heat will be latent condensation heat.
12-16
General description
B - NOTES AND CONSIDERATIONS
The described process has been extremely simplified.

We have therefore added a certain number of notes
that allow readers to understand how the notions of
physics in the previous chapter have been used and
considerations added, at least in principle, about the
differences between the described scheme and what
actually happens in practice.
THE HEAT EXCHANGES
Heat exchanges amongst the various elements in ques-

tion (air, components of the A/C and ECC system,
etc.) and within the elements themselves, occur in the
following way:
• from the air to the external walls of the evapora-
tor (by convection)
• from the external walls to the internal walls of the

evaporator and from these to the coolant (by con-
duction)
• from inside the coolant and when this is transfer-

red from the evaporator to the condenser through
the compressor (by convection)
• from the coolant to the internal walls of the con-

denser (by conduction)
• from the internal walls to the external walls of the

condenser (by conduction)
• from the external walls of the condenser to the

air that passes through it and to the outside envi-
ronment (by convection and by radiation).
NOTE
Heat exchanges between the internal parts of the
system and the outside environment also occur
through the walls of tubes and the filter and this
negatively influences the efficiency of the system,
although to a modest extent.
12-17
General description
PRACTICAL NOTES
The pairs of temperature and pressure values chosen coolant from which it must be extracted along
as examples for the sake of convenience, have been with that collected by the evaporator.
considered constants in each of the two parts (cold
and hot) of the system and have been given with refer- Given that the sequence of components in the sys-
ence to the conditions of the coolant. tem along the circuit remains unchanged, in practice,
In practice, the following points must be taken into their positions in the vehicle will be influenced by the
account: available space and by all the measures taken to opti-
a) there is a certain temperature difference betwe- mize both functionality and safety.
en the internal and external surfaces of heat
exchangers (e.g.: in the evaporator, internal tem- One essential constant to prevent the efficiency from
perature – 5 °C and external temperature + 2 being impaired is that the expansion valve must be
°C; in the condenser, internal temperature positioned extremely near to the evaporator (it must
+ 56 °C and external temperature + 50 °C) practically form a single unit).
b) there is a difference in temperature between the
coolant on the inlet and that leaving the exchan- In the simplified diagram in Fig.15-12 the four essen-
gers established by the size of the system and tial main components (evaporator, compressor, con-
how it is regulated in order to ensure that: denser, expansion valve) are represented together with
- the coolant that leaves the evaporator is com- the coolant that they contain, by way of principle, in
pletely in the state of vapour and that it rea- order to form the thermodynamic cycle (cooling cy-
ches the compressor as such (the compres- cle).
sor is a pump that is only suitable for gaseous
substances and not liquids). In actual fact, another component, the dehydrator
To ensure this, the vapour must be slightly filter, is installed in series in the circuit (between the
overheated, i.e. its temperature must be hi- condenser and the expansion valve) and has impor-
gher than that of saturated vapour (e.g.: – 2 tant functions, but does not controbitute towards the
°C instead – 5 °C); operation of the thermodynamic cycle itself.
- when leaving the condenser, the coolant is
completely in a liquid state to optimize its effi-
ciency. Thus its temperature, at the conside-
red pressure, must be lower than that of con-
densation (e.g.: 52 °C instead of 56 °C, liquid
being cooled);
c) further differences (a few degrees more for the

cold part or a few degrees less for the hot part)
should then be considered owing to the effect
of the heat exchangers along the route leading
from one exchanger to the next (see previous
note);
d) the pressure of the coolant is lowered along its
route due to friction, turbulence, etc. (load loss);
further variations to a greater or lesser extent
than those determined by the expansion valve
and compressor, are due to the previously men-
tioned heat exchanges along the circuit beyond
the exchangers.
e) The energy used to operate the compressor
(normally drawn from the engine of the vehicle),
is converted into heat and is then yielded to the
12-18
General description
1-3 Main components of an air age to the earth environments followed with worried
attention by the International Community. Right from
conditioning system the "Vienna Convention" of 1985 and the successive
"Protocol of Montreal" in 1987, the objective has been
A - COOLANT OR COOLING FLUID to prohibit the above mentioned substances both by
gradually reducing their use until their production com-
This is the fluid used to fill the A/C and ECC system. pletely ceases and, parallely, by establishing regula-
It acts as a carrier of heat, transferring this from the tions to govern the permitted uses.
point in which it is removed from the cab (or rather,
from the air let into or re-circulated around the com- Production has already stopped throughout Europe (in
partment) by means of the evaporator, to the point in Italy, with law N° 549 of 28/12/93) and in the majority
which it is disposed of in the outside environment by of all the other countries while use of the product, gov-
means of the condenser. erned by the above mentioned regulations, is now lim-
ited to the very small amounts of the substance avail-
Until a few years ago, a product bearing the code name able on the market.
R12 was generally used in the A/C systems of vehi-
cles (and is still used whwen available, to service old In view of the above, three alternative substances have
systems). The chemical formula of this coolant is been identified with suitable technical characteristics
CCI2+F2 (Dichlorodifluoromethane) and it is marketed which do not, however, contain chlorine and which there-
by various producers under different trademarks / de- fore do not damage the ozone in the stratosphere.
nominations.
In particular, a substance known as R134a (HFC –
Since this product contains chlorine (Cl) in its mole- 134a), with the chemical formula CH2+FCF3+ (1, 1,2 –
cule, it is part of the group of CFC substances most Tetrafluoroethane) is used as a replacement for R12
greatly responsible for the destruction of the ozone (CFC-12).
layer (O3) in the stratosphere and the consequent dam-
OUTSIDE AIR
Solenoid valve
Condenser
Compressor
Filter High pressure liquid
High pressure vapour
Expansion Electric fan Low pressure liquid

valve
Evaporator Low pressure vapour
TREATED AIR (to cab) Fig.15-12
12-19
General description
The basic properties of these products that make them 3 - COMPRESSOR (F FIG.16-12)
particularly suitable for use as coolants are:
a) low boiling temperature, at atmospheric pressure at The compressor is the propelling part for the coolant
sea level (29.8 °C for l’R12 and –26,1 °C for l’R134a). in the A/C and ECC system.
This means that it is easy to make a cold body (evap- Its functions are:
orator) able to collect the heat from the hot air that hits • to circulate the coolant around the circuit
it. • to raise the pressure and, thus, the temperature of
b) high boiling temperatures in relation to even high the gaseous coolant from the evaporator at low
ambient temperatures (30 to 35 °C) in summer, pressure and low temperature.
with relatively low pressures (e.g.: 70 °C with
18 and 21 bar, for R12 and R134a respecti-
vely). Basically, to carry out these functions, they consist
This means that the heat can be disposed of of:
into the outside environment by means of the • a container body (or casing) formed by a more or
condenser without having to build an excessi- less large number of components and equipped
vely strong system with a high weight and cost. with hangers to fix it to the vehicle.
c) high vaporizing heat (latent) and condensation • an internal mechanism to produce the pumping
values in the various temperature and pressu- effect
re conditions. • a valve system to regulate coolant intake and deli-
very
• fittings to connect the pipes
2 - EVAPORATOR (L FIG.18-12) • a pulley / clutch assembly (electro-clutch)
• a load of oil
As was said in the previous chapter, the evaporator is
that part of the A/C system that removes heat from
the air let into the cab (the way heat is exchanged has
also been described).
Another very important function carried out by the evap-
orator and that has not been mentioned previously is
that of dehumidifying the treated air. F
This is done in the following way:

• in normal conditions, the air contains a certain quan-
tity of watery vapour;
• the vapour condenses as it comes into contact with
the cold surfaces of the evaporator;
• water in the liquid state (condensation) is collected
in a receptacle and is disposed of through the rela-
tive channels;
• the humidity condensing heat is yielded to the cool-
ant through the walls of the evaporator as occurs
for the heat removed from the air in order to lower
the temperature.
Fig.16-12
In view of the above, the treated air leaving the evap-
orator the let into the cab contains a lower quantity of
moisture besides being cooler.
12-20
General description
D - CONDENSER (G FIG.17-12)
The condenser is the exchanger that removes the heat

absorbed in the evaporator and that created by con-
G
verting the energy used to operate the compressor from
the coolant that circulates around the A/C system.
E - EXPANSION OR GOVERNOR VALVE
The expansion valve in the A/C an ECC system car-

ries out the following essential functions:
• it drastically reduces the pressure (and, thus, the

temperature of the coolant fluid arriving from the Fig.17-12
condenser through the filter;
• it continuously regulates the coolant that flows to

the evaporator so that it can completely evaporate
and it passes through the evaporator in the various
thermal load conditions. As it passes through the
system, it also reaches a minimum degree of over-
heating that is sufficient to ensure it arrives in the
compressor as vapour.
F - FILTER OR DEHYDRATOR (H FIG.19-12)
The filter is a component which, although being in-

stalled in series in the coolant flow within the A/C sys-
tem, does not cause any type of thermodynamic ef-
B
fect and therefore does not influence the changes of
state to which the coolant is subjected or the heat
exchanges. Fig.18-12
Fig.19-12
12-21
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
12-22
CHAP. 12
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12-23

Compressor Erison V
Type Axial with 10 cylinders
Swept volume 110 cc
Speed 8000 RPM
Minimum safety pressure 2 bar
Maximum safety pressure 27 bar
Fan unit
Number of speeds 3
Refrigerating power 4.8 - 5.8 kW
Air flow rate 320 - 450 m3/h
Cooling fluid
Type R134a
Quantity 1.3 Kg
Total amount of oil 0.24 cc
12-24
CHAP. 12
Air-conditioning system (AC)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.3 Air-conditioning system (AC)
3-1 Main components ................................................... 12-26

3-2 How to use the air-conditioning system ................. 12-27
3-3 Wiring diagram ........................................................ 12-28
12-25
Sect.3 - Air-conditioning system (AC)

3-1 Main components
A
A - Control board
B - Evaporator
C - Fan unit
E - Heating cock
F - Compressor
G - Condensator
B H - Filter
I - Expansion valve
C L - Evaporator
M - Fan unit
D
M
E
I
F
G
H
Fig.20-12
12-26

3-2 How to use the air-condition-
ing system
E
1 - Make sure that all the doors and windows are shut,
then shut the air vents;
2 - With the engine running, activate A/C switch (A)

and turn the temperature adjuster knob (C) to about A B
3/4 of its clockwise rotation travel obtain the ma-
ximum initial cooling effect;
3 - Turn the fan control knob (C) fully clockwise for a D C

quick cooling action, opening the air vents (12).
Reduce the fan speed once the required tempe-
rature has been obtained;
Fig.21a-12
4 - Regulate the temperature with the knob (Fig.21-12);
5 - Adjust the fan speed to maintain comfortable ope-

rating conditions. Bear in mind that low fan spee-
ds give cooler, if slower air.
6 - A short while after the system has been operating,

open the two air circulating ducts to obtain a fast
cooling effect when the weather is very hot. This
allows the same air to be circulated and obtains a
faster cooling action. Shut the circulation ducts
once the cab temperature is cool enough.
NOTA: clean the cab air filter at the prescribed in-

tervals and fit special filters when using chemical
products.
CAUTION: if the tractor is left unused for an ex- Fig.21b-12

tended period of time, or if the air conditioning
system is not used frequently, run the system at
least once a week for 15 minutes to keep it efficient
and to prevent gas from escaping from the com-
pressor. It is always advisable to check the effi-
ciency of the system once a year.
12-27

3-3 Wiring diagram
Page in preparation
Fig.22-12
12-28
12-29
Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
12-30
CHAP. 12
Emptying and charging the system
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.4 Emptying and charging the system
4-1 Safety notes ............................................................ 12-32

4-2 Maintenance instructions ........................................ 12-33
4-3 Recharging procedure ............................................ 12-34
12-31
Sect. 4 - Emptying and charging the system

4-1 Safety notes
When coolants are handled, it is always necessary to
comply with the following safety rules to safeguard
the health.
1 - Always wear protective goggles and gloves

when handling coolant.
If coolant splashes into the eyes it can damage
the sight and cause blindness.
2 - Do not allow coolant to come into contact with

the skin.
Coolant has a very low boiling temperature which
can lead to freezing (approx. –26 °C for R134a and
approx. –30 °C for R12, at atmospheric pressure
at sea level).
3 - The equipment used to treat the coolant must

be used in adequately ventilated places with
at least four air changes per hour. Do not inhale
coolant vapours for lengthy periods of time. It can
be dangerous and even lethal.
4 - Do not use equipment to treat coolant near

open or leaking receptacles containing inflam-
mable substances.
5 - To not tamper with or modify the settings of

the breather and safety valves of the contai-
ners and equipment used to treat coolant.
6 - Do not fill receptacles (cylinders, A/C charging

equipment or storage containers) with coolant
unless they have been approved for the pur-
pose and equipped with appropriate safety val-
ves.
7 - Do not fill any storage vessel to beyond 80% of

its capacity.
8 - Pay the utmost attention when the service pi-

pes are disconnected, since they may contain
coolant under pressure.
12-32

4-2 Maintenance instructions
Before setting the air conditioning system at work, To regulate the belt tension, slacken off the fixing
make sure that the doors and windows of the vehicle screws and check nuts on the belt idler under the
are securely shut. Clean the cab interior as clean as bearing plate and move the compressor until the
possible. If the cab cannot be completely closed for correct tension has been obtained.
any reason, it is essential to shut off the air re-circula- Tighten all the screws and check nuts.
tion system. Failure to comply with these instructions
can lead to the evaporator becoming clogged (B). This
would consequently stop the air conditioning system
and could damage the compressor (F).
1 - Clean the cab air filter every 100 hours or more

frequently if necessary.
2 - Replace the cab air filter every 1000 hours or once

a year.
3 - Replace the carbon filter every 250 hours service

with chemical products. Activated carbon filters
cannot be repaired.
4 - To ensure the system operates in the correct way,

periodically check the filter installed at the rear of
the cab, the condenser (G), the fan blades (C) and
the evaporator (B). Built up dirt can lead to an in-
crease in the high and low pressure values and
impair the efficiency of the cooling system. It is
advisable to check the tension and alignment of
the transmission belt.
5 - Check the conditions of the pipes that drain off the

cooling water leading from the evaporator (B). Wa-
ter accumulated in the drip tray can freeze the evap-
orator and prevent the coolant from circulat i n g ,
thus reducing the efficiency of the system.
6 - Have the system checked once a year, at the be-

ginning of summer.
7 - To keep the system in order, remember to operate

the AC system for a few minutes a week in order
to keep all the components lubricated.
8 - Periodically check the tension of the compressor

belt (F) in the middle of its longest side. It must
give 15 mm.
12-33

4-3 Recharging procedure Besides the specialistic components used for the
charging operations, the Dvx coolant recovery, prepa-
A - INTRODUCTION ration and recharging station in the versions for R 12,
R 134a and “refmaticplus” (Fig.26-12), also has:
An A/C system can be installed on a vehicle at its
origin, when it is being assembled during production, - a hermetic compressor, which intakes the coo-
or it can be installed at a later date on a finished vehi- lant when the A/C system is emptied and allows it
cle ready for delivery to the Purchaser or even in a to re-circulate through a special internal mechani-
tractor that has already been operating for some time. sm in order to prepare it, lastly depositing it in the
reservoir for future reuse;
In any case, once it has been completely and correct-
ly installed, the A/C system must be adequately filled - a filter to retain the solid particles, the humidity
with coolant fluid. Thye following paragraphs therefore and polluting acids in the recovered coolant
describe:
- the essential equipment used for charging pur- - a distiller to separate the oil
poses (filling with coolant);
- the relative procedures; - a condensing apparatus to separate the inconden-
- the operating tests to verify the performances of sable gases, with relative automatic or manual ex-
the installed system. pelling device
- an electronic scale to weigh the coolant

B - BASIC EQUIPMENT
- a microprocessor, plus keyboard and display, to
The basic equipment required to charge an A/C sys- automatically handle the various functions.
tem consists of:
- a pump to produce vacuum;
- a metering cylinder or a scale to measure the
quantity (in weight) or the required coolant;
- a pair of pressure gauges;
- a vacuometer;
- a set of taps to handle the connections of the va-
rious above listed components to the A/C system
and to the coolant reserve tank (bottle);
- service pipes with relative fittings, to connect to
the service valves of the system and to the bottle.
The above listed parts are normally assembled in rel-

ative casings to form a single component, allowing all
the charging procedures to be carried out.
Remember that, according to the current laws in force

in Italy, in Europe and in the majority of other coun-
tries, coolant can no longer be disposed of in the envi-
ronment and that it is therefore obligatory to collect all
the coolant emptied from a system in a suitable ves-
sel.
It is consequently essential to be in possession of the

adequate equipment when these operations are car-
ried out.
12-34

C - RECHARGING PROCEDURE
This procedure includes the following phases: 8 3
1 - emptying the air from the system

2 - dehydration
3 - vacuum tightness test
2
4 - filling with coolant
5 - activation of the system and performance
tests.
1
4
1 - EMPTYING THE AIR 7
The air must be eliminated from the system:
- to leave all the space inside for the coolant
- to prevent the air and the moisture it contains (even
in tiny quantities) from polluting the coolant and
altering its thermodynamic characteristics. 6 Dvx
The coolant is emptied out by means of the vacuum
pump which is connected, through the service pipes
of the charging plant, to the HP and LP service valves
of the A/C system and with the vehicle engine off.
5
This operation takes a very short time and during it,
the pointers of the HP and LP pressure gauges move Fig.23-12
from 0 to positions near to –1.
1 - Keyboard
2 - Display
3 - Pressure gauges
4 - Service taps
5 - Vacuum pump
6 - Scale
7 - Container
8 - Quick couplings for the service pipes
12-35

2 - DEHYDRATION 3 - VACUUM TIGHTNESS TEST
This follows the previous operation. The vacuum pump Before beginning to charge with coolant, make sure
continues to operate and the pressure, indicated by that the system is perfectly tight.
the pressure gauges, remains near to –1. To do this, at the end of the dehydration phase, shut
off the tap that sets the A/C and ECC system in com-
The recommended length of this operation is 40 to 45 munication with the vacuum pump, stop this latter and
minutes and more, if the system is very large. open the connection between the system and the vac-
In this way, humidity that is not discharged with the air uometer.
but which has remained, in the liquid state, in the sys- The pointer of the vacuometer will set near to the – 1
tem (in the pores and recesses of the internal walls, position. Record this position (vacuometers often have
especially in flexible hoses, dissolved in the compres- a movable pointer. If the pointer itself has not appreci-
sor oil, absorbed by the filter, etc.) can be released as ably moved after 10 minutes, the system can be con-
vapour and, as such, removed by means of the vacu- sidered perfectly tight).
um pump. Now shut the vacuometer tap and proceed with the
charging operation.
NOTE
Remember that the boiling point of water depends Vice versa, if the pointer of the vacuometer moves
on the pressure. towards 0 during the above mentioned period of time,
this means that the system is not tight and that, if it
Since the temperatures in a system when the charge were to be charged in those conditions, it would very
is being prepared are practically the same as those of quickly lose its charge and, thus, its efficiency.
the environment (workshop) in which the work is car- In this case, identify the leak point or points, repair
ried out, they can also be very low (e.g. 10 to 15°C) and repeat the procedure from the start.
particularly in winter. The only way to evaporate the
internal humidity is to lower the pressure. This is done
by working with the vacuum pump.
The considerable length of this operation is also re-

quired to allow the vapour, escaping from the most
distant parts of the system, to reach the service valves
and to then be extracted.
Humidity must be removed from the system to pre-

vent:
- the formation of corrosive acids caused by a che-
mical reaction with the coolant fluid and oil, which
would consequently damage the components
- the formation of ice around the expansion valve,
which would clog the calibrated hole and block the
system.
12-36

4 - CHARGING THE SYSTEM
The quantity (in weight) of coolant required to operate Consequently, charging in the liquid phase would not
the A/C and ECC system in an optimum way is deter- be able to be completed owing to pressure balancing.
mined by the Manufacturer and indicated in the rela- To sufficiently raise the pressure in the container, the
tive operation and maintenance manual. coolant is heated before it is transferred to the A/C
If this value is not available for some reason, it can be and ECC system:
determined in an empiric way by gradually charging - with the resistance applied to the dosing cylinder
with coolant until optimum pressure values are obtained (e.g. in the "fill station")”);
(Table 1 page 12-44). - with the compressor in the plant (e.g. in “refma-
Given, therefore, that the weight required for charging tic”).
is known, this quantity must be exactly measured.
NOTE
This can be done in two ways, depending on the avail- Recharging in the liquid phase can only be done
able apparatus: by adding the coolant in the plant section after the
- by the difference between the two weight values of compressor, through the high pressure valve.
the coolant holder at the beginning and at the end If coolant were to be added prior to the compres-
of the charge, if a high precision scale (electro- sor, it would damage this when the plant was acti-
nic) is available, as in Dvx "refmatic" stations for vated.
example.
- In an indirect way, depending on its pressure (tem-
perature) and volume, by means of the conventio- In the vapour phase
nal dosing cylinder (as in the Dvx “fill station”),
again by the difference in initial and final weight. If the container is connected to the low pressure serv-
ice valve, the engine can be started and coolant drawn
The coolant can be added by the compressor in the pure vapour state. This is
obtained by means of adequate throttles created with
the plant taps installed along the route the coolant takes
In the liquid phase from the container to the system.
When the pressure in the container or dosing cylinder

is sufficiently high (8 to 10 bar), to allow the required In a mixed phase
quantity of coolant to be completely transferred with
the sole aid of the difference in pressure between the By first transferring liquid until the pressures are bal-
container and A/C and ECC system. anced and then steam, with the aid of suction from the
As the pressure inside a container of coolant (not in compressor.
the presence or in contact with heat sources) is that In this case it will be necessary to work with the plant
corresponding to the temperature of the ambient in taps so that liquid is transferred after the compressor
which it is to be found (e.g. 5.7 bar at 20°C), the same and vapour prior to it.
pressure is also created in the A/C and ECC system
by simply connecting one to the other.
12-37

5 - PLANT ACTIVATION AND PERFORMANCE CHECKS
Having completed the charging procedure and keep- To correctly interpret the values shown on the pres-
ing the plant connected, activate the system and check sure gauges, also remember that the pressures them-
its performances in the following way: selves are influenced by the atmospheric pressure
- start the engine and regulate the charging rate which, apart from the differences bound to the climat-
(1500 to 1800 RPM) ic conditions, gradually decreases as the altitude in-
- select the A/C plant controls to obtain maximum creases.
cooling, i.e. the thermostat (when accessible) must
be set to max position and the fan to maximum To take these pressure variations into account, sub-
speed; tract the correction data of Table 2 from the values
- open the doors of the vehicle; read on the pressure gauges.
- allow the system to operate in these conditions for
about 10 minutes;
- shut the doors and windows; Pressure variations depending on altitude
- check the pressure values indicated on the HP and
LP gauges; Altitude Absolute atmospheric Correction
- check the temperature of the place in which the (m a.s.l.) pressure (kg/cm2) (kg/cm2)
work is being carried out with the thermometer.
0 1.029 0
Taking the ambient temperature as a reference, the
300 0.994 - 0.035
pressure values that indicate correct plant operation
are within the ranges given in Table 1. 600 0.959 - 0.070
900 0.924 - 0.105
1200 0.889 - 0.140
1500 0.854 - 0.175
R 134a 1800 0.815 - 0.210
Ambient 2100 0.791 - 0.238
HP gauge LP gauge
temperature 2
2400 0.763 - 0.266
(°C) (kg/cm ) (kg/cm2)
Table - 2
min max min max
15.5 9.5 13 0.5 3
21.0 12 17.5 0.5 3
26.5 14 20.5 0.5 3
32.0 16 24 0.5 3.5
38.0 18.5 25.5 0.5 3.5
43.0 22 28 0.5 3.5
Table - 1
12-38
CHAP. 12
Functionality tests
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sect.5 Functionality tests
5-1 Equipment required................................................. 12-40

5-2 Checking the efficiency of the system (AC) ........... 12-41
5-3 Check control tables ............................................... 12-42
12-39
Sect. 6 - Functionality tests

5-1 Equipment required
Use the following equipment to test plant operation
and identify any faults:
a - Plant to recover, prepare and charge coolant

(Fig.24-12)
b - Thermometer and hygrometer (Fig.25-12)
c - Coolant leak detectors (Fig.26-12)
d - Protective goggles and gloves (Fig.27-12)
Fig.25-12
Fig.26-12
Dvx
Fig.24-12 Fig.27-12
12-40
Functionality tests
5-2 Checking the efficiency of the R 134a
system (AC)
Ambient HP gauge LP gauge
temperature
a - Set the AC temperature regulator knob to the col- (kg/cm2) (kg/cm2)
(°C)
dest position;
min max min max
b - Start the engine and bring it to a 1500/2000 RPM
rate; 15.5 9.5 13 0.5 3
21.0 12 17.5 0.5 3
c - Start the AC system;
26.5 14 20.5 0.5 3
d - Select an intermediate speed for internal ventila- 32.0 16 24 0.5 3.5
tion
38.0 18.5 25.5 0.5 3.5
e - Check the outside and ambient temperature with a 43.0 22 28 0.5 3.5
thermometer;
Table - 2
f - Activate the cab air recirculation system if the ou-
tside temperature exceeds 28°C;; To correctly interpret the values given by the pressure
gauges, also remember that the pressure values them-
g - If the inside temperature exceeds the ouside one, selves are influenced by the atmospheric pressure
open the doors, wait for the internal temperature which, apart from differences bound to the climatic
to stabilize to the value of the outside one, then conditions, decreases as the altitude above sea level
shut the doors and allow the AC system to opera- increases.
te for 5-10 minutes. Allow the AC system to ope-
rate for 5-10 minutes if the inside temperature is Subtract the correction values given in table 3 from
lower than the outside one; the values shown by the pressure gauges to take the-
se pressure variations into account.
h - Measure the temperature by setting the thermo
meter near to the cold air vents and make sure
that the average value is within those indicated in Pressure variations depending on altitude
table 1.
Altitude Absolute atmospheric Correction
TEMPERATURE TABLE (m a.s.l.) pressure (kg/cm 2) (kg/cm2)
Temp. outside 0 1.029 0

the vehicle (°C) 20° 25° 30° 35° 300 0.994 - 0.035
600 0.959 - 0.070
Temp. of air from 900 0.924 - 0.105
central vents 6°-8° 8°-10° 8°-12° 9°-14° 1200 0.889 - 0.140
(°C) (average value) 1500 0.854 - 0.175
1800 0.815 - 0.210
Table - 1
2100 0.791 - 0.238
If the measured temperature is not within the given 2400 0.763 - 0.266
values, check the HP and LP pressure values, con- Table - 3
sulting table (2) which gives the minimum and maxi-
mum values and considering the ambient temperature Proceed by checking if the values are beyond the limi-
as reference. ts of those indicated in the table (2).
12-41
Functionality tests
5-3 Check-control tables
LOW PRESSURE LINE
Pressure measured Probable cause
- Suction or discharge pipes inverted on the compressor.

- The electro-clutch of the compressor slips or does not mesh correctly.
- Expansion valve blocked in the open position. If compressor is the variable
Low displacement type, the LP is subjected to small but fast pressure changes
- Compressor swept volume adjuster valve badly regulated or faulty
- Compressor damaged
- Defective thermostat
- Expansion valve jammed in closed position or clogged
- Filter saturated with humidity
- Compressor swept volume adjuster valve jammed in maximum displacement
High
position
- Obstruction in L.P. or H.P. branch between filter and evaporator
HIGH PRESSURE LINE

Pressure measured Probable cause
- Normal situation with very high ambient temperature (>43°c)

- Too much coolant, 30-35% more
- Overheating in the condenser
High - Air in the A/C system
- Compressor displacement adjuster valve defective
- Clogging in the H.P. branch, between compressor and condenser-filter pipe,
but after the H.P. reading point
- Normal situation with very low ambient temperature (<5°c)

- Low amount of coolant, 70-75% less. Check for possible coolant leaks
- Expansion valve jammed closed or clogged
- Clogging in the L.P. or H.P. branch between filter and evaporator
Low
- Clogging in the H.P. branch between compressor and condenser-filter pipe,
but before the H.P. reading point.
- Damaged compressor
12-42
Functionality tests
HIGH AND LOW PRESSURE LINES
Pressures measured Probable cause
- Infiltrations of hot air in the evaporating unit or cab

Normal - Infiltrations of hot water in the heater
- Formation of ice on the evaporating bank
- Compressor belt failure. Could be caused by pulley misalignment

- The electro-clutch of the compressor slips or fails to mesh
Almost equal - Compressor damaged
- Compressor displacement adjuster valve defective
Fault Probable cause
NOTE - The noise heard when the A/C system is turned on is not ascribable
to defects. In the event of persistent noise, even a few minutes after the A/
C is turned on, check for one of the following defects and apply the relative
solution.
Noisy
A/C
system - Belt slipping or wear
- Noisy belt stretcher bearing
- The electro-clutch plate slips
- Vibration and resonance from the compressor bearing plate
- The expansion valve whistles
- Unsuitable condensation discharge.
12-43
SPECIAL TOOLS
CHAP. 13
Special tools
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sez.1 Drawings
01 FRI REX ...................................................................... 13-3

01 CMB REX ................................................................... 13-4
01 DIF MYT ..................................................................... 13-5
01 DT ATL ....................................................................... 13-6
01 DT MYT ...................................................................... 13-7
03 DT MYT ...................................................................... 13-8
03 DT REX....................................................................... 13-9
04 DT MYT .................................................................... 13-10
05 DT MYT .................................................................... 13-11
05 DT LG ....................................................................... 13-13
01 IDR REX ................................................................... 13-14
02 IDR MYT ................................................................... 13-15
03 IDR MYT ................................................................... 13-16
04 IDR MYT ................................................................... 13-17
122 IDR GL .................................................................... 13-18
125 IDR GL .................................................................... 13-19
CR 342 ........................................................................... 13-20
R 502 ............................................................................. 13-22
13-1
SPECIAL TOOLS
01 FRI REX
Plug gauge, centering and height adjustment tool

01 FRI REX for main clutch levers
Quantity: 1 Material: 30NiCrMo12 UNI 7845
Notes:
13-3
SPECIAL TOOLS
01 CMB REX
Support to measure C dimension, tapered pinion

01 CMB REX adjustment
Quantity: 1 Material: C40 UNI 7845
Notes:
13-4
SPECIAL TOOLS
01 DIF MYT
Dummy bearings for pre-adjustment of rear bevel

01 DIF MYT gear
Quantity: 2 Material: 100Cr6 UNI 3097
Notes:
13-5
SPECIAL TOOLS
01 DT ATL
Hexagon CH. 27
6,8-NR.4 90°-teeth
01 DT ATL Key for collar of side final drive, Dana axle
Notes:
13-6
SPECIAL TOOLS
01 DT MYT
7,8-NR.8 45°-teeth
Hexagon CH 27
Key for collar of side final drive, Landini 4WD

01 DT MYT
Notes:
13-7
SPECIAL TOOLS
03 DT MYT
Hexagon CH. 27
8,8-NR.4 90°-teeth
03 DT MYT Key for collar of differential support, Landini 4WD
Notes:
13-8
SPECIAL TOOLS
03 DT REX
11 - NR.3 FORI at 120°
03 DT REX Spring-on spring compressor tool
Quantity: 1-support/3-threaded bar Material: 30NiCrMo12 UNI 7845
Notes:
13-9
SPECIAL TOOLS
04 DT MYT
04 DT MYT Diff lock spring compressor tool
Notes:
13-10
SPECIAL TOOLS
05 DT MYT a
Dummy bearings for adjustment of bevel gear

05 DT MYT a Landini 4WD axle
Notes:
13-11
SPECIAL TOOLS
05 DT MYT b
Dummy pin for adjustment of bevel gear Landini

05 DT MYT b 4WD axle
Notes:
13-12
SPECIAL TOOLS
05 DT LG
Hexagon CH. 27 /30
05 DT LG Puller for fork pin, 4WD axle
Notes:
13-13
SPECIAL TOOLS
01 IDR REX
Hexagon CH. 19
01 IDR REX Lift pressure gauge union
Quantity: 1 Material: FE 360 drawn
Notes:
13-14
SPECIAL TOOLS
02 IDR MYT
Hexagon CH. 19
02 IDR MYT Trailer brake pressure gauge union
Notes: to be used with a commercial female union
13-15
SPECIAL TOOLS
03 IDR MYT
Hexagon 24
Auxiliary valve pressure gauge union. To be used

03 IDR MYT with male union for quick coupling.
Notes:
13-16
SPECIAL TOOLS
04 IDR MYT
04 IDR MYT Steering system pressure gauge union
Notes: Can be obtained from union FOR 113.003-12
13-17
SPECIAL TOOLS
122 IDR GL
Hexagon CH. 17
1/4 GAS
122 IDR GL Universal adapter union (commercial type)
Quantity: 1 Material:
Notes:
13-18
SPECIAL TOOLS
125 IDR GL
Diff lock 4WD/PTO pressure gauge union

125 IDR GL
Notes: To be obtained from union FOR 113.003-12
13-19
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool CR 342 a
8,5 - NR.2 FORI
Electric
welding
CR 342 a Valve system checking device for hydraulic power

lift
Notes:
13-20
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool CR 342 b
Q.tà 2
Hexagon CH.22
Hexagon CH.22
Q.tà 2
Valve system checking device for hydraulic power

CR 342 b lift
Notes:
13-21
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool R 502
Q.ta 2 Q.ta 1
Plate for pre-load adjustment of side final drive be-

R 502 vel bearings

bolts 30NlCrMo12
Notes:
13-22
PRE-SALE SERVICE
PRE-SALE SERVICE
Realized by: DALET

Atla Ghibli 3661514M2GBind

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Atla Ghibli 3661514M2GBind

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Atlantis 70-75-80-85-90-100

Chap. 4 STANDARD TRANSMISSION

Chap. 5 OPTIONAL TRANSMISSION

Cap. 6 4WD FRONT AXLE

Chap. 7 POWER TAKE-OFF

Chap. 8 LOW PRESSURE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Chap. 9 HIGH PRESSURE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Chap.10 OPTIONAL HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Chap.11 MECHANICAL POWER LIFT

Chap.12 GHIBLI TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Chap.13 ATLANTIS TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Chap.14 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Chap.15 SPECIAL TOOLS

This manual includes all specifications, mechanical, hydraulic and electrical

Descriptions and specifications contained in this manual are not committing.

Sect. 1 Reading the manual. ................................................................. 1-3

Sect. 2 Tractor identification and technical specifications. ............... 1-5

Sect. 3 Working in safety. ................................................................... 1-29

Sect. 4 Pre-delivery inspections and maintenance. .......................... 1-45

Sect. 5 Conversion tables. .................................................................. 1-53

Sect. 6 Sealants. ................................................................................ 1-69

Sect. 7 Table of bolt driving torques. .............................................. 1-72

Sect. 8 General assembly instructions. .......................................... 1-73

Reading the manual

Sect.1 Reading the manual

1-1 Introduction .................................................................... 1-4

Sect.1 - Reading the manual

Before reading the manual, it is essential to read

The information in this manual was up to date at the

1-2 Structure of the manual

Example: 5-7 indicates page 7 of chapter 5.

Numbering of the figures also begins with 1 in each

Example: Fig. 73-5, indicates figure 73 of chapter

The tools required for all the demounting, remoun-

Tractor identification and technical

Sect.2 Tractor identification and technical specifications

2-1 Tractor identification ...................................................... 1-6

Sect.2-Tractor identification and technical specifications

The tractor is identified by a serial number stamped

To ensure a quick and efficient service when orde-

Engine serial number (Fig. 3-1) .............................

Type of tractor ........................................................

Owner / Operator ...................................................

Dealer's or Agent's address ...................................

Delivery date ..........................................................

Warranty expiry date .............................................

Tractor identification and technical specifications

The tractor is identified by a serial number stamped

To ensure a quick and efficient service when orde-

Chassis serial number (Fig. 4/6/7-1) .....................

Engine serial number (Fig. 5-1) ............................. Fig.5-1

Cab serial number (Fig. 6-1) ..................................

Type of tractor ........................................................

Owner / Operator ...................................................

Dealer's or Agent's address ...................................

Delivery date ..........................................................

Warranty expiry date .............................................

Tractor identification and technical specifications

- In running order, without front and rear ballast and safety

Tractor identification and technical specificationS

- In running order, without front and rear ballast,

A - Height at cab ........................................................ mm 2630 2630 2630 2630

Tractor identification and technical specifications

- In running order, without front and rear ballast,